advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 1184
9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT and 675xi Series Phones t1 SIP IIP PHONE SI 41-001160-03 Rev 00 D ra f Administrator Guide Release 2.4 t1 ra f D Aastra Telecom will not accept liability for any damages and/or long distance charges, which result from unauthorized and/or unlawful use. While every effort has been made to ensure accuracy, Aastra Telecom will not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained within this documentation. The information contained in this documentation is subject to change without notice. Copyright 2008 Aastra Telecom. www.aastratelecom.com All Rights Reserved. Software License Agreement t1 Aastra Telecom Inc., hereinafter known as "Seller", grants to Customer a personal, worldwide, non-transferable, non-sublicenseable and non-exclusive, restricted use license to use Software in object form solely with the Equipment for which the Software was intended. This Product may integrate programs, licensed to Aastra by third party Suppliers, for distribution under the terms of this agreement. These programs are confidential and proprietary, and are protected as such by copyright law as unpublished works and by international treaties to the fullest extent under the applicable law of the jurisdiction of the Customer. In addition, these confidential and proprietary programs are works conforming to the requirements of Section 401 of title 17 of the United States Code. Customer shall not disclose to any third party such confidential and proprietary programs and information and shall not export licensed Software to any country except in accordance with United States Export laws and restrictions. D ra f Customer agrees to not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or display Software furnished in object code form. Customer shall not modify, copy, reproduce, distribute, transcribe, translate or reduce to electronic medium or machine readable form or language, derive source code without the express written consent of the Seller and its Suppliers, or disseminate or otherwise disclose the Software to third parties. All Software furnished hereunder (whether or not part of firmware), including all copies thereof, are and shall remain the property of Seller and its Suppliers and are subject to the terms and conditions of this agreement. All rights reserved. Customer's use of this software shall be deemed to reflect Customer's agreement to abide by the terms and conditions contained herein. Removal or modification of trademarks, copyright notices, logos, etc., or the use of Software on any Equipment other than that for which it is intended, or any other material breach of this Agreement, shall automatically terminate this license. If this Agreement is terminated for breach, Customer shall immediately discontinue use and destroy or return to Seller all licensed software and other confidential or proprietary information of Seller. In no event shall Seller or its suppliers or licensors be liable for any damages whatsoever (including without limitation, damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, other pecuniary loss, or consequential damages) arising out of the use of or inability to use the software, even if Seller has been advised of the possibility of such damages. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 iii t1 ra f D Third Party Copyright Compliance This product contains software provided under license to Aastra Telecom by one or more third parties. In addition to the Aastra SLA shown above, use and distribution of this product is subject to the following license terms: Expat XML Parser t1 Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: ra f The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. D THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 v M5T SIP Stack - M5T Portions of this software are © 1997 - 2006 M5T a Division of Media5 Corporation ("M5T( tm )"). All intellectual property rights in such portions of the software and documentation are owned by M5T and are protected by Canadian copyright laws, other applicable copyright laws and international treaty provisions. M5T and its suppliers retain all rights not expressly granted. MD5 RSA ra f t1 Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved. License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function. License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work. RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind. These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software. D OpenSSL License Issues The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact [email protected]. vi 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 OpenSSL License D ra f t1 /* ============================================================ * Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this * software must display the following acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software without * prior written permission. For written permission, please contact * [email protected]. * * 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" * nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written * permission of the OpenSSL Project. * * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following * acknowledgment: 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 vii D ra f t1 * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY * EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR * ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * ==================================================================== * * This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young * ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim * Hudson ([email protected]). */ Original SSLeay License /* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) * All rights reserved. * * This package is an SSL implementation written * by Eric Young ([email protected]). * The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. * * This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as viii 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 D ra f t1 * the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions * apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, * lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation * included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms * except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). * * Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in * the code are not to be removed. * If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution * as the author of the parts of the library used. * This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or * in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: * "This product includes cryptographic software written by * Eric Young ([email protected])" * The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library * being used are not cryptographic related :-). * 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from * the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: * "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 ix D ra f t1 * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * * The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or * derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be * copied and put under another distribution licence * [including the GNU Public Licence.] */ x 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 libSRTP (SRTP) - Cisco Copyright (c) 2001-2005 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. • Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. • Neither the name of the Cisco Systems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. t1 • D ra f THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION). HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 xi Wind River Systems - VxWorks software D UPnP - Intel ra f t1 The VxWorks Run-Time software module is Copyright (c) WindRiver Systems Inc, all rights reserved. It is licensed for use, not sold. All use of this product and the VxWorks Run-Time module is subject to agreement with the following EULA terms With respect to the Run-Time Module, Wind River and its licensors are third party beneficiaries of the End User License Agreement and that the provisions related to the Run-Time Module are made expressly for the benefit of, and are enforceable by, Wind River and its licensors. Activities expressly prohibited: (i) copying the Run-Time Module, except for archive purposes consistent with the End User’s archive procedures; (ii) transferring the Run-Time Module to a third party apart from the Target Application; (iii) modifying, decompiling, disassembling, reverse engineering or otherwise attempting to derive the Source Code of the Run-Time Module; (iv) exporting the Run-Time Module or underlying technology in contravention of applicable U.S. and foreign export laws and regulations; and (v) using the Run-Time Module other than in connection with operation of the Target Application. Aastra Telecom and Wind River Systems: (i) Retain ownership of all copies of the Run-Time Module; (ii) expressly disclaim all implied warranties, including without limitation the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title and non-infringement; (iii) exclude liability for any special, indirect, punitive, incidental and consequential damages; and (iv) require that any further distribution of the Run-Time Module be subject to the same restrictions set forth herein. INTEL SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (Final, Site License) IMPORTANT - READ BEFORE COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING. Do not use or load this software and any associated materials (collectively, the "Software") until you have carefully read the following terms and conditions. By loading or using the Software, you agree to the terms of this Agreement. If you do not wish to so agree, do not install or use the Software. LICENSE. You may copy the Software onto your organization's computers for your organization's use, and you may make a reasonable number of back-up copies of the Software, subject to these conditions: xii 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 1. You may not copy, modify, rent, sell, distribute or transfer any part of the Software except as provided in this Agreement, and you agree to prevent unauthorized copying of the Software. 2. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software. 3. You may not sublicense the Software. 4. The Software may include portions offered on terms in addition to those set out here, as set out in a license accompanying those portions. t1 OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWARE AND COPYRIGHTS. Title to all copies of the Software remains with Intel or its suppliers. The Software is copyrighted and protected by the laws of the United States and other countries, and international treaty provisions. You may not remove any copyright notices from the Software. Intel may make changes to the Software, or to items referenced therein, at any time without notice, but is not obligated to support or update the Software. Except as otherwise expressly provided, Intel grants no express or implied right under Intel patents, copyrights, trademarks, or other intellectual property rights. You may transfer the Software only if the recipient agrees to be fully bound by these terms and if you retain no copies of the Software. D ra f LIMITED MEDIA WARRANTY. If the Software has been delivered by Intel on physical media, Intel warrants the media to be free from material physical defects for a period of ninety days after delivery by Intel. If such a defect is found, return the media to Intel for replacement or alternate delivery of the Software as Intel may select. EXCLUSION OF OTHER WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED ABOVE, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Intel does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of any information, text, graphics, links or other items contained within the Software. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOST INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS PROHIBIT EXCLUSION OR 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 xiii LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER LEGAL RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. Intel may terminate this Agreement at any time if you violate its terms. Upon termination, you will immediately destroy the Software or return all copies of the Software to Intel. APPLICABLE LAWS. Claims arising under this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of California, excluding its principles of conflict of laws and the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the Sale of Goods. You may not export the Software in violation of applicable export laws and regulations. Intel is not obligated under any other agreements unless they are in writing and signed by an authorized representative of Intel. D ra f t1 GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software is provided with "RESTRICTED RIGHTS." Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR52.227-14 and DFAR252.227-7013 et seq. or its successor. Use of the Software by the Government constitutes acknowledgment of Intel's proprietary rights therein. Contractor or Manufacturer is Intel Corporation, 2200 Mission College Blvd., Santa Clara, CA 95052. xiv 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Software License Agreement iii Third Party Copyright Compliance v Expat XML Parser ....................................................................................................1-v . M5T SIP Stack - M5T .............................................................................................. 1-vi . MD5 RSA ................................................................................................................ 1-vi . OpenSSL ................................................................................................................. 1-vi . t1 License Issues ........................................................................................................ 1-vi . OpenSSL License .................................................................................................. 1-vii . Original SSLeay License ....................................................................................... 1-viii . ra f libSRTP (SRTP) - Cisco .......................................................................................... 1-xi Wind River Systems - VxWorks software ............................................................... 1-xii . . UPnP - Intel ............................................................................................................ 1-xii Preface About this guide .......................................................................................................... 1-xvii . . D Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1-xvii . Audience .............................................................................................................. 1-xvii . Other Documentation ...........................................................................................1-xviii . Chapters and appendixes in this guide ................................................................. 1-xix . Chapter 1 Overview . About this chapter ...........................................................................................................1-1 . IP Phone Models ............................................................................................................1-3 . Description ...............................................................................................................1-3 . Model 9143i IP Phone ..............................................................................................1-6 . Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones ...................................................................1-10 Model 6751i IP Phone ............................................................................................1-15 Model 6753i IP Phone ............................................................................................1-20 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 . . . v Contents Contents Contents Model 6755i IP Phone ............................................................................................1-23 Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones ...................................................................1-27 . . Firmware Installation Information .................................................................................1-33 . Description .............................................................................................................1-33 . Installation Considerations .....................................................................................1-33 . Installation Requirements .......................................................................................1-34 . Configuration Server Requirement .........................................................................1-35 . Firmware and Configuration Files .................................................................................1-36 . Description .............................................................................................................1-36 . Configuration File Precedence ...............................................................................1-38 . Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files ............................................................1-39 . Chapter 2 Configuration Interface Methods t1 . About this chapter ...........................................................................................................2-1 . Configuration Methods ...................................................................................................2-2 . Description ...............................................................................................................2-2 . ra f IP Phone UI ..............................................................................................................2-2 . Aastra Web UI ..........................................................................................................2-6 . Configuration Files (Administrator Only) ................................................................2-17 D Chapter 3 Administrator Options . . About this chapter ...........................................................................................................3-1 Administrator Level Options ...........................................................................................3-3 . . Description ...............................................................................................................3-3 . IP Phone UI Options ................................................................................................3-3 . Aastra Web UI Options ............................................................................................3-6 . Configuration File Options ........................................................................................3-8 . Phone Status ............................................................................................................3-9 . Restarting Your Phone ...........................................................................................3-13 Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration .....................................3-15 . . Basic Settings ........................................................................................................3-19 . Account Configuration ............................................................................................3-35 . Network Settings ....................................................................................................3-37 . Line Settings ..........................................................................................................3-71 . vi 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys ......................................3-72 . Contents Action URI ..............................................................................................................3-73 . Configuration Server Settings ................................................................................3-75 . Firmware Update Features ....................................................................................3-84 . TLS Support ...........................................................................................................3-85 . 802.1x Support .......................................................................................................3-89 . Troubleshooting .....................................................................................................3-92 . Chapter 4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features . About this chapter ...........................................................................................................4-1 Overview .........................................................................................................................4-3 t1 Network Settings ............................................................................................................4-4 . . . Basic Network Settings ............................................................................................4-4 Advanced Network Settings ...................................................................................4-30 . . Global SIP Settings ......................................................................................................4-70 . ra f Description .............................................................................................................4-70 . Basic SIP Settings ..................................................................................................4-71 Advanced SIP Settings (optional) ..........................................................................4-84 Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings .........................................................4-93 . . . D Autodial Settings ..................................................................................................4-103 Configuration Server Protocol ....................................................................................4-108 Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol .....................................................4-108 . . . Chapter 5 Configuring Operational Features . About this chapter ...........................................................................................................5-1 . Operational Features ......................................................................................................5-5 . Description ...............................................................................................................5-5 . User Passwords .......................................................................................................5-5 . Administrator Passwords .........................................................................................5-9 . Locking/Unlocking the Phone .................................................................................5-10 . Defining an Emergency Dial Plan ..........................................................................5-16 . Time and Date ........................................................................................................5-19 . Backlight Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) .....................5-30 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 . vii Live Dial Pad* .........................................................................................................5-33 Contents . Language ...............................................................................................................5-34 . Locking IP Phone Keys ..........................................................................................5-49 . Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i) .......................................5-50 . Local Dial Plan .......................................................................................................5-53 . Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls ............................................................................5-59 . Suppressing DTMF Playback .................................................................................5-63 . Display DTMF Digits ..............................................................................................5-65 Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone ...............................................................................5-67 . . Stuttered Dial Tone .................................................................................................5-70 . XML Beep Support .................................................................................................5-72 . Status Scroll Delay .................................................................................................5-74 . Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing .............................................................................5-76 t1 . Switch Focus to Ringing Line .................................................................................5-79 Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout ............................................................5-81 Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call .....................................................................5-85 ra f UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones) .............................................................5-87 Message Waiting Indicator Line .............................................................................5-89 . . . . . DND Key Mode ......................................................................................................5-91 . Call Forward Mode .................................................................................................5-93 . D Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) ...................................................................5-97 . Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In .............................5-102 . Group Paging RTP Settings .................................................................................5-107 . Key Mapping ........................................................................................................5-113 . Ring Tones and Tone Sets ...................................................................................5-117 . Priority Alerting .....................................................................................................5-122 . Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) ...........................................5-129 . Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys ................5-141 Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI ...........................................5-164 . . Speeddial Prefixes ...............................................................................................5-167 . Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key ...................................5-168 Busy Lamp Field (BLF) ........................................................................................5-169 . . BLF Subscription Period ......................................................................................5-176 . BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys ......................................................................5-178 viii . 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers) .....................................5-188 ACD Subscription Period .....................................................................................5-198 BLA Subscription Period ......................................................................................5-200 Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers) ............................5-202 . Contents Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i) .....................................5-184 . . . . Do Not Disturb (DND) ..........................................................................................5-211 . Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) ..........................................................................5-222 . BLA Support for Third Party Registration .............................................................5-229 . P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts ....................................................5-230 BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) .............................................5-231 . . Park/Pick Up Key .................................................................................................5-234 . Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers) ..............................................................5-245 . Call Forwarding ....................................................................................................5-249 t1 . Callers List ...........................................................................................................5-288 . Customizable Callers List and Services Keys ......................................................5-294 Missed Calls Indicator ..........................................................................................5-295 . . ra f Directory List ........................................................................................................5-297 Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) .............................5-308 . . XML Customized Services ...................................................................................5-311 XML Override for a Locked Phone .......................................................................5-356 . . D Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments ...................................................5-357 Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) ..........................5-359 “SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference (not applicable to the 6751i) ..............5-363 . . . Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS) ................................................................................5-365 . Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module ...................5-368 . Chapter 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features . About this chapter ...........................................................................................................6-1 . Advanced Operational Features .....................................................................................6-3 . Description ...............................................................................................................6-3 . MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages .............................................6-5 . SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer ..............................................................6-7 . 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 ix Update Caller ID During a Call .................................................................................6-8 Contents . Boot Sequence Recovery Mode ..............................................................................6-9 . Auto-discovery Using mDNS ..................................................................................6-10 . Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only) ............................................6-11 . Missed Call Summary Subscription .......................................................................6-13 . As-Feature-Event Subscription ..............................................................................6-17 . Blacklist Duration ...................................................................................................6-22 . Whitelist Proxy .......................................................................................................6-24 . Transport Layer Security (TLS) ..............................................................................6-26 . 802.1x Support .......................................................................................................6-31 . Symmetric UDP Signaling ......................................................................................6-43 Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers .....................................................6-44 t1 GRUU and sip.instance Support ............................................................................6-45 Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro Servers) ...........6-46 . . . . Configurable DNS Queries .....................................................................................6-49 Ignore Out of Sequence Errors ..............................................................................6-51 ra f “Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891 .........................................6-52 Reason Header Field in SIP Message ...................................................................6-52 Chapter 7 Encrypted Files on the IP Phone . . . . . D About this chapter ...........................................................................................................7-1 Encrypted Files on the IP Phone ....................................................................................7-2 . . Configuration File Encryption Method ......................................................................7-2 . Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files ................................................................7-4 Vendor Configuration File Encryption .......................................................................7-6 Chapter 8 Upgrading the Firmware . . . About this chapter ...........................................................................................................8-1 . Upgrading the Firmware .................................................................................................8-2 . Using the “Firmware Update” Page in the Aastra Web UI .......................................8-2 Using the Restart Feature ........................................................................................8-5 Using the Auto-Resync Feature ...............................................................................8-7 x . . . 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Contents Chapter 9 Troubleshooting . About this chapter ...........................................................................................................9-1 Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................................9-3 . . Log Settings .............................................................................................................9-3 . Module/Debug Level Settings ..................................................................................9-4 . Support Information ..................................................................................................9-7 . WatchDog Task Feature .........................................................................................9-12 . Error Messages Display .........................................................................................9-15 . Troubleshooting Solutions ............................................................................................9-19 . Description .............................................................................................................9-19 . Why does my phone display “Application missing”? ..............................................9-19 . t1 Why does my phone display the “No Service” message? ......................................9-20 Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"? ..........................................9-20 Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP Server? .....9-21 How do I restart the IP phone? ..............................................................................9-22 . . . . ra f How do I set the IP phone to factory default? ........................................................9-23 . How do I erase the phone’s local configuration? ...................................................9-24 . How to reset a user’s password? ...........................................................................9-25 How do I lock and unlock the phone? ....................................................................9-27 . . D Appendix A Configuration Parameters About this appendix ....................................................................................................... A-1 . . Setting Parameters in Configuration Files ..................................................................... A-6 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters ............................................................. A-7 Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu ..................................................................... A-7 . . . Network Settings ..................................................................................................... A-8 . DHCP Option Settings .......................................................................................... A-13 . Password Settings ................................................................................................ A-15 . Emergency Dial Plan Settings ............................................................................... A-16 . Aastra Web UI Settings ......................................................................................... A-17 . Configuration Server Settings ............................................................................... A-18 . Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings ........................................................ A-29 . Rport Setting ......................................................................................................... A-31 . Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting .......................................................................... A-32 . 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 xi Local SIP TLS Port ................................................................................................ A-32 Contents . HTTPS Client and Server Settings ........................................................................ A-33 . HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings ....................................................... A-35 . UPnP Settings ....................................................................................................... A-37 . Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings ......................................................... A-38 . Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings ................................................................... A-44 . Time and Date Settings ......................................................................................... A-45 . Time Server Settings ............................................................................................. A-52 . Custom Time Zone and DST Settings .................................................................. A-54 . Backlight Mode Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) ..................... A-63 . Live Dialpad Settings ............................................................................................ A-64 . SIP Local Dial Plan Settings ................................................................................. A-65 . SIP Basic, Global Settings .................................................................................... A-67 t1 . SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings ................................................................................. A-76 . BLA Support for MWI ............................................................................................ A-87 Centralized Conferencing Settings ........................................................................ A-88 . . ra f SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference ............................................................... A-90 HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS .................................... A-91 . . Advanced SIP Settings ......................................................................................... A-92 . Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings ...................................................... A-101 . As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings ............................................................. A-104 D . Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings ............................................................. A-105 . 802.1x Support Settings ...................................................................................... A-109 RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings .................................................................... A-114 . . Autodial Settings ................................................................................................. A-119 . Voicemail Settings ............................................................................................... A-122 . Directory Settings ................................................................................................ A-123 . Callers List Settings ............................................................................................ A-124 . Customize Callers List and Services Key ........................................................... A-125 . Call Forward Settings .......................................................................................... A-126 . Call Forward Key Mode Settings ......................................................................... A-127 . LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings ............................................................................ A-129 . Missed Calls Indicator Settings ........................................................................... A-131 . XML Settings ....................................................................................................... A-132 . xii 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Action URI Settings ............................................................................................. A-135 . Contents XML SIP Notify Settings ...................................................................................... A-141 . Polling Action URI Settings ................................................................................. A-142 . Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings ............................................................ A-143 . Ring Tone Per-Line Settings ............................................................................... A-145 . Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting .............................................................. A-146 . Switch Focus to Ringing Line .............................................................................. A-148 . Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout ......................................................... A-149 Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call .................................................................. A-150 . . Stuttered Dial Tone Setting ................................................................................. A-151 . Call Waiting Settings ........................................................................................... A-152 . Message Waiting Indicator Settings .................................................................... A-153 . DND Key Mode Settings ..................................................................................... A-154 t1 . Priority Alert Settings ........................................................................................... A-155 . Bellcore Cadence Settings .................................................................................. A-160 Language Settings .............................................................................................. A-162 ra f Language Pack Settings ..................................................................................... A-164 . . . Suppress DTMF Playback Setting ...................................................................... A-173 . Display DTMF Digits Setting ............................................................................... A-174 . Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings ................................................... A-175 D Group Paging RTP Settings ................................................................................ A-179 Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings ..................................... A-180 Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings ............................ A-184 . . . . ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings ................................................................... A-186 . Park and Pickup Global Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i/6757i CT only) .......... A-187 Mapping Key Settings ......................................................................................... A-189 Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters ......... A-192 Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT ............................. A-193 Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 6753i, and 6755i .................................... A-202 Top Softkey Settings for 6757i and 6757i CT ...................................................... A-207 Handset Feature Key Settings for the 9480i CT and 6757i CT ........................... A-214 Expansion Module Key Settings for M670i (6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) and M675i (for 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) .............................................. A-216 . . . . . . . . Customizing the Key Type List ............................................................................ A-223 . Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys ........................................................ A-226 . 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 xiii Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i) ....................................................... A-229 Contents . Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys ....................................... A-230 . BLF List URI Settings .......................................................................................... A-230 . Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display ........................................... A-231 . Expansion Module 1 through 3 ........................................................................... A-231 . Advanced Operational Parameters ........................................................................... A-233 . Blind Transfer Setting .......................................................................................... A-233 . Update Caller ID Setting. .................................................................................... A-233 . Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings. .......................................................... A-234 . Single Call Restriction Setting ............................................................................. A-235 . Blacklist Duration Setting .................................................................................... A-236 . Whitelist Proxy Setting ........................................................................................ A-236 . t1 XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail) ............ A-237 Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 6751i) ................................... A-239 . . Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting .............................................. A-239 . XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting .......................................................... A-240 ra f Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting ....................................................................... A-240 . . User-Agent Setting .............................................................................................. A-241 . GRUU and sip.instance Support ......................................................................... A-241 . DNS Query Setting .............................................................................................. A-242 . Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests ...................................................................... A-243 D . Configuration Encryption Setting ......................................................................... A-243 . Troubleshooting Parameters ..................................................................................... A-244 . Log Settings ........................................................................................................ A-244 . WatchDog Settings ............................................................................................. A-247 . Appendix B Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX About this appendix ....................................................................................................... B-1 . . IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX ................................................................................... B-2 . Appendix C Sample Configuration Files About this appendix ....................................................................................................... C-1 . . Sample Configuration Files ........................................................................................... C-2 . 6757i Sample Configuration File ............................................................................. C-2 xiv . 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 6757i CT Sample Configuration File ..................................................................... C-12 . Contents 6753i Sample Configuration File ........................................................................... C-29 . Appendix D Sample BLF Softkey Settings About this appendix ....................................................................................................... D-1 . . Sample BLF Softkey Settings ........................................................................................ D-2 . Asterisk BLF ............................................................................................................ D-2 . BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF .................................................................................... D-3 . Appendix E Sample Multiple Proxy Server Configuration About this appendix ....................................................................................................... E-1 . . Multiple Proxy Server Configuration .............................................................................. E-2 . t1 Appendix F Creating and Managing XML Applications About this appendix ....................................................................................................... F-1 . . Creating an XML Application ......................................................................................... F-3 . Overview ................................................................................................................. F-3 . ra f XML format .............................................................................................................. F-3 . Creating XML Objects ............................................................................................. F-4 . Creating Custom Softkeys ...................................................................................... F-5 . Text Menu Object (Menu Screens) .......................................................................... F-6 D Text Screen Object (Text Screens) ........................................................................ F-14 . . UserInput Object (User Input Screens) ................................................................. F-23 Directory Object (Directory List Screen) ................................................................ F-39 Status Message Object (Idle Screen) .................................................................... F-41 Execute Commands Object (for executing XML commands) ............................... F-43 XML URI for Key Press Simulation ....................................................................... F-60 Dynamic Configuration Object (to push a configuration to the phone) .................. F-64 XML Image Objects (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i/6757i CT only) ..................... F-70 Attributes/Options to Use with XML Objects ......................................................... F-80 . . . . . . . . HTTP Post ............................................................................................................. F-84 . XML Schema File .................................................................................................. F-87 . Managing XML Applications ........................................................................................ F-90 . Description ............................................................................................................ F-90 . Support of Virtual Web Servers ............................................................................. F-90 . 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 xv Non-Blocking HTTP Connections ......................................................................... F-90 . XML SIP Notify ...................................................................................................... F-91 . Limited Warranty D ra f t1 . Preface About this guide Introduction t1 This SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide provides information on the basic network setup, operation, and maintenance of the IP phones, Models 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT and the 675xi Series IP Phones (6751i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT). It also includes details on the functioning and configuration of the IP phones. D Audience ra f Note: Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are specific to a particular IP phone model are indicated where required in this guide. This guide is for network administrators, system administrators, developers and partners who need to understand how to operate and maintain the IP phone on a SIP network. It also provides some user-specific information. This guide contains information that is at a technical level, more suitable for system or network administrators. Prior knowledge of IP Telephony concepts is recommended. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 xvii IP Phone Administrator Guide About this guide Other Documentation The IP phone documentation consists of: <Model-specific> SIP IP Phone Installation Guide – contains installation and set-up instructions, information on general features and functions, and basic options list customization. Included with the phone. • Model 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, and 675xi Series SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide – explains how to set the phone up on the network, as well as advanced configuration instructions for the SIP IP phone. This guide contains information that is at a technical level more suitable for a system or network administrator. • <Model-specific> SIP IP Phone User Guides – explains the most commonly used features and functions for an end user. t1 • D ra f This Administrator Guide complements the Aastra product-specific Installation Guide and the Aastra product-specific User Guide. xviii 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Chapters and appendixes in this guide This guide contains the following chapters and appendixes: Go to An overview of the IP Phones and the IP Phone firmware installation information Chapter 1 IP Phone interface methods Chapter 2 Administrator options information Chapter 3 Configuring the Network and Global SIP Features on the IP Phone Chapter 4 Configuring operational information on the IP Phones Chapter 5 Configuring advanced operational information on the IP Phones Chapter 6 Encryption information Chapter 7 Firmware upgrade information Chapter 8 Troubleshooting solutions Chapter 9 Appendix A Appendix B Sample configuration files Appendix C Sample BLF softkey settings Appendix D Sample multiple proxy server configuration Appendix E Creating XML applications Appendix F D Configuring the IP Phones at the Asterisk PBX ra f Configuration parameters t1 For 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 xix t1 ra f D Chapter 1 Overview About this chapter Introduction Topics ra f t1 This chapter briefly describes the IP Phone Models, and provides information about installing the IP phone firmware. It also describes the firmware and configuration files that the IP phone models use for operation. This chapter covers the following topics: D Topic IP Phone Models Page page 1-3 Model 9143i IP Phone page 1-6 Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones page 1-10 Model 6751i IP Phone page 1-15 Model 6753i IP Phone page 1-20 Model 6755i IP Phone page 1-23 Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones page 1-27 Firmware Installation Information page 1-33 Installation Considerations page 1-33 Installation Requirements page 1-34 Configuration Server Requirement page 1-35 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-1 IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page Firmware and Configuration Files page 1-36 page 1-38 Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files page 1-39 D ra f t1 Configuration File Precedence 1-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models IP Phone Models Description All Aastra SIP IP Phone Models communicate over an IP network allowing you to receive and place calls in the same manner as a regular business telephone. All phone models support the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). The 9480i CT and 6757i CT offers the base phone along with a cordless extension. References For more information about the features and installation requirements, see the SIP IP Phone Installation Guide for your specific model. t1 The following illustrations show the types of IP Phone Models. ra f Hold Redi al Go od bye Op tio ns Op Save Conf De tions Dire ctor y 948 0i lete Xfer L3 L2 L1 Xfer Co nf Ico D Mut e m Serv ice s 9480i 9143i Hold Redi al Go od bye Op tio ns 948 0i C T Xfer Co nf Ico m Serv ice s 9480i CT 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-3 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models 6753i 6751i t1 6757i CT 6755i ra f 6757i Optional Accessories D The following are optional accessories for the IP Phones. Power over Ethernet (PoE) Inline Power Injector 1-4 Additional Ethernet Cable (category 5/5e straight through cable) 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models A Power over Ethernet (PoE) inline power injector supplies 48V power to the IP phone through the Ethernet cable on pins 4 & 5 and 7 & 8. Warning: Do not use this inline PoE power injector to power other devices. See your phone-specific Installation Guide for more information. Reference D ra f t1 For more information about installing the PoE and additional Ethernet cable, see your phone-specific Installation Guide. M670i Expansion Module for 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT M675i Expansion Module for 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT The M670i module adds 36 additional softkeys to the IP phone models 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT. The M670i provides paper labels for each softkey. Up to 3 modules can be piggy-backed to provide up to 108 additional softkeys for the phone. The M675i module adds 60 additional softkeys to the IP phone models 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT (using the 3 function keys on the bottom right of the unit). The M675i module provides an LCD display for display softkey labels. Up to 3 modules can be piggy-backed to provide up to 180 additional softkeys for the phone. Reference For more information about installing and using the expansion modules, see your phone-specific Installation Guide and phone-specific User Guide. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-5 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Model 9143i IP Phone This section provides brief information about the Model 9143i IP Phone. It includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 9143i. Options Directory Save Delete Conf Xfer 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 8 9 WXYZ TUV L3 L2 t1 PQRS * 0 # L1 ra f Mute 9143i Phone Features • • • • 3-line LCD screen 3 call appearance lines with LEDs 7 programmable keys Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls Supports up to 9 call lines Headset support (modular connector) Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with your computer Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters. AC power adapter (included) Enhanced busy lamp fields* Set paging* D • • • • • • • • *Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider. 1-6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models 9143i Symbol Key Descriptions* Keys Key Description Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/ call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option. t1 Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the light that is flashing. ra f Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker. Conf Xferer D Callers List key - Allows you to access the Callers List that stores up to 200 of the last calls received. Conference key - Allows you to begin a conference call with up to 3 active call parties. Transfer key - Allows you to perform blind or consultative transfer of an active call to another number. In blind transfer, you transfer the call without waiting for the far end to answer. In consultative transfer, you wait for the far end to answer before transferring the call. Redial key - Redials a previously dialed number. The Redial key stores up to 100 previously dialed numbers you can select from. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-7 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 9143i IP Phone supports up to 3 line keys. L1 L2 L3 L4 Directory key - Accesses the Directory on the phone. The Directory List is your personal phone book, conveniently stored within your phone. You can enter up to 200 entries into the 9143i Directory by adding them manually, or by saving the number and name from other lists stored on your phone. Each entry can contain a maximum of 16 letters and numbers. D Directory Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Specific options are available to your System Administrator only and are password protected. Contact your System Administrator for more information. ra f Options t1 Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone. Save key - Allows you to save entries when storing numbers and names in Directory. Also allows you to save Option settings when using the programmable keys. Delete key - Allows you to remove entries from the Redial, Directory, or Callers Lists. 1-8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Programmable keys - Allows you to use the feature configured for that key. You can program up to 7 keys with a specific function. By default, there are no functions configured on the programmable keys (keys are configured as “None”). ra f t1 Note: For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1 through 7 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141. D Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute). *See the Aastra 9143i User Guide for more information about each of these keys. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-9 Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones This section provides brief information about the Models 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones. It includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on these models. 35i Hold Hold Redial edial 35i Good oodbye Hold Hold Redial edial Good oodbye 1 2 ABC D EF 3 DEF GHI 4 GHI JKL 5 JKL 6 MNO PQ RS TU V 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZYZ Options Options Options Options 2 ABC D EF 3 DEF GHI 4 GHI JKL 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 8 9 WXYZYZ 0 # Xfer er Icom om Conf onf Servi vices es * 0 # Xfer er Icom om Conf onf L1 L2 L3 Servi vices es L4 L1 L2 L3 L4 t1 * TU V TUV 9480i 9480i CT 9480i and 9480i CT Phone Features • • • • • • • • • • • • ra f PQ RS PQRS 5 line graphical LCD screen with large backlit display 6 multi-functional, state-based softkeys Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature 4 call appearance lines with LEDs Supports up to 9 call lines Speakerphone for handsfree calls Headset support (modular connector) Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with your computer. Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters. AC power adapter (included) Enhanced busy lamp fields* Set paging* D 1 *Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider. Overview IP Phone Models 9480i and 9480i CT Key Descriptions* Keys Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. Good oodbye Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options. Options Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the light that is flashing. t1 Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number. ra f Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker. D Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone. Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute). Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 9480i and 9480i CT IP phones support up to 4 line keys. L1 L2 L3 L4 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-11 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/ call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option. Transfer key - Transfers an active call to another number. Xfer er Icom key - Begins an intercom call to a remote extension and answers incoming intercom calls. The 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones also have default softkey 4 configured as Icom. ra f Icom om Conference key - Begins a conference call with the active call. t1 Conf D Services key - Displays a list of Services available to your phone, if specific services have been configured. The available Aastra services include Directory & Callers Log. The 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones also have default softkey 1 configured as Services. Note: Availability of the services feature is dependant on your phone system and/or service provider. Softkeys - 6 state-based softkeys on the 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones. By default, key 1 is assigned as WebApps. When you pick up the handset, the following displays on key 1: Dial - After entering a phone number from the keypad, you can press the Dial softkey to immediately dial the number. Note: For more information about configuring softkeys 1 through 6 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/ Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141. *See the Aastra 9480i and 9480i CT User Guides for more information about each of these keys. 1-12 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models 9480i CT Cordless Handset Features 5 line backlit display screen 2 multi-functional softkeys Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions Vibration Alerter Headset Jack Desk charging stand D ra f t1 • • • • • • 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-13 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models 9480i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions* Function Description 1 Receiver 2 Volume key During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume During a call: Adjusts receiver volume During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left 3 Display 4 Features ƒ Key List Access key to the programmed Feature Key List Scrolls up when in the various lists Adds a space during editing 5 Softkeys Activates feature or option shown on the display above the keys 6 Call key Used to obtain dial tone Also used as a Hold key 7 Dial Pad 10 11 ra f 9 Mute Key When used, prevents the caller from hearing you Headset Jack Status Light D 8 t1 Function # Release key To end calls and go on hook Exits Menu and the various lists 12 Menu Key Access key to the different Options Scrolls down when in the various lists Used as Backspace during editing 13 Redial Key Displays the last 10 numbers dialed 14 Charging Jack 15 Charging Contacts 16 Microphone *See the Aastra 9480i CT User Guide for more information about each of these keys. 1-14 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models Model 6751i IP Phone This section provides brief information about the Model 6751i IP Phone. It includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 6751i. The 6751i is available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad. Goodbye t1 Services Hold ra f Redial 6751i with Symbol Keys Save Delete Swap Speaker Mute 6751i with Text Keys • • D 6751i Phone Features 3-line LCD screen 1 call appearance line • • Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports 1 call line with transfer capabilities • Full-duplex speakerphone for monitoring calls • Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with your computer • AC power adapter (sold separately) 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-15 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models 6751i Symbol Key Descriptions*. Keys Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. Services key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone. This keys also access the Directory List and Callers List. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options. Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the Hold key again. t1 Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number. ra f Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and handsfree speaker. D Save key - Saves names and numbers to the Directory List. Also saves names and numbers from the Callers List to the Directory List. Delete key - Deletes individual or all entries from the Directory List and Callers List. Deletes all entries from the Redial List. You can also use this key to backspace and delete a character when entering values for speeddial softkeys. Swap key - If you are on an active call and a second call comes in, you can press the Swap key. This key places the first call on hold and answers the second call. Pressing the Swap key again toggles between the two active calls. The Swap key works with two active calls only. A third call cannot be accepted. Speaker key - Activates Handsfree for receiving calls without lifting the handset. Can be used on active calls to switch from the handset to handsfree. 1-16 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you. Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. UP Arrow - This key also acts as a Transfer Key, allowing you to transfer calls when required. DOWN Arrow - This key also acts as a Conference Key, allowing you to join conferences when required. t1 Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view the lines on the LCD. While in the Options List, the navigation keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option. D ra f *See the Aastra 6751i User Guide for more information about each of these keys. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-17 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models 6751i Text Key Descriptions*. Keys Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. Services key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone. This keys also access the Directory List and Callers List. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options. Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the Hold key again. t1 Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number. ra f Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and handsfree speaker. D Save key - Saves names and numbers to the Directory List. Also saves names and numbers from the Callers List to the Directory List. Delete key - Deletes individual or all entries from the Directory List and Callers List. Deletes all entries from the Redial List. You can also use this key to backspace and delete a character when entering values for speeddial softkeys. Swap key - If you are on an active call and a second call comes in, you can press the Swap key. This key places the first call on hold and answers the second call. Pressing the Swap key again toggles between the two active calls. The Swap key works with two active calls only. A third call cannot be accepted. Speaker key - Activates Handsfree for receiving calls without lifting the handset. Can be used on active calls to switch from the handset to handsfree. 1-18 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you. Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. UP Arrow - This key also acts as a Transfer Key, allowing you to transfer calls when required. DOWN Arrow - This key also acts as a Conference Key, allowing you to join conferences when required. t1 Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view the lines on the LCD. While in the Options List, the navigation keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option. D ra f *See the Aastra 6751i User Guide for more information about each of these keys. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-19 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Model 6753i IP Phone ra f t1 This section provides brief information about the Model 6753i IP Phone. It includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys and default programmable keys on the 6753i. • • • • • • • • • • • D 6753i Phone Features 3-line LCD screen 6 top keys - all 6 keys are programmable 3 call appearance lines with LEDs Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports up to 9 call lines Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls Headset support (modular connector) Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with your computer AC power adapter (included) Enhanced busy lamp fields* Set paging* *Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider. 1-20 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models 6753i Key Descriptions* Keys Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options. Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the light that is flashing. t1 Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number. ra f Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker. D Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6753i IP phone supports up to 3 line keys. Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone. Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-21 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/ call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option. Programmable keys - 6 Top Keys - all 6 keys are programmable. Keys 1 and 2 are designated as the SAVE and DELETE keys, respectively. These keys are locked but can be unlocked and made configurable if required by the System Administrator. Allows you to save numbers and/or names to the Directory. Using this key, you enter the number, name, and line (or speeddial key) to record in the Directory List. 2 - DELETE Allows you to delete a single entry or all entries from the Directory List and Callers List. 3 - DIRECTORY Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order). 4 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received. 5 - TRANSFER Transfers the active call to another number. 6 - CONFERENCE Begins a conference call with the active call. D ra f 1 - SAVE t1 The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the 6753i IP phone: Notes: 1. For more information about programming the SAVE and DELETE keys, see “Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i)” on page 5-50. 2, For more information about configuring keys 1 thru 6 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5 the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141. *See the Aastra 6753i User Guide for more information about each of these keys. 1-22 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models Model 6755i IP Phone ra f t1 This section provides brief information about the Model 6755i IP Phone. It includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys, default programmable keys, and default softkeys on the 6755i. • • • • • • • • • • D 6755i Phone Features 8 line graphical LCD screen (144 x 75 pixels) with white backlight 12 programmable keys 6 Top keys:Programmable hard keys 6 Bottom keys:Programmable state-based softkeys 4 call appearance lines with LEDs Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports up to 9 call lines Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls Headset support (modular connector) Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with your computer. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-23 • • • • Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters. AC power adapter (included) Enhanced busy lamp fields* Set paging* *Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider. 6755i Key Descriptions* Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. t1 Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options. ra f Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the light that is flashing. Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number. D Keys Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker. Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6755i IP phone supports up to 4 line keys. Overview IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone. Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute). Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/ text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. t1 Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option. Programmable keys - 6 Top keys: programmable hard keys (up to 6 programmable functions) ra f By default, the top keys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory, Callers List, and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned functions. All 6 keys are programmable and can be assigned to perform specific functions. D The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the 6755i IP phone: 1 - SERVICES Accesses enhanced features and services such as XML applications and voicemail, provided by third parties. 2 - DIRECTORY Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order). 3 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received. 4 - ICOM Accesses another extension on the network. 5 - NONE No assigned function. 6 - NONE No assigned function. Note: For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1 through 6 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-25 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Softkeys - 6 Bottom keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20 programmable functions). By default, keys 1 through 6 have no assigned functions. You can configure all 6 bottom softkeys to perform specific functions on the 6755i IP phone. However, after you lift the handset, there are specific static softkeys that display that cannot be changed. These are as follows: 1 - DIAL 2 - CONF 3 - XFER Allows you to dial out on the phone. Begins a conference call with the active phone. Transfers the active call to another number. t1 Note: For more information about configuring softkeys 1 through 6 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141. D ra f *See the Aastra 6755i User Guide for more information about each of these keys. 1-26 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones ra f 6757i t1 This section provides brief information about the Model 6757i IP Phone. It includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys and default softkeys on the 6757i. 6757i CT • • D 6757i and 6757i CT Phone Features 11 line graphical LCD screen (144 x 128 pixels) with white backlight 12 multi-functional softkeys - 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys • • • • • • - 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys 4 call appearance lines with LEDs Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports up to 9 call lines Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls Headset support (modular connector) Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with your computer. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-27 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models • • • • Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters. AC power adapter (included) Enhanced busy lamp fields* Set paging* *Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider. 6757i and 6757i CT Key Descriptions* Keys Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. t1 Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options. ra f Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the light that is flashing. D Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number. Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker. Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6757i IP phone supports up to 4 line keys. 1-28 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone. Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute). Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/ text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. D ra f t1 Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-29 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Softkeys - 12 softkeys on the 6757i IP Phone. - 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys (up to 10 programmable functions) - 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20 programmable functions) By default, the top softkeys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory, Callers List, and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned functions. All 6 keys are programmable and can be assigned to perform specific functions. The following are the default functions for the top softkeys on the 6757i IP phone: Accesses enhanced features and services such as XML applications and voicemail, provided by third parties. 2 - DIRECTORY Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order). 3 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received. 4 - ICOM Accesses another extension on the network. 5 - NONE No assigned function. 6 - NONE No assigned function. t1 1 - SERVICES ra f By default, the bottom softkeys 7 through 12 have no assigned functions. You can configure all 6 bottom softkeys to perform specific functions on the 6757i IP phone. However, after you lift the handset, there are specific static softkeys that display that cannot be changed. These are as follows: Allows you to dial out on the phone. Begins a conference call with the active phone. Transfers the active call to another number. D 7- DIAL 8- CONF 9- XFER Note: For more information about programming the softkeys to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/ Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141. *See the Aastra 6757i or 6757i CT User Guide for more information about each of these keys. 1-30 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview IP Phone Models 6757i CT Cordless Handset Features 5 line backlit display screen 2 multi-functional softkeys Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions Vibration Alerter Headset Jack Desk charging stand D ra f t1 • • • • • • 6757i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions Function # Function Description 1 Receiver 2 Volume key During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume During a call: Adjusts receiver volume During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left 3 Display 4 Features ƒ Key List Access key to the programmed Feature Key List Scrolls up when in the various lists Adds a space during editing 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-31 IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Function Description 5 Softkeys Activates feature or option shown on the display above the keys 6 Call key Used to obtain dial tone Also used as a Hold key 7 Dial Pad 8 Mute Key When used, prevents the caller from hearing you 9 Headset Jack 10 Status Light 11 Release key To end calls and go on hook Exits Menu and the various lists 12 Menu Key Access key to the different Options Scrolls down when in the various lists Used as Backspace during editing 15 16 1-32 ra f 14 Redial Key Displays the last 10 numbers dialed Charging Jack Charging Contacts Microphone D 13 t1 Function # 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview Firmware Installation Information Firmware Installation Information Description The firmware setup and installation for the IP phone can be done using any of the following: • Phone User Interface via the keypad (Phone UI) • Aastra Web-based user interface (Aastra Web UI) Installation Considerations t1 When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default. Depending on the type of configuration server setup you may have, the IP phone may download a firmware version automatically, or you may need to download it manually. • If you are planning on using dynamic IP addresses, make sure a DHCP server is enabled and running on your network. D • ra f The following considerations must be made before connecting the IP phone to the network: If you are not planning on using dynamic IP addresses, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-24 for manually setting up an IP address. To install the IP phone hardware and cabling, refer to the model-specific SIP IP Phone Installation Guide. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-33 IP Phone Administrator Guide Firmware Installation Information Installation Requirements The following are general requirements for setting up and using your SIP IP phone: • SIP-based IP PBX system or network installed and running with a SIP account created for the IP phone. • Access to a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) server, or HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) (HTTPS). • Ethernet/Fast Ethernet LAN (10/100 Mb) • Category 5/5e straight through cabling • Power source t1 — For Ethernet networks that supply in-line power to the phone (IEEE 802.3af): ra f — For power, use the Ethernet cable (supplied) to connect from the phone directly to the network for power. (No 48v AC power adapter required.) — For Ethernet networks that DO NOT supply power to the phone: D — For power, use the 48V AC Power Adapter (included) to connect from the DC power port on the phone to a power source. or — (optional) - For power, use a Power over Ethernet (PoE) power injector or a PoE switch. A PoE power injector is available as an optional accessory from Aastra Telecom. Contact your Administrator for more information. 1-34 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview Firmware Installation Information Configuration Server Requirement A basic requirement for setting up the IP phone is to have a configuration server. The configuration server allows you to: • Store the firmware images that you need to download to your IP phone. • Stores configuration files for the IP phone • Stores the software when performing software upgrades to the IP phone Note: If you use TFTP, the configuration server must be able to accept connections anonymously. t1 Reference To set the protocol for your configuration server, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. D ra f To update the firmware on your phone, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Firmware”. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-35 IP Phone Administrator Guide Firmware and Configuration Files Firmware and Configuration Files Description When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default allowing the phone to automatically get its IP address from the network. Upon bootup, the phone also automatically updates it firmware and configuration files from the configuration server using the default TFTP protocol. The IP Phones support TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS as download protocols. You can change the protocol server that you use to download firmware and configuration files, and can perform the download manually or configure the phone to download them automatically. ra f t1 Note: Automatic download is dependant on your configuration server setup. For more information about manual and automatic download of firmware, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Firmware.” For more information on changing the download protocol on your phone, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. D The firmware consists of a single file called: • <phone model>.st (for example, 55i.st (for 6755i)) - This file contains information about the specific IP Phone model and contains the language packs to load to the phone. The configuration files consist of two files called: • aastra.cfg - This file contains configuration information about the IP Phone. • <MAC>.cfg (for example, 00085D1610DE.cfg) - This file contains configuration information about the IP Phone. 1-36 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview Firmware and Configuration Files The following table provides the files that the phone requests from the configuration server during bootup of the phone: Associated Firmware Configuration Files Language Files 9143i 9143i.st aastra.cfg 9480i 9480i.st 9480i CT 9480iCT.st 6751i 51i.st 6753i 53i.st 6755i 55i.st 6757i 57i.st <MAC>.cfg (for example, 00085D1610DE.cfg) lang_de.txt (German) lang_es.txt (Spanish) lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish) lang_fr.txt (French) lang_fr_ca.txt (Canadian French) lang_it.txt (Italian) 6757i CT 57iCT.st t1 IP Phone Model ra f The IP Phone firmware file includes all the necessary files you need for your phone, including the language files. Loading the language files to your phone(s) is optional. Reference D For more information about loading language files and using the various languages on the IP phone, see Chapter 5, the section, “Language” on page 5-34. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-37 IP Phone Administrator Guide Firmware and Configuration Files Configuration File Precedence Aastra IP phones can accept two sources of configuration data: • The server configuration most recently downloaded/cached from the configuration server files, aastra.cfg/<mac>.cfg (or the aastra.tuz/<mac>.tuz encrypted equivalents). • Local configuration changes stored on the phone that were entered using either the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI In the event of conflicting values set by the different methods, values are applied in the following sequence: Default values hard-coded in the phone software 2. Values downloaded from the configuration server 3. Values stored locally on the phone t1 1. ra f The last values to be applied to the phone configuration are the values that take effect. D For example, if a parameter’s value is set in the local configuration (via Aastra Web UI or IP phone UI) and the same value was also set differently in one of the <mac>.cfg/aastra.cfg files on the configuration server, the local configuration value is the value that takes effect because that is the last value applied to the configuration. 1-38 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Overview Firmware and Configuration Files Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files The following procedure describes how to install the firmware and configuration files. Step Action 1 If DHCP is disabled, manually enter the configuration server’s IP address. For details on manually setting DHCP, see Chapter 4, the section “DHCP” on page 4-4. 2 Copy the firmware file <phone model>.st to the root directory of the configuration server. The IP phone accepts the new firmware file only if it is different from the firmware currently loaded on the IP phone. Note: The <phone model> attribute is the IP phone model (i.e., 9143i.st, 9480i.st, 9480iCT.st, 51i.st, 53i.st, 55i.st, 57i.st, 57iCT.st). Copy the Aastra configuration files (aastra.cfg and <mac>.cfg) to the root directory of the configuration server. t1 3 Note: The <mac> attribute represents the actual MAC address of your phone. (i.e., 00085D030996.cfg). ra f Note: Restart the IP phone as described in Chapter 3, “Restarting Your Phone” on page 3-13. D 4 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 1-39 t1 ra f D Chapter 2 Configuration Interface Methods About this chapter Introduction t1 This chapter describes the methods you, as an Administrator, can use to configure the IP phones. ra f Note: Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are specific to a particular IP phone models are indicated where required in this guide. D Topics This chapter covers the following topics: Topic Page Configuration Methods page 2-2 IP Phone UI page 2-2 Aastra Web UI page 2-6 Configuration Files (Administrator Only) page 2-17 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 2-1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Configuration Methods Description You can use the following to setup and configure the IP phone: • IP phone UI • Aastra Web UI • Configuration files t1 Note: There are specific parameters you can configure using only the IP Phone UI, only and Aastra Web UI, only the configuration files, or a combination of any of these methods. For more information about configuring the phone, see Chapter 4, Chapter 5, and Chapter 6. IP Phone UI ra f The following paragraphs describe each method of configuring the IP Phone. D The IP Phone User Interface (UI) provides an easy way to access features and functions for using and configuring the IP phone. An Administrator can configure all features and functions on the phone. A User can configure a subset of these features and functions. Users of the IP phones should see their Model-specific User’s Guide for available features and functions to configure. You use the phone’s hard keys and keypad to configure specific features on the IP phone. By default, specific softkeys/programmable keys on each phone model can also access the Directory List and Callers List, and initiate transfers and conference calls. Reference Refer to Chapter 1, the section “IP Phone Models” on page 1-3 for keys specific to your phone model. For more information about using the hard keys on each phone, see Chapter 5, the section, “Locking IP Phone Keys” on page 5-49. For more information about the softkeys/programmable keys, see Chapter 5, the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141. 2-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Options Key The Options key allows you to access the "Options List" on the IP phone. Accessible options in this list are for both user and Administrator use. An Administrator must enter a password for administrator options. Note: An Administrator can apply a simplified options menu to the IP phones. An Administrator can also enable and disable the use of an Administrator password protection in the IP phone UI. These features are configurable using the configuration files only. For more information about these features, see Chapter 3, the section, “Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu” on page page 3-5, and Chapter 5, the section, “Administrator Passwords” on page 5-9. t1 This document describes the administrator options only. For a description of the user options in the "Options List", see your model-specific SIP IP Phone User Guide. The following illustrations indicate the location of the Options Key on each phone model. ra f Options Key Options 9480i Directory Hold Redial Goodbye Save Options Delete D Conf 1 2 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ ABC 3 DEF Xfer 1 2 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ * 0 ABC 3 DEF # L3 L2 * L1 0 # Xfer Icom Conf Mute L1 Services L2 L3 L4 9480i/9480i CT 9143i Options Key 9480i CT Handset 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 2-3 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Options Key 6751i 6753i t1 6755i ra f Options Key 6757i CT Handset D 6757i/6757i CT 2-4 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Using the Options Key Step Action 1 Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List. Note: Press the Services key on the 6751i and then select Options from the list. 2 3 Use the r and s to scroll through the list of options. On 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: To select an option, press the Enter softkey, or select the number on the keypad that corresponds to the option in the Option List. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: To select an option, press the Select softkey, press 4, or select the number on the keypad that corresponds to the option in the Option List. On 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Use the Set softkey after making a change to an option, to save the change. t1 4 On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Use the Change softkey to change a selected option. Press the Done softkey at any time to save the changes and exit the current option. 6 Press the Cancel softkey, press 3, press changes. ra f 5 , or press Good oodbye any time to exit without saving Step 1 2 3 4 Action D From the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handset: Press the  key to enter the Options List when the phone is not in use. Use the scroll keys  and Ï to scroll the options. To select and change an option, press the r keys. Press y when done. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 2-5 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Aastra Web UI An administrator can setup and configure the IP phone using the Aastra Web UI. The Aastra Web UI supports Internet Explorer and Gecko engine-based browsers like Firefox, Mozilla or Netscape. Note: An Administrator can enable or disable the Aastra Web UI for a single phone or all phones in a network. For more information about enabling/disabling the Aastra Web UI, see “Enabling/Disabling the Aastra Web UI” on page 2-16. HTTP/HTTPS Support t1 The Aastra Web UI supports both Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS) client and server protocols. ra f HTTP is the set of rules for transferring files (text, graphic images, sound, video, and other multimedia files) over the Internet. When you open your Web browser, you are indirectly making use of HTTP. HTTP is an application protocol that runs on top of the TCP/IP suite of protocols (the foundation protocols for the Internet). D HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as the pages that are returned by the Web server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet. It uses a 40-bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. When a server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL. Note: HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the TCP/IP lower layer. Both the HTTP and HTTPS port numbers are configurable using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI and DHCP Option 66. For more information about configuring these ports, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. 2-6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods HTTP/HTTPS Client and Server Support The Aastra IP phones allow for HTTP request processing and associated data transfers to perform over a secure connection (HTTPS). The IP phones support the following: • Transfer of firmware images, configuration files, script files, and web page content over a secure connection. • Web browser phone configuration over a secure connection. • TLS 1.0or SSL 3.0 methods for both client and server HTTPS Client t1 When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are: Downloading of configuration files and firmware images. • Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a softkey definition. ra f • HTTPS Server • • D The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks. The main HTTPS server functions are: Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection. Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure connection 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 2-7 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Non-Blocking HTTP Connections The IP Phones support a non-blocking HTTP connection feature. This feature allows the user to continue using the phone when there is a delay during an HTTP connection while the phone is waiting for the HTTP server to respond. This feature also allows a user to abort the connection and perform other operations on the phone (which will abort the HTTP connection automatically). A user can also abort the HTTP loading by pressing the GOODBYE key while the phone is displaying “Loading Page.......”. Note: This feature impacts only the HTTP calls triggered by a phone key (softkey or programmable key); the HTTP calls performed by action URIs are still blocking. t1 Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods for Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS) D ra f The IP Phones have authentication support per RFC 2617 when using HTTP or HTTPS as download protocols. If a 5i Series phone is challenged by an HTTP or HTTPS server when the server attempts to download the aastra.cfg file, the phone automatically sends "aastra" as the default Username and Password back to the server. For more information about this feature, see Chapter 5, the section, “Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)” on page 5-365. 2-8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Using HTTPS via the Aastra Web UI HTTPS is enabled by default on the IP phones. When you open a browser window and enter an IP address or host name for a phone using HTTP, a server redirection occurs which automatically converts an HTTP connection to an HTTPS connection. After the redirection, a “Security Alert” certificate window displays alerting the user that information exchanged with the phone cannot be viewed or changed by others. Accepting the certificate then forwards you to the phone’s Web UI. Notes: 1. The private key and certificate generate outside the phone and embed in the phone firmware for use by the HTTPS server during the SSL handshake. ra f t1 2. Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI, you can configure the following regarding HTTPS: - Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TLS 1.0 or SSL 3.0) - Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function - HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone Reference • • D For more information on configuring the HTTPS protocol, see Chapter 4, the sections: “Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108 “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-40 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 2-9 Accessing the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to access the Aastra Web UI. Step Action 1 Open your web browser and enter the phone’s IP address or host name into the address field. The following is an example of the Login screen that displays. D ra f t1 IP address or host name Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Step Action 2 Enter your username and password and click . Note: For an administrator, the default username is “admin” and the password is “22222”. For a user, the default username is “user” and the password field is left blank. The IP phones accept numeric passwords only. The Network Status window displays for the IP phone you are accessing. The following illustration is an example of a Network Status screen for the 9143i IP phone. D ra f t1 9143i Network Status Window 3 You can logout of the Aastra Web UI at any time by clicking LOGOFF. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 2-11 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Depending on the model phone you are accessing, the following categories display in the side menu of the Aastra Web UI: Status, Operation, Basic Settings, Advanced Settings. Note: Programmable Keys apply to the 9143i, 6753i, and 6755i. Softkeys apply to the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT. Expansion Modules apply to the 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only. Status Operation t1 The Status section displays the network status and the MAC address of the IP phone. It also displays hardware and firmware information about the IP phone. The status window also displays the SIP Account information for each account on the phone. The information in the Network Status window is read-only. The Operation section provides the following options: Description ra f Heading User Password Allows you to change user password. (Applicable to User and Administrator). D Phone Lock Allows you to assign an emergency dial plan to the phone, lock the phone to prevent any changes to the phone and to prevent use of the phone, and reset the user password. Note: You can also configure a softkey to use for locking/ unlocking the phone. (Applicable to User and Administrator). Programmable Keys 9143i - 7 multi-functional programmable keys 6753i - 6 Top, multi-functional, programmable keys 6755i - 6 Top multi-functional, programmable keys (Applicable to User and Administrator). 2-12 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Heading Description Softkeys and XML 9480i/9480i CT6 state-based, multi-functional softkeys 6755i 6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional softkeys 6757i/6757i CT6 Top, multi-functional, static softkeys 6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional softkeys (Applicable to User and Administrator). The M670i has up to 36 configurable keys. The M675i has up to 60 configurable keys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules attached to a single phone allowing you to configure keys for Expansion Module 1, Expansion Module 2, and Expansion Module 3.See your Model-specific User Guide for applicable expansion modules for your model phone. t1 Expansion Module <N> Note: Expansion Modules apply to the 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only. ra f (Applicable to User and Administrator). Allows you to configure up to 15 softkeys on the handset. Keypad Speed Dial Allows you to configure up to 9 speeddial keys. These fields map to the keypad digits 1 through 9 on the phone. You can also configure additional speeddials on the programmable keys, softkeys and expansion modules. See your model-specific User Guide for more information about this feature. D Handset Keys (9480i CT and 6757i CT only) (Applicable to User and Administrator). (Applicable to User and Administrator). Directory Allows you to copy the Callers List and Directory List from your IP phone to your PC. (Applicable to User and Administrator). Reset Allows you to restart the IP phone when required. (Applicable to User and Administrator). This setting also allows you to set the IP phone back to its factory default settings or remove the local configuration. (Applicable Administrator only). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 2-13 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Basic Settings The Basic Settings section provides the following options: Heading Description Preferences Allows you to set the following General specifications on the IP phone. Local Dial Plan (Admin Only) Send Dial Plan Terminator (Admin Only) Digit Timeout (Admin Only) Park Call (not available on 9143i and 6753i) Pickup Parked Call (not available on 9143i and 6753i) Suppress DTMF Playback Display DTMF Digits Call Waiting Play Call Waiting Tone Stuttered Dial Tone XML Beep Support Status Scroll Delay Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Switch Focus to Ringing Line Preferred Line Preferred Line Timeout (seconds) Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call UPnP Mapping Lines Message Waiting Indicator Line DND Key Mode Call Forward Key Mode Use LLDP ELIN D ra f t1 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • This section also allows you to set: • • • • • • • • • • Account Configuration 2-14 Incoming Intercom Settings Outgoing Intercom Settings (Admin Only; Administrator can enable these for a User if required) Group Paging RTP Settings Key Mapping (Admin Only) Ring Tones Priority Alert Settings (Admin Only) Directed Call Pickup Settings (Admin Only) Auto Call Distribution Settings (Admin Only) Time and Date Settings Language Settings (Only the Admin can specify the language pack names to load to the phone). Both the Admin and User can select the language type to display for the Web UI. Allows you to configure DND (Do Not Disturb) and/or Call Forwarding by specific account or by all accounts. Also allows you to enable/disable specific states for each account, specify different phone numbers for call forwarding, and specify number of rings for a “No Answer” state. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Advanced Settings (Applicable to Administrator Only) The Advanced Settings section provides the following options: Description Network Allows you to set Basic Network Settings, Advanced Network Settings, Type of Service DSCP, and VLAN settings. Global SIP Allows you to set global Basic SIP Authentication Settings, Basic SIP Network Settings, Advanced SIP Settings, Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) settings, and Autodial Settings that apply to all lines on the IP phone. Lines 1 through 9 Allows you to set per-line Basic SIP Authentication Settings, Basic SIP Network Settings, Advanced SIP Settings, Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) settings, and Autodial Settings that apply to specific lines on the IP phone. t1 Heading Allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events occur. An Administrator can also specify a URI to be called, enable polling for the URI, and specify the interval between polls. ra f Action URI (Applicable to Administrator Only) D Configuration Server Firmware Update Allows you to set the protocol to use on the configuration server (TFTP (default), FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS), configure automatic firmware and configuration file updates, enable/ disable auto-resync, and assign an XML push server list. (Applicable to Administrator Only) Allows you to manually perform a firmware update on the IP phone from the configuration server using any of the IP Phones supported protocols. (Applicable to Administrator Only) TLS Support Allows you to specify the SIP Root and Intermediate Certificate files to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. (Applicable to Administrator Only) 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 2-15 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Heading Description 802.1x Support Allows you to enable/disable the 802.1x Protocol (Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)) to use on the IP phones for authentication purposes. Applicable choices are EAP-MD5 or EAP-TLS. (Applicable to Administrator Only) Troubleshooting Allows you to perform troubleshooting tasks whereby the results can be forwarded to Aastra Technical Support for analyzing and troubleshooting. (Applicable to Administrator Only) Enabling/Disabling the Aastra Web UI ra f t1 The Aastra Web UI is enabled by default on the IP phones. A System Administrator can disable the Aastra Web UI on a single phone or on all phones if required using the configuration files. Use the following procedure to enable and disable the Aastra Web UI. To disable the Aastra Web UI: D Configuration Files Step Action 1 Using a text-based editing application, open the <mac>.cfg file if you want to disable the Web UI on a single phone. Open the aastra.cfg file to disable the Web UI on all phones 2 Enter the following parameter: web interface enabled: 0 Note: A value of zero (0) disables the Web UI on the phone. A value of 1 enables the Web UI. 3 Save the changes and close the <mac>.cfg or the aastra.cfg file. 4 Restart the phone to apply the changes. The Aastra Web UI is disabled for a single IP phone or for all phones. 2-16 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Configuration Files (Administrator Only) A system administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to configure the IP phones. All parameters in configuration files can only be set by an administrator. You can enter specific configuration parameters in either of the following configuration files: • aastra.cfg • <mac>.cfg References t1 For information about configuration file precedence, see Chapter 1, “Overview.” For a description of each configuration file parameter, see Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.” ra f Using the Configuration Files When you use the configuration files to configure the IP phones, you must use a text-based editing application to open the configuration file (aastra.cfg or <mac>.cfg). D Use the following procedure to add, delete, or change parameters and their settings in the configuration files. Note: Apply this procedure wherever this Administrator Guide refers to configuring parameters using the configuration files. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 2-17 Configuration files Step Action 1 Using a text-based editing application, open the configuration file for the phone, for which you want to configure the directory list (either aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg or both). 2 Enter the required configuration parameters followed by the applicable value. For example, directory 1: company_directory directory 2: my_personal_directory 3 Save the changes and close the configuration file. 4 If the parameter requires the phone to be restarted in order for it to take affect, use the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone. t1 Locking Parameters in the Configuration File ra f The IP Phones allow you to lock individual configuration parameters to prevent an end user from changing the configuration on the phone. This feature allows service providers to prevent the end-user from changing the values of specific parameters that would affect the service they provide. An Administrator can lock parameters on the phone by placing an exclamation mark (!) before the parameter in the configuration file. For example, D !admin password: 22222 !emergency dial plan: 911|999 You can lock parameters on the phone using the configuration files only. Once the parameters are locked, they cannot be changed at all during the phones run-time. The parameters appear as read-only when accessing the Aastra Web UI and the IP Phone UI. In the Aastra Web UI, they appear grayed out. In the IP Phone UI the ability to change the parameters is removed. In addition, when parameters are locked, they cannot be changed via XML. Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Notes: 1. The “parameter locking” feature applies to Release 2.4 and up. Any phones that have a previous release loaded on the phone will not be able to use the locking functionality in the configuration file. 2. Any parameter duplicated in the mac.cfg from the aastra.cfg is overwritten by the locking status and the value of the parameter found in the mac.cfg file. Limitations A User possessing the Administrator password can bypass the locking of configuration server details by defaulting the phone. • Parameters cannot be locked using XML. • Configuration files that include locked parameters are not backwards compatible D ra f t1 • 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 2-19 t1 ra f D Chapter 3 Administrator Options About this chapter Introduction ra f t1 The IP phones provide specific options on the IP Phone that only an Administrator can access. These options are password protected and allow an Administrator to change or set features and configuration information as required. For all models, an Administrator can use the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files to enter and change values. D Note: Specific options are configurable only via the IP Phone UI, and/or Aastra Web UI, and/or configuration files. This chapter provides information about the available Administrator options. Topics This chapter covers the following topics: Topic Page Administrator Level Options page 3-3 IP Phone UI Options page 3-3 Aastra Web UI Options page 3-6 Configuration File Options page 3-8 Phone Status page 3-9 Restarting Your Phone page 3-13 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-1 IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page page 3-15 Basic Settings page 3-19 Account Configuration page 3-35 Network Settings page 3-37 Line Settings page 3-71 Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys page 3-72 Action URI page 3-73 Configuration Server Settings page 3-75 Firmware Update Features page 3-84 TLS Support page 3-85 802.1x Support page 3-89 page 3-92 D ra f Troubleshooting t1 Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration 3-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Administrator Level Options Description There are options on the IP phone that both a User and Administrator can access. However, there are specific options that an Administrator can access only. These options allow the Administrator to configure and manage local and/or remote IP phones in a network. IP Phone UI Options t1 An Administrator can access and manage these options using the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. ra f Using the IP Phone UI, you can access the Administrator options at Options->Administrator Menu using the default password of "22222" Administrator Menu D Options Menu 1. Call Forward 2. Preferences 3. Phone Status 4. User Password 5. Administrator Menu 6. Restart Phone 7. Phone Lock Select Done Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-15 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-3 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options The following are administrator options in the "Options List" on the IP phone UI: • Administrator Menu — Configuration Server — Network Settings — SIP Settings — Factory Default — Erase Local Config. References D ra f t1 For information about all other user options in the “Options Menu”, see your model-specific SIP IP Phone User Guide. For procedures on configuring Administrator Options on the IP phone via the IP phone UI, see: Chapter 4, “Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features” Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features” 3-4 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu An Administrator can replace the existing options menu on the Phone UI with a more simplified options menu. In the configuration files, the “options simple menu” parameter allows you to display either the full menu (if set to 0), or the simplified menu (if set to 1). The following table illustrates the differences between the full menu and the simplified menu. When setting the “options simple menu” parameter, the menu changes in the Phone UI only. The Aastra Web UI is not affected. Simplified Options Menu Call Forward Call Forward Preferences Preferences Phone Status User Password Administrator Menu Phone Status Removed Removed Removed ra f Restart Phone t1 Full Options Menu Phone Lock Phone Lock D Warning: When using the simplified menu, you cannot change the Network settings from the IP Phone UI. If the network settings become misconfigured, you must “factory default” the phone and use the full menu to recover the network settings from the Phone UI OR use the Aastra Web UI to configure the network settings. Configuring the Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu You can enable the simplified IP Phone UI Options menu using the configurations files only. Configuration Files For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu” on page A-7. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-5 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Aastra Web UI Options An Administrator can configure specific options using the Aastra Web UI. These options display after an Administrator logs into the Web UI using a Web browser and entering the Admin username and password at the login prompt (The default username is "admin" and the default password is "22222". The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.) The column on the left side of the screen indicates the configurable options. A User has limited configuration options as shown in the following illustrations. Administrator Web UI Menu D ra f t1 User Web UI Menu 3-6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options The following are options that an Administrator can configure in the Aastra Web UI (and are not available for the User to configure): • • • Operation->Reset — Restore to Factory Defaults — Remove Local Configuration Settings Basic Settings->Preferences->General — Local Dial Plan — Send Dial Plan Terminator — Digit Timeout (seconds) Basic Settings->Preferences->Outgoing Intercom Settings (User can configure this via the Aastra Web UI if enabled by an Administrator) Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping • Basic Settings->Preferences->Priority Alerting Settings • Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings • Basic Settings->Preferences->Auto Call Distribution Settings • Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings — Language 1 (entering language pack filename) — Language 2 (entering language pack filename) — Language 3 (entering language pack filename) — Language 4 (entering language pack filename) Advanced Settings — Network — Global SIP — Line 1 through 9 Settings — Action URI — Configuration Server — Firmware Update — TLS Support — 802.1x Support — Troubleshooting ra f D • t1 • 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-7 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options References For information about options available to a User AND Administrator in the Aastra Web UI, see your Model-specific User Guide. For procedures to Restart your phone or restore factory defaults, see “Restarting Your Phone” on page 3-13, and “Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration” on page 3-15. For more information about Advanced Settings for the IP Phone, see Chapter 4, “Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features.” Configuration File Options t1 For procedures on configuring the Basic Settings for the IP Phone, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features.” ra f An Administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to configure the IP phones. All parameters in configuration files can only be set by an administrator. References D For a procedure on using the configuration files, see Chapter 2, the section, “Configuration Files (Administrator Only)” on page 2-1. For a description of each parameter you can enter in the configuration files, see Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.” 3-8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Phone Status The Phone Status on the IP Phone displays the network status and firmware version of the IP phone. You can display phone status using the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI. Phone Status via IP Phone UI In the IP phone UI, the Phone Status options are available to the user and the administrator and do not require a password entry. The following options display for phone status on the IP phone UI: Phone Status Screen for 9143i, 6751i, 6753i Phones ra f t1 Phone Status 1. IP&MAC Addresses 2. LAN Port 3. PC Port 4. Firmware Info =Next =Enter D Phone Status Screen for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT Phones Phone Status 1. IP&MAC Addresses 2. LAN Port 3. PC Port 4. Firmware Info Select Done 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-9 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options • IP&MAC Addresses Displays the IP address and MAC address of the phone. • LAN Port Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its LAN port. • PC Port Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its PC Port. • Firmware Info Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP phone. Phone Status via Aastra Web UI D ra f t1 The first screen that displays after logging into the Aastra Web UI for a phone is the Network Status screen. This screen also displays when selecting Status->System Information. The information on this screen is available to the user and the administrator as read-only. 3-10 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options The following is a description of the information on the Network Status screen: Network Attributes Displays the network status of the Ethernet ports at the back of the phone. You can also view the phone’s IP and MAC addresses. Information in this field includes Link State, Negotiation, Speed, and Duplex for Port 0 and Port 1. • Hardware Information Displays the current IP phone platform and the revision number. • Firmware Information Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP phone. Information in this field includes Firmware Version, Firmware Release Code, Boot Version, Release Date/Time. • SIP Status Displays information about the SIP registration status of the phone. If there are accounts configured on the IP Phone, their SIP status displays in this field. The 6751i displays only one status line. All other model phones display the status of up to 9 lines. D ra f t1 • 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-11 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options The following table describes the status conditions that can display for an account(s). Status Condition Description Registered Displays this status on accounts that HAVE been registered with the SIP proxy server. Example: Line 1 Backup Registrar SIP Account Status Used? [email protected]:5060Registered Yes SIP Error Number t1 where Account Number is “1” SIP Account is “[email protected]” on port “5060” Status is “Registered” Backup registrar is used (“Yes”) Displays on accounts when registration fails with the SIP proxy server. ra f Example: Line 4 SIP Account Status [email protected]:5060401 Backup Registrar Used? No D where Account Number is “4” SIP Account is “[email protected]” on port “5060” Status is “401” - Unregistered if SIP registration fails. Backup registrar is used (“No”) Note: The IP Phones can register with multiple server using the same user name. So the SIP Status information on the Network Status screen may display the same account with different registrar and proxy IP addresses. For more information, see 3-12 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Restarting Your Phone As System Administrator, there may be times when you need to restart a phone. The Restart option allows you reboot the phone when required. A reset may be necessary when: • There is a change in your network, OR • To re-load modified configuration files, OR • If the settings for the IP phone on the IP PBX system have been modified. You can restart the phone using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI. t1 Restarting the Phone Using the IP Phone UI IP Phone UI Action 1 Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select Restart Phone. 3 For 9143i. 6751i, 6753i: Press # to confirm. ra f Step D Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key. For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Press Restart. Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-13 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Restarting the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Reset->Phone. 2 Click ra f t1 1 D to restart the phone. 3-14 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration You can set phones to their factory default setting or remove a local phone’s configuration using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI. Setting Factory Defaults on the Phone Factory default settings are the settings that reside on the phone after it has left the factory. The factory default settings on the phone sets the factory defaults for all of the settings in the aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg, and local configuration. Performing this action results in losing all user-modified settings.You can reset a phone to factory defaults using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI. t1 Setting Factory Defaults Using the IP Phone UI IP Phone UI Action 1 Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222). 3 Select Factory Default. 4 For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: The “Restore Defaults?” prompt displays. Press # to confirm. D ra f Step For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i/6757i/6757i CT: The “Reset phone to factory defaults?” prompt displays. Press Default to confirm. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-15 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Settings Factory Defaults Using the Aastra Web UI Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings. 2 In the "Restore to Factory Defaults" field, click ra f t1 Step . D This restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files. 3-16 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration You can reset the IP Phone’s local configuration if required. The local configuration is the last updated configuration you performed using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI. Performing this action results in losing all recently user-modified settings. For more information about local configuration, see Chapter 1, the section, “Configuration File Precedence” on page 1-38. Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration Using the IP Phone UI IP Phone UI Action 1 Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222). 3 Select Erase Local Config. 4 For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: The “Erase local config?” prompt displays. Press # to confirm. ra f t1 Step D For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: The “Erase local config?” prompt displays. Press Erase to confirm. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-17 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration Using the Aastra Web UII Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings. 2 In the "Remove Local Configuration Settings" field, click ra f t1 Step . D This removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone. 3-18 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Basic Settings An Administrator has access to specific Basic Setting options to configure and manage the IP Phone in the network. The following sections identify the options available to an Administrator only, or where indicated, to a User and Administrator. These tables also identify whether you can configure them using the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or the configuration files. General Settings Local Dial Plan Parameter in Configuration Files sip dial plan Description A dial plan that describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to reach a particular telephone number. Dial Plan field accepts up to 512 characters. t1 Parameter in Aastra Web UI For more information on this feature, see “Local Dial Plan” on page 5-53. Digit Timeout Allows you to enable or disable a dial plan terminator. When you configure the dial plan on the phone to use a dial plan terminator (such as the pound symbol (#)), the phone waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up the handset or after dialing the number on the keypad before making the call. ra f sip dial plan terminator D Send Dial Plan Terminator sip digit timeout For more information on this feature, see “SIP Dial Plan Terminator” on page 5-55. Represents the time, in seconds, to configure the timeout between consecutive key presses. For more information on this feature, see. “Digit Timeout” on page 5-55. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-19 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Park Call sprecode Description The parking of a live call to a specific extension. Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is available on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only. To configure the Park feature on a global basis, see Chapter 5, the section, “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls” on page 5-59. To configure the Park feature on a key, see Chapter 5, the section, “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234. Pick Up Parked Call Picking up a parked call at the specified extension. t1 pickupsprecode Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is available on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only. ra f To configure the Pickup feature on a global basis, see Chapter 5, the section, “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls” on page 5-59. Suppress DTMF Playback D To configure the Pickup feature on a key, see Chapter 5, the section, “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234. suppress dtmf playback Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Display DTMF Digits For more information on this feature, see. “Suppressing DTMF Playback” on page 5-63. display dtmf digits Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Call Waiting Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. 3-20 Enables and disables suppression of DTMF playback when a number is dialed from the softkeys or programmable keys. Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits on the IP phone display during a connected state. For more information on this feature, see. “Display DTMF Digits” on page 5-65. call waiting Enable or disables Call Waiting on the IP Phone. For more information on this feature, see. “Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-67. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Play Call Waiting Tone call waiting tone Enable or disables the playing of a call waiting tone when a caller is on an active call and a new call comes into the phone. Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Stuttered Dial Tone For more information on this feature, see. “Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-67. stutter disabled Enable or disables the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a message waiting on the IP phone. Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. XML Beep Support Description For more information on this feature, see. “Stuttered Dial Tone” on page 5-70. xml beep notification t1 Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Enables or disables the playing of a beep to indicate a status on the phone. When the phone receives a status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the message is displaying. For more information on this feature, see “XML Beep Support” on page 5-72. Status Scroll Delay (seconds) For more information on this feature, see “Status Scroll Delay” on page 5-74. D Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Incoming Call Interrupts incoming call interrupts Dialing dialing Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Switch Focus to Ringing switch focus to ringing Line line Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Preferred Line Allows you to set the time delay, in seconds, between the scrolling of each status message on the phone. ra f xml status scroll delay preferred line Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Enable or disables how the phone handles incoming calls while the phone is dialing out. For more information on this feature, see “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” on page 5-76. Enables or disables whether or not the UI focus is switched to a ringing line while the phone is in the connected state. For more information on this feature, see “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” on page 5-79. Specifies the preferred line to switch focus back to when incoming or outgoing calls end on the phone. For more information on this feature, see “Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page 5-81. 3-21 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Preferred Line Timeout (seconds) preferred line timeout Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call goodbye key cancels incoming call For more information on this feature, see “UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)” on page 5-87. Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Allows you to enable the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) on a single line or on all lines on the phone. For example, if you set this parameter to 3, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on line 3. If you set this parameter to 0, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on any line on the phone (lines 1 through 9). ra f D DND Key Mode Enables or disables the use of Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on a specific line on the IP phone. t1 upnp mapping lines mwi led line Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Enable or disables the behavior of the Goodbye Key on the IP phone. For more information on this feature, see “Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call” on page 5-85. Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Message Waiting Indicator Line Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone switches back to the preferred line after a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a duration of inactivity on an active line. For more information on this feature, see “Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page 5-81. Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. UPnP Mapping Lines Description dnd key mode For more information on this feature, see “Message Waiting Indicator Line” on page 5-89. Allows you to configure the DND mode to use on the phone (Account, Phone, Custom) when the DND key is pressed. You can configure DND for all accounts or a specific account. For more information on this feature, see “DND Key Mode” on page 5-91. Also see Chapter 5, the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211. 3-22 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Call Forward Key Mode call forward key mode Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Description Allows you to configure the Call Forward mode to use on the phone (Account, Phone, or Custom). You can configure Call Forward for all accounts or a specific account. For more information on this feature, see “Call Forward Mode” on page 5-93. Also see Chapter 5, the section, “Call Forwarding” on page 5-249. Use LLDP ELIN use lldp elin Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers. Caution: In Release 2.3 and later, LLDP is enabled t1 by default. If LLDP is enabled on your network, the phones may come up with different network settings. D ra f For more information on this feature, see “Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)” on page 5-97. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-23 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Calls The Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Call settings on the IP Phone specify whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed. These settings also specify the prefix code for server-side Intercom calls, and specifies the configuration to use when making the Intercom call. Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Description Incoming Intercom Settings (all models) Auto-Answer sip allow auto answer t1 Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Enables or disables the IP phone to allow automatic answering for an Intercom call. If auto-answer is enabled on the IP phone, the phone plays a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom call. If auto-answer is disabled, the phone rejects the incoming intercom call and sends a busy signal to the caller. Microphone Mute ra f For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/ Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-102. sip intercom mute mic D Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Play Warning Tone Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Allow Barge In Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. 3-24 sip intercom warning tone Enables or disables the microphone on the IP phone for Intercom calls made by the originating caller. For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/ Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-102. Enables or disables a warning tone to play when the phone receives an incoming intercom call on an active line. For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/ Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-102. sip intercom allow barge Enable or disables how the phone handles incoming in intercom calls while the phone is on an active call. For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/ Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-102. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Description Outgoing Intercom Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) Type sip intercom type Determines whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed. Applicable settings are Phone-Side, Server-Side, OFF. For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/ Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-102. Prefix Code sip intercom prefix code The prefix to add to the phone number for server-side outgoing Intercom calls. This parameter is required for all server-side Intercom calls. sip intercom line Specifies the line for which the IP phone uses the configuration from, when making the Intercom call. The IP phone uses the first available line for physically making the call but uses the configuration from the line you set for this parameter. D ra f Line t1 For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/ Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-102. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Note: The "sip intercom type" parameter must be set with the Server-Side option to enable the "sip intercom line" parameter. For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/ Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-102. 3-25 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Group Paging RTP Settings Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Paging listen addresses paging addr list Description Allows you to specify up to 5 listening multicast addresses to send/receive a Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP) stream to/from these pre-configured multicast address(es) without involving SIP signaling. Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. For more information on this feature, see “Group Paging RTP Settings” on page 5-107. Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files map redial key to Description Sets the Redial key as a speeddial key if a value is entered for this parameter. If you leave this parameter blank, the Redial key returns to its original functionality. D ra f Map Redial Key To t1 Key Mapping Map Conf Key To map conf key to Note: If you configure the Redial key for speeddialing on the 9480i CT or 6757i CT Base Stations, the Redial key on the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handsets retain their original functionality. The Redial key on the handset is not configured for speeddial. For more information on this feature, see “Key Mapping” on page 5-113. Sets the Conf key as a speeddial key if a value is entered for this parameter. If you leave this parameter blank, the Conf key returns to its original functionality. Note: If you configure the Conf key for speeddialing on the 9480i CT or 6757i CT Base Stations, the Conf key on the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handsets retain their original functionality. The Conf key on the handset is not configured for speeddial. For more information on this feature, see “Key Mapping” on page 5-113. 3-26 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Ring Tones Parameter in IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Tone Set Parameter in Configuration Files Tone Set tone set Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Ring Tone Globally sets a tone set for a specific country For more information on this feature, see “Ring Tones and Tone Sets” on page 5-117. Global Ring Tone ring tone Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Globally sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone. Ring tone can be set to one of six distinct rings. For more information on this feature, see “Ring Tones and Tone Sets” on page 5-117. LineN t1 N/A Description lineN ring tone For more information on this feature, see “Ring Tones and Tone Sets” on page 5-117. D ra f Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone on a per-line basis. Ring tone can be set to one of six distinct rings. Priority Alerting Settings Parameter in Aastra Web UI Enable Priority Alerting Parameter in Configuration Files priority alerting enabled Description Enables and disables distinctive ringing on the IP phone for incoming calls and call-waiting calls. For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-122. Group alert group When an "alert group" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone. For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-122. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-27 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files External alert external Description When an "alert external" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone. For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-122. Internal alert internal When an "alert-internal" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone. For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-122. alert emergency When an "alert emergency" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone. t1 Emergency For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-122. alert priority When an "alert priority" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone. ra f Priority For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-122. alert auto call distribution When an "alert-acd" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone. D Auto Call Distribution Community 1 thru Community 4 alert community 1 alert community 2 alert community 3 alert community 4 For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-122. When an "alert community-#” keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone. Available Bellcore tones are: 0 Normal ringing (default) 1 Bellcore-dr2 2 Bellcore-dr3 3 Bellcore-dr4 4 Bellcore-dr5 5 Silent For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-122. 3-28 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Directed Call Pickup (DCP) Parameter in Aastra Web UI Directed Call Pickup Parameters in Configuration Files directed call pickup Description Enables or disables the use of "directed call pickup" feature. For more information on this feature, see “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on page 5-129. Directed Call Pickup Prefix directed call pickup prefix Allows you to specify a prefix to use for "directed call pickup" that you can use with a BLF or BLF List softkey. play a ring splash Enables or disables the playing of a short "ring splash tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored extension. If the host tone is idle, the tone plays a "ring splash". ra f Play a Ring Splash t1 For more information on this feature, see “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on page 5-129. D For more information on this feature, see “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on page 5-129. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-29 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Auto Call Distribution (ACD) Settings Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Auto Available acd auto available Description Enables or disables the use of the ACD Auto-Available Timer. For more information on this feature, see “Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-188. Auto Available Timer acd auto available timer Specifies the length of time, in seconds, before the IP phone status switches back to “available.” D ra f t1 For more information on this feature, see “Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-188. 3-30 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Time and Date Parameter in IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Time Format Time Format Parameters in Configuration Files time format Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Description This parameter changes the time to 12 hour or 24 hour format. Use “0” for the 12 hour format and “1” for the 24 hour format. For more information on this feature, see “Time and Date” on page 5-19. Date Format Date Format For more information on this feature, see “Time and Date” on page 5-19. D Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. time zone name ra f N/A Time Zone Time Servers This parameter allows the user to change the date to various formats. t1 Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. date format NTP Time Servers Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Custom Parameters: • time zone minutes • dst minutes • dst [start|end] relative date • dst start month • dst end month • dst start week • dst end week • dst start day • dst end day • dst start hour • dst end hour time server disabled This parameter allows you to set the time zone code or customize the time zone for their area as required. For more information on this feature, see “Time Zone & DST” on page 5-20. This parameter allows you to enable or disable the Network Time Server (NTP) to set the time on the phone. For more information on this feature, see “Time Servers” on page 5-27. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-31 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Time Server 1 Time Server 1 Parameters in Configuration Files time server1 Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Time Server 2 time server2 Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. This parameter allows you to set the IP address of Time Server 2 in dotted decimal format. t1 For more information on this feature, see “Time Servers” on page 5-27. time server3 This parameter allows you to set the IP address of Time Server 3 in dotted decimal format. For more information on this feature, see “Time Servers” on page 5-27. D ra f Time Server 3 Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. This parameter allows you to set the IP address of Time Server 1 in dotted decimal format. For more information on this feature, see “Time Servers” on page 5-27. Time Server 2 Time Server 3 Description 3-32 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Live Dialpad Parameter in IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Live Dialpad N/A Parameters in Configuration Files live dialpad Note: This option can be set by a User via the IP Phone UI and by an Administrator via the IP Phone UI and the configuration files. Description This parameter turns the “Live Dialpad” feature ON or OFF. For more information on this feature, see “Live Dial Pad*” on page 5-33. Parameter in Configuration Files WebPage Language D Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. language Description The language you want to display in the IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI. ra f Parameter in Aastra Web UI t1 Language Valid values for 9143i, 9480i, 6751i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i are: 0 (English) 1 (French) 2 (Spanish) 3 (German) 4 (Italian) Valid values for 9480i CT and 6757i CT handsets are: 0 (English) 1 (French) 2 (Spanish) Note: All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. For more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-34. For more information on specifying a language to use on the IP Phone, see “Specifying the Language to Use” on page 5-37. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-33 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Input Language input language Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Description Allows you to specify the language to use for inputs on the IP Phone. Entering a language value for this parameter allows users to enter text and characters in the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, and in XML applications via the keypad on the phone, in the language(s) specified. t1 Valid values are: • English • French • Français • German • Deutsch • Italian • Italiano • Spanish • Español Language 1 thru 4 ra f For more information on this feature, see “Specifying the Input Language to Use” on page 5-41. language N The language pack you want to load to the IP phone. D Valid values are: lang_fr.txt lang_fr_ca.txt lang_es.txt lang_es_mx.txt lang_de.txt lang_it.txt Notes: 1. The languages packs you load are dependant on available language packs from the configuration server. 2. You must reboot the phone to load a language pack. For more information on this feature, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-34. 3-34 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Account Configuration The IP phones have a DND and CFWD feature that allows an Administrator and User to configure “do not disturb” and “call forwarding” by account. You can set specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND and CFWD. The three modes you can set on the phone for these features are: • • • Account Phone Custom You can set the modes for DND and CFWD in the Aastra Web UI at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->General, or using the following parameters in the configurations files: dnd key mode call forward key mode t1 • • Modes DND Sets DND for a specific account. A pre-configured DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF. CFWD Sets CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a pre-configured CFWD key applies to the account in focus D Account ra f The following table describes the behavior of the mode settings for DND and CFWD. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-35 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Modes DND CFWD Phone Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. A Sets the same CFWD configuration for all pre-configured DND key toggles all accounts accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When on the phone to ON or OFF. you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone. Custom Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing a pre-configured DND key, that list the account(s) on the phone. The user can select a specific account for DND, turn DND ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all accounts ra f t1 Sets CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey. References D For more information about account configuration of DND and CFWD on the IP Phones, see Chapter 5, the sections: For DND: • • “DND Key Mode” on page 5-91. “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211. For CFWD: 3-36 • “Call Forward Mode” on page 5-93. • “Call Forwarding” on page 5-249. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Network Settings The following paragraphs describe the network parameters you can configure on the IP phone. Network settings are in two categories: • Basic network settings • Advanced network settings D ra f t1 Note: Specific parameters are configurable using the Aastra Web UI only and are indicated where applicable. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-37 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Basic Network Settings If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled, the IP phone automatically configures all of the Network settings. If the phone cannot populate the Network settings, or if DHCP is disabled, you can set the Network options manually. Parameter In IP Phone UI DHCP Parameters in Configuration Files dhcp Description Enables or disables DHCP. Enabling DHCP populates the required network information. The DHCP server serves the network information that the IP phone requires. If the IP phone is unable to get any required information, then you must enter it manually. DHCP populates the following network information: IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Domain Name Servers (DNS), TFTP, HTTP HTTPS, and FTP servers, and Timer Servers. D ra f t1 DHCP Parameter in Aastra Web UI Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support Option 66. The IP phones also support Option 60 and 43. For more information, see “DHCP” on page 4-4. IP Address IP Address ip IP address of the IP phone. To assign a static IP address, disable DHCP. For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-24. 3-38 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Subnet Mask Parameter in Aastra Web UI Subnet Mask Parameters in Configuration Files subnet mask Description Subnet mask defines the IP address range local to the IP phone. To assign a static subnet mask, disable DHCP. For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-24. Gateway Gateway default gateway The IP address of the network’s gateway or default router IP address. To assign a static Gateway IP address, disable DHCP. Primary DNS dns1 D ra f Primary DNS t1 For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-24. Primary domain name server IP address. For any of the IP address settings on the IP phone a domain name value can be entered instead of an IP address. With the help of the domain name servers the domain names for such parameters can then be resolved to their corresponding IP addresses. To assign static DNS addresses, disable DHCP. Note: If a host name is configured on the IP phone, you must also set a DNS. For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-24. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-39 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Secondary DNS Parameter in Aastra Web UI Secondary DNS Parameters in Configuration Files dns2 Description A service that translates domain names into IP addresses. To assign static DNS addresses, disable DHCP. For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-24. Hostname Hostname hostname Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends with the DHCP Request packet. Ethernet t1 For more information, see “Using Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone” on page 4-11. N/A LAN Port PC Port Link PC Port ethernet port 0 ra f LAN Port Link ethernet port 1 Enable PassThru Port (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) D PC Port Enabled PC Port PassThru pc port passthrough (9143i, 6751i, Enable/Disable enabled 6753i) (9143i, 6751i, 6753i) PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) The send (TX) and receive (RX) negotiation to use on the Ethernet LAN Port and Ethernet PC Port for transmitting and receiving data over the LAN or to/from your PC, respectively. The pc port passthrough enabled parameter applies to the 802.1x support on the IP Phones. For more information on configuring the LAN and PC port negotiation, see “Configuring LAN and PC Port Negotiation” on page 4-24. For more information on configuring 802.1x support, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. 3-40 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options D ra f t1 Advanced Network Settings 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-41 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI DHCP User Class Parameter in Aastra Web UI DHCP User Class Parameters in Configuration Files dhcp userclass Description Specifies the User Class DHCP Option 77 that the phone sends to the configuration server with the DHCP Request packet. Note: If you specify a value for this parameter, you must restart your phone for the change to take affect. Any change in its value during start-up results in an automatic reboot. For more information, see “Using Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone” on page 4-14. dhcp config option override D The value specified for this parameter overrides the precedence order for determining a configuration server. Valid values are: -1 (Disabled - ignores all DHCP configuration options). 0 (Any) 43 66 159 160 t1 DHCP Download Options ra f Download Options Notes: 1. If the DHCP server supplies Options 159 and 160, the phones will attempt to contact the configuration server given in these options. 2. You must restart the IP Phone for this parameter to take affect. For more information, see “Using Options 159 and 160 on the IP Phone” on page 4-17. For more information about setting DHCP download preference, see “Configuration Server Download Precedence” on page 4-20. 3-42 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI LLDP Support Parameter in Aastra Web UI LLDP Parameters in Configuration Files lldp Description Enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone. Caution: In Release 2.3 and later, LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP is enabled on your network, the phones may come up with different network settings. LLDP Packet Interval lldp interval D ra f N/A t1 For more information on this feature, see “Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)” on page 5-97. The amount of time, in seconds, between the transmission of LLDP Data Unit (LLDPDU) packets. The value of zero (0) disables this parameter. Caution: In Release 2.3 and later, LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP is enabled on your network, the phones may come up with different network settings. For more information on this feature, see “Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)” on page 5-97. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-43 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI UPnP Parameter in Aastra Web UI UPnP Parameters in Configuration Files upnp manager Description Enables or disables Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on the IP phone. If you set this parameter to “0”, you can manually configure NAT on the IP phone and the UPnP manager will not start. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for remote phones)” on page 4-50. N/A upnp gateway IP address or fully qualified Domain Name of the Internet gateway or router. This parameter stores the IP address of the gateway or router in the event that only non-default UPnP gateways get discovered on the network. The UPnP port mappings are saved to this IP address so even if the phone reboots, it will still have the correct port mappings. NAT IP D ra f t1 N/A NAT IP sip nat ip For more information, see Chapter 4, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for remote phones)” on page 4-50. IP address the network device that enforces NAT. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional)” on page 4-35. NAT SIP Port NAT SIP Port sip nat port Port number of the network device that enforces NAT. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional)” on page 4-35. 3-44 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI NAT RTP Port Parameter in Aastra Web UI NAT RTP Port Parameters in Configuration Files sip nat rtp port Description Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or router. The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port. Nortel NAT Traversal sip nortel nat support Enabled N/A D ra f Nortel NAT t1 For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional)” on page 4-35. Nortel NAT Timer (seconds) sip nortel nat timer Enables or disables the phone to operate while connected to a network device that enforces NAT. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuring Nortel NAT (optional)” on page 4-32. The interval, in seconds, that the phone sends SIP ping requests to the Nortel proxy. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuring Nortel NAT (optional)” on page 4-32. N/A Rport (RFC 3581) sip rport Allows you to enable (1) or disable (0) the use of Rport on the IP phone. “Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the port from which the request came. For more information, see Chapter 4, “RPORT” on page 4-65. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-45 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI NTP Time Servers Parameters in Configuration Files time server disabled Description Enables or disables the time server. This parameter affects the time server1, time server2, and time server3 parameters. Setting this parameter to 0 allows the use of the configured Time Server(s). Setting this parameter to 1 prevents the use of the configured Time Server(s). For more information, see Chapter 4, “Network Time Servers” on page 4-67. Time Servers 1, 2, and 3 time server1 time server2 time server3 time server4 The 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the time server is enabled, the value for time server1 will be used to request the time from. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Network Time Servers” on page 4-67. D ra f t1 N/A 3-46 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options HTTPS Settings Advanced Network Settings includes HTTPS settings for the IP Phones. Parameter In IP Phone UI HTTPS Parameter in Aastra Web UI HTTPS Server Redirect HTTP to HTTPS Parameters in Configuration Files https redirect http get Description Allows or disallows redirection from the HTTP server to the HTTPS server. For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-40. D Enables or disables the blocking of XML scripts from HTTP POSTs. t1 https block http post xml ra f XML HTTP POSTs HTTPS Server Block XML HTTP POSTs Some client applications use HTTP POSTs to transfer XML scripts. The phones’s HTTP server accepts these POSTs even if server redirection is enabled, effectively bypassing the secure connection. When this parameter is enabled (blocking is enabled), receipt of an HTTP POST containing an XML parameter header results in the following response: “403 Forbidden”. This forces the client to direct the POSTs to the HTTPS server through use of the “https://” URL. For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-40. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-47 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Client Method Parameter in Aastra Web UI HTTPS Client Method Parameters in Configuration Files https client method Description Defines the security method that the client advertises to the server during the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) handshake. Available options are: For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-40. D ra f t1 TLS 1.0 - Transport Layer Security version 1 (TLS 1.0) is a protocol that ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. TLS is the successor to SSL. SSL 3.0 - Secure Socket Layer version 3 (SSL 3.0) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet. 3-48 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Cert Validation Parameter in Aastra Web UI Validate Certificates Parameters in Configuration Files Description https validate certificates Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of certificates on the phone. When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client performs validation on SSL certificates before accepting them. t1 Notes: 1. If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you must set this parameter to “0” (disabled) before upgrading to Release 2.3 or later of the IP Phones. Check Certificate Expiration https validate expires D Check Expires ra f 2. If you are using HTTPS and the certificates are not valid or are not signed by Verisign, Thawte, or GeoTrust, the phones fail to download configuration files. For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Server Certificate Validation” on page 4-44. Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of the expiration of the certificates. When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a certificate has expired prior to accepting the certificate. Note: If the “https validate expires” parameter is set to enable, the clock on the phone must be set for the phone to accept the certificates. For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Server Certificate Validation” on page 4-44. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-49 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Check Hostnames Parameter in Aastra Web UI Check Certificate Hostnames Parameters in Configuration Files Description https validate hostnames Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of hostnames on the phone. For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Server Certificate Validation” on page 4-44. N/A Trusted Certificates Filename https user certificates Specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This file contains the User-provided certificates in PEM format. These certificates are used to validate peer certificates. For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Server Certificate Validation” on page 4-44. D ra f t1 Note: You must disable the “https validate certificates” parameter in order for the phone to accept the User-provided certificates. 3-50 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Type of Service (ToS), DSCP Advanced Network Settings include Type of Service (ToS) and Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for the IP phones. Parameter In IP Phone UI Type of Service SIPt Parameter in Aastra Web UI SIP Parameters in Configuration Files tos sip Description The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for SIP packets. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS” on page 4-54. The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTP packets. t1 tos rtp RTCP tos rtcp D Type of Service RTCP RTP ra f Type of Service RTP 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 For more information, see Chapter 4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS” on page 4-54. The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTCP packets. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS” on page 4-54. 3-51 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options VLAN You can enable or disable VLAN and set specific VLAN IDs and priorities under Network Settings. Parameter In IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Description Global Settings VLAN Enable VLAN Enable tagging enabled Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on page 4-54. Priority, Non-IP Packet priority non-ip Specifies the priority value for non-IP packets. t1 Other Priority LAN Port Settings (Port 0) VLAN ID VLAN id D Phone VLAN ID ra f For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on page 4-54. VLAN is a feature on the IP phone that allows for multiple logical Ethernet interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single physical Ethernet as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure a VLAN ID that associates with the physical Ethernet Port 0. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on page 4-54. 3-52 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI SIP Priority RTP Priority RTCP Priority Parameters in Configuration Files tos priority map Description This parameter is based on the Type of Service (ToS), Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) setting for SIP (tos sip parameter), RTP (tos rtp parameter) and RTCP (tos rtcp parameter). It is the mapping between the DSCP value and the VLAN priority value for SIP, RTP, and RTCP packets. You enter the tos priority map value as follows: (DSCP_1,Priority_1)(DSCP_2,Priori ty_2).....(DSCP_64,Priority_64) where the DSCP value range is 0-63 and the priority range is 0-7. Mappings not enclosed in parentheses and separated with a comma, or with values outside the ranges, are ignored. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on page 4-54. D ra f t1 SIP Priority RTP Priority RTCP Priority Parameter in Aastra Web UI 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-53 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Description PC Port Settings (Port 1) PC Port VLAN ID VLAN ID VLAN id port 1 Specifies the VLAN ID used to pass packets through to a PC via Port 1. Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this port. The following is an example of configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent to the passthrough port. PC Port Priority D ra f t1 Example You enable tagging on the LAN Port (VLAN id) as normal but set the PC Port (VLAN id port 1) to 4095. The following example sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 on the LAN Port but the PC Port is configured as untagged. Priority QoS eth port 1 priority tagging enabled: 1 VLAN id: 3 VLAN id port 1: 4095 For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on page 4-54. Specifies the priority value used for passing VLAN packets through to a PC via Port 1. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on page 4-54. 3-54 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options SIP Settings The following paragraphs describe the SIP parameters you can configure on the IP phone. SIP configuration consists of configuring: • Basic SIP Authentication Settings • Basic SIP Network Settings • Advanced SIP settings • RTP Settings • Autodial Settings t1 Notes: 1. Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis. You can also configure specific parameters using the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. If you have a proxy server or have a SIP registrar present at a different location than the PBX server, the SIP parameters may need to be changed. D ra f 2. The IP phones allow you to define different SIP lines with the same account information (i.e., same user name) but with different registrar and proxy IP addresses. This feature works with Registration, Subscription, and Notify processing. This feature also works with the following types of calls: incoming, outgoing, Broadsoft Shared Call Appearance (SCA), Bridged Line Appearance (BLA), conference, transfer, blind transfer. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-55 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Basic SIP Authentication Settings Screen Name Parameter in Aastra Web UI Screen Name (Global and Per-Line) N/A Screen Name 2 (Global and Per-Line) User Name Phone Number sip screen name (global) sip lineN screen name (per-line) sip screen name 2 (global) sip lineN screen name 2 (per-line) sip user name (global) ra f (Global and Per-Line) Parameters in Configuration Files sip lineN user name (per-line) D Display Name Caller ID (Global and Per-Line) Description Name that displays on the idle screen. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. Custom text message that displays on the idle screen. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. t1 Parameter In IP Phone UI sip display name (global) sip lineN display name (per-line) User name used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering the phone at the registrar. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. Name used in the display name field of the "From SIP" header field. Some IP PBX systems use this as the caller’s ID, and some may overwrite this with the string that is set at the PBX system. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. 3-56 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Auth Name Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Authentication Name sip auth name (global) (Global and Per-Line) sip lineN auth name (per-line) Description Authorization name used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. Password Password sip lineN password (per-line) Password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy. Valid values are up to 20 numeric characters. Passwords are encrypted and display as asterisks when entering. t1 (Global and Per-Line) sip password (global) N/A ra f For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. BLA Number sip lineN bla number (per-line) D (Global and Per-Line) sip bla number (global) Phone number that you assign to BLA lines that is shared across all phones (global configuration) or shared on a per-line basis (per-line configuration). For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. For more information about BLA, see Chapter 5, the section, “Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)” on page 5-222. N/A Line Mode (Global and Per-Line) sip mode (global) sip lineN mode (per-line) The mode-type that you assign to the IP phone. Valid values are Generic (0), BroadSoft SCA (1), Nortel (2), or BLA (3). Default is Generic (0). For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-57 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Basic SIP Network Settings Parameter In IP Phone UI Proxy Server Parameter in Aastra Web UI Proxy Server (Global and Per-Line) Proxy Port Proxy Port IP address of the SIP proxy server. Up to 64 alphanumeric characters. sip lineN proxy ip (per-line) For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. sip proxy port (global) SIP proxy server’s port number. Default is 0. sip lineN proxy port (per-line) For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. Backup Proxy Server sip backup proxy server (global) (Global and Per-Line) sip lineN backup proxy server (per-line) The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable. Backup Proxy Port The port number of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses when the primary SIP proxy port is unavailable. sip backup proxy port (global) D N/A sip proxy ip (global) ra f N/A (Global and Per-Line) 3-58 Description t1 (Global and Per-Line) Parameters in Configuration Files sip lineN backup proxy port (per-line) For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Outbound Proxy Server (Global and Per-Line) Parameters in Configuration Files Description sip outbound proxy server (global) Address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you have a sip lineN outbound proxy Session Border Controller in your server network, then you would normally (per-line) set its address here. Default is 0.0.0.0. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. Outbound Proxy Port sip outbound proxy port (global) (Global and Per-Line) sip lineN outbound proxy port (per-line) The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP messages. Default is 0. Registrar Server ra f t1 N/A Registrar Server sip lineN registrar ip (per-line) D (Global and Per-Line) sip registrar ip (global) For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. IP address of the SIP registrar. Up to 64 alphanumeric characters. Enables or disables the phone to be registered with the Registrar. When Register is disabled globally, the phone is still active and you can dial using username and IP address of the phone. A message "No Service" displays on the idle screen and the LED is steady ON. If Register is disabled for a single line, no messages display and LEDs are OFF. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. Registrar Port Registrar Port (Global and Per-Line) 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 sip registrar port (global) SIP registrar’s port number. Default is 0. sip lineN registrar port (per-line) For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. 3-59 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Backup Registrar Server sip backup registrar ip (global) (Global and Per-Line) sip lineN backup registrar ip (per-line) Description The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary registrar is unavailable. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. N/A Backup Registrar Port sip backup registrar port (global) The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number. (Global and Per-Line) sip lineN backup registrar port For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. Registration Period sip registration period (global) The requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar. sip lineN registration period (per-line) For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. sip centralized conf (global) Globally enables or disables SIP centralized conferencing for an IP phone. Conference Server URI D N/A ra f (Global and Per-Line) t1 N/A (Global and Per-Line) 3-60 sip lineN centralized conf (per-line) For more information, see Chapter 4, “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-359. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Advanced SIP Settings In addition to the basic SIP settings, you can also configure the following advanced SIP parameters. These parameters are configurable via the Aastra Web UI and the configuration files on a global basis only. Parameter in Aastra Web UI sip explicit mwi subscription Description If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider, a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells the user there is a message on the IP Phone. You can enable and disable MWI by setting this parameter to 0 (disable) or 1 (enable) in the configuration files or by checking the box for this field in the Aastra Web UI. Default is disabled. t1 Explicit MWI Subscription Parameters in Configuration Files sip explicit mwi subscription period D Explicit MWI Subscription Period ra f For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. Missed Call Summary Subscription sip missed call summary subscription (global) (Global and Per-Line) sip lineN missed call summary subscription (per-line) The requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times out. The phone re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature. This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. Default is disabled. For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call Summary Subscription” on page 6-13. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-61 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Missed Call Summary Subscription Period sip missed call summary subscription period Description Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses the Missed Calls Summary Subscription feature. This parameter is always enabled with a default value of 86400 seconds. When the phone reaches the limit set for this parameter, it sends the subscription again. For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call Summary Subscription” on page 6-13. sip as-feature-event subscription (global) (Global and Per-Line) sip lineN as-feature-event subscription (per-line) For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription” on page 6-17. sip as-feature-event subscription period Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, between resubscribing. If the phone does not resubscribe in the time specified for this parameter, it loses subscription. D ra f AS-Feature-Event Subscription Period Enables or disables the specified line with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD features. t1 AS-Feature-Event Subscription Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message sip send mac For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription” on page 6-17. Adds an "Aastra-Mac:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the phone to the call server, where the value is the MAC address of the phone. For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/ Line Number in REGISTER Messages” on page 6-5. 3-62 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Send Line Number in REGISTER Message Parameters in Configuration Files sip send line Description Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the phone to the call server, where the value is the line number that is being registered. For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/ Line Number in REGISTER Messages” on page 6-5. sip session timer The time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic re-INVITE requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE requests to maintain the status' of the connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details. Default is 0. t1 Session Timer sip T1 timer sip T2 timer D Timer 1 and Timer 2 ra f For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. Transaction Timer sip transaction timer These timers are SIP transaction layer timers defined in RFC 3261. Timer 1 is an estimate, in milliseconds, of the round-trip time (RTT). Timer 2 represents the amount of time, in milliseconds, a non-INVITE server transaction takes to respond to a request. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. The amount of time, in milliseconds that the phone allows the callserver (registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends. If the phone does not receive a response in the amount of time designated for this parameter, the phone assumes the message has timed out. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-63 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Transport Protocol Parameters in Configuration Files sip transport protocol Description The protocol that the Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) port on the IP phone uses to send out SIP signaling packets. t1 Notes: 1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4 (TLS), the phone checks to see if the “sips persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection. If “sips persistent tls” is disabled, then the phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is used, you must specify the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate, the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates. ra f 2. If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you MUST specify the Trusted Certificates; the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate, and the Private Key are optional. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. sip local port D Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Specifies the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the phone sends SIP messages. Notes: 1. It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport. 2. By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060.If symmetric UDP signaling is disabled, the phone sends from random ports but it listens on the configured SIP local port. For more information, see Chapter 4, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on page 4-37. 3-64 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Local SIP TLS Port Parameters in Configuration Files sip local tls port Description Specifies the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone sends SIP messages. Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports being used. For example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS on 443/tcp. For more information, see Chapter 4, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on page 4-37. sip registration retry timer Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits between registration attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar. t1 Registration Failed Retry Timer For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the phone waits until it re-attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out. D ra f Registration Timeout Retry sip registration timeout retry Timer timer Registration Renewal Timer If this parameter is set lower than 30 seconds, the phone uses a minimum timer of 30 seconds. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. sip registration renewal timer The length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration, that the phone renews registrations. For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20 seconds before the registration is due to expire, a new REGISTER message is sent to the registrar to renew the registration. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-65 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI BLF Subscription Period Parameters in Configuration Files sip blf subscription period Description Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. sip acd subscription period Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. t1 ACD Subscription Period For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. sip bla subscription period Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is specified, the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds. D ra f BLA Subscription Period Blacklist Duration sip blacklist duration For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains on the server blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server (if another server is available) for this amount of time. For more information about Blacklist Duration, see Chapter 6, the section, “Blacklist Duration” on page 6-22. 3-66 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Whitelist Proxy Parameters in Configuration Files sip whitelist Description This parameter enables/disables the whitelist proxy feature, as follows: • Set to 0 to disable the feature. • Set to 1 to enable the feature. When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server. For more information about Whitelist Proxy see Chapter 6, the section, “Whitelist Proxy” on page 6-24. sip xml notify event Enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message. t1 XML SIP Notify D ra f Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the phone rejects the message. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 For more information about XML SIP Notify see Chapter 6, the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-339. 3-67 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options RTP Settings You can configure the following RTP settings. Parameter In IP Phone UI RTP Port Base Parameter in Aastra Web UI RTP Port Parameters in Configuration Files sip rtp port Description The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port. Default is 3000. Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729) sip use basic codecs N/A D ra f N/A t1 For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-93. Force RFC2833 Out of Band DTMF sip out-of-band dtmf Enables or disables basic codecs. Enabling this parameter allows the IP phone to use the basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP packets. Valid values are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled). Default is 0 (disabled). For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-93. Enables or disables out-of-band DTMF. Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF according to RFC2833. Valid values are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled). Default is 1 (enabled). For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-93. 3-68 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Customized Codec Preference List Parameters in Configuration Files sip customized codec Description Specifies a customized Codec preference list which allows you to use the preferred Codecs for this IP phone. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-93. DTMF Method (Global and Per-Line) sip dtmf method (global) sip lineN dtmf method (per-line) Sets the dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) method to use on the IP phone on a global or per-line basis. Valid values are 0 (RTP), 1 (SIP INFO), or 2 (BOTH). Default is 0 (RTP). t1 N/A For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-93. RTP Encryption sip srtp mode (global) ra f N/A sip lineN srtp mode (per-line) D (Global and Per-Line) This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this IP phone, as follows: • If set to 0, then disable SRTP. • If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred. • If set to 2, then SRTP calls only are generated/accepted. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-93. N/A Silence Suppression sip silence suppression Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones. The phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-93. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-69 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Autodial Settings You can configure the following Autodial settings. Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Autodial Number sip autodial number (Global and Per-Line) sip lineN autodial number Description Globally or on a per-line basis, specifies the SIP phone number that the IP phone autodials when the handset is lifted from the phone cradle. An empty (blank) value disables autodial on the phone. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Autodial Settings” on page 4-103. Autodial Timeout Globally or on a per-line basis, specifies the time, in seconds, that the sip lineN autodial timeout phone waits to dial a preconfigured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone cradle. D ra f (Global and Per-Line) sip autodial timeout t1 N/A If this parameter is set to 0 (hotline), the phone immediately dials a preconfigured number when you lift the handset. If this parameter is set to a value greater than 0, the phone waits the specified number of seconds before dialing the preconfigured number (warmline) when you lift the handset. Default is 0 (hotline). For more information, see Chapter 4, “Autodial Settings” on page 4-103. N/A Use Global Settings (Per-line configurations only) N/A For each line, this parameter specifies to use the global autodial settings of “Autodial Number” and “Autodial Timeout”. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Autodial Settings” on page 4-103. 3-70 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Line Settings An administrator can configure multiple lines on the IP phone with the same SIP network configuration (global) or a different SIP network configuration (per-line). The following table provides the number of lines available for each IP phone model. Available Lines 9143i 9 9480i 9 9480i CT 9 6753i 9 6755i 9 6757i 9 t1 IP Phone Model 6757i CT 9 ra f On the IP Phones, you can configure the following on a per-line basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI: Basic SIP Authentication Settings • Basic SIP Network Settings • Advanced SIP Settings (Missed Call Summary Subscription only) • • D • RTP Settings (DTMF Method and RTP Encryption only) Autodial Settings (On a per-line basis, you can also enable/disable the “Use Global Settings” parameter.) References For more information about configuring the features listed above on a per-line basis, see Chapter 4, the sections: • “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71 • “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84 • “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-93 • “Autodial Settings” on page 4-103 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-71 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys A user or administrator can assign specific functions to softkeys, programmable keys, or expansion module keys. The available keys for configuration depend on the IP phone model as shown in the following table. Softkeys Expansion Module Keys Programmable Keys 9143i - Not Applicable 7 9480i 6 Not Applicable - 9480i CT 6 Not Applicable - 6753i - 36 to 108* (Model M670i) 4 6755i 6 36 to 108* (Model M670i) 6 IP Phone Model 6757i 12 t1 60 to 180** (Model M675i) 36 to 108* (Model M670i) - 12 D 6757i CT ra f 60 to 180** (Model M675i) 36 to 108* on Base Station (Model M670i) - 60 to 180** on Base Station (Model M675i) *The M670i expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones. **The M675i expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones. The softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key can be set to use a specific function. Available functions depend on the IP phone model. Reference For more information about key functions see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/ Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. For information about configuring softkeys, programmable keys, and expansion module keys, see Chapter 5, the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141. 3-72 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Action URI The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain XML events occur. The Action URI feature prevents the phones from hanging if the Action URIs should fail. The phones also support transparent, non-blocking, XML post execute item URIs. The IP phone XML events that support this feature are defined in the following table. Description Startup Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event occurs. Successful Registration Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful registration event occurs. t1 Action URI Registration Event Specifies the URI for when registration events occur or when there are registration state changes. Outgoing Call Offhook Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call event occurs. D Incoming Call ra f Note: This action URI is not called when the same event is repeated (for example, a timeout occurs again when registration is already in a timeout state.) Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call event occurs. Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an offhook event occurs. Onhook Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an onhook event occurs. Disconnected Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when it transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state. XML SIP Notify Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone. Poll Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri poll interval" seconds. Poll Interval Specifies the interval, in seconds, between calls from the phone to the "action uri poll". You can set these parameters using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-73 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Reference For more information about setting the Action URIs for XML applications, see “XML Action URIs” on page 5-325. Action URI Disconnected The phones allow an Administrator to specify a URI to allow a disconnect event to occur when the phone transitions from any active state (outgoing, incoming, connected, or calling) to an idle state. Reference For more information about configuring the Action URI Disconnected parameter, see “Action URI Disconnected” on page 5-336. t1 XML SIP Notify Events and Action URIs ra f In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with or without XML content. If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY, it is processed directly by the phone as it is done for an XML PUSH. D Reference For more information about enabling the XML SIP Notify on the IP Phones, see Chapter 5, the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-339. Polling Action URIs Another way to reach a phone behind a NAT/firewall is to have the phone make an XML call at periodic intervals. An Administrator can use the action uri poll to command the phone to perform an XML call at configurable intervals. An Administrator can specify the URI to be called and specify the interval between polls. Configuration of this feature is dynamic (no reboot required). Reference For more information about configuring the polling and polling interval of Action URIs, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-334. 3-74 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Configuration Server Settings The configuration server stores the firmware images, configuration files, and software when performing software upgrades to the IP phone. An administrator can configure the following parameters for the configuration server: Parameter In IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Description Download Protocol Settings download protocol Protocol to use for downloading new versions of software to the IP phone. Valid values are: TFTP FTP HTTP HTTPS D ra f t1 Download Protocol Download Protocol 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain name for the download servers, your DHCP server must support Option 66. The IP phones also support Option 60 and 43. For more information, see Chapter 4, the section, “DHCP” on page 4-4. For more information about download protocols on the IP Phone, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. 3-75 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Primary TFTP Parameter in Aastra Web UI TFTP Server Parameters in Configuration Files tftp server Description The TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain name. If DHCP is enabled and the DHCP server provides the information, this field is automatically populated. Use this parameter to change the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. tftp path D ra f Primary TFTP Path TFTP Path t1 For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. Alternate TFTP Alternate TFTP alternate tftp server The alternate TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain name. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. 3-76 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Alternate TFTP Path Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Alternate TFTP Path alternate tftp path Description Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. use alternate tftp FTP Server ftp server D FTP Server Use Alternate TFTP ra f Select TFTP t1 For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. Enables or disables the alternate TFTP server. Valid values are "0" disabled and "1" enabled. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. The FTP server’s IP address or network host name. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Optional: You can also assign a username and password for access to the FTP server. See the following parameters for setting username and password. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-77 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI FTP Path Parameter in Aastra Web UI FTP Path Parameters in Configuration Files ftp path Description Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. FTP Username ftp username FTP Password D ra f FTP Username t1 For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. FTP Password ftp password The username to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Note: The IP Phones support usernames containing dots (“.”). For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. The password to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. 3-78 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI HTTP Server Parameter in Aastra Web UI HTTP Server Parameters in Configuration Files http server Description The HTTP server’s IP address. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Optional: You can also assign an HTTP relative path to the HTTP server. See the next parameter (http path). For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. HTTP Path http path Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. HTTP Port D ra f t1 HTTP Path HTTP Port http port If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-79 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Download Server Parameter in Aastra Web UI HTTPS Server Parameters in Configuration Files https server Description The HTTPS server’s IP address. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Optional: You can also assign an HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS server. See the next parameter (https path). For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. HTTPS Path https path Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTPS server for downloading to the IP Phone. Download Port D ra f t1 Download Path HTTPS Port https port If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. 3-80 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Description Auto-Resync Settings Mode auto resync mode Enables and disables the phone to be updated automatically once a day at a specific time in a 24-hour period. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, and HTTP servers. Notes: 1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an auto-reboot. 2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are not overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files. 3. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone. 4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle. 5. The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain text configuration files. D ra f t1 N/A For more information, see Chapter 8, the section, “Using the Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-81 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Time (24-hour) Parameters in Configuration Files auto resync time Description Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to be automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, and HTTP servers. Notes: 1. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone. 2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M. 3. When selecting a value for this parameter in the Aastra Web UI, the values are in 30-minute increments only. 4. When entering a value for this parameter using the configuration files, the value can be entered using minute values from 00 to 59 (for example, the auto resync time can be entered as 02:56). 5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00, the event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15. 6. When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish, you must enter the time in the format "00h00" (configuration files only). D ra f t1 N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI For more information, see Chapter 8, the section, “Using the Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7. 3-82 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Maximum Delay Parameters in Configuration Files auto resync max delay Description Specifies the maximum time, in minutes, the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a checksync. For more information, see Chapter 8, the section, “Using the Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7. N/A Days auto resync days Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between checksync operations. ra f t1 Note: A value of 0 causes the phone to checksync every time the clock reads the proper time. A value of 1 forces the phone to wait 24 hours prior to doing the first checksync. For more information, see Chapter 8, the section, “Using the Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7. XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses) XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses) xml application post list D N/A 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 The HTTP server that is pushing XML applications to the IP phone. For more information, see Chapter 5, the section, “XML Push Requests” on page 5-318. 3-83 Firmware Update Features The IP phones support the protocols, TFTP, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS to download configuration files and upgrade firmware to the phones from a configuration server. You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three ways: Using the “Firmware Update” page in the Aastra Web UI at the location Advanced Settings->Firmware Update. • Using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone. The phone automatically looks for firmware updates and configuration files during the boot process. • Setting an Auto-Resync feature to automatically update the firmware, configuration files, or both at a specific time in a 24-hour period). (Feature can be enabled using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI). ra f Reference t1 • D For more information about firmware update, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Firmware.” Administrator Options Administrator Level Options TLS Support The IP Phones support a transport protocol called Transport Layer Security (TLS) and Persistent TLS. TLS is a protocol that ensures communication privacy between the SIP phones and the Internet. TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or tamper with any message. An Administrator can configure the following parameters for TLS Support. Parameter In IP Phone UI Transport Protocol Parameters in Configuration Files sip transport protocol Description Specifies the protocol that the RTP port on the IP phone uses to send out SIP signaling packets. Default is USP. Notes: 1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4 (TLS), the phone checks to see if the “sips persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection. If “sips persistent tls” is disabled, then the phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is used, you must specify the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate, the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates. 2. If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you MUST specify the Trusted Certificates; the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate, and the Private Key are optional. D ra f t1 N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-26. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-85 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI N/A Parameters in Configuration Files sips persistent tls Description Enables or disables the use of Persistent Transport Layer Security (TLS). t1 Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once and re-uses that connection for all calls from the phone. The setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone. If the phones are set to use Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone, this call and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated connection. This significantly reduces the delay time when placing a call. D ra f Notes: 1. Persistent TLS requires the outbound proxy server and outbound proxy port parameters be configured in either the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI (Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Network Settings). There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per phone. The phone establishes the TLS connection to the configured outbound proxy. 2. If you configure the phone to use Persistent TLS, you must also specify the Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and Intermediate Certificates, Local Certificate, and Private Key files are optional. For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-26. 3-86 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Root and Intermediate Certificates Filename Parameters in Configuration Files sips root and intermediate certificates Description Allows you to specify the SIP Root and Intermediate Certificate files to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. t1 The Root and Intermediate Certificate files contain one root certificate and zero or more intermediate certificates which must be placed in order of certificate signing with root certificate being the first in the file. If the local certificate is signed by some well known certificate authority, then that authority provides the user with the Root and Intermediate Certificate files (most likely just CA root certificate). This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.) N/A D ra f Note: The certificate files must use the format “.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support. Local Certificate Filename sips local certificate For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-26. Allows you to specify the Local Certificate file to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.) Note: The certificate file must use the format “.pem”. To create specific certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support. For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-26. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-87 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Private Key Filename Parameters in Configuration Files sips private key Description Allows you to specify a Private Key file to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.) Note: The key file must use the format “.pem”. To create specific private key files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support. Trusted Certificates sips trusted certificates Allows you to specify the Trusted Certificate Filename files to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. D ra f N/A t1 For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-26. The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates. The phone’s trusted list must contain the CA root certificates for all the servers it is connecting to. For example, if the phone is connecting to server A which has a certificate signed by CA1, and server B which has a certificate signed by CA2, the phone must have CA1 root certificate and CA2 root certificate in its Trusted Certificate file. This parameter is required when configuring TLS or Persistent TLS. Note: The certificate files must use the format “.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support. For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-26. 3-88 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options 802.1x Support The IP phones support the IEEE 802.1x Protocol. The 802.1x Protocol is a standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over a wired or wireless Local Area Network (LAN). The 802.1x Protocol on the IP phone facilitates media-level access control, and offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity, control LAN access, and apply traffic policy, based on user or endpoint identity. This feature supports both the EAP-MD5 and EAP-TLS Protocols. t1 Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the certificates and private keys must already be configured and stored on the phone. Use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to load certificates and private keys. An Administrator can configure the following parameters for the 802.1x Protocol. Parameter in Aastra Web UI EAP-MD5 Identity EAP Type eap-type D 802.1x Mode Parameters in Configuration Files ra f Parameter In IP Phone UI Identity identity Description Specifies the type of authentication to use on the IP Phone. For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. Specifies the identity or username used for authenticating the phone. Note: The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path Advanced Settings-> 802.1x Support->General->Identity For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-89 IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI MD5 Password Parameter in Aastra Web UI MD5 Password Parameters in Configuration Files md5 password Description Specifies the password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone. Note: The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path Advanced Settings-> 802.1x Support->EAP-MD5 Settings->MD5 Password. The password displays as “*******”. For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable pc port passthrough enabled Enables or disables the PC port on the phone to be used for 802.1x authentication support. t1 Enable PassThru Port For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. EAP-TLS EAP Type eap type Specifies the type of authentication to use on the IP Phone. ra f 802.1x Mode For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. Identity identity D Identity Specifies the identity or username used for authenticating the phone. Note: The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path Advanced Settings-> 802.1x Support->General->Identity For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. N/A 3-90 Root and Intermediate Certificates Filename 802.1x root and intermediate certificates Specifies the file name that contains the root and intermediate certificates related to the local certificate. For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Local Certificate Filename Parameters in Configuration Files 802.1x local certificate Description Specifies the file name that contains the local certificate. For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. N/A Private Key Filename 802.1x private key Specifies the file name that contains the private key. For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. Trusted Certificates 802.1x trusted Filename certificates Specifies the file name that contains the trusted certificates. t1 N/A For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable pc port passthrough enabled Enables or disables the PC port on the phone to be used for 802.1x authentication support. ra f Enable PassThru Port D For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 3-91 Troubleshooting The Troubleshooting feature in the Aastra Web UI provides tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP phones for troubleshooting purposes. Using this feature, a system administrator can: Assign an IP address and IP port in which to save log files • Filter the logs according to severity that get reported to log files • Save the current local configuration file to a specified location • Save the current server configuration file to a specified location • Show task and stack status (including “Free Memory”and “Maximum Memory Block Size”) • Enable/disable a WatchDog task • View Error Messages t1 • ra f Aastra Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform troubleshooting tasks. Reference D For more information about troubleshooting on the IP Phones, see Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting.” Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features About this chapter About this chapter ra f Introduction t1 Chapter 4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features D This chapter provides the information required to configure the Network and Global SIP features on the IP Phone. These features are password protected on the IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI. This chapter also includes procedures for configuring the Network and Global SIP features via the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI where applicable. Note: The IP Phone User Interface (UI) procedures in the remainder of this Guide use the keys on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and/or 6757i CT when configuring Administrator Options. For information on using the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i keys to configure the Administrator Options, see Chapter 2, the section, “Using the Options Key” on page 2-5. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-1 IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topics This chapter covers the following topics: Topic Page Overview page 4-3 Network Settings page 4-4 Basic Network Settings page 4-4 Advanced Network Settings page 4-30 Global SIP Settings page 4-70 page 4-71 Advanced SIP Settings (optional) page 4-84 Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings page 4-93 Autodial Settings t1 Basic SIP Settings Configuration Server Protocol page 4-108 D ra f Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol page 4-103 page 4-108 4-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Overview Overview An administrator can configure the IP Phone Network and SIP options from the phone UI, from the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. Administrator level options are password protected in both the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web UI. Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-15. t1 The procedures in this section include configuring from the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web UI. To configure the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.” ra f To configure the phone using the IP phone UI, you must enter an administrator password. To configure the phone using the Aastra Web UI, you must enter an administrator username and password. D Note: In the IP phone UI, the default password is "22222". In the Aastra Web UI, the default admin username is "Admin" and the default password is "22222". References For configuring the IP phone at the Asterisk IP PBX, see Appendix B, “Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX.” For sample configuration files, see Appendix C, “Sample Configuration Files.” These sample files include basic parameters required to register the IP phone at the PBX. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-3 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Network Settings This section describes the basic network settings on the IP phone which include configuring for: DHCP • IP Address (of phone) • Subnet Mask (of phone) • Gateway • Primary DNS • Secondary DNS • LAN Port • PC Port DHCP ra f Basic Network Settings t1 • D The IP phone is capable of querying a DHCP server, allowing a network administrator a centralized and automated method of configuring various network parameters for the phone. If DHCP is enabled, the IP phone requests the following network information: 4-4 • Subnet Mask • Gateway (i.e. router) • Domain Name Server (DNS) • Network Time Protocol Server • IP Address • TFTP Server or Alternate TFTP Server if enabled on the phone • TFTP Path or Alternate TFTP Path if enabled on the phone • FTP Server 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings • FTP Path • HTTP Server • HTTP Path • HTTP Port • HTTPS Server • HTTPS Path • HTTPS Port t1 The network administrator chooses which of these parameters (if any) are supplied to the IP phone by the DHCP server. The administrator must configure the phone manually to provide any required network parameters not supplied by the DHCP server. Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the Configuration Files ra f Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP on the phone using the configuration files. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network Settings” on page A-8. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-5 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP on the phone using the IP Phone UI. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Network Settings. 5 Select option DHCP. 6 Press Change to set "Use DHCP?" to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable). 7 Press Done to save the changes. D ra f t1 on the phone to enter the Options List. 4-6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. 2 Enable the "DHCP" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). 3 Click D ra f t1 Step to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-7 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings DHCP Options 60, 66, and 43 Server Configurations Option 66 The IP Phones support download protocols according to RFC2131 and RFC1541 (TFTP, FTP, HTTP,. HTTPS) to support DHCP option 66. Option 66 is part of the DHCP Offer message that the DHCP server generates to tell the phone which configuration server it should use to download new firmware and configuration files. Options 60 and 43 t1 For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain name for the servers, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Option 66 is responsible for forwarding the server’s IP address or domain name to the phone automatically. If your DHCP server does not support Option 66, you must manually enter the IP address or domain name for your applicable configuration server into your IP phone configuration. ra f The Aastra phones also support Option 60 and Option 43 as per RFC 2132. Option 60 (Vendor Class Identifier) provides the DHCP server with a unique identifier for each phone model. This enables a system administrator to send the phone a customized Server Configuration in option 43. D The table below lists the identifier values for each phone model. 4-8 Model Identifier Value 9143i AastraIPPhone9143i 9480i AastraIPPhone9480i 9480i CT AastraIPPhone9480iCT 6751i AastraIPPhone51i 6753i AastraIPPhone53i 6755i AastraIPPhone55i 6757i AastraIPPhone57i 6757i CT AastraIPPhone57iCT 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings The System administrator can use the Vendor Class Identifier to send the phone a customized Server Configuration in option 43 (Vendor-Specific information). Note: If Aastra IP Phones receive the server configuration from both DHCP Option 66 and DHCP Option 43, then Option 43 takes precedence over Option 66. Using Option 43 to Customize the IP Phone A System Administrator can customize the IP Phone(s) in the network by entering a text string in the phone’s configuration files. The following is an Option 43 example using Linux. Linux Example t1 On the startup of the phones, when the DHCP server receives the request with the information in this example, it allows the 6757i phones to use FTP and the 6757i CT phones to use TFTP from the same server. ra f A System Administrator can enter the following in the Aastra IP Phone configuration file: option space AastraIPPhone57i; option AastraIPPhone57i.cfg-server-name code 02 = text; D option space AastraIPPhone57iCT; option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name code 02 = text; Subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 { class "vendor-class-57i" { match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57i"; vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone57i; option AastraIPPhone57i.cfg-server-name "ftp:// username:[email protected]"; } class "vendor-class-57iCT" { match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57iCT"; vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone57iCT; option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name "tftp://10.10.10.1"; } } 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-9 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Your DHCP server configuration file, such as the dhcpd.conf file, may include one of these lines to configure the configuration server protocol and the server details. Protocol Format Examples HTTP http://<server>/<path> option tftp-server-name “http://192.168.1.45”; option tftp-server-name “http://192.168.1.45/path”; option tftp-server-name “http://httpsvr.example.com/path”; HTTPS https://<server>/<path> option tftp-server-name “https://192.168.1.45”; option tftp-server-name “https://192.168.1.45/path”; FTP ftp://user:password@ftpserver t1 option tftp-server-name “https://httpssvr.example.com/ path”; option tftp-server-name “ftp://192.168.1.45”; ra f option tftp-server-name “ftp://ftpsvr.example.com”; (for anonymous user) option tftp-server-name “ftp://userID:password@ ftpsvr.example.com”; TFTP tftp://tftpserver option tftp-server-name “192.168.1.45”; D option tftp-server-name “tftpsvr.example.com”; 4-10 option tftp-server-name “tftp://tftpsvr.example.com”; 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Using Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone If you set the phone to use DHCP Option 12, the phone automatically sends this option to the configuration server. This option specifies the hostname (name of the client). The name may or may not be qualified with the local domain name (based on RFC 2132). See RFC 1035 for character set restrictions. Notes: 1. The hostname of [<model><MAC address>] automatically populates the field on initial startup of the phone. For example, for a 6753i, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated as “53i00085D164435”, where the model number is “6753i” and the MAC address is “00085D164435”. t1 2. If the configuration server sends the hostname back to the phone in a DHCP Reply Packet, the hostname is ignored. ra f An Administrator can change the “Hostname” for the DHCP Option 12 via the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI. Configuring DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone D Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option Settings” on page A-13. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-11 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Select Network Settings. 3 Select Hostname. 4 By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [<Model><MAC address>] of your phone (for example, 53i00085D164435). t1 2 Restart the phone for the change to take affect. D 5 ra f If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field, then press DONE. Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if required. 4-12 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. Hostname By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [<Model><MAC address>] of your phone (for example, 53i00085D164435). D 2 ra f t1 1 If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field. Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if required. 3 Click to save your changes. Note: Changing the “Hostname” field requires a reboot of your phone. 4 Click on Operation->Reset, and click RESTART. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-13 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Using Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone DHCP Option 77 User Class is sent in DHCP request packets from the phone to the configuration server. This Option 77 defines specific User Class identifiers to convey information about a phone’s software configuration or about its user's preferences. For example, you can use the User Class option to configure all phones in the Accounting Department with different user preferences than the phones in the Marketing Department. A DHCP server uses the User Class option to choose the address pool for which it allocates an address from, and/or to select any other configuration option. Notes: 1. If the User Class is not specified (left blank) in the DHCP request packet, the phone does not send the User Class DHCP Option 77. Multiple User Classes inside a DHCP Option 77 are not supported. t1 2. ra f 3. DHCP Option 77 may affect the precedence of DHCP Options, dependent on the DHCP Server. An Administrator can configure the DHCP Option 77 User Class via the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI. D Configuring DHCP Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option Settings” on page A-13. 4-14 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Select Network Settings. 3 Select DHCP Settings. 4 Select DHCP User Class. 5 In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones, then press DONE. Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. For example, “admin”. 6 Restart the phone for the change to take affect. D ra f t1 2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-15 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings . Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. D ra f t1 DHCP User Class 2 In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones. For example, “admin”. Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. 3 Click to save your changes. Note: Entering a value in the “DHCP User Class” field requires a reboot of your phone. 4 4-16 Click on Operation->Reset, and click RESTART. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Using Options 159 and 160 on the IP Phone In addition to DHCP options 43 and 66 already supported on the IP Phones, the phones also support DHCP Options 159 and 160. The IP Phones use the following order of precedence when deriving the configuration server parameters: 43, 160, 159, 66. In addition, an administrator can override this order of precedence by setting a configuration parameter called, dhcp config option override (configuration files), DHCP Download Options (Aastra Web UI), or Download Options (IP Phone UI). Setting this parameter results in the phone only using the chosen DHCP option and ignoring the other options. t1 For more information about setting DHCP download preference, see “Configuration Server Download Precedence” on page 4-20.. ra f Warning: Administrators should review the updated IP phone DHCP option precedence order and configuration options to avoid potential impact to existing Aastra IP phone deployments. Configuring DHCP Download Options on the IP Phones D Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option Override on the IP Phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option Settings” on page A-13. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-17 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Enter you Administrator password and press Enter. 3 Select Network Settings. 4 Select DHCP Settings. 5 Select Download Options. The following list displays: Any (default) - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160, Option 43 Option 66 Option 159 Option 160 Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160)) 159, 66. ra f • • • • • • t1 2 Choose an option that you want to use to override the DHCP normal precedence order, and press DONE. 7 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect. 4-18 D 6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. 2 D ra f t1 DHCP Download Options Parameter In the “DHCP Download Options” field, select an option to use to override the normal precedence order. Valid values are: • • • • • • Any (default) - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160, Option 43 Option 66 Option 159 Option 160 Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160)) 159, 66. 3 Click 4 Click on Operation->Reset, and restart the phone for the changes to take affect. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 to save your changes. 4-19 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuration Server Download Precedence An Administrator can set the phone’s download precedence to ignore DHCP, (only during the boot when the remote configuration server is contacted) and use the following precedence instead: 1. Configuration URI, 2. DHCP, and then 3. Direct configuration. t1 To configure the download precedence, you use the option value (-1) as the value for the “dhcp config option override” parameter in the configuration files. Setting this parameter to “-1” causes all DHCP configuration options to be ignored. Configuring a Download Precedence Using the Configuration Files ra f Use the following procedure to configure the DHCP download precedence using the configuration files. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option Settings” on page A-13. 4-20 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Configuring a Download Precedence Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the IP Phone UI. Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Enter you Administrator password and press Enter. 3 Select Network Settings. 4 Select DHCP Settings. 5 Select Download Options. • Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, ra f 6 t1 2 66, 159, 160)) Select the Disabled option and press Enter. 7 D Note: The “Disabled” download option performs the same function as the “-1” in the configuration files (ignores DHCP options). Restart the phone for the selection to take affect. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-21 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring a Download Precedence Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. D ra f t1 DHCP Download Options Parameter 2 In the “DHCP Download Options” field, select “Disabled” from the list of options. Note: In the Aastra Web UI, the “Disabled” download option performs the same function as the “-1” in the configuration files (ignores DHCP options). 3 Click 4 Select Operation->Reset, and click Restart to reboot the phone. 4-22 to save your setting. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Multiple DHCP Servers The IP Phones can receive messages from multiple DHCP servers. After the phone receives its first DHCP message, it listens for a specific time period, for more DHCP messages. If the first DHCP offer contains configuration server information (Options 43, 66, 159 or 160), then the phone times out and continues using the first DHCP offer, without listening for more DHCP offers. If the first DHCP message contains no configuration server information, the phone continues to listen for other DHCP messages. If the second DHCP message contains configuration server information and other conditions, the phone chooses the second DHCP message over the initial DHCP message. IMPORTANT NOTE t1 Note: If the DHCP Download Options parameter is enabled with a value (Option 43, Option 66, Option 159, or Option 160), the phone checks the override option setting before timing out. ra f Users currently using multiple DHCP servers on a single network could be affected by this feature. DNS Caching D The IP phones have the ability to cache DNS requests according to RFC1035 and RFC2181. The phone caches DNS lookups according to the TTL field, so that the phone only performs another lookup for an address when the TTL expires. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-23 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring Network Settings Manually If you disable DHCP on your phone, you need to configure the following network settings manually: • IP Address • Subnet Mask • Gateway • Primary DNS • Secondary DNS t1 Note: If you disable DHCP on the phone, the phone uses the TFTP protocol as the default server protocol. If you want to specify a different protocol to use, see “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. ra f You can configure the network settings using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network Settings” on page A-8. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Network Settings. 5 Select IP Address and enter the IP address of the phone. 6 Select Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask. 4-24 on the phone to enter the Options List. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 7 Select Gateway and enter the gateway address. 8 Select DNS and enter a Primary and/or Secondary DNS server. 9 Press Done to save the changes. The IP phone is manually configured. . t1 Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. 2 Enter an IP address of the phone in the IP Address field. 3 Enter a subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field. 4 Enter a gateway address in the Gateway field. 5 Enter a Primary DNS in the Primary DNS field, and/or a secondary DNS in the Secondary DNS field. 6 Click D ra f Step to save your settings. The IP phone is manually configured. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-25 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring LAN and PC Port Negotiation Ethernet is the computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). You use the LAN Port to connect to a LAN using a twisted pair 10BASE-T cable to transmit 10BASE-T Ethernet. You use the PC Port to connect to the configuration server (your PC). There are two Ethernet ports on the rear of the IP phones: LAN Port and PC Port. Using the Aastra Web UI, you can select the type of transmission you want these ports to use to communicate over the LAN. The IP phones support each of the following methods of transmission: Auto-negotiation • Half-duplex (10Mbps or 100 Mbps) • Full-duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps) Auto-negotiation t1 • D ra f Auto-negotiation is when two connected devices choose common transmission parameters. In the auto-negotiation process, the connected devices share their speed and duplex capabilities and connect at the highest common denominator (HCD). Auto-negotiation can be used by devices that are capable of different transmission rates (such as 10Mbit/sec and 100Mbit/sec), different duplex modes (half duplex and full duplex) and/or different standards at the same speed. You can set the LAN and PC Ports on the IP phones to auto-negotiate during transmission. Half-Duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps) Half-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions on a signal carrier, but not at the same time. For example, on a LAN using a technology that has half-duplex transmission, one device can send data on the line and then immediately receive data on the line from the same direction in which data was just transmitted. Half-duplex transmission implies a bidirectional line (one that can carry data in both directions). On the IP phones, you can set the half-duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps. 4-26 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Full-Duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps) Full-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions on a signal carrier at the same time. For example, on a LAN with a technology that has full-duplex transmission, one device can be sending data on the line while another device is receiving data. Full-duplex transmission implies a bidirectional line (one that can move data in both directions). On the IP phones, you can set the full-duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps. Configuring the LAN Port and PC Port Configuration Files t1 You can configure the Ethernet port transmission method to use on the IP phones using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. D IP Phone UI ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network Settings” on page A-8. Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Network Settings. 5 Select Ethernet. 6 Select LAN Port Link. on the phone to enter the Options List. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-27 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 7 Select a negotiation method to use on port 0 and press Done. Valid values are: • AutoNegotiation • FullDuplex 10Mbps • FullDuplex 100Mbps • HalfDuplex 10Mbps • HalfDuplex 100Mbps Default is AutoNegotiation. Select PC Port Link. 9 Select a negotiation method to use on port 1and press Done. Valid values are: • AutoNegotiation • FullDuplex 10Mbps • FullDuplex 100Mbps • HalfDuplex 10Mbps • HalfDuplex 100Mbps 10 ra f Default is AutoNegotiation. t1 8 Press Done (3 times) to finish configuring the configuration server protocol for the IP phone. Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings. Select Restart. D 11 4-28 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. 2 In the “LAN Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 0. Valid values are: • Auto Negotiation • Full Duplex, 10Mbps • Full Duplex, 100Mbps • Half Duplex, 10Mbps • Half Duplex, 100Mbps D ra f t1 Step Default is Auto Negotiation. 3 In the “PC Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 1. Valid values are: • Auto Negotiation • Full Duplex, 10Mbps • Full Duplex, 100Mbps • Half Duplex, 10Mbps • Half Duplex, 100Mbps Default is Auto Negotiation. 4 Click to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-29 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Advanced Network Settings You can set advanced network settings on the IP phone such as, Network Address Translation (NAT), Nortel NAT, Network Time Protocol (NTP) Time Servers, Virtual LAN (VLAN), and Quality of Service (QoS), and Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. Note: The available advanced network parameters via the IP phone UI are NAT, Nortel NAT, UPnP, VLAN, and QoS only. Network Address Translation (NAT) D ra f t1 The protocols used by all IP phones do not interoperate completely with Network Address Translation (NAT). For the IP Phones, specific configuration parameters allow the phone to operate while connected to a network device that enforces NAT. The following is a sample network using a NAT proxy and relevant IP phone configuration parameters. 4-30 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Nortel Proxy/Registrar The phone at IP address 10.10.10.10 is configured to register with the proxy at 63.251.195.10. Because it is a Nortel proxy, the configuration must additionally include the "sip nortel nat support" and "sip nortel nat timer" settings, telling the firmware to enhance the protocols with Nortel specific content. Note: This IP phone uses RTP port 3000 (the default value) since an RTP port was not explicitly configured. SBC or ALG proxy/registrar t1 The phone at IP address 10.10.10.20 is configured to register with the proxy at 63.251.195.20. Because the proxy/registrar has session border control (SBC) or application layer gateway (ALG) functionality, no additional IP phone configuration is required. ra f Other proxy/registrars D The phone at IP address 10.10.10.30 is configured to register with the proxy at 63.251.195.30. Because this proxy/registrar is not a Nortel proxy and has no SBC or ALG functionality, the configuration must additionally include the "sip nat ip" and "sip nat port" settings that contain the public ip address of the NAT router and the port used for call signaling messages. This information is embedded in protocol messages to allow the proxy/registrar to reach the IP phone on the NAT router private network. NAT router configuration You must configure the NAT router to allow signaling or media packets containing the various UDP port values to flow between the private and public networks that are separated by the NAT router. In the sample network, the NAT router must not filter packets using ports 3000, 5060, 6060, 16420, and 16430. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-31 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Nortel Networks NAT Nortel Networks provides a proprietary solution to support connectivity to their proxies from phones placed behind devices (such as routers or firewalls) that use NAT. Nortel uses the SIP ping request/reply between the Nortel proxy and the phone in order to keep the connection through the router or firewall active. A SIP Nortel NAT timer is the interval, in seconds (default is 60), that the phone sends SIP ping requests to the Nortel proxy. ra f t1 When you use NAT in your network, a network device (usually a router) provides a “firewall” division between the public network (usually the Internet) and the private network, to which the IP Phones are connected. The firewall protects the network by translating port numbers within packets between the public and private networks. When using NAT, and an RTP packet arrives at the public side of the firewall, it is expected to have the NAT RTP port within the packet. If the packet contains the proper port number, the firewall changes the NAT RTP port number in the packet to the RTP port number that the phone recognizes, and then forwards it onto the private network. Often the router/firewall automatically discovers these various port numbers and other information concerning public and private sides of the network with the use of the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Protocol between the phone and the router/firewall. Configuring Nortel NAT (optional) D You can configure Nortel NAT using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-29. 4-32 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Network Settings. 5 Select NAT Settings. 6 Select Nortel NAT. 7 Press Change to set either “Enabled” or “Disabled”. 8 Press Done (3 times) to finish. t1 on the phone to enter the Options List. Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings. Select Restart. D ra f 9 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-33 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. 2 Select Yes (enable) or No (disable) in the "Nortel NAT Traversal Enabled" field to enable or disable NAT for a Nortel network. 3 Enter a time, in seconds, in the "Nortel NAT timer" field. Valid values are 0 to 2147483647. Default is 60. 4 Click D ra f t1 Step 4-34 to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional) You can also configure a specific NAT address and port on the IP phone using the configuration files, IP Phone UI, or Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-29. t1 IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Network Settings. 5 Select Static NAT. 6 Select NAT IP. 7 Enter a public IP address of your NAT device in dotted-decimal format. 8 Press Done to save the setting. 9 Select NAT SIP Port. Default is 51620. 10 Enter the public SIP signalling port number of your NAT device. 11 Press Done to save the setting. 12 Select NAT RTP Port. 13 Enter the RTP Port number of your NAT device. Default is 51720. 14 Press Done (4 times) to finish. D ra f on the phone to enter the Options List. Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings. 15 Select Restart. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-35 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. 2 Enter a NAT IP address in the "NAT IP" field. The value must be entered in dotted decimal format. For example, 0.0.0.0. The “NAT IP” is the public IP address of your NAT device. 3 Enter a NAT port in the "NAT SIP Port" field. Default is 51620. The “NAT SIP Port” is the public SIP signalling port number of your NAT device. 4 Enter a NAT port in the "NAT RTP Port" field. Default is 51720. The “NAT RTP Port” is the RTP Port number of your NAT device. 5 Click D ra f t1 Step 4-36 to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal A System Administrator can configure the SIP and TLS source ports on the IP Phone. Previously, the IP phone used default values (5060 for UDP/TCP and 5061 for TLS). The two new parameters for configuring the SIP and TLS source ports are: • sip local port • sip local tls port You can configure the SIP and TLS source ports using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. After configuring these parameters, you must reboot the phone. t1 If NAT is disabled, the port number also shows in the VIA and Contact SIP headers. ra f If you enable NAT, the phone uses the NAT port number (and NAT IP address) in the Via and Contact SIP headers of SIP messages, but still use the configured source port. D Note: By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060.If symmetric UDP signaling is disabled, the phone sends from random ports but it listens on the configured SIP local port. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-37 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters to configure SIP and TLS ports for NAT traversal: • sip local port • sip local tls port Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections: “Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting” on page A-32. “Local SIP TLS Port” on page A-32. D ra f t1 • • 4-38 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure SIP and TLS source ports using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. . D ra f t1 1 “Local SIP UDP/TCP Port” Parameter 2 “Local SIP TLS Port” Parameter The “Local SIP UDP/TCP Port” field has a default value of 5060. Change this value if required to a value greater than 1024 and less than 65535. Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-39 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra Web UI 3 The “Local SIP TLS Port” field has a default value of 5061. Change this value if required to a value greater than 1024 and less than 65535. Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports being used. For example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS on 443/tcp. 4 Click to save your changes. HTTPS Client/Server Configuration ra f t1 HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as the pages that are returned by the Web server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet. It uses a 40-bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. When a server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL. D Note: HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the TCP/IP lower layer. When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are: 4-40 • Downloading of configuration files and firmware images. • Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a softkey definition. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks. The main HTTPS server functions are: • Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection. • Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure connection. Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI, you can configure the following regarding HTTPS: Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TSLv1 or SSLv3) • Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function • HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone t1 • Configuring HTTPS Client and Server Settings ra f Use the following procedures to configure the HTTPS client and server for the IP phones. D Note: To enable or disable the IP phones to use the HTTPS protocol as the configuration server, see the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTPS Client and Server Settings” on page A-33. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-41 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Configuration Server. 5 Select HTTPS Settings. on the phone to enter the Options List. Configure HTTPS Client Select HTTPS Client. 7 Select Client Method. 8 Press Change to select a client method to use for HTTPS. Valid values are: 9 SSL 3.0 (default) TLS 1.0 ra f • • t1 6 Press Done to save the changes. Configure HTTPS Server Select HTTPS Server. 11 Select HTTP->HTTPS. 12 Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”. Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS. 13 Press Done to save the changes. 14 Select XML HTTP POSTs. 15 Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”. Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP Phone. 16 Press Done (4 times) to finish. D 10 Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings. 17 4-42 Select Restart. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. 2 Select an HTTPS client method to use from the HTTPS Client Method field. Valid values are: D ra f t1 Step SSL 3.0 (default) TSL 1.0 3 Enable HTTP to HTTPS redirect by checking the HTTPS Server - Redirect HTTP to HTTPS field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is disabled. 4 Enable the blocking of XML HTTP POSTs by the HTTPS server by checking the HTTPS Server Block XML HTTP POSTs field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is disabled. 5 Click to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-43 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings HTTPS Server Certificate Validation The HTTPS client on the IP Phones support validation of HTTPS certificates. This feature supports the following: • Verisign, GeoTrust, and Thawte signed certificates • User-provided certificates • Checking of hostnames • Checking of certificate expiration • Ability to disable any or all of the validation steps • Phone displays a message when a certificate is rejected (except on check-sync operations) t1 All validation options are enabled by default. Certificate Management ra f Aastra Provided Certificates The phones come with root certificates from Verisign, GeoTrust, and Thawte pre-loaded. D User Provided Certificates The administrator has the option to upload their own certificates onto the phone. The phone downloads these certificates in a file of .PEM format during boot time after configuration downloads. The user-provided certificates are saved on the phone between firmware upgrades but are deleted during a factory default. The download of the User-provided certificates are based on a filename specified in the configuration parameter, https user certificates (Trusted Certificates Filename in the Aastra Web UI; User-provided certificates are not configurable via the IP Phone UI). Note: Certificates that are signed by providers other than Verisign, GeoTrust or Thwate do not verify on the phone by default. The user can overcome this by adding the root certificate of their certificate provider to the use-provided certificate .PEM file. 4-44 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Certificate Validation Certificate validation is enabled by default. Validation occurs by checking that the certificates are well formed and signed by one of the certificates in the trusted certificate set. It then checks the expiration date on the certificate, and finally, compares the name in the certificate with the address for which it was connected. If any of these validation steps fail, the connection is rejected. Certificate validation is controlled by three parameters which you can configure via the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI: https validate certificates - Enables/disables validation • https validate hostname - Enables/disables the checking of the certificate commonName against the server name. • https validate expires - Enables/disables the checking of the expiration date on the certificate. User Interface ra f Certificate Rejection t1 • When the phone rejects a certificate, it displays, "Bad Certificate" on the LCD. D An Administrator can configure HTTPS Server Certificate Validation using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Use the following procedures to configure the HTTPS server certificate validation on the IP phones. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings” on page A-35. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-45 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Select Configuration Server. 3 Select HTTPS Settings->Cert. Validation. The following list displays: • Enable • Check Expires • Check Hostnames t1 2 ra f Enable/Disable HTTPS Server Certificate Validation 4 Select Enable. 5 Press Change to toggle the “Enable” field to “Yes” or “No”. 6 D Note: If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you must set this field to “No” before upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones. Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen. Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE. Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Certificate Expiration 7 Select Check Expires. 8 Press Change to toggle the “Check Expires” field to “Yes” or “No”. Notes: 1. This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE. 2. If the “Check Expires” parameter is set to Yes, the clock on the phone must be set for the phone to accept the certificates. 4-46 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 9 Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen. Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE. Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Hostnames 10 Select Check Hostnames. 11 Press Change to toggle the “Check Hostnames” field to “Yes” or “No”. 12 Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen. Press to exit the Options Menu and return to the idle screen. D ra f 13 t1 Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-47 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings. The “Validate Certificates” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of certificates, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark. ra f 2 t1 HTTPS Validation Certificate Parameters When this parameter is enabled, the HTTPS client performs validation on SSL certificates before accepting them. 3 D Notes: 1. This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button. 2. If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you must disable (uncheck) this field before upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones. The “Check Certificate Expiration” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of certificate expiration, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark. When this parameter is enabled, the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a certificate has expired prior to accepting the certificate. Notes: 1. This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button. 2. If the “Check Certificates Expiration” parameter is set to Yes, the clock on the phone must be set for the phone to accept the certificates. 4 The “Check Certificate Hostnames” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of hostnames, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark. Note: This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button. 4-48 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI 5 If you require the download of User-provided certificates in a .PEM formatted file, enter the file name in the format <filename.pem> in the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field. For example: trustedCerts.pem This parameter specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This file contains the User-provided certificates in PEM format. These certificates are used to validate peer certificates. Notes: 1. You must disable the “Validate Certificates” field in order for the phone to accept the User-provided certificates. 2. This parameter requires you restart the phone in order for it to take affect. Click to save your changes. 7 If you entered a filename in the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field, click on Operation->Reset, and restart the phone for the changes to take affect. D ra f t1 6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-49 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for remote phones) UPnP is a standard that uses Internet protocols to enable devices to be plugged into a network and automatically know about each other. With UPnP, when a user plugs a device into the network, the device configures itself, acquires a TCP IP address, and uses a discovery protocol based on the Internet's HTTP or HTTPS URL to announce its presence on the network to other devices. This method of device discovery on a network is called “Universal Plug and Play” or UPnP. If you enable UPnP, and the phone is discovered on the network, port mappings are set up between the phone and the Internet Gateway Device (IGD). The phone controls the opening, closing, and polling of ports on the IGD. HTTP and SIP use a single port each. RTP/RTCP uses a range of ports. ra f t1 The UPnP manager performs its functions when you set the phone to remote mode. When you switch the phone back to local mode, the UPnP manager removes any open port mappings and shuts itself down. If you boot the phone in remote mode, the UPnP manager initializes after the phone obtains an IP address and before a SIP registration is sent out. If you want to manually configure your NAT, you must disable UPnP on the remote mode phone. D Note: Enabling UPnP allows the IP phones to access the Internet even if a firewall has been set on the IGD. This allows the phone to send and receive SIP calls and XML pushes without interruption. UPnP does not work with multiple firewalls. You can enable UPnP on remote IP phones using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Using the configuration files, you can enable UPnP using the following parameters: • upnp manager • upnp gateway • sip nat rtp port The “upnp manager” parameter enables or disables UPnP. The “upnp gateway” parameter is the IP address or qualified domain name of the Internet gateway or router that stores the port mappings. In the event a phone using UPnP is rebooted, it will still have the previously set port mappings on the gateway. The “sip nat rtp port” parameter specifies the RTP port range on the gateway. 4-50 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings A User or Administrator can specify UPnP on specific lines using the configuration files (using the “upnp mapping lines” parameter) or the Aastra Web UI (at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->UPnP Mapping Lines). Reference For more information about enabling/disabling UPnP Mapping on specific lines, see Chapter 5, the section, “UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)” on page 5-87. Configuring UPnP (optional) Configuration Files t1 Use the following procedures to configure UPnP on the IP phones. D IP Phone UI ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “UPnP Settings” on page A-37. Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Network Settings. 5 Select NAT Settings. 6 Select UPnP. 7 Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”. This field enables or disables the use of UPnP on the IP Phone. on the phone to enter the Options List. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-51 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 8 Press Done (3 times) to save the changes. Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings 9 Select Restart. . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. D ra f t1 Step 4-52 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 The “UPnP” field is disabled by default. To enable UPnP, place a check in the “Enabled” box. Uncheck the box to disable this field. This field enables and disable UPnP on the IP phone. 3 Click D ra f t1 to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-53 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Virtual LAN (optional) Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a feature on the IP phone that allows for multiple logical Ethernet interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single physical Ethernet as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure a VLAN ID that associates with the physical Ethernet port. By configuring specific VLAN parameters, the IP phones have the capability of adding and removing tags, and processing the ID and priority information contained within the tag. Note: All latest VLAN functionality is backwards compatible with IP Phone Releases 1.3 and 1.3.1. t1 VLAN on the IP phones is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP phone provides defaults for all VLAN parameters. If you choose to change these parameters, you can configure them using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. ra f The following sections describe the VLAN features you can configure on the IP phones. Type of Service (ToS), Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS D ToS is an octet as a field in the standard IP header. It is used to classify the traffic of the different QoSs. QoS provides service differentiation between IP packets in the network. This service differentiation is noticeable during periods of network congestion (for example, in case of contention for resources) and results in different levels of network performance. Port 0 is the Ethernet LAN Port connected to the network. Port 1 is the Ethernet PC Port used for passthrough to a PC. Differentiated Service (DiffServ) QoS is class-based where some classes of traffic receive preferential handling over other traffic classes. The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value is stored in the first six bits of the ToS field. Each DSCP specifies a particular per-hop behavior that is applied to a packet. 4-54 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings The following parameters allow an administrator to configure ToS, QoS, and DiffServ QoS for VLAN: Parameters in Configuration Files Parameters in Aastra Web UI Global tagging enabled VLAN enable priority non-ip Priority, Non-IP Packet LAN Port VLAN ID tos priority map SIP Priority tos priority map RTP Priority tos priority map RTCP Priority PC Port vlan id port 1 VLAN ID Priority ra f QoS eth port 1 priority t1 vlan id D Notes: 1. In order for the software to successfully maintain connectivity with a network using VLAN functionality, the IP phone reboots if you modify the "tagging enabled" (VLAN Enable in the Web UI), "vlan id", or "vlan id port 1" parameters. 2. When the LAN Port (vlan id) and the PC Port (vlan id port 1) parameters have the same value, VLAN functionality is compatible with earlier IP phone software releases. If you set the PC Port (vlan id port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this port. For configuring this feature via the Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI, see “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-60. For configuring this feature using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings” on page A-38. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-55 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings DSCP Range/VLAN Priority Mapping DSCP bits in the ToS field of the IP header are set for RTP, RTCP, and SIP packets using either the default values or the values configured via the "tos sip", "tos rtp", and "tos rtcp" parameters. When the VLAN global configuration parameter, "tagging enabled" is set to 1, VLAN priority for IP packets is mapped to the DSCP value instead of a single priority for all packets. An administrator can also configure VLAN priority for non-IP packets using the "priority non-ip" parameter. t1 Since the default DSCP settings for SIP, RTP, and RTCP are 26, 46, and 46 respectively, this results in corresponding default VLAN priorities of 3 for SIP, 4 for RTP, and 4 for RTCP (based on the settings in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority” on page 4-56). You can change the default parameters by modifying just the DSCP values, just the VLAN priority values, or by modifying all values. ra f The following table shows the DSCP range/VLAN priority mapping. DSCP Range/VLAN Priority DSCP Range VLAN Priority 0 1 16-23 2 24-31 3 32-39 4 40-47 5 48-55 6 56-63 7 D 0-7 8-15 4-56 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings The following table identifies the default DSCP of protocols. Protocol Name Default DSCP Values in the ToS Field sip 26 rtp 46 rtcp 46 Configuring Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP (optional) Use the following procedures to configure ToS/DSCP on the IP phone. ra f Configuration Files t1 Note: ToS/DSCP is enabled by default. The SIP, RTP, and RTCP parameters show defaults of 26, 46, and 46, respectively. Use the following procedures to change these settings if required. D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings” on page A-44. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Network Settings. 5 Select Type of Service DSCP. on the phone to enter the Options List. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-57 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 6 Select Type of Service SIP. or Select Type of Service RTP. or Select Type of Service RTCP. 7 Enter a value for “Type of Service SIP”. Default is 26. or Enter a value for “Type of Service RTP”. Default is 46. or Enter a value for “Type of Service RTCP”. Default is 46. t1 Valid values are 0 to 63. Note: If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority” on page 4-56 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-60. Press Done (3 times) to save the changes. ra f 8 Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings Select Restart. D 9 4-58 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Type of Service,DSCP. 2 Select a Protocol field: • “SIP” or • “RTP” or • “RTCP” 3 Enter a value from 0 to 63. Default values are as follows: D ra f t1 Step SIP = 26 RTP = 46 RTCP = 46 Note: If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority” on page 4-60 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-60. 4 Click to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-59 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring VLAN (optional) Use the following procedures to configure VLAN on the IP phone. Note: VLAN is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP phones use the default settings for each VLAN parameter. You can change the default settings if required using the following procedure. Configuration Files ra f IP Phone UI t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings” on page A-38. Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Network Settings. 5 Select VLAN Settings. D on the phone to enter the Options List. To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets: 6 Select VLAN Enable. 7 Press Change to set VLAN Enable to “Yes” to enable or “No” to disable. Default is “No”. 8 Press Done to save the changes. 9 Select Phone VLAN. 10 Select VLAN Priority. 11 Select Other and enter a non-IP priority value from 0 to 7 for non-IP packets. Default for this field is 5. 12 Press Done (3 times) to return to the VLAN Settings menu. 4-60 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action To set VLAN ID and priority for LAN Port (Port 0): 13 Select Phone VLAN. 14 Select Phone VLAN ID and enter a value from 1 to 4094 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port. Default is 1. 15 Press Done to save the change. 16 Select VLAN Priority. 17 Select one of the following VLAN Protocols: Enter a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the associated Protocol. Default values for each Protocol are: SIP Priority = 3 RTP Priority = 5 RTCP Priority = 5 19 ra f 18 SIP Priority RTP Priority RTCP Priority t1 • • • Press Done (3 times) to return to the VLAN Settings menu. To set VLAN ID and priority for PC Port (Port 1): Select PC Port VLAN. 21 Select PC Port VLAN ID. 22 Enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the PC Port. Default is 1. D 20 Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this port. The following is an example of configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent to the PC Port (passthrough port). Example You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the passthrough port (PC Port) to 4095. The following example sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the passthrough port is configured as untagged. VLAN Settings->VLAN Enable: Yes VLAN Settings->Phone VLAN->Phone VLAN ID: 3 VLAN Settings->PC Port VLAN->PC Port VLAN ID: 4095 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-61 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 23 Press Done to save the change. 24 Select PC Port Priority. 25 Select a PC Port VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port. Default is 0. 26 Press Done (4 times) to save the changes. Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings Select Restart. D ra f t1 27 4-62 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN. D ra f t1 Step To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets: 2 Enable VLAN by checking the VLAN Enable field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). 3 With VLAN enabled, select the priority (0 to 7) for non-IP packets in the Priority, Non-IP Packet field. To set VLAN ID and priority for the LAN Port (Port 0): 4 Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4094 in the VLAN ID field. Default is 1. 5 Choose a VLAN Protocol (SIP Priority, RTP Priority, and/or RTCP Priority), and select a priority for the associated Protocol. Valid values are 0 to 7, Defaults are as follows: SIP Priority = 3 RTP Priority = 5 RTCP Priority = 5 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-63 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action To set VLAN ID and priority for the PC Port (Port 1): 6 Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4095 in the VLAN ID field. Default is 1. Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this PC Port. The following is an example of configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent to the passthrough port. D ra f t1 Example You enable tagging as normal, enter a value for the LAN Port VLAN ID, and then set the PC Port VLAN ID to 4095. The following example sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the PC Port VLAN ID is configured as untagged.. 7 Select a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port in the Priority field. Default is 0. 8 Click 4-64 to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings RPORT The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) operates over UDP and TCP. When used with UDP, responses to requests are returned to the source address from which the request came, and returned to the port written into the topmost “Via” header of the request. However, this behavior is not desirable when the client is behind a Network Address Translation (NAT) or firewall. A parameter created for the “Via” header called “Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the port from which the request came. When you enable “Rport, the phone always uses symmetric signaling (listens on the port used for sending requests). t1 An Administrator can configure “Rport” using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring Rport Using the Configuration Files sip rport ra f Use the following parameter to configure Rport on your phone. D Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Rport Setting” on page A-31. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-65 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring Rport Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure Rport on your phone using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. D ra f t1 1 2 Rport Parameter In the "Advanced Network Settings" section, enable the "Rport (RFC3581" field by checking the check box. (Disable Rport by unchecking the box). “Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the port from which the request came. 3 4-66 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Network Time Servers Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol that the IP phone uses to synchronize the phone clock time with a computer (configuration server) in the network. To use NTP, you must enable it using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. You can specify up to three time servers in your network. Note: The IP phones support NTP version 1. Configuring NTP Servers (optional) Configuration Files t1 Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP servers using the configuration files. ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time Server Settings” on page A-52. D Use the following procedure to enable/disable the NTP server using the IP Phone UI. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Preferences. 3 Select Time and Date. 4 Select Time Server. 5 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 6 Select Timer Server 1, Timer Server 2, or Time Server 3. on the phone to enter the Options List. Note: The Time Servers are disabled by default. 7 To set a Time Server, press Enable. (Press Disable to disable a Time Server.) 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-67 IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 8 Enter the IP Address (in dotted decimal) or qualified domain name for the Time Server. 9 Press Done to save the change. Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP Servers using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. 2 Enable the "NTP Time Servers" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled. D ra f t1 Step 4-68 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 3 Enter an IP address or qualified domain name in the "Time Server 1", "Time Server 2", and/or "Time Server 3" field(s) to specify the location of the NTP time server. 4 Click D ra f t1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-69 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Global SIP Settings Description The IP phone uses the information in the Global Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) settings to register at the IP PBX. The IP phone configuration defines network and user account parameters that apply globally to all SIP lines. Since not all SIP lines are necessarily hosted using the same IP-PBX/server or user account, additional sets of per-line parameters can also be defined for network and user account. t1 You configure and modify these parameters and associated values using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The Aastra Web UI and configuration file methods configure global and per-line SIP settings on the IP phone. The IP phone UI configures global SIP settings only. ra f On the IP Phones, you can configure Basic and Advanced SIP Settings. The Basic SIP Settings include authentication and network settings. The Advanced SIP Settings include other features you can configure on the IP Phone. Reference D For more information about Basic SIP Settings (for authentication and network), see “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. For more information bout Advanced SIP Settings, see “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84. 4-70 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Basic SIP Settings Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis. You can also configure specific parameters using the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. If you have a proxy server or have a SIP registrar present at a different location than the PBX server, the SIP parameters may need to be changed. The IP phones allow you to define different SIP lines with the same account information (i.e., same user name) but with different registrar and proxy IP addresses. This feature works with Registration, Subscription, and Notify processing. This feature also works with the following types of calls: incoming, outgoing, Broadsoft Shared Call Appearance (SCA), Bridged Line Appearance (BLA), conference, transfer, blind transfer. t1 The following tables identify the SIP global and per-line, authentication and network parameters on the IP phones. SIP Global Parameters Aastra Web UI Parameters ra f IP Phone UI Parameters Configuration File Parameters SIP Global Authentication Parameters Screen Name N/A User Name Display Name Auth Name Password N/A N/A • • • • • • • • Screen Name Screen Name 2 Phone Number Caller ID Authentication Name Password BLA Number Line Mode • • • • • • • • • sip screen name sip screen name 2 sip user name sip display name sip auth name sip password sip bla number sip mode sip vmail Proxy Server Proxy Port Backup Proxy Server Backup Proxy Port Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Port Registrar Server Registrar Port Backup Registrar Server Backup Registrar Port Registration Period Conference Server URI (see Chapter 5) • • • • • • • • • • • • • sip proxy ip sip proxy port sip backup proxy ip sip backup proxy port sip outbound proxy sip outbound proxy port sip registrar ip sip registrar port sip backup registrar ip sip backup registrar port sip registration period sip centralized conf (see Chapter 5) D • • • • • • • • SIP Global Network Parameters • • • • • • • • • • • • Proxy Server Proxy Port N/A N/A N/A N/A Registrar Server Registrar Port N/A N/A N/A N/A • • • • • • • • • • • • 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-71 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Reference For more information about centralized conferencing, see Chapter 5, the section, “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-359. SIP Per-Line Parameters IP Phone UI Parameters Aastra Web UI Parameters Configuration File Parameters SIP Per-Line Authentication Parameters Screen Name N/A User Name Display Name Auth Name Password N/A N/A • • • • • • • • Screen Name Screen Name 2 Phone Number Caller ID Authentication Name Password BLA Number Line Mode • • • • • • • • • sip lineN screen name sip lineN screen name 2 sip lineN user name sip lineN display name sip lineN auth name sip lineN password sip lineN bla number sip lineN mode sip lineN vmail Proxy Server Proxy Port Backup Proxy Server Backup Proxy Port Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Port Registrar Server Registrar Port Backup Registrar Server Backup Registrar Port Registration Period Conference Server URI (see Chapter 5) • • • • • • • • • • • • • sip lineN proxy ip sip lineN proxy port sip lineN backup proxy ip sip lineN backup proxy port sip lineN outbound proxy sip lineN outbound proxy port sip lineN registrar ip sip lineN registrar port sip lineN backup registrar ip sip lineN backup registrar port sip lineN registration period sip lineN centralized conf (see Chapter 5) SIP Per-Line Network Parameters • • • • • • • • • • • • • ra f Proxy Server Proxy Port N/A N/A N/A N/A Registrar Server Registrar Port N/A N/A N/A N/A D • • • • • • • • • • • • t1 • • • • • • • • Reference For more information about centralized conferencing, see Chapter 5, the section, “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-359. 4-72 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Note: The "sip vmail" and "sip lineN vmail" parameters are configurable using the configuration files only. To configure voicemail see Chapter 5, the section, “Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only)” on page 5-308. Specific sets of SIP parameters are inter-dependent with each other. To prevent conflicting parameter values from being applied, per-line values always take precedence over the corresponding set of global values. t1 For example, if a parameter value is configured for one of the per-line sets, all parameters from that set are applied and all parameters from the corresponding global section are ignored, even if some of the parameters within the global set are not defined in the per-line set. SIP Precedence Example ra f The following example shows the SIP proxy feature and example schema for storage and parsing of the SIP configuration parameters. The following SIP configuration is assumed: D # SIP network block sip proxy ip: 10.30.11.154 sip proxy port: 5060 sip registrar ip: 10.44.122.37 sip registrar port: 4020 sip line3 proxy ip: siparator.vonage.com sip line3 proxy port: 0 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-73 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Line3 specifies per-line values for proxy IP address and proxy port, so the phone uses those parameter values for SIP calls made on that line. However, because those parameters are part of the SIP network block, the phone does not apply any of the global SIP network block parameters. So even though the global parameters configure a SIP registrar, Line3 on the phone ignores all global network block parameters. Since line3 does not contain a per-line SIP registrar entry, the phone does not use a registrar for that line. Note: Global SIP parameters apply to all lines unless overridden by a per-line configuration. D ra f t1 Per-line settings are configurable for lines 1 through 7. 4-74 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Backup Proxy/Registrar Support The IP phones support a backup SIP proxy and backup SIP registrar feature. If the primary server is unavailable, the phone automatically switches to the backup server allowing the user's phone to remain in service. How it Works All SIP registration messages are sent to the primary registrar first. If the server is unavailable, then a new registration request is sent to the backup registrar. This also applies to registration renewal messages, which try the primary server before the backup. t1 Similarly, any outgoing calls attempt to use the primary proxy first, then the backup if necessary. In addition, subscriptions for BLF, BLA, and explicit MWI can also use the backup proxy when the primary fails. Outgoing calls and the previously mentioned subscriptions behave the same as registrations, where the primary proxy is tried before the backup. ra f You can configure the backup SIP proxy on a global or per-line basis via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. SIP Server (SRV) Lookup D The SIP SRV Lookup feature allows you to configure the IP phone to perform a DNS server lookup on a SIP proxy, a SIP registrar, or a SIP outbound proxy. The IP phone performs an SRV lookup when the IP address of the server is FQDN and the corresponding port is 0. For example, if the phone is configured with sip proxy ip of "ana.aastra.com", and sip proxy port of "0", the SRV lookup may return multiple servers, based on the priorities if one is selected as primary and others are selected as secondary. However, if the IP address is an FQDN and the corresponding server port is non-zero, then the phone performs a DNS "A" Name Query to resolve the FQDN into dot notation form. If the IP address is a valid dot notation and the port is zero, then a default port 5060 is used. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-75 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings You can configure SRV lookup using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and <mac>.cfg) only. The parameters to use are: • sip proxy ip • sip proxy port Configuring Basic SIP Network Settings (optional) You can configure SIP settings using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files t1 Note: To configure the SIP settings per-line, use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Basic, Global Settings” on page A-67 or “SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings” on page A-76 D Note: You can set global configuration only using the IP Phone UI. 4-76 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select SIP Settings. on the phone to enter the Options List. Configuring Proxy IP and Proxy Port Select Proxy IP/Port. 6 Enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Proxy Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0. 7 Enter a Proxy Port number in the Proxy Port field for accessing the SIP proxy server. Default is 0. 8 Press Done to save the changes. t1 5 ra f Configuring Registrar IP and Registrar Port 9 Select Registrar IP/Port. 10 Enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Registrar Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0. D A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone. If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on. 11 Enter a Registrar Port number in the Registrar Port field for accessing the SIP registrar server. Default is 0. 12 Press Done to save the changes. Enabling/Disabling the Use of the Registrar Server 13 Select SIP Register. 14 Press Change to set Register to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable). Default is “Yes”. This parameter enables/disables the IP phone to register on the network. 15 Press Done to save the changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-77 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings IP Phone UI Action 16 Select User Name to enter the username in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone, and for registering the phone at the registrar. Note: The IP phones allow usernames containing dots (“.”). You can also enter the same user name for different registrar and proxy IP addresses. 17 Press Done to save the changes. 18 Select Display Name to enter the name used in the display name field of the "From SIP" header field. 19 Press Done to save the changes. 20 Select Screen Name and enter the name to display on the idle screen. 21 Press Done to save the changes. 22 Select Authentication Name to enter the authorization name used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request. 23 Press Done to save the changes. 24 Select Password to enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy. Note: The IP phones accept numeric passwords only. 25 Press Done (3 times) to save the changes. ra f t1 Step Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings Select Restart. D 26 4-78 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 For global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Settings. D ra f t1 Step 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-79 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action D ra f t1 Or, for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9). To configure SIP authentication settings: 2 4-80 In the "Screen Name" field, enter the screen name that displays on the idle screen. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 3 In the "Screen Name 2" field, enter the text you want to display on the phone under the “Screen Name” on the idle screen. Notes: 1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network Disconnected”, the Screen Name 2 value does not display. 2. Symbol characters are allowed (such as “#”). 3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates the text to fit the display. Figure 1 Services Dir Callers Icom t1 9480i, 9480i CT 6755i, 6757i 6757i CT Screen Name Screen Name 2 John Smith Lab Phone L1 D ra f Sat Jan 1 12:18am Figure 2 9143i, 6751i, 6753i 4 1 John Burns Lab Phone Sat Jun 8 2:55pm Screen Name Screen Name 2 In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone. 5 In the "Caller ID" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone. 6 In the "Authentication Name" field, enter the name used in the username field of the Authorization header of the SIP REGISTER request. 7 In the "Password" field, enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy. Note: The IP phones accept numeric passwords only. 8 In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all IP phones. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-81 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 9 In the "Line Mode" field, select "Generic" for normal mode, "BroadSoft SCA" for a BroadWorks network, or "Nortel" for a Nortel network. To configure SIP network settings: 10 In the "Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name of the SIP proxy server. 11 In the "Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the SIP proxy server. 12 In the "Backup Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup proxy server. In the "Backup Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the backup proxy server. In the "Outbound Proxy Server" field, enter the SIP outbound proxy server IP address or fully qualified domain name. This parameter allows all SIP messages originating from a line on the IP phone, to be sent to an outbound proxy server. t1 13 14 ra f Note: If you configure an outbound proxy and registrar for a specific line, and you also configure a global outbound proxy and registrar, the IP phone uses the global configuration for all lines except line 1. Line 1 uses the outbound proxy and registrar that you configured for that line. In the "Outbound Proxy Port" field, enter the port on the IP phone that allows SIP messages to be sent to the outbound proxy server. 16 In the "Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the SIP registrar server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone. D 15 If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on. 17 In the "Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the Registrar. 18 In the "Backup Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup registrar server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone. If the Backup Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on. 19 In the "Backup Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the backup registrar. 20 In the "Registration Period" field, enter the requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar. 4-82 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 21 To enter a value in the “Conference Server URI” field, see Chapter 5, the section, “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-359. 22 Click D ra f t1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-83 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Advanced SIP Settings (optional) Advanced SIP Settings on the IP Phone allow you to configure specific features on the phone. The following table provides a list of Advanced SIP Settings that you can configure using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. Configuration File Parameters Explicit MWI Subscription Explicit MWI Subscription Period sip explicit mwi subscription sip explicit mwi subscription period Missed Call Summary Subscription (global) Missed Call Summary Subscription (per-line) (see Chapter 6) sip missed call summary subscription (global) sip lineN missed call summary subscription (per-line) (see Chapter 6) Missed Call Summary Subscription Period (see Chapter 6) sip missed call summary subscription period (see Chapter 6) AS-Feature-Event Subscription (global) AS-Feature-Event Subscription (per-line) (see Chapter 6) t1 Aastra Web UI Parameters sip as-feature-event subscription (global) sip lineN as-feature-event subscription (per-line) (see Chapter 6) ra f AS-Feature Event Subscription Period (see Chapter 6) sip as-feature-event subscription period (see Chapter 6) sip send mac (see Chapter 6) Send Line Number in REGISTER Message (see Chapter 6) sip send line (see Chapter 6) Session Timer sip session timer D Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message (see Chapter 6) T1 Timer T2 Timer sip T1 timer sip T2 timer Transaction Timer sip transaction timer Transport Protocol sip transport protocol Local SIP UDP/TCP Port (see page 4-37) sip local port (see page 4-37) Local SIP TLS Port (see page 4-37) sip local tls port (see page 4-37) Registration Failed Retry Timer sip registration retry timer Registration Timeout Retry Timer sip registration timeout retry timer Registration Renewal Timer sip registration renewal timer BLF Subscription Period (see Chapter 5) sip blf subscription period (see Chapter 5) 4-84 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Configuration File Parameters ACD Subscription Period (see Chapter 5) sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5) BLA Subscription Period (see Chapter 5) sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5) Blacklist Duration (see Chapter 6) sip blacklist duration (see Chapter 6) Whitelist Proxy (see Chapter 6) sip whitelist (see Chapter 6) XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6) XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6) D ra f t1 Aastra Web UI Parameters 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-85 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Reference Refer to Appendix A,“Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-92 for a description of each of the above parameters. For more information about Blacklist Duration and Whitelist Proxy, see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features.” Configuring Advanced SIP Settings Use the following procedures to configure the advanced SIP settings on the IP phone. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-92. 4-86 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings . Aastra Web UI Step Action 1 D ra f t1 For Global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. Or for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-87 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 Enable the "Explicit MWI Subscription" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled). If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider, a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells the user there is a message on the IP Phone. 3 If you enable the “Explicit MWI Subscription” field, then in the “Explicit MWI Subscription Period” field, enter the requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times out. The phone re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends. Default is 86400. 4 Enable the “Missed Call Summary Subscription” field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled). t1 This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call Summary Subscription” on page 6-13. 5 ra f Note: The “Missed Call Summary Subscription” feature is configurable on a global or per-line basis. If you enable the “Missed Call Summary Subscription” field, then in the “Missed Call Summary Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses the Missed Calls Summary Subscription feature. Default is 86400. D For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call Summary Subscription” on page 6-13. Note: The “Missed Call Summary Subscription Period” is configurable on a global basis only. 6 Enable the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled). This feature enables or disables the specified line with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD features. For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription” on page 6-17. Note: The “AS-Feature-Event Subscription ” feature is configurable on a global or per-line basis. 4-88 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 7 If you enable the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” field, then in the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, between resubscribing. If the phone does not resubscribe in the time specified for this parameter, it loses subscription. Default is 3600. For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription” on page 6-17. 8 Enable the “Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message” and the “Send Line Number in REGISTER Message” fields by checking the check boxes. (Disable these fields by unchecking the check boxes. Default is disabled for both fields). t1 For more information about these message features, see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages” on page 6-5. Note: The “AS-Feature-Event Subscription Period” feature is configurable on a global basis only In the "Session Timer" field, enter the time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic re-INVITE requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE requests to maintain the status' of the connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details. 10 In the "Timer 1 and Timer 2" fields, enter a time, in milliseconds, that will apply to an IP phone session. These timers are SIP transaction layer timers defined in RFC 3261. ra f 9 11 D Timer 1 is an estimate of the round-trip time (RTT). Default is 500 msec. Timer 2 represents the amount of time a non-INVITE server transaction takes to respond to a request. Default is 4 seconds. In the "Transaction Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, that the phone allows the call server (registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends. Valid values are 4000 to 64000. Default is 4000. Note: If the phone does not receive a response in the amount of time designated for this parameter, the phone assumes the message has timed out. 12 In the "Transport Protocol" field, select a transport protocol to use when sending SIP Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packets. Valid values are User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), UDP, TCP, Transport Layer Security (TLS) or Persistent TLS. The value “UDP” is the default. For more information about TLS, see “RTP Encryption” on page 4-97 and Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-26. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-89 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 13 In the "Local SIP UDP/TCP Port" field, specify the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the phone sends SIP messages. Default is 5060. For more information about this feature, see the section, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on page 4-37. 14 In the "Local SIP TLS Port" field, specify the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone sends SIP messages. Default is 5061. For more information about this feature, see the section, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on page 4-37. In the " Registration Failed Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits between registration attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar. Valid values are 30 to 1800. Default is 1800. 16 In the " Registration Timeout Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits until it re-attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out. Valid values are 30 to 214748364. Default is 120. 17 In the " Registration Renewal Timer" field, enter the length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration, that the phone renews registrations. ra f t1 15 D For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20 seconds before the registration is due to expire, a new REGISTER message is sent to the registrar to renew the registration. Valid values are 0 to 214748364. Default is 15. 18 The “BLF Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 3600 seconds. This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. For information about setting the “BLF Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section, “BLF Subscription Period” on page 5-176. 19 (For Sylantro Servers) The “ACD Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 3600 seconds. This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. For information about setting the “ACD Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section, “ACD Subscription Period” on page 5-198. 4-90 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 20 The “BLA Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 300 seconds. This feature sets the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is specified, the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds. For information about setting the “BLA Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section, “BLA Subscription Period” on page 5-198. 21 (For Broadsoft Servers) The “Blacklist Duration” field is enabled by default with a value of 300 seconds (5 minutes). Valid values are 0 to 9999999. t1 This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. Note: The value of “0” disables the blacklist feature. 22 ra f For information about setting the “Blacklist Duration”, see Chapter 6, the section, “Blacklist Duration” on page 6-22. Enable the "Whitelist Proxy" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled). D When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server. For information about setting the “Whitelist Proxy”, see Chapter 6, the section, “Whitelist Proxy” on page 6-24. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-91 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 23 Enable the "XML SIP Notify" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled). Enabling this parameter allows the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message. Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the phone rejects the message. Click to save your changes. D ra f 24 t1 For information about setting this feature, see Chapter 5, the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-339. 4-92 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used as the bearer path for voice packets sent over the IP network. Information in the RTP header tells the receiver how to reconstruct the data and describes how the bit streams are packetized (i.e. which codec is in use). Real-time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP) allows endpoints to monitor packet delivery, detect and compensate for any packet loss in the network. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) and H.323 both use RTP and RTCP for the media stream, with User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as the transport layer encapsulation protocol. t1 Note: If RFC2833 relay of DTMF tones is configured, it is sent on the same port as the RTP voice packets. The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The following DTMF tones are supported: • Support signals 0-9, #, * • Support durations up to 5 seconds ra f You can set the following parameters for RTP on the IP Phones: Aastra Web UI Parameters RTP Port Configuration File Parameters sip rtp port D Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729) sip use basic codecs Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF sip out-of-band dtmf Customized Codec Preference List sip customized codec DTMF Method (global and per-line settings) sip dtmf method (global and per-line settings) RTP Encryption (global and per-line settings) sip srtp mode (global and per-line settings) Silence Suppression sip silence suppression 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-93 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings RTP Port RTP is described in RFC1889. The UDP port used for RTP streams is traditionally an even-numbered port, and the RTCP control is on the next port up. A phone call therefore uses one pair of ports for each media stream. The RTP port is assigned to the first line on the phone, and is then incremented for each subsequent line available within the phone to provided each line a unique RTP port for its own use. On the IP phone, the initial port used as the starting point for RTP/RTCP port allocation can be configured using "RTP Port Base". The default RTP base port on the IP phones is 3000. t1 For example, if the RTP base port value is 5000, the first voice patch sends RTP on port 5000 and RTCP on port 5001. Additional calls would then use ports 5002, 5003, etc. ra f You can configure the RTP port on a global-basis only, using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729) D CODEC is an acronym for COmpress-DECompress. It consists of a set of instructions that together implement one or more algorithms. In the case of IP telephony, these algorithms are used to compress the sampled speech data, to decrease the content's file size and bit-rate (the amount of network bandwidth in kilobits per second) required to transfer the audio. With smaller file sizes and lower bit rates, the network equipment can store and stream digital media content over a network more easily. Aastra IP phones support the International Telecommunications Union (ITU) transmission standards for the following CODECs: 4-94 • Waveform CODECs: G.711 pulse code modulation (PCM) with a-Law or u-Law companding • Parametric CODEC: G.729a conjugate structure - algebraic code excited linear prediction (CS_ACELP). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings All Codecs have a sampling rate of 8,000 samples per second, and operate and operate in the 300 Hz to 3,700 Hz audio range. The following table lists the default settings for bit rate, algorithm, packetization time, and silence suppression for each Codec, based on a minimum packet size. Default Codec Settings. Bit Rate Algorithm Packetizatio n Time Silence Suppression G.711 a-law 64 Kb/s PCM 30 ms enabled G.711 u-law 64 Kb/s PCM 30 ms enabled G.729a 8 Kb/s CS-ACELP 30 ms enabled CODEC t1 You can enable the IP phones to use a default "basic codec" set, which consists of the set of codecs and packet sizes shown above. Or you can instead configure a custom set of codecs and attributes instead of using the defaults. ra f Note: The basic and custom codec parameters apply to all calls, and are configured on a global-basis only using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. D Customized Codec Preference List You can also configure the IP phones to use preferred Codecs. To do this, you must enter the payload value (payload), the packetization time in milliseconds (ptime), and enable or disable silence suppression (silsupp). Payload is the codec type to be used. This represents the data format carried within the RTP packets to the end user at the destination. You can enter payload values for G.711 a-law, G.711 u-law, and G.729a. Ptime (packetization time) is a measurement of the duration of PCM data within each RTP packet sent to the destination, and hence defines how much network bandwidth is used for transfer of the RTP stream. You enter the ptime values for the customized Codec list in milliseconds. (See table below). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-95 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Silsupp is used to enable or disable silence suppression. Voice Activity Detection (VAD) on the IP phones is used to determine whether each individual packet contains useful speech data. Enabling silsupp results in decreased network bandwidth, by avoiding sending RTP packets for any frame where no voice energy was detected by the VAD. You must enter the values for this feature in list form as shown in the following example: payload=8;ptime=10;silsupp=on,payload=0;ptime=10;silsupp=off The valid values for creating a Codec preference list are as follows. Customized Codec Settings Attribute 0 for G.711 u-Law 8 for G.711 a-Law 18 for G.729a t1 payload Value 5, 10, 15, 20.......90 silsupp on off ra f ptime (in milliseconds) D You can specify a customized Codec preference list on a global-basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Out-of-Band DTMF The IP phones support out-of-band Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) mode according to RFC2833. In the Aastra Web UI, you can enable or disable this feature as required. The "out-of-band DTMF" is enabled by default. In out-of-band mode, the DTMF audio is automatically clamped (muted) and DTMF digits are not sent in the RTP packets. You can configure out-of-band DTMF on a global-basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. 4-96 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings DTMF Method A feature on the IP phone allows you to select the DTMF method that the phone uses to send DTMF digits from the IP phone via INFO messages. You can set the DTMF method as Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), SIP info, or both. You can configure the DTMF method on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. RTP Encryption t1 The IP Phones include support for Secure Real-time Transfer Protocol (SRTP), using Session Description Protocol Security (SDES) key negotiation, for encryption and authentication of RTP/RTCP messages sent and received by the Aastra IP phones on your network. As administrator, you specify the global SRTP setting for all lines on the IP phone. You can choose among three levels of SRTP encryption, as follows: SRTP Disabled (default): IP phone generates and receives nonsecured RTP calls. If the IP phone gets called from SRTP enabled phone, it ignores SRTP tries to answer the call using RTP. If the receiving phone has SRTP only enabled, the call fails; however, if it has SRTP preferred enabled, it will accept RTP call. • SRTP Preferred: IP phone generates RTP secured calls, and accepts both secured and non-secured RTP calls. If the receiving phone is not SRTP enabled, it sends non-secured RTP calls instead. D • ra f • SRTP Only: IP phone generates and accepts RTP secured calls only; all other calls are rejected (fail). You can override the global setting as necessary, configuring SRTP support on a per-line basis. This allows IP phone users to have both secured and unsecured lines operating on the same phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-97 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings If an SRTP enabled IP phone initiates a call, and the receiving phone is also SRTP enabled, the IP Phone UI displays a “lock” icon, indicating that the call is secure. If the receiving phone does not support SRTP, the IP phone will send unsecured RTP messages instead of SRTP encrypted messages. However in this case, the IP Phone UI does not display the lock icon - indicating a non-secure call. Note: If you enable SRTP, then you should also enable Transport Layer Security (TLS). This prevents capture of the key used for SRTP encryption. To enable TLC, set the Transport Protocol parameter (located on the Global SIP Settings menu) to TLS. You can configure SRTP on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. t1 Silence Suppression ra f In IP telephony, silence on a line (lack of voice) uses up bandwidth when sending voice over a packet-switched system. Silence suppression is encoding that starts and stops the times of silence in order to eliminate that wasted bandwidth. Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones. The phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value. D You can configure silence suppression on a global-basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. 4-98 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Configuring RTP Features Use the following procedures to configure the RTP features on the IP phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set for RTP features in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings” on page A-114. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select SIP Settings. 5 Select RTP Port Base to change the RTP port base setting. Default is 3000. 6 Press Done (2 times) to save the change. ra f t1 on the phone to enter the Options List. 7 D Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings Select Restart. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-99 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings. Global Settings. ra f t1 Step D Click on Advanced Settings->Line <N>->RTP Settings. Per-Line Settings. 4-100 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 Enter an RTP Port Base in the RTP Port field. Default is 3000. The RTP Port indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or router. The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port. Note: The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The following DTMF tones are supported: • Support signals 0-9, #, * • Support durations up to 5 seconds Enable the "Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box. Default is disabled). t1 3 Enabling this parameter allows the IP phone to use the basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP packets. The "Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF" field is enabled by default. Disable this field by unchecking the box. ra f 4 Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF according to RFC2833. Enter a "Customized Codec Preference List". For example, D 5 payload=8;ptime=10; silsupp=on, payload=0;ptime=10; silsupp=off Valid values are: Attribute Value payload 0 for G.711 u-Law 8 for G.711 a-Law 18 for G.729a ptime (in milliseconds) 5, 10, 15, 20.....90 silsupp on off For this parameter, you specify a customized codec list which allows you to use the preferred Codecs for this IP phone. Default for the “Customized Codec Preference List” is blank. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-101 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 6 Select a method to use from the “DTMF Method” list box. Valid values are RTP, SIP Info, Both. Default is RTP. Note: You can configure the DTMF Method on a global or per-line basis. 7 Select the type of RTP encryption to use from the “RTP Encryption” list box. Valid values are SRTP Disabled, SRTP Preferred, or SRTP Only. Default is SRTP Disabled. Note: You can configure RTP Encryption on a global or per-line basis. 8 The “Silence Suppression” field is enabled by default. Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Click to save your changes. D ra f 9 t1 When enabled, the phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value. 4-102 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Autodial Settings The IP phones include a feature called “Autodial”. When you configure Autodial on an IP phone, the phone automatically dials a preconfigured number whenever it is off-hook. Depending on the configuration you specify, the Autodial functions as either a “hotline”, or as a “warmline,” as follows: • Hotline (default): The IP phone immediately dials a preconfigured number when you lift the handset. • Warmline: The IP phone waits for a specified amount of time after you lift the handset before dialing a preconfigured number. If you do not dial a number within the time allotted, then the IP phone begins to dial the number. t1 By default, the Autodial feature functions as a hotline. If you want Autodial to function as a warmline, you can use the Autodial “time-out” parameter to specify the length of time (in seconds) the IP phone waits before dialing a preconfigured number. ra f As administrator, you configure Autodial globally, or on a per-line basis, for an IP phone. The line setting overrides the global setting. For example, you can disable Autodial on a specific line simply by setting the line’s autodial number parameter to empty (blank). D Note: IMPORTANT INFORMATION before configuring Autodial on your IP phone: • Any speeddial numbers that you configure on an IP phone are not affected by autodial settings. • If you configure autodial on your IP phone, any lines that function as hotlines do not accept conference calls, transferred calls, and/or intercom calls. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-103 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Configuring AutoDial Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters to configure Autodial using the configuration files: Global Configuration • sip autodial number • sip autodial timeout Per-Line Configuration sip lineN autodial number • sip lineN autodial timeout Configuration Files t1 • D ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Autodial Settings” on page A-119. 4-104 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Configuring Autodial Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure Autodial using the Aastra Web UI. By default, your IP phone uses the global settings you specify for Autodial for all lines on your IP phone. However, you can also configure Autodial on a per-line basis. Aastra Web UI Global Configuration Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Autodial Settings. 2 In the “Autodial Number” field, specify the SIP number that the IP phone dials whenever the IP phone is off-hook. An empty (blank) value disables autodial on the phone. D ra f t1 1 For example: 8500 3 In the “Autodial Timeout” field, specify a value, in seconds, for the timer as follows: • If you want the IP phone to autodial the number immediately (hotline) whenever the IP phone is off-hook, accept the default value of 0. • If you want to specify a length of time for the IP phone to wait before dialing the number, enter the length of time (in seconds). For example: 30 Valid values are 0 to 120. 4 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-105 IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Per-Line Configuration Click on Advanced Settings->Line <1 - 9>->Autodial Settings. 2 Do one of the following actions: 4-106 ra f • To allow this line to use the global autodial settings, click on the Use Global Settings parameter to enable it, then click to save your changes. • To specify a different autodial configuration for this specific line, disable the Use Global Settings parameter. Then proceed to step 3. D 3 t1 1 In the “Autodial Number” field, specify the SIP number for this line that the IP phone dials whenever the IP phone is off-hook as follows: • If set to -1, then the global autodial settings for this IP phone to this line. • If set to empty (blank), then disable Autodial on this line. • If set to a valid SIP number, dial the SIP number specified for this line. For example: 8500 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI 4 In the “Autodial Timeout” field, specify a value, in seconds, for the timer for this line as follows: • If you want the IP phone to autodial the number immediately (hotline) whenever the IP phone is off-hook, accept the default value of 0. • If you want to specify a length of time for the IP phone to wait before dialing the number, enter the length of time (in seconds). For example: 30 Valid values are 0 to 120. Click to save your changes. D ra f t1 5 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-107 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Server Protocol Configuration Server Protocol You can download new versions of firmware and configuration files from the configuration server to the IP phone using any of the following types of protocols: TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS. For each Protocol, you can specify the path for which the configuration files are located on the server. For HTTP and HTTPS, you can also specify the port number to use for downloading the phone configuration. For FTP, you can configure a Username and Password that are authenticated by the FTP server. t1 The TFTP setting is the default download protocol. You can configure the type of protocol that the IP phones use by setting it in the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. ra f Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain name for the TFTP, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server, your DHCP server must support download protocol according to RFC2131 and RFC1541 for Option 66. For more information, see this chapter, the section, “DHCP” on page 4-4. D Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol Use the following procedure to configure the configuration server protocol. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-18. 4-108 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Configuration Server Protocol IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Configuration Server. 5 Select Download Protocol. 6 Select from the following: • Use TFTP • Use FTP • Use HTTP • Use HTTPS ra f Default is “Use TFTP”. t1 on the phone to enter the Options List. The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server. Press Done (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) or Set (9143i, 6751i, 6753i) to save the changes. 8 From the Configuration Server menu, select from the following. This selection is dependent on the Download Protocol you selected in step 6. D 7 TFTP Settings FTP Settings HTTP Settings HTTPS Settings 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-109 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Server Protocol IP Phone UI Step Action 9 Enter the IP address of the protocol server (in dotted decimal format). Use the following table to configure the applicable server. TFTP Settings Select Primary TFTP Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the primary TFTP server. Press Done or Set to save the change. Select Pri TFTP Path. Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. t1 - Optional: You can also configure an Alternate TFTP server and Alternate TFTP Path if required by selecting the “Alternate TFTP” and the “Alt TFTP Path” parameters. ra f From the TFTP Settings menu, select Alternate TFTP and press Enter. Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the alternate TFTP server. Press Done or Set to save the change. Select Alt TFTP Path. Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. D - FTP Settings - Select FTP Server. Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the FTP server. Press Done or Set to save the change. Select FTP Path. Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required: - 4-110 Select FTP Username. Enter a username for accessing the FTP server. Press Done. Select FTP Password. Enter a password for accessing the FTP server. Press Done or Set. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Configuration Server Protocol IP Phone UI Step Action 9 (Cont’d) HTTP Settings Select HTTP Server Enter the IP address of the HTTP server. Press Done or Set. Select HTTP Path. Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. - Select HTTP Port. - Enter the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP. Default is 80. - Press Done or Set. t1 - HTTPS Settings ra f Select HTTP Client. Select Download Server. Enter the IP address of the HTTPS server. Press Done or Set. Select Download Path. Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTPS server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. - Press Done or Set. - Select Client Method. - Select the client method to use for downloading the configuration files (SSl 3.0 or TLS 1.0). For more information about which client method to use, see the section, “HTTPS Client/ Server Configuration” on page 4-40. - Select Download Port. - Enter the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTPS. Default is 443. D - 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-111 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Server Protocol IP Phone UI Step Action 9 (Cont’d) HTTPS Settings (Continued) - Select HTTPS Server. - Select HTTP->HTTPS. - For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Press Change to select “Do not redirect”or “Redirect”. Default is “Do not redirect”. Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS. Press Set. - Select XML HTTP POSTs. t1 - For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Press Change to select “Yes” and redirect HTTP to HTTPS. Select “No” to not direct HTTPS to HTTPS, Default is “No”. Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS. Press Done. ra f - For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Press Change to select “Do not block” or “Block”. Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP Phone. D - For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Press Change to select “Yes” and block XML HTTP Posts. Select “No” to unblock XML HTTP Posts. Default is “No”. Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP Phone. Reference For more information on configuring the HTTPS security method, HTTP to HTTPS redirect, and HTTPS server blocking for HTTP XML POSTs, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-40. 10 Press Done or Set repeatedly until the session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings. 11 Select Restart. 4-112 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Configuration Server Protocol Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server. D ra f t1 Step 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 4-113 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Server Protocol Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 Select the protocol from the "Download Protocol" list box. Valid values are TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS. Default is TFTP. The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server. Use the following table to configure the applicable server. TFTP t1 - Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "TFTP Server" field. - Enter the path name in the “TFTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. Optional: You can also configure an alternate TFTP server if required. If "Use Alternate TFTP" is enabled, you must also enter an IP address or qualified domain name for the alternate server in the "Alternate TFTP" field. You can also enter a path name for the alternate TFTP server in the “Alternate TFTP Path” field. ra f FTP D - Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "FTP Server" fiel.d. - Enter the path name in the “FTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required. - Enter a username for a user that will access the FTP server in the "FTP User Name" field. - Enter a password for a user that allows access to the FTP server in the "FTP Password" field. 4-114 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Configuration Server Protocol Aastra Web UI Step Action 3 HTTP - Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "HTTP Server" field. - Enter the path name in the “HTTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. - Enter the HTTP port number in the “HTTP Port” field that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP. t1 Optional: You can enter a list of users to be authenticated when they access the HTTP server in the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field. HTTPS ra f - Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "HTTPS Server" field. - Enter the path name in the “HTTPS Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. - Enter the HTTPS port number in the “HTTPS Port” field that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTPS. D Optional: You can enter a list of users to be authenticated when they access the HTTP server in the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field. Reference: For more information on configuring the HTTPS security method, HTTP to HTTPS redirect, and HTTPS server blocking for HTTP XML POSTs, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-40. 4 Click to save your settings. Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings. 5 Select Operation->Reset and click 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 . 4-115 D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Server Protocol 4-116 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Chapter 5 Configuring Operational Features About this chapter Introduction Topics ra f t1 The IP phones have specific operational features you can configure to customize your IP phone. This chapter describes each feature and provides procedures for configuring your phone to use these features. This chapter covers the following topics: D Topic Page Operational Features page 5-5 User Passwords page 5-5 Administrator Passwords page 5-9 Locking/Unlocking the Phone page 5-10 Defining an Emergency Dial Plan page 5-16 Time and Date page 5-19 Time Zone & DST page 5-20 Time Servers page 5-27 Backlight Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) page 5-30 Live Dial Pad* page 5-33 Language page 5-34 Locking IP Phone Keys page 5-49 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-1 IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page page 5-50 Local Dial Plan page 5-53 Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls page 5-59 Suppressing DTMF Playback page 5-63 Display DTMF Digits page 5-65 Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone page 5-67 Stuttered Dial Tone page 5-70 XML Beep Support page 5-72 Status Scroll Delay page 5-74 Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing page 5-76 Switch Focus to Ringing Line page 5-79 t1 Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i) page 5-81 Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call page 5-85 UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones) page 5-87 Message Waiting Indicator Line page 5-89 DND Key Mode page 5-91 Call Forward Mode page 5-93 Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) page 5-97 Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In page 5-102 Group Paging RTP Settings page 5-107 Key Mapping page 5-113 Ring Tones and Tone Sets page 5-117 Priority Alerting page 5-122 Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) page 5-129 Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys page 5-141 Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI page 5-164 Speeddial Prefixes page 5-167 Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key page 5-168 Busy Lamp Field (BLF) page 5-169 BLF Subscription Period page 5-176 D ra f Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout 5-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features About this chapter Topic Page page 5-178 Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i) page 5-184 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers) page 5-188 ACD Subscription Period page 5-198 BLA Subscription Period page 5-200 Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers) page 5-202 Do Not Disturb (DND) page 5-211 Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) page 5-222 BLA Support for Third Party Registration page 5-229 P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts page 5-230 BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) page 5-231 Park/Pick Up Key t1 BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys page 5-234 Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers) page 5-245 Call Forwarding page 5-249 ra f Callers List page 5-288 page 5-294 Missed Calls Indicator page 5-295 Directory List page 5-297 D Customizable Callers List and Services Keys Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) page 5-308 XML Customized Services page 5-311 Creating Customized XML Services on the IP Phones page 5-311 Configuring the Phone to use XML page 5-317 XML Get Timeout page 5-317 Configuring for XML on the IP Phone page 5-318 Using the XML Customized Service page 5-323 XML Action URIs page 5-325 Polling Action URIs page 5-334 Action URI Disconnected page 5-336 XML SIP Notify Events page 5-339 XML Softkey URI page 5-345 Web Applications Keys page 5-351 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-3 IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page XML Key Redirection page 5-352 Options Key Redirection (for Options Menu on all phones and Services Menu on 6751i) page 5-353 XML Applications and Off-Hook Interaction page 5-355 XML URI for Key Press Simulation page 5-355 page 5-356 Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments page 5-357 Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) page 5-359 “SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference (not applicable to the 6751i) page 5-363 Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS) page 5-365 Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module page 5-368 D ra f t1 XML Override for a Locked Phone 5-4 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Operational Features Description This section describes the operational features managed and configured by a System Administrator. User Passwords A user or an administrator can change the user passwords on the phone using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. t1 Use the following procedures to change the user password. ra f Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead. Configuring a User Password D Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password Settings” on page A-15. IP Phone UI 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select User Password. 3 Enter the current user password. 4 Press Enter. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-5 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI 5 Enter the new user password. Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead. Press Enter. 7 Re-enter the new user password. 8 Press Enter. A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen. t1 6 Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->User Password. 2 In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password. 3 In the "New Password" field, enter the new user password. D ra f 1 Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead. 4 In the "Password Confirm" field, enter the new user password again. 5 Click 5-6 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Resetting a User Password If a user forgets his password, either the user or an administrator can reset it so a new password can be entered. The reset user password feature resets the password to the factory default which is blank (no password). You can reset a user password using the Aastra Web UI only at the path Operation->Phone Lock. Use the following procedure to reset a user password. Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Phone Lock. D ra f t1 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-7 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 In the “Reset User Password” field, click . t1 The following screen displays: 3 In the “Current Password” field, leave this blank. 4 In the “New Password” field, enter a new password for the user. ra f Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead. 5 In the “Password Confirm” field, re-enter the new user password. 6 Click D to save the new user password and perform the next procedure. 5-8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Administrator Passwords An administrator can change the administrator passwords on the phone using the configuration files only. Procedure t1 An administrator can also assign a password for using the Options key on the IP phone. You turn this feature on and off by entering the "options password enabled" parameter followed by a valid value in the configuration files. Valid values are 0 (false; Options key not password protected), or 1 (true; Options key password protected). If this parameter is set to 1, a user has to enter a password at the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user is allowed to gain access to the Options Menu and no more password prompts display for other password protected screens. If the user fails to enter the correct password in three attempts, access to the Options Menu is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle screen. ra f Use the following procedure to change the administrator password. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password Settings” on page A-15. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-9 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Locking/Unlocking the Phone A user or administrator can lock a phone to prevent it from being used or configured. Once the phone is locked, the user or administrator can enter their password to unlock the phone. You can lock/unlock a phone using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. You can use any of the following methods to lock/unlock a phone: Using the IP Phone UI via the “Phone Lock” option in the Options Menu. • Using the Aastra Web UI via the path Operation->Phone Lock. • Using the configuration files to configure a key as “phonelock”, and then pressing the key to lock/unlock the phone. • Using the Aastra Web UI to configure a key as “Phone Lock”, and then pressing the key to lock/unlock the phone. t1 • D ra f Note: All of the methods above configure locking/unlocking of the phone dynamically. Once configured, the feature takes affect immediately. To unlock the phone, a user or administrator must enter their password. 5-10 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the IP Phone UI Use the following IP Phone UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and prevent it from being used or configured. IP Phone UI Step Action Lock the phone: 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select Phone Lock. The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays. Press Lock to lock the phone. t1 3 Unlock the phone: 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 ra f The prompt, “To unlock the phone...Password:” Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter. D The phone unlocks. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-11 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following Aastra Web UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and prevent it from being used or configured. Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Phone Lock. 2 D Lock the phone: ra f t1 1 In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click . The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message: “Phone is locked”. Unlock the phone: 3 Click on Operation->Phone Lock. 4 In the “Unlock the Phone?” field, click . The phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message: “Phone is unlocked”. 5-12 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring a Lock/Unlock Key Using the Configuration Files Using the configuration files, you can configure a key on the phone (softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key) to use as a lock/unlock key. In the configuration files, you assign the function of the key as “phonelock”. Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using the configuration files. Configuration Files Reference t1 To configure a softkey/programmable key as a lock/unlock key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. D ra f To use the lock/unlock softkey or programmable key, see “Using the Configured Lock/Unlock Key on the IP Phone” on page 5-15. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-13 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring a Lock/Unlock Key using the Aastra Web UI Using the Aastra Web UI, you can configure a key on the phone (softkey, programmable key, expansion module key) to use as a lock/unlock key. In the Aastra Web UI, you assign the function of the as “Phone Lock”. Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>. t1 1 D ra f Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is shown as an example. 2 5-14 Select a key you want to configure for locking/unlocking the phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 3 In the “Type” field, select Phone Lock from the list of options. 4 Click to save your changes. Using the Configured Lock/Unlock Key on the IP Phone After configuring a key as a lock/unlock key, refer to the following procedure to use the key on the IP phone. Step Action Lock the phone: 1 Press the LOCK softkey. t1 IP Phone UI Unlock the phone: Press the UNLOCK softkey. D 1 ra f The phone locks. The LED for the softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp illuminate steady ON. An “Unlock” label appears next to the softkey you just pressed. A password prompt displays. 2 Enter the user or administrator password and press ENTER. The phone unlocks. The LED for the softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp go OFF. The “Lock” label appears next to the softkey you just pressed. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-15 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Defining an Emergency Dial Plan Public telephone networks in countries around the world have a single emergency telephone number (emergency services number), that allows a caller to contact local emergency services for assistance when required. The emergency telephone number may differ from country to country. It is typically a three-digit number so that it can be easily remembered and dialed quickly. Some countries have a different emergency number for each of the different emergency services. You can specify the digits to dial on the IP phone for contacting emergency services. Once you specify the emergency number(s) on the phone, you can dial those numbers directly on the dial pad when required and the phone automatically dials to those emergency services. t1 Note: Contact your local phone service provider for available emergency numbers in your area. ra f The following table describes the default emergency numbers on the IP phones. Emergency Number Description 911 A United States emergency number 999 An international emergency telephone number for GSM mobile phone networks. In all European Union countries it is also the emergency telephone number for both mobile and fixed-line telephones. D 112 A United Kingdom emergency number 110 5-16 A police and/or fire emergency number in Asia, Europe, Middle East, and South America. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Emergency Dial Plan and Pattern Matching The IP Phones support emergency dialing using pattern matching and prepend dial plan functionality. There are two ways to dial a number on the phone: • dialing digit-by-digit (i.e., select line and dial) • dialing by string (i.e., pre-dial then go off-hook) When a user dials digit-by-digit, the phone adds every digit to a dialed string and checks against the dial plan. If the phone is not locked, it checks against the regular dial plan. If the phone is locked, it checks against the emergency dial plan. t1 When a user dials by string, (pre-dial, speed-dial, etc., and then goes off-hook), and the phone is not locked, it checks to see if the number matches the emergency dial plan. If it doesn’t match, it blocks the call from going through. If the phone is locked, and the number matches the emergency dial plan it allows the call to go through. ra f Adding a pre-pend to a dial plan also works with both dialing digit-by-digit and dialing by string. Limitation • D The following is a limitation for emergency dial plans with pattern matching: Secondary dial tone is not supported. You can set the emergency dial plan via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring an Emergency Dial Plan Use the following procedures to specify the numbers to use on your phone for dialing emergency services in your area. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Emergency Dial Plan Settings” on page A-16. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-17 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Phone Lock. 2 In the “Emergency Dial Plan” field, enter the number used in your local area to contact emergency services. For multiple numbers, enter a “|” between each emergency number. D For example: 911|110. ra f t1 1 Default for this field is "x+#|xx+*". You can enter up to 512 characters in this field. 3 5-18 Click to save the emergency dial plan to your phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Time and Date In addition to enabling/disabling the time server, you can also set the time and date, set the time and date format, set the time zone, and set daylight savings time on the IP phones. You configure these features using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The following table identifies which method of configuration applies to each feature. Method of configuration Set Time IP Phone UI Set Time Format Configuration Files IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Set Date IP Phone UI Set Date Format Configuration Files IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI IP Phone UI Configuration Files ra f Set Time Zone t1 Feature Set Daylight Savings Time IP Phone UI Configuration Files D Daylight Savings Time (DST) Information The Aastra IP Phones incorporate the federally mandated DST observance change. This change became affective starting in 2007. The US has made a change to its daylight savings time observance starting in 2007. The Energy Policy Act of 2005 mandates that DST will now begin at 2:00 A.M. on the second Sunday in March and revert to Standard time on the first Sunday in November. Note: In previous years, the DST began on the first Sunday of April and ended on the first Sunday of October. The changes to daylight savings time applies to the U.S. and Canada, but may impact other countries outside North America. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-19 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Time Zone & DST There are two ways you can set the time zone on the IP Phones. First Method - You can set a time zone using the Time Zone option in the IP Phone UI or you can use the “time zone name” parameter in the configuration files. Both methods allow you to enter a value from the Time Zone table. The list of time zone names is provided in the table in Appendix A, the section, “Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” on page A-47. The following is an example: time zone name: US-Eastern t1 Second Method - You can use the “time zone name” parameter in the configuration files, and specify a value of “custom” for this parameter. This method allows you to customize the time zone for your area using additional configuration parameters. The following is an example using relative time for EST: ra f time zone name: custom D The following table identifies the additional parameters you can enter in the configuration files if you want to customize your time zone. Custom Configuration File Parameter time zone minutes Description Example The number of minutes the time zone is custom time zone minutes: 300 offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). This can be positive (West of the Prime Meridian) or negative (East of the Prim Meridian). Eastern Standard Time (EST) has a value of 300. dst minutes The number of minutes to add during dst minutes: 60 Daylight Saving Time. Valid values are a positive integer between 0 to 60. dst [start|end] relative date Specifies how to interpret the start and dst [start|end] relative date: 1 end day, month, and week parameters absolute (0) or relative (1). 5-20 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Custom Configuration File Parameter Description Example Absolute Time (not applicable to Eastern Standard Time (EST)) The month that DST starts. Valid values dst start month: 3 are 1 to 12 (January to December). dst end month The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to December). dst end month: 4 dst [start |end] week Not applicable to absolute time. N/A dst start day The day of the month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 31. dst start day: 15 dst end day The day of the month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 31. dst end day: 31 dst start hour The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23. dst start hour: 5 dst end hour The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23. dst end hour: 23 t1 dst start month Relative Time dst end month The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to December). dst end month: 5 The week in the specified month in which DST starts. Valid value is a positive or negative integer from 1 to 5. dst start week: 2 D dst start week The month that DST starts. Valid values dst start month: 4 are 1 to 12 (January to December). ra f dst start month 1 = first full week of month -1 = last full week of month 2 = second full week of month . . . -5 -= fifth full week of month 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-21 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Custom Configuration File Parameter dst end week Description Example The week in the specified month in which DST ends. Valid value is a positive or negative integer from 1 to 5. dst end week: -1 1 = first full week of month -1 = last full week of month 2 = second full week of month . . . -5 -= fifth full week of month The day of the specified week in the dst start day: 2 specified month that DST starts on. Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7. t1 dst start day The day of the specified week in the dst end day: 7 specified month that DST ends on. Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7. D dst end day ra f 1 = Sunday 2 = Monday . . . 7 = Saturday 1 = Sunday 2 = Monday . . . 7 = Saturday dst start hour The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23. dst start hour: 10 dst end hour The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23. dst end hour: 23 5-22 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Example 1 The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the configuration files using relative time (for EST): time zone name: custom dst [start|end] relative date: 1 #relative time zone minutes: 300 dst minutes: 60 Example 2 The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the configuration files using absolute time: DST month: 11 #November week: 1 #first full week day: 1 #Sunday D #End of dst end dst end dst end DST month: 3 #March week: 2 #second full week day: 1 #Sunday ra f #start of dst start dst start dst start t1 time zone name: custom dst [start|end] relative date: 0 #absolute Configuring Time and Date Using the Configuration Files Use the following information to set a time and date, time and date format, time zone, and daylight savings time using the configuration files.. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date Settings” on page A-45. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-23 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Time and Date Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time zone, and daylight savings time using the IP Phone UI. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List. Set Time and Time Format: Select Time and Date. 3 Select Set Time. 4 Using the keys on the keypad, enter a time to set on the IP phone. 5 Press Done to save the time you entered. 6 Select Time Format. Valid values are 12hr and 24hr. t1 2 ra f Note: The default Time Format is 12hr. 7 Press Change to toggle between 24hr and 12hr format. 8 Press Done to save the Time Format you selected. Set Date and Date Format: Select Set Date. 10 Using the keys on the keypad, enter a date to set on the IP phone. 11 Press Done to save the date you entered. 12 Select Date Format. 13 Select a date format from the list of options. Valid values are: • WWW MMM DD (default) • DD-MMM-YY • YYYY-MM-DD • DD/MM/YYYY • DD/MM/YY • DD-MM-YY • MM/DD/YY • MMM DD D 9 Note: The default Date Format is WWW MMM DD (Day of Week, Month, Day). 5-24 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 14 Press Done to save the Date Format. Set Time Zone: 15 Select Time Zone. 16 For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Press * to display a list of Time Zone options. 17 Select a Time Zone from the list of options. For valid values, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date Settings” on page A-45. Note: The default Time Zone is US-Eastern. Press Done to save the Time Zone you selected. Set Daylight Savings Time: t1 18 Select Daylight Savings. 20 Select a Daylight Savings time from the list of options. Valid values are: • OFF • 30 min summertime • 1 hr summertime • automatic ra f 19 21 D Note: The default for Daylight Savings is Automatic. Press Done to save the Daylight Savings value you selected. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-25 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Time and Date Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time zone, and daylight savings time using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting. 2 In the “Time Format” field, select the time format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are: • 12h (12 hour format) (default) • 24h (24 hour format). ra f t1 1 3 D Note: The time displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field. In the “Date Format” field, select the date format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are: • WWW MMM DD (default) • DD-MMM-YY • YYYY-MM-DD • DD/MM/YYYY • DD/MM/YY • DD-MM-YY • MM/DD/YY • MMM DD Note: The date displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field. 4 5-26 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Time Servers A time server is a computer server that reads the actual time from a reference clock and distributes this information to the clients in a network. The time server may be a local network time server or an internet time server. The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is the most widely used protocol that distributes and synchronizes time in the network with the time on the time server. On the IP phones, you can enable or disable a Time Server to be used to synchronize time on the phones with the Timer Server you specify. An Administrator can use the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, or configuration files to enable/disable the Time Server and specify a Time Server 1, Timer Server 2, and/ or Time Server 3. A User can enable/disable the Time Server using the IP Phone UI or Aastra Web UI only. The Time Server is enabled by default. t1 Setting Time Server Using the Configuration Files ra f Use the following procedure to enable/disable the Time Server and optionally set the IP Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time Server Settings” on page A-52. Setting Time Server Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally set the IP Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3. IP Phone UI Step Action Enable/the Time Server by specifying Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3: 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select Preferences->Time and Date->Time Server. 3 Select Timer Server 1, Time Server 2, and/or Time Server 3. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-27 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 4 Enter the IP address of the Time Server, in dotted decimal format. Use the available softkeys to help you enter the information. 5 Click to save your changes. Setting Time Server Using the Aastra Web UI t1 Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally set the IP Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting. D ra f 1 To enable/disable Time Server: 2 5-28 The “NTP Time Server” field is enabled by default. If you need to disable the Time Server, uncheck the box. The Time Server 1, 2, and 3 fields are grayed out when disabled. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI To set Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3: 3 Note: The “Time Server” field must be enabled to enter values in the “Time Server 1, 2, and 3” fields. In the “Time Server 1”, “Time Server 2”, and/or “Time Server 3” field(s), enter the IP address of the Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3 in your network, in dotted decimal format. Default for this field is 0.0.0.0. For example, 132.234.5.4 Click to save your changes. D ra f t1 4 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-29 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Backlight Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) The 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT have a backlight feature that allows you to turn the backlight on the LCD: • Off - Backlight is always OFF. • Auto (Default)- Automatically turns ON the backlight when the phone is in use, and then automatically turns OFF the backlight when the phone is idle after a specified length of time. “The Auto” setting sets the phone to turn off the backlighting after a period of inactivity. The period of time that the phone waits before turning the backlight off is also configurable. t1 You can set this backlight feature using the configuration files and the IP Phone UI. Configuring the Backlight Mode Using the Configuration Files ra f Use the following information to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on the IP Phones. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Backlight Mode Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)” on page A-63. Configuring the Backlight Mode Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on the IP Phone using the IP Phone UI. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Preferences. 3 Select Display. 5-30 on the phone to enter the Options List. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 4 Select Backlight. Display 1. Contrast Level 2. Backlight - Select Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to select the Backlight status for your phone. Default is “Auto”. Valid options are: • Off • Auto (Default) ra f 5 t1 Done - D Note: Setting the Backlight to “Auto” displays an ADVANCED button for you to set the Auto timer. Backlight Off Auto Cancel Done - 6 If you select “Off”, press Done to save your setting. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-31 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 7 If you select “Auto”, press the Advanced softkey to set the automatic timer. Backlight Off Auto Using the keypad, enter the amount of seconds you want the phone to stay backlit when the phone is idle. Valid values are 1 to 120 minutes (2 hours). Default is 10 minutes. When this period of time is reached, the phone turns OFF the backlight. Use the "Backspace" and/or "Clear" softkeys to delete entries if required. ra f 8 t1 Advanced Cancel Done - D Backlight On Time 10 seconds - Backspace - Clear 9 5-32 Cancel Done - Press Done to save your setting. The setting applies immediately to the phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Live Dial Pad* The "Live Dialpad" option on the IP phone turns the Live Dial Pad mode ON or OFF. With live dial pad ON, the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed. With live dial pad OFF, if you dial a number while the phone is on-hook, lifting the receiver or initiates a call to that number. pressing the *Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider. A User can turn the “Live Dialpad” ON and OFF using the IP Phone UI only. A System Administrator can turn it ON and OFF using the IP Phone UI or the configuration files. t1 Enabling/Disabling Live Dialpad Using the Configuration Files Use the following procedure to enable/disable Live Dialpad on the IP Phones. Configuration Files ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Live Dialpad Settings” on page A-64. Enabling/Disabling Live Dialpad Using the IP Phone UI D Use the following procedure to enable/disable Live Dialpad on the IP Phones. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Preferences. 3 Select Live Dialpad. 4 On 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to toggle the live dialpad setting ON or OFF. on the phone to enter the Options List. On 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Press Change to toggle the live dialpad setting ON or OFF. 5 Press Done to save the setting. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-33 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Language The IP phones support several different languages. You can have the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web UI display in a specific language as required. When you set the language to use, all of the display screens (menus, services, options, configuration parameters, etc.) display in that language. The IP phones support the following languages: Associated Language File (included in the firmware file when downloaded from configuration server) Available Language Default (resides on the phone) German lang_de.txt (German)* Spanish lang_es.txt (Spanish) Mexican Spanish French Italian lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish) lang_fr.txt (French) lang_fr_ca.txt (Canadian French) ra f Canadian French t1 English lang_it.txt (Italian)* *German and Italian languages are not applicable to the 6757i CT cordless handset. D Loading Language Packs You make languages available to use on the phone by loading language packs from the configuration server to the local <MAC>.cfg configuration file. You can use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to perform the download. Each language pack consists of the IP Phone UI and Aastra Web UI translated in a specific language. Loading Language Packs via the Configuration File (<mac>.cfg) Using the configuration files, you specify a language pack to load in the following format: lang_<ISO 639>_<ISO 3166>.txt or lang_<ISO 639>.txt 5-34 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features where <ISO 639> is the language code specified in Standard ISO 639 (see Appendix A, the section, Language Codes (from Standard ISO 639) on page A-165) and <ISO 3166> is the country code specified in Standard ISO 3166 (see Country Codes (from Standard ISO 3166) on page A-165). The <ISO 3166> attribute is optional. Note: Adding/changing language packs can only be done at bootup of the IP phone. The default language (English) cannot be changed or removed. Example The following is an example of the parameters you would enter in the <MAC>.cfg file to load a French, Italian, German, and Spanish language pack to the IP phone. 1: 2: 3: 4: lang_fr_ca.txt lang_it.txt lang_de.txt lang_es_mx.txt t1 language language language language ra f The above entries in the <MAC>.cfg file tells the phone which language packs to load. When the language pack(s) have loaded, you must then use the configuration files IP Phone UI to specify which language to display on the IP phone. You must use the Aastra Web UI to specify the language to use in the Web UI. D References For more information about specifying the language to use, see the section, “Specifying the Language to Use” on page 5-37. For more information about language codes and country codes, see Appendix A, the section, “Language Pack Settings” on page A-164. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-35 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Loading Language Packs via the Aastra Web UI t1 Using the Aastra Web UI, you can specify a language pack to load using the parameters at Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings. D ra f You use the following fields in the Aastra Web UI to specify which language packs to load: Once the language pack is loaded to the phone, it is available for selection from either the configuration files, the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI. 5-36 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Specifying the Language to Use Once the language pack(s) have loaded, you must then specify which language to use on the phone. After the phone has booted up, you can specify which language(s) to use. You can use the configuration files and the IP Phone UI to specify the language for the IP Phone UI. You can use the Aastra Web UI to specify the files for the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedures to specify the language to use on the IP phone. Configuration Files t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Language Settings” on page A-162 and “Language Pack Settings” on page A-164. D ra f Notes: 1. If you specify the language to use on the phone via the configuration files, you must reboot the phone for the changes to take affect. 2. All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-37 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Language. 3 Select English (English), Français (French), Español (Spanish), Deutsch (German), Italiano (Italian). on the phone to enter the Options List. 4 Press Done to save the changes. t1 Notes: 1. Valid values for the 6757i CT cordless handset are English, French, and Spanish only. 2. All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. English is the default language and cannot be changed or removed. For more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-34. D ra f The change is dynamic. The IP phone UI displays all menu items in the language you chose. 5-38 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings. t1 1 2 ra f Loading the Language Pack In the “Language N” fields, enter the file name of the language pack you want to use to display a specific language in the Aastra Web UI. For example, you could enter the following in the “Language 1”, “Language 2”, “Language 3”, and “Language 4” fields to display the Aastra Web UI in French, Spanish, German, and Italian: D lang_de.txt lang_es.txt lang_es_mx.txt lang_fr.txt lang_fr_ca.txt lang_it.txt Note: You must have the language pack(s) already loaded to your phone in order to use them. For more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-34. For more information about language codes and country codes, see Appendix A, the section, “Language Pack Settings” on page A-164. 3 Click to save your changes. Specifying the Language to Use in the Aastra Web UI 4 After restarting your phone, log back in using the Aastra Web UI. 5 Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-39 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 6 In the “Webpage Language” field, select a language to apply to the Aastra Web UI. The IP phone supports the following languages: • • • • • English (default) French (European French and Canadian French) Spanish (European Spanish and Mexican Spanish) German Italian Notes: 1. Valid values for the 6757i CT cordless handset are English, French, and Spanish only. 2. All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. English is the default language and cannot be changed or removed. Click to save your changes. t1 7 D ra f The Aastra Web UI displays all screens in the language you chose. 5-40 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Specifying the Input Language to Use The 5i Series phones support text and character inputs in various languages (English, German, French, Spanish, and Italian). Inputting textual or character information into the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, and XML scripts can now be done in various languages using the keypad on the phone. The System Administrator and User can enable this feature using the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. An Administrator can also use the configuration files to enable this feature. Users can then use text and characters in a specific language when performing inputs on the phone. The following tables identify the language characters that a User can enter on the 5i Series phones that support the Input Language feature. t1 Keypad Input Alphabet Tables English Uppercase Characters Lowercase Characters 0 0 0 1 1.:;=_,-'&() 1.:;=_,-'&() 2 ABC2 abc2 3 DEF3 def3 GHI4 ghi4 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6 mno6 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8 tuv8 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 * * <SPACE> * <SPACE> # #/\@ #/\@ 5 D 4 ra f Key 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-41 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features French Uppercase Characters Lowercase Characters 0 0 0 1 1.:;=_,-'&() 1.:;=_,-'&() 2 ABC2ÀÂÇÁÅÆ abc2àâçáåæ 3 DEF3ÉÈÊË def3éèêë 4 GHI4ÎÏ ghi4îï 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÑÓÒÔÖ mno6ñóòôö 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8ÚÙÛÜ tuv8úùûü 9 WXYZ9 * * <SPACE> # #/\@ * <SPACE> Uppercase Characters Lowercase Characters 0 0 0 1 1.:;=_,-'&() 1.:;=_,-'&() ABC2ÁÀÇ abc2áàç DEF3ÉÈ def3éè 4 GHI4ÏÍ ghi4ïí 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÑÓÒ mno6ñóò 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8ÚÜ tuv8úü 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 * * <SPACE> * <SPACE> # #/\@ #/\@ 3 D Key 2 5-42 wxyz9 #/\@ ra f Spanish t1 Key 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features German Uppercase Characters Lowercase Characters 0 0 0 1 1.:;=_,-'&() 1.:;=_,-'&() 2 ABC2ÄÀ abc2äà 3 DEF3É def3é 4 GHI4 ghi4 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6Ö mno6ö 7 PQRS7ß pqrs7ß 8 TUV8Ü tuv8ü 9 WXYZ9 * * <SPACE> # #/\@ wxyz9 * <SPACE> #/\@ ra f Italian t1 Key Uppercase Characters Lowercase Characters 0 0 0 1 D Key 1.:;=_,-'&() 1.:;=_,-'&() ABC2ÀCÇ abc2àcç 3 DEF3ÉÈË def3éèë 4 GHI4 ghi4 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÓÒ mno6óò 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8Ù tuv8ù 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 * * <SPACE> * <SPACE> # #/\@ #/\@ 2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-43 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Language Input Using the Configuration Files An Administrator can specify the input language to use by entering a specific parameter in the configuration files. An Administrator must enter the following parameter to enable this feature: • input language Use the following procedures to specify the input language to use on the IP phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Language Settings” on page A-162. t1 Configuring Language Input Using the IP Phone UI Example ra f Once “Language Input” is enabled, an Administrator or User can change the input language on the phone using the IP Phone UI. The “Input Language” option appears under the Language option in the IP Phone UI. D Preferences 1. Tones 2. Contrast Level 3. Speed Dial Edit 4. Live Dialpad 5. Set Audio 6. Time and Date 7. Language - Select - Select Done - Language Option 5-44 Language 1. Screen Language 2. Input Language Done - Input Language Option Input Language 1. English 2. Français 3. Español 4. Deutsch 5. Italiano Cancel Done - Languages Available 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Use the following procedure to change the input language using the IP Phone UI. Aastra IP Phone UI Action 1 Press the Options key. 2 Select Language from the Options List. 3 Select Input Language from the Language List. 4 Select the language you want to use on the IP phone for inputting text and characters. Valid values are: • English (default) • Français (French) • Español (Spanish) • Deutsch (German) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset) • Italiano (Italian) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset) • Note: Available input languages are dependent on the configuration enabled by your System Administrator. 5 Press Done when you have selected a language. D ra f t1 Step 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-45 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Language Input Using the Aastra Web UI Once “Language Input” is enabled, an Administrator or User can also change the input language on the phone using the Aastra Web UI. The “Input Language” option appears at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings. Use the following procedure to set the input language using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->Language Settings. 2 Select a language from the "Input Language" field. Setting this field allows you to specify the language to use when entering text in the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or in XML applications on the phone. Valid values are: • English (default) • Français (French) • Español (Spanish) • Deutsch (German) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset) • Italiano (Italian) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset) D ra f t1 1 Note: Available input languages are dependent on the configuration enabled by your System Administrator. 3 5-46 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Language Input for an XML Application A System Administrator can enable input languages in XML applications using the <AastraIPPhoneInputScreen> object and the “inputLanguage” attribute. The “inputLanguage” attribute can have a value of any of the following: English French Français German Deutsch Italian Italiano Spanish Español t1 • • • • • • • • • The following is an example of an XML script using the “inputLanguage” attribute with a value of “German”. ra f XML Example: D <AastraIPPhoneInputScreen Beep=”Yes”inputLanguage=”German”> <Title>Login Screen</Title> <Prompt>User ID:</Prompt> <Prompt>Password:</Prompt> <URL>http://10.50.10.53/script.pl</URL> <Parameter>UserID</Parameter> <Parameter>Password</Parameter> <Default></Default> <AastraIPPhoneInputScreen> XML Screen Example: LOGON-Schirm Benutzername: Verwalter Kennwort: ********* Backspace Dot Cancel Done The screen above shows the user input of “Verwalter” in German. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-47 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Note: If a non-supported value is used with the “inputLanguage” attribute in the XML script, the phone uses the input language that was configured using the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. If the parameters are not set in the Aastra Web UI or the Phone UI, the phone uses the default of "English". UTF- 8 Codec for Multi-National Language Support The IP Phones and expansion modules include support for ISO 8859-2 (Latin2) of multi-national languages when displaying and inputing in the IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI. t1 Note: This feature is not applicable to the handsets on the 6757i CT and the 9480i CT. ra f UTF-8 is also compatible with XML encoding on the IP Phones. D The following table illustrates the Latin 2 character set now used on the IP Phones. 5-48 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Locking IP Phone Keys The IP phones allow you to lock or unlock programmable keys, softkeys, hard keys, cordless handset keys, and expansion keys (for expansion modules). When key locking is enabled, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous local configuration. A user cannot override the configuration of a locked key. You can lock and unlock keys using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. When viewing the locked key via the Aastra Web UI, the key is grayed out (disabled) and cannot be changed. Locking is dynamic for XML pushes. t1 You use the following “locking” parameters in the configuration files to lock the softkeys and programmable keys on the 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT. The locking parameters impact existing softkey and programmable key parameters as shown in the table below. Impacted Parameters Phone Model Affected softkeyN locked softkeyN type softkeyN label softkeyN value softkeyN line softkeyN states 9480i 9480i CT 6755i 6757i 6757i CT topsoftkeyN locked topsoftkeyN type topsoftkeyN label topsoftkeyN value topsoftkeyN line 6757i 6757i CT prgkeyN locked prgkeyN type prgkeyN value prgkeyN line 9143i 6753i 6755i featurekeyN locked featurekeyN type featurekeyN label 9480i CT 6757i CT expmodX keyN locked expmodX keyN type expmodX keyN value expmodX keyN line 5-series phones only (not applicable to the 6751i) D ra f Locking Parameter 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-49 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Note: The 9143i and 6753i IP phones prevent users from setting a speed dial key via the Phone UI on a key that has been locked. Locking the IP Phone Keys Use the following procedures to lock the softkeys and programmable keys on the IP phone. Configuration Files Reference t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys” on page A-226. ra f For more information about locking/unlocking the phones using the Phone UI and Aastra Web UI, see your applicable phone-specific User Guide. Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i) D There are 4 programmable keys on the 6753i phone located to the left of the paper label. Two additional keys (SAVE and DELETE) can be made programmable by the Administrator, providing a total of 6 programmable keys if required. Save Key Delete Key Directory Callers List Transfer Conference 6753i Programmable Keys 5-50 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features If a System Administrator unlocks the SAVE and DELETE keys, these keys can be configured with the same functions that are available for the other programmable keys. Only the System Administrator can unlock these keys. The Save key allows you to save entries to the Directory and perform a Save-To from the Callers List. It also allows you to save speeddial information to a programmable key. You can also use the Save key while using specific XML applications. The Delete key allows you to remove entries from the Directory List and Callers List. (Must enter the Directory or Callers list and select an entry, then press twice to delete entry). prgkey1 locked • prgkey2 locked ra f • t1 By default, the Save and Delete keys are locked so that a user can use them for saving and deleting only. An Administrator can unlock these keys using the configuration files, allowing the keys to be programmed with other functions if required. An Administrator can use the following parameters in the configuration file to lock and unlock the Save and Delete keys: The value of "0" unlocks the keys, and the value of "1" locks the keys. The default is "1" (lock). D The following is an example of unlocking the Save and Delete keys using the configuration files: Example: • prgkey1 locked: 0 • prgkey2 locked: 0 Once the Save and Delete keys are unlocked, a User can change the function of the keys using the Aastra Web UI. An Administrator can change the function of the keys using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-51 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IMPORTANT: If you change the functions of the Save and Delete keys, and then an Administrator locks Keys 1 and 2, the functions are automatically set back to the default settings of "Save" and "Delete". Note: The Save and Delete functions are limited to Key 1 and Key 2 on the 6753i IP phone only. Locking and Unlocking the Save and Delete Keys using the Configuration Files. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i)” on page A-229. 5-52 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Local Dial Plan A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to reach a particular telephone number. Access codes, area codes, specialized codes, and combinations of the number of digits dialed are all part of a dial plan. For instance, the North American Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) uses a 10-digit dial plan that includes a 3-digit area code and a 7-digit telephone number. Most PBXs support variable length dial plans that use 3 to 11 digits. Dial plans must comply with the telephone networks to which they connect. Only totally private voice networks that are not linked to the PSTN or to other PBXs can use any dial plan. t1 The Dial Plan field accepts up to 512 characters. If a User enters a dial plan longer than 512 characters, or a parsing error occurs, the phone uses the default dial plan of “x+#|xx+*”. You configure the SIP Local Dial Plan using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. The IP phone SIP local dial plan available symbols are as follows: Description ra f Symbol 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Digit symbol ; Allows a secondary dial tone to be audible before dialing a number. *, #, . | + Match any digit symbol (wildcard) Other keypad symbol D X Expression inclusive OR 0 or more of the preceding digit symbol or [] expression [] Symbol inclusive OR - Used only with [], represent a range of acceptable symbols; For example, [2-8] ; Used when a secondary dial tone is required on the phone. (For example, “9;xxxxxx”, when a user has to dial “9” to get and outside line and needs a secondary dial one presented Dial Plan Example An example of a SIP Local Dial Plan is: [01]XXX|[2-8]XXXX|91XXXXXX XXXX|X+.|*XX 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-53 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features The dial plan in the above example can accept any 4-digit dial strings that begin with a '0' or '1', any 5-digit dial strings that begin with a '2' up to '8', any 12-digit dial strings that begin with '91', any non-empty digit string that ends with a '.' or any 2-digit code that begins with a '*'. Prefix Dialing The IP phones support a prefix dialing feature for outgoing calls. You can manually dial a number or dial a number from a list. The phone automatically maps the pre-configured prepended digit in the configuration, to the outgoing number. When a match is found, the prepended digits are added to the beginning of the dial string and the call is dialed. t1 Note: The prepend digits are also added if the dialing times-out on a partial match. ra f You can enable this feature by adding a prepend digit(s) to the end of the Local Dial Plan parameter string in the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI at Basic Settings->Preferences->General. • D For example, if you add a prepend map of “[2-9]XXXXXXXXX,91”, the IP phone adds the digits “91” to any 10-digit number beginning with any digit from 2 to 9 that is dialed out. Other examples of prepend mappings are: 1X+#,9 (Prepends 9 to any digit string beginning with “1” and terminated with “#”.) • 6XXX,579 (Prepends “579” to any 4-digit string starting with “6”.) • [4-6]XXXXXX,78 (Prepends “78” to any 7-digit string starting with “4”, “5”, or “6”.) Note: You can configure a local dial plan via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Example If you enter the following dial string for a local dial plan: sip dial plan: 1+#,9 5-54 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features where “9” is the prepended digit, and you dial the following number: 15551212 the IP phone automatically adds the “9” digit to the beginning of the dialed number before the number is forwarded as 915551212. Note: You can configure a local dial plan via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. SIP Dial Plan Terminator t1 The IP phone allows you to enable or disable the use of the “dial plan terminator”. When you configure the phone’s dial plan to use a dial plan terminator or timeout (such as the pound symbol (#)) the phone waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up the handset or after you finish dialing the numbers on the keypad before making the call. ra f You can enable or disable the dial plan terminator using Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. Digit Timeout D The IP phone allows you to configure a “Digit Timeout” feature on the IP phone. The Digit Timeout is the time, in seconds, between consecutive key presses on the IP phone’s keypad. The default for this parameter is 4 seconds. If you press a key on the phone and wait 4 seconds before pressing the next key, the key times out and cancels the digit selection. You must press consecutive keys before the timeout occurs. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-55 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Secondary Dial Tone The IP phones now support a feature that allows the user to dial a predefined dial string, obtain a dial tone, and continue dialing. A User or Administrator can configure this using the existing Dial Plan feature on the phone. You can enter a new character string in the dial plan that allows you to configure the secondary dial tone. The character string is of the form ".;." , where the period indicates an arbitrary number of digits and the semicolon indicates that the phone is to present a dial tone after the previous dialed digit. For example, in the string: "9;xxxxx" t1 the user dials “9” to get the outside line, listens for the dial tone, and continues to dial the applicable number. The “;” tells the phone to present a second dial tone after the previously dialed digit. “The “xxxxx” in the example tells the phone that a phone number is dialed after the secondary dial tone is audible. ra f You can enter the Secondary Dial Tone string in the Dial Plan using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. You use the following parameter in the configuration files to configure a secondary dial tone: sip dial plan D • Example sip dial plan: “9;5551313” 5-56 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring the SIP Local Dial Plan, Dial Plan Terminator, and Digit Timeout Use the following procedures to configure the SIP Local Dial Plan using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Local Dial Plan Settings” on page A-65. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-57 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences. 2 In the "Local Dial Plan" field, enter a valid local dial plan (up to 512 alphanumeric characters) for the IP phone. Default is X+#|XX+*. Enter prepended digits or a “;”to present a secondary dial tone if required. D ra f t1 1 Note: If a User enters a dial plan longer than 512 characters, or a parsing error occurs, the phone uses the default dial plan of “x+#|xx+*”. 3 Enable the "Send Dial Plan Terminator" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled. 4 In the "Digit Timeout (in seconds)" field, enter a timeout value. This is the length of time, in seconds, he phone waits before dialing. Default is 4 seconds. 5 Click 5-58 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls The IP phones (including the 6757i CT handset) have a park and pickup call feature that allows you to park a call and pickup a call when required. There are two ways a user or administrator can configure this feature: • Using a static configuration (globally configures park and pickup) • Using a programmable configuration Note: The IP phones accept both methods of configuration. However, to avoid redundancy, Aastra Telecom recommends you configure either a static configuration or a programmable configuration. t1 The IP phones support the Park/Pickup feature on the Asterisk, BroadWorks, Sylantro, and ININ PBX servers. The following paragraph describes the park and pickup static configuration on the IP phones. ra f Reference For information on configuring the park and pickup programmable configuration (using a key), see “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234. D Park/Pickup Static Configuration (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT only) Using the static method of configuring park and pickup configures these features on a global basis for all IP phones connected in the network. You can use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to configure a park/pickup static configuration. In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to statically configure park/pickup: • sprecode: • pickupsprecode: 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-59 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features In the Aastra Web UI, you use the following fields at Basic Settings-> Preferences to configure park/pickup statically: • Park Call • Pickup Call How It displays on the Phone On the IP phone UI, the static configuration method displays the following: • When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the default label of "Park" displays on the first screen of the Phone UI. • After pressing the "Park" softkey to park the call, the default label of "Pickup" displays on the first screen of the phone UI. t1 Note: On the 6757i CT handset, pressing Ï displays the "Park" and "Pickup" labels. ra f The values you enter for the Park/Pickup feature are dependant on your type of server. The following table provides the values you enter for the “sprecode” and “pickupsprecode” parameters (configuration files), or "Park Call" and "Pickup Parked Call" fields (Aastra Web UI). D Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values Server Park Values* Pickup Values* Aasterisk 70 70 Sylantro *98 *99 BroadWorks *68 *88 callpark pickup ININ PBX *Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature. 5-60 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Park /Pickup using Static Configuration (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT only) Use the following procedures to configure the Park/Pickup call feature using the static configuration method. Note: Aastra recommends you configure either the static or the programmable configuration, but not both. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Park and Pickup Global Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i/6757i CT only)” on page A-187. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-61 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 Enter a server value in the Park Call field to which incoming live calls will be parked. D ra f t1 1 Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-60. 3 Enter a server value in the "Pickup Parked Call" field. Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-60. 4 5-62 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Suppressing DTMF Playback A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable the suppression of DTMF playback when a number is dialed from the softkeys and programmable keys. When suppression of DTMF playback is disabled, and you press a softkey or programmable key, the IP phone dials the stored number and displays each digit as dialed in the LCD window. When the suppression of DTMF playback is enabled, the IP phone dials the stored number and displays the entire number immediately in the LCD window, allowing the call to be dialed much faster. t1 DTMF playback suppression is disabled by default. Suppressing DTMF playback can be configured using the Aastra Web UI and the configuration files. Configuring Suppression of DTMF Playback ra f Use the following procedures to configure the suppression of DTMF playback on the IP phone. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Suppress DTMF Playback Setting” on page A-173. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-63 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 Enable the "Suppress DTMF Playback" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your settings. You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect. 4 Click on Operation->Reset. 5 In the "Restart Phone" field click 5-64 to restart the IP phone and apply the changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Display DTMF Digits A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) digits to display to the IP phone when using the keypad to dial, or when dialing from a softkey or programmable key. DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate when you press the phone’s touch keys. This is also known as “touchtone” dialing. Each key you press on your phone generates two tones of specific frequencies. One tone is generated from a high-frequency group of tones and the other from a low frequency group. t1 If you enable the Display DTMF Digits parameter, the digits you are dialing from the keypad or from a softkey or programmable key display to the IP phone’s LCD display. This parameter is disabled by default (no digits display when dialing). You can enable the “Display DTMF Digits” parameter using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. ra f Configuring Display DTMF Digits D Use the following procedures to configure the suppression of DTMF playback on the IP phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Display DTMF Digits Setting” on page A-174. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-65 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 Enable the "Display DTMF Digits" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your settings. You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect. 4 Click on Operation->Reset. 5 In the "Restart Phone" field click 5-66 to restart the IP phone and apply the changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone A call waiting feature notifies the user currently on the phone, of a new incoming call. You can disable this call waiting feature, so that the new incoming call is automatically rejected by the phone with a busy message. A User or Administrator can configure this feature. If you disable call waiting on the phone, and the user is on a call, any further incoming calls will receive busy unless “Call Forward Busy” or “Call Forward No Answer and Busy” is configured on the phone. It will then forward the call according to the rule configured. The phone can only: • transfer the currently active call or accept transferred calls if there is no active calls. t1 • If call waiting is disabled: on the 6757i CT bases, and the handset is currently on a call, all additional incoming calls are rejected on the handset. • intercom calls are treated as regular incoming calls and are rejected. • pre-dialing with live dial pad disabled still accepts incoming calls. • the “Incoming Call Cancels Dialing” parameter is ignored because the incoming call is automatically rejected. • D • ra f • the Missed Calls List does not get updated with details of calls. the Blind Transfer feature on the phone may not work if two calls are made to the phone at one time. You can enable/disable call waiting using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-67 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Call Waiting Tone You can also enable or disable the playing of a short “Call Waiting Tone" when there is an incoming call on your phone. This feature is enabled by default. If you have Call Waiting enabled, and a call comes into the line for which you are on an active call, a tone is audible to notify you of that incoming call. The tone is also audible to the caller to indicate to that caller you are currently on another call. Note: The Call Waiting Tone feature works only if Call Waiting is enabled. A User or Administrator can configure this feature. An Administrator can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. t1 Configuring Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone ra f Use the following procedures to configure the Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone features on the IP phone. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Call Waiting Settings” on page A-152. 5-68 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features . Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->General. 2 The "Call Waiting" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. This feature allows you to enable or disable the call waiting feature on the IP phone. 3 The "Play Call Waiting Tone" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. This feature allows you to enable or disable the call waiting tone on the IP phone. D ra f t1 1 Note: The Call Waiting Tone feature works only if the “Call Waiting” tone field is enabled. 4 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-69 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Stuttered Dial Tone You can enable or disable the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a message waiting on the IP phone. You can configure this feature using the configuration files and the Aastra Web UI. Configuring Stuttered Dial Tone Use the following procedures to configure stuttered dial tone on the IP phones. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling stuttered dial tone, see Appendix A, the section, “Stuttered Dial Tone Setting” on page A-151. 5-70 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 The "Stuttered Dial Tone" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-71 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features XML Beep Support The IP phones have a feature that allows you to enable or disable a beep on the phone with it receives a status message from an XML application. This beep can be turned ON or OFF using the Aastra Web UI, the configuration files, or in an XML script. Reference For more information about enabling/disabling the XML Beep Support in an XML script, see “XML Customized Services” on page 5-311. Configuring XML Beep Support Configuration Files t1 Use the following procedures to enable/disable XML Beep Support. D ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings” on page A-132. 5-72 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 The “XML Beep Support” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-73 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Status Scroll Delay The IP phones have a feature that allows you to specify the time delay, in seconds, between the scrolling of each status message (including XML status messages) on the phone. The default time is 5 seconds for each message to display before scrolling to the next message. You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Reference For more information about configuring the status scroll delay for XML status messages, see “XML Customized Services” on page 5-311. Configuring Status Scroll Delay Configuration Files t1 Use the following procedures to configure Status Scroll Delay. D ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings” on page A-132. 5-74 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 In the “Status Scroll Delay (seconds)” field, enter a value, in seconds, that each XML status message displays on the phone. Default is 5 seconds. Valid values are 1 to 25. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-75 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing You can configure whether or not an incoming call interrupts an outgoing call that is dialing. The “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) parameter or “incoming call cancels dialing” (in config file) parameter controls this feature. How it Works When you enable this parameter (1 = enable), an incoming call interrupts the outgoing call during dialing and allows the phone to ring for the user to answer the incoming call. ra f t1 When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), which is the default, the phone does not interrupt the outgoing call during dialing and the number you were dialing continues to display in the LCD. The phones sends the incoming call to a free line on the phone (or sends busy signal if all remaining lines are busy) and the LED for that line blinks. You have a choice to ignore the incoming call, or answer the incoming call on another line, via the Ignore and Answer softkeys that display. If you choose to answer the incoming call, you can answer the call, finish the call, and then hang up. You can still go back to the original outgoing call and finish dialing out. D Notes: 1. On a 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, you must use the down arrow key to ignore the call. To answer the call you must press the line key where the call is coming in. 2. For all models, if you disable this parameter (0=disable), and the phone receives an incoming call while you are dialing an outgoing call, you can pick up the call and perform transfer or conference as required. 3. This feature works only if the User selects a line for which to dial out. It is recommended that the Administrator always keeps Live Dialpad ON in order for the User to have to select a line before dialing out. 5-76 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Transfer/Conference Call Behavior If you are dialing the phone to transfer or conference a call, and your phone receives an incoming call, your dialing is never interrupted (regardless of whether the “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” is enabled or disabled). For Transfer and Conference, the incoming calls always go to an available line (other than the one you are using for dialing) and the incoming call’s line LED blinks. The LCD still displays your dialing screen. Intercom Behavior ra f t1 If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) or “incoming call cancels dialing” (config file) is enabled and you are dialing an outgoing Intercom call, the enabled interrupt setting takes precedence over an enabled “Allow Barge In” setting. The incoming call interrupts your dialing on an outgoing intercom call. On an incoming intercom call, the enabled “Allow Barge In” and “Auto-Answer” occurs while you are dialing to transfer or conference the call. However, the incoming call goes to an available idle line, and the LED blinks while you are dialing the second half of the conference or transfer. D If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) or “incoming call cancels dialing” (config file) is disabled, an incoming intercom goes to an available idle line and the LED blinks for that line. The phone answers the call under all conditions. Configuring Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Use the following procedures to configure how the IP phone handles incoming calls that interrupt outgoing dialing. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling how the IP phones handle incoming calls that interrupt outgoing dialing, see Appendix A, the section, “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting” on page A-146. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-77 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing is disabled by default. If required, enable the "Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing" field by checking the check box. 3 Click 5-78 D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Switch Focus to Ringing Line An Administrator or User can control the behavior of the phone when it receives an incoming call when it is already in a connected call. By default, the phone switches focus to the ringing line to enable the user to see who is calling them. You can turn off this functionality so that the phone now stays focused on the connected call. You can do this using the “switch focus to ringing line” parameter in the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. t1 Note: If you configure the BLF/Xfer key(s) and/or Speeddial/Xfer key(s) on the phone, you can enable or disable the switching of the user interface focus to ringing line while the phone is in the connected state. Configuring “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” ra f You use the following procedures to enable or disable “Switch Focus to Ringing Line”. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling “Switch Focus to Ringing Line”, see Appendix A, the section, “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” on page A-148. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-79 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. . D ra f t1 1 “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” Parameter 2 The “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. 3 Click 5-80 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout An Administrator or User can define a preferred line as well as a preferred timeout. If a preferred line is selected, after a call ends (incoming or outgoing), the display switches back to the preferred line. Next time you go off-hook, you pickup on the preferred line. You can specify the number of seconds it takes for the phone to switch back to the preferred line using the “preferred timeout” parameter. An Administrator can configure the “preferred line” and the “preferred timeout” parameters using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. A User can configure these parameters using the Aastra Web UI only. t1 The following table provides the behavior of the preferred line focus feature with other features on the phone. Preferred Line Behavior call return The phone switches back to the focused line immediately after the call ends. speeddial conference The line is already specified when the speeddial is created. The phone switches back immediately after the call ends. For incoming calls, the phone switches back immediately after the call ends. For incoming or outgoing calls, the current behavior is that the same line used to transfer the call does not change. For incoming calls, the phone switches back immediately after the call transfers. D transfer ra f Phone Feature blf The phone switches back immediately after the call ends. park The phone switches back immediately after the call ends. voicemail The phone switches back immediately after the call ends. redial The phone switches back immediately after the call ends. dialing For incomplete dialing on a non-preferred line, the focus does not change if some digits are entered. If no digits are entered or digits were cleared, the focus changes to preferred line after the time out has passed without activities. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-81 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Phone Feature Preferred Line Behavior caller id If the "Switch UI Focus To Ringing Line" parameter is disabled, the User is able to see the Caller ID when the phone switches the focus to the ringing line. factory default Factory default and recovery mode clears the "preferred line" and "preferred line timeout" parameters, and the phone operates in a non-preferred line mode. Notes: 1. If you specify a value of “0” for the preferred line parameter, it disables the preferred line focus feature. t1 2. If you specify a value of “0” for the preferred line timeout parameter, the phone returns the line to the preferred line immediately. ra f Configuring the Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout You use the following procedures to configure the Preferred Line and the Preferred Line Timeout on the IP Phones. D Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for configuring the Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout, see Appendix A, the section, “Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page A-149. 5-82 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Use the following parameters to configure preferred line focus using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. ra f Preferred Line t1 1 D Preferred Line Timeout 2 In the “Preferred Line” field, select a preferred line to switch focus to after incoming or outgoing calls end on the phone. Valid values are: • • None (disables the preferred line focus feature) 1 to 9 Default is 1. For example, if you set the preferred line to “1”, when a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone (on any line), the phone switches focus back to Line 1. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-83 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 3 In the “Preferred Line Timeout” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone switches back to the preferred line after a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a duration of inactivity on an active line. Default is 0. Valid values are: • Click to save your changes. D ra f t1 4 0 to 999 5-84 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call You can configure the Goodbye key to drop active calls or ignore incoming calls using the “goodbye cancels incoming call” parameter. This parameter controls the behavior of the goodbye key when the phone is on an active call and a second call is presented to the phone. How it Works When you enable this parameter (1 = enable in the configuration files), which is the default, the Goodbye key rejects the incoming call. When you disable this parameter (0 = disable in the configuration files), the Goodbye key hangs up the active call. t1 For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT: If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when an active call is already present, the phone displays softkey 1 as “answer” and softkey 2 as “ignore”. You can press the required softkey as applicable. ra f For the 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: D If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when an active call is already present, the “ignore” option only displays in the LCD window. The phone ignores the incoming call. If you press the DOWN arrow key, the phone answers the incoming call. You can set this parameter using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring the Goodbye Key to Cancel Incoming Calls Use the following procedures to configure the behavior of the Goodbye Key on the IP phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the behavior of the Goodbye Key, see Appendix A, the section, “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting” on page A-146. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-85 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing is disabled by default. If required, enable the "Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing" field by checking the check box. 3 Click 5-86 D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones) Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a standard that uses Internet protocols to enable devices to be plugged into a network and automatically know about each other. With UPnP, when a user plugs a device into the network, the device configures itself, acquires a TCP IP address, and uses a discovery protocol based on the Internet's HTTP or HTTPS URL to announce its presence on the network to other devices. This method of device discovery on a network is called “Universal Plug and Play” or UPnP. If you enable UPnP, and the phone is discovered on the network, port mappings are set up between the phone and the Internet Gateway Device (IGD) in your network. The phone controls the opening, closing, and polling of ports on the IGD. HTTP and SIP use a single port each. RTP/RTCP uses a range of ports. t1 You can enable the UPnP mappings to specific lines on your phone. You set this configuration using the Aastra Web UI at Basic Settings->Preferences->UPnP Mapping Lines. ra f Note: UPnP must be enabled on your remote phone before you can configure the UPnP mapping lines. For information on enabling/disabling UPnP see Chapter 4, the section, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for remote phones)” on page 4-50. D Configuring UPnP Mapping Lines Use the following procedures to configure UPnP mapping on specific lines on the IP phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “UPnP Settings” on page A-37. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-87 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 The "UPnP Mapping Lines" field is set to 0 by default. If required, change the setting to a specific line by selecting a line from the list. Valid values are 0 through 10. The line you select is the line that your remote phone uses to perform Universal Plug and Play on the network you are connecting to. 3 Click 5-88 D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Message Waiting Indicator Line A User or Administrator can configure the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) to illuminate for a specific line or for all lines. For example, if you configure the MWI LED on line 3 only, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on line 3. If you configure the MWI LED for all lines, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on any line on the phone (lines 1 through 9). A User can configure the MWI using the Aastra Web UI only. An Administrator can configure the MWI on single or all lines using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) Configuration Files t1 Use the following procedures to configure MWI on the IP phone. D ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Message Waiting Indicator Settings” on page A-153. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-89 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->General. 2 In the “Message Waiting Indicator Line” field, select a single line from 1 to 9, or select “All” for all lines. If you select a single line, the MWI illuminates when a voice mail message is pending on that line. If you select all lines, the MWI illuminates when a voice mail message is pending on any line from 1 to 9. 3 Click 5-90 D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features DND Key Mode The IP phones have a feature you can enable called "Do not Disturb (DND). An Administrator or User can set “do not disturb” based on the accounts on the phone (all accounts or a specific account). You can set specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND. The three modes you can set on the phone for DND are: • Account • Phone • Custom t1 An Administrator or User can set the DND mode using the Aastra Web UI at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->General->DND Key Mode. An Administrator can also set the DND Key Mode using the configuration files. ra f Note: You must configure a DND key on the phone to use this feature. Reference D For more information about how DND works and how you can use it on the phones, see the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211. Configuring the DND Key Mode Use the following procedures to set the DND Key Mode on the phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DND Key Mode Settings” on page A-154. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-91 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. In the “DND Key Mode” field, select a “do not disturb” (DND) mode to use on the phone. Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Phone. • account • phone • custom D 2 DND Key Mode Parameter ra f t1 1 Sets DND for a specific account. DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF. Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF. Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key, that list the account(s) on the phone. The user can select a specific account for DND, turn DND ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all accounts. Notes: 1. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”. 2. Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND Key Mode to “phone”, all accounts synchronize to the current setting of Account 1. 5-92 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 3 Configure a DND key on the phone using the procedures in the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211. 4 Click to save your changes. The change takes effect immediately without a reboot. Reference For more information, see the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211. Call Forward Mode t1 Call Forward (CFWD) on the IP phone allows incoming calls to be forwarded to another destination. The phone sends the SIP message to the SIP proxy, which then forwards the call to the assigned destination. D ra f An Administrator or User can configure CFWD on the phone-side by setting a mode for the phone to use (Account, Phone, or Custom). Once the mode is set, you can use the IP Phone UI to use the CFWD feature at Options->Call Forward or by pressing a configured Call Forward softkey/programmable key/extension module key. The following describes the behavior for each CFWD mode. • • Account mode - The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in focus. Phone mode - The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-93 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features • Custom mode - The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey. Note: If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”. ra f Reference t1 The states you can set for Call Forward are All, Busy, No Answer. You can enable different call forwarding rules/modes independently (for example, you can set different phone numbers for Busy, All, and NoAns modes and then turn them on/ off individually. The behavior of these states is dependent on the mode (account, phone, or custom) you configure on the phone. For more information about how Call Forwarding works and how you can use it on the IP Phones, see “Call Forwarding” on page 5-249. D Configuring Call Forward Key Mode Use the following procedures to set the Call Forward key mode on the IP phones. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Call Forward Key Mode Settings” on page A-127. 5-94 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. ra f t1 1 Call Forward Key Mode Parameter D Note: If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still configure Call Forwarding via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-95 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 In the “Call Forward Key Mode” field, select a call forward mode to use on the phone. Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Account. • • ra f t1 • account The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in focus. phone The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone. custom The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific state (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey. 3 Click D Notes: 1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward. 2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”. 3. When configuring a CFWD state (All, Busy, No Answer) for an account, you must configure a CFWD number for that state in order for the state to be enabled. to save your changes. The change takes effect immediately without a reboot. Reference For more information, see the section, “Call Forwarding” on page 5-249. 5-96 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) The IP Phones support Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED). LLDP-MED is designed to allow for things such as: • Auto-discovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 Priority and Diffserv settings) leading to "plug and play" networking. • Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints. • Inventory management, allowing network administrators to track their network devices, and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions, serial / asset number). t1 On the IP Phones, LLDP-MED performs the following: Supports the MAC/PHY configuration (e.g. speed rate/duplex mode). • Supports VLAN info from the network policy; this takes precedence over manual settings. • Allows you to enable/disable LLDP-MED if required. • Allows you to configure time interval between successive LLDP Data Unit (LLDPDU) frames. • Allows LLDP packets to be received from the LAN port. D • ra f • Allows the phone to use the location information, Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN), sent by the switch, as a caller ID for making emergency calls. Note: If the phone receives location information in ECN ELIN format (10 to 25 numeric string), the phone replaces the caller ID SIP header with the ECN ELIN value and the SIP URI does not change. The phone determines if this is an emergency number by checking the emergency dial plan configured on the phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-97 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features The following table identifies the configuration parameters for LLDP and ELIN and which method you can use to configure each parameter. This table also indicates whether the parameters can be configured by an Administrator, a User, or both. Method of Configuration Who Can Configure lldp Configuration Files Administrator lldp interval Configuration Files Administrator use lldp elin Configuration Files Administrator LLDP Support IP Phone UI Administrator LLDP Aastra Web UI Administrator LLDP Packet Interval Aastra Web UI Administrator LLDP ELIN Aastra Web UI Administrator and User t1 Parameter Configuring LLDP-MED and ELIN ra f Use the following procedures to configure LLDP-MED and ELIN on the IP phones. D Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings” on page A-129. Use the following procedure to enable/disable LLDP-MED using the IP Phone UI. Note: You cannot configure the “LLDP Interval” or the “Use LLDP ELIN” parameters via the IP Phone UI. 5-98 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Select Network Settings. 3 Select Ethernet & VLAN. 4 Select LLDP Support. 5 Press CHANGE to toggle the LLDP setting to Enabled or Disabled. t1 2 This field enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone. ra f Press DONE to save the change. D 6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-99 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Use the following procedure to configure LLDP-MED using the Aastra Web UI: Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. LLDP D ra f t1 LLDP Packet Interval 2 The “LLDP” field is enabled by default. To disable LLDP, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark. 3 In the “LLDP Packet Interval” field, enter the time, in seconds, between the transmission of LLDP Data Unit (LLDPDU) packets. The value of zero (0) disables this parameter. Valid values are 0 to 2147483647. Default is 30. 4 5-100 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Select Basic Settings->Preferences->General. t1 5 The “Use LLDP ELIN” field is enabled by default. To disable LLDP ELIN, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark. D 6 ra f Use LLDP ELIN This field enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers. 7 Click 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 to save your changes. 5-101 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In The Intercom feature allows you to press the configured Intercom button on the IP phone and then enter the number you want to call to initiate an intercom call. Intercom calls can be controlled either locally (phone-side) or by the SIP server (server-side). You can configure incoming and outgoing intercom calls on all phone models. A User can configure incoming intercom calls only. Outgoing Intercom Calls t1 On outgoing intercom calls, an available unused line is found when the Icom button is pressed. Since this line has no configuration, the phone applies an existing configuration ("Outgoing Intercom Settings", Line, default is Line 1) to this line in preparation for placing the intercom call. For example, an outgoing intercom call can use the configuration of line 1 but places the actual intercom call using line 9. Only an Administrator can configure outgoing intercom calls. D ra f A phone-side Intercom call indicates the phone is responsible for telling the recipient that an intercom call is being placed, while a server-side intercom call means the SIP server is responsible for informing the recipient. Server-side calls require additional configuration of a prefix code. After pressing the Icom button and entering the number to call, the phone automatically adds the prefix to the called number and sends the outgoing call via the server. For outgoing intercom calls, an administrator can configure the following parameters: Configuration File Parameters Web UI Parameters • sip intercom type • Type) • sip intercom prefix code • Prefix Code • sip intercom line • Line Note: To configure outgoing intercom calls using these parameters, see “Configuring Intercom Calls Settings” on page 5-104. 5-102 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Incoming Intercom Calls You can configure how the phone handles incoming intercom calls. You can receive incoming intercom calls whether or not there are active calls on the phone. The way the phone handles the call depends on the incoming intercom call configuration. The following paragraphs describe the configuration parameters for incoming intercom calls. Microphone Mute You can mute or unmute the microphone on the IP phone for intercom calls made by the originating caller. If you want to mute the intercom call, you enable this feature. If you want to unmute (or hear the intercom call), you disable this feature. t1 Auto-Answer/Play Warning Tone ra f The auto-answer feature on the IP phone allows you to enable or disable automatic answering for an Intercom call. If “Auto-Answer” is enabled, the phone automatically answers an incoming intercom call. If “Play Warning Tone” is also enabled, the phone plays a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom call. If “Auto-Answer” is disabled, the phone rejects the incoming intercom call and sends a busy signal to the caller. D “Delay” before Auto-Answer The IP Phones include support for the "delay" parameter (in the Alert-Info header, used in conjunction with info=alert-autoanswer) in order to facilitate auto-answer functionality. When present, the value of the "delay" parameter specifies the length of time in seconds an IP phone rings before a call is auto-answered. If this value of the "delay" parameter set to 0 (delay=0), then an incoming call is immediately auto-answered. The absence of the parameter is considered as ring forever. In order for the delay functionality to operate, you must first enable Auto-Answer on the IP Phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-103 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Allow Barge In You can configure whether or not the IP phone allows an incoming intercom call to interrupt an active call. The “sip intercom allow barge in” parameter controls this feature. When you enable the sip intercom allow barge in parameter (1 = enable in the configuration files), which is the default value, an incoming intercom call takes precedence over any active call, by placing the active call on hold and automatically answering the intercom call. When you disable this parameter (0 = disable in the configuration files), and there is an active call, the phone treats an incoming intercom call like a normal call and plays the call warning tone. You can set this parameter using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. t1 For incoming intercom calls, an administrator or user can configure the following parameters: Web UI Parameters • sip allow auto answer • Auto-Answer • sip intercom mute mic • Microphone Mute • sip intercom warning tone • Play Warning Tone • sip intercom allow barge in • Barge In D ra f Configuration File Parameters Note: To configure incoming intercom calls using these parameters, see “Configuring Intercom Calls Settings” on page 5-104. Configuring Intercom Calls Settings You can configure the Intercom feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Note: An administrator can configure the incoming and outgoing Intercom feature. A user can configure the incoming Intercom feature only. 5-104 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Use the following procedures to configure Intercom calls on the IP phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for outgoing Intercom, see Appendix A, the section, “Outgoing Intercom Settings” on page A-175. For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for incoming Intercom, see Appendix A, the section, “Incoming Intercom Settings” on page A-177. Aastra Web UI Outgoing intercom settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only): Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Outgoing Intercom Settings. 2 Select an Intercom type for outgoing Intercom calls from the Type list box. Valid values are Phone-Side, Server-Side, Off. Default is Off. 3 If Server-Side is selected, enter a prefix to add to the phone number in the "Prefix Code" field. D ra f t1 1 Note: For Sylantro servers, enter *96. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-105 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 If Phone-Side or Server-Side is selected, select a line from the Line list box for which you want the IP phone to use as its configuration on the Intercom call. Note: The IP phone uses the configuration from the line you select from this list box. The call itself is made using the first available line at the time of the call. 5 Click to save your changes. Incoming intercom settings: Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Incoming Intercom Settings. 2 The "Auto-Answer" field is enabled by default. The automatic answering feature is turned on for the IP phone for answering Intercom calls. To disable this field, uncheck the box.\ D ra f t1 1 Note: If the Auto-Answer field is not checked (disabled), the phone rejects the incoming intercom call and sends a busy signal to the caller. 3 The "Microphone Mute" field is enabled by default. The microphone is muted on the IP phone for Intercom calls made by the originating caller. To disable this field, uncheck the box. 4 The "Play Warning Tone" field is enabled by default. If “Auto-Answer” is enabled, the phone plays a warning tone when it receives in incoming intercom call. To disable this field, uncheck the box. 5-106 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 The "Allow Barge In" field is enabled by default. If an active line on the phone receives an incoming intercom call, the active call is put on hold and the phone automatically answers the incoming intercom call. To disable this field, uncheck the box. 6 Click to save your changes. Group Paging RTP Settings t1 An Administrator or User can configure a specific key (softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key) on the phone that allows you to send/receive a Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP) stream to/from pre-configured multicast address(es) without involving SIP signaling. This is called Group Paging on the IP phones. You can specify up to 5 listening multicast addresses. An Administrator can use the following parameters in the configuration files to set Group Paging RTP Settings: paging addr list • softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type • sofkeyN label • softkeyN value, topsoftkeyN value, prgkeyN value, or expmodX keyN value D ra f • An Administrator or User can use the following parameters in the Aastra Web UI to set Group Paging RTP Settings: • Paging Listen Addresses (Path: Basic Settings->Preferences->Group Paging RTP Settings) • <Paging> Key (Operation->Softkeys and XML, Programmable Keys, or Expansion Module Keys) Note: The Group Paging RTP Settings are dependant upon the setting for the “Allow Barge In” parameter. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-107 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features How it works After pressing a configured “Paging” key on the phone, the Phone sends RTP to a preconfigured multicast address(es) (IP port). Any phone in the local network then listens for RTP on the preconfigured multicast address(es) (IP port). For both sending and receiving of the multicast RTP there is no sip signaling involved. The Phone displays the multicast RTP sent/received address(es) to the user. Note: Multicast RTP is one way only - from sender to the receiver (i.e. from sender to the multicast address(es) (receiver)). The phone uses a preconfigured G711 uLaw CODEC for multicast RTP. t1 For Paging Systems, the phone only plays RTP traffic; users have the ability to drop a rogue page. The recipient can drop the incoming page if required. The recipient can also set Do Not Disturb (DND) to ignore any incoming pages. ra f Note: For outgoing RTP multicasts, all other existing calls on the phone are put on hold. For incoming RTP multicasts, the ringing display is dependant on the “Allow Barge-In” parameter. If this parameter is disabled, and there is not other call D on the phone, then the paging is automatically played via the preferred audio device (see the model-specific IP Phone User Guide for setting Audio Mode on the phone). If there is an existing call on the phone, the call initially displays in the ringing state. The user has the option to accept/ignore the call. If the “Allow Barge-In” parameter is enabled, the RTP multicast call barges in, and any existing calls are put on hold. If an RTP multicast session already exists on the phone, and the phone receives another incoming RTP multicast session, the priority is given to the first multicast session and the second multicast session is ignored. The behavior for the incoming calls in this case is also based on the setting for the “Allow Barge-in” parameter. The incoming call is handled as if there were an existing call already on the phone. 5-108 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Group Paging RTP Settings Use the following procedure to configure Group Paging RTP Settings using the configuration files. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Group Paging RTP Settings” on page A-179. Use the following procedure to configure RTP streaming for Paging applications using the Aastra Web UI. Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Group Paging RTP Settings. D ra f 1 t1 Aastra Web UI 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-109 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 In the “Paging Listen Addresses” text box, enter the multicast IP address(es) and port number on which the phone listens for incoming multicast RTP packets. Note: Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (for example, 224.0.0.2:10000,239.0.1.20:15000) If this field is blank, Paging listening capability is disabled on the phone. Click on Softkeys and XML. or Click on Programmable Keys. or Click on Expansion Module Keys. 4 Choose a key that you want to assign as the Paging Key and select Paging from the “Type” field. 5 In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the Paging key (for example, “Group 1”). D ra f t1 3 5-110 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 6 In the “Value” field, enter a multicast IP address(es) and a port number for the Paging key. When you press this key, the phone initiates an outgoing multicast RTP session to the specified address(es) using the specified port. (For example, 224.0.0.2:10000). Note: When you select Paging for the “Type” field, the “Line” field and state fields are disabled. Click to save your changes. D ra f t1 7 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-111 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Using the Configured Paging Key on the IP Phone The following procedure describes the use of the Paging key. The procedures assumes you have already configured the Paging key using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Notes: 1. Recipient of a Paging call can set a global “Do Not Disturb” (DND) to ignore any incoming pages. 2. For incoming Paging, the phones use the Intercom configuration settings. The incoming Page is dependant on the “Allow Barge-In” parameter setting and the “Idling/On Call” state. Step t1 Aastra IP Phone UI Action ra f On the IP Phone, press the key you configured for Paging (labeled as “Group 1” in the following illustration). Services Dir Callers Icom D Tues Jan1 10:00am Group 1 LAB ACD The phone opens a multicast RTP session and an outgoing OR incoming phone screen displays as follows: Paging 00:01 Drop Press the Drop key to end the multicast RTP session and return to the idle screen. Note: If you enable global DND on the phone, the incoming multicast RTP session is dropped. 5-112 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Key Mapping There are hard keys on your phone, such as Hold, Redial, Xfer, and Conf that are configured by default for specific call-handling features. (See the product-specific User Guide for more information about these key functions. Notes: 1. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT the Xfer and Conf keys are hard-coded by default on keys 5 and 6 to the left of the LCD display and cannot be reassigned. The Xfer and Conf labels display when you lift the handset. To disable these keys, see the next paragraph. ra f t1 2. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, the Xfer and Conf keys are assigned by default to keys 5 and 6, respectively. These keys are programmable keys and can be reassigned if applicable. To disable these keys, see the next paragraph. Enabling/Disabling Redial, Xfer, and Conf Keys • • • D You can enable or disable the Redial, Xfer, and Conf keys as required using the following parameters in the configuration files: redial disabled conference disabled call transfer disabled Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter is set to 1, the key is not active and is ignored if pressed by the user. For "redial disabled" the value of 1 does not save the dialed number to the "Redial List". If this parameter is set to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. This feature is configurable via the configuration files only. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-113 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Use the following procedure to enable/disable the Redial, Xfer, and Conf keys. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Mapping Key Settings” on page A-189. Mapping Redial and Conf Keys as Speeddials You can map the Redial and Conference keys on the IP phone to use as speeddial keys. When the Redial or Conference key is pressed, the number configured for the key automatically speed dials. If no number is configured, the Redial and Conference keys return to their original functionality. t1 You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. ra f Note: If you configure the Redial and Conference keys for speeddialing on the 6757i CT Base Station, the Redial and Conference keys on the 6757i CT handset retain their original functionality. The Redial and Conference keys on the handset are not configured for speeddial. D Use the following procedures to set the Redial and Conf keys as speeddial keys. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Mapping Key Settings” on page A-189. 5-114 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences. 2 In the Key Mapping section, enter a number in the "Map Redial Key To" field, that the IP phone will use to speeddial when the Redial key is pressed. 3 Enter a number in the "Map Conf Key To" field, that the IP phone will use to speeddial when the Conf Key is pressed. 4 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-115 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Using Redial Key for “Last Number Redial” The IP phones have an enhanced redial user interface that allows a user to quickly redial the last number that was dialed out from the phone. You can: • Press the REDIAL key twice to redial the last number dialed. • Press the REDIAL key once, scroll the list of numbers, then press the REDIAL button again to dial the number that displays on the screen. The “last number redial” feature for the Redial key is static and is not configurable. D ra f t1 Note: You can use the Redial key during active calls. 5-116 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Ring Tones and Tone Sets You can configure ring tones and ring tone sets on the IP phones. Ring Tones There are several distinct ring tones a user or administrator can select from to set on the IP phones. You can enable/disable these ring tones on a global basis or on a per-line basis. The following table identifies the valid settings and default values for each type of configuration method. Ring Tone Settings Table Global: 0 (Tone1) 1 (Tone 2) 2 (Tone 3) 3 (Tone 4) 4 (Tone 5) 5 (Silent) ra f Configuration Files Valid Values t1 Configuration Method Global: 0 (tone 1) Per-Line: -1 (global) 0 (Tone1) 1 (Tone 2) 2 (Tone 3) 3 (Tone 4) 4 (Tone 5) 5 (Silent) Per-Line: -1 (global) Global: Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 Tone 4 Tone 5 Global: Tone 1 D IP Phone UI 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Default Value 5-117 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuration Method Default Value Global: Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 Tone 4 Tone 5 Silent Global: Tone 1 Per-Line: Global Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 Tone 4 Tone 5 Silent Per-Line: Global D ra f t1 Aastra Web UI Valid Values 5-118 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Ring Tone Sets In addition to ring tones, you can configure ring tone sets on a global-basis on the IP phones. Ring tone sets consist of tones customized for a specific country. The ring tone sets you can configure on the IP phones are: US (Default - also used in Canada) • Australia • Europe (generic tones) • France • Germany • Italy • Mexico • United Kingdom (UK) t1 • ra f When you configure the country's tone set, the country-specific tone is heard on the phone for the following: D - dial tone - secondary dial tone - ring tone - busy tone - congestion tones - call waiting tone - ring cadence pattern Important: You configure ring tones and tone sets using the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or configuration files. However, when using the IP phone UI, you can set global configuration only. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-119 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Ring Tones and Tone Sets Use the following procedures to configure ring tones and tone sets on the IP phones. Configuration Files IP Phone UI Step Action For global configuration only: t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for ring tones, see Appendix A, the section, “Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings” on page A-143 or “Ring Tone Per-Line Settings” on page A-145. Press on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select Preferences. 3 Select Tones. 4 Select Set Ring Tone. 5 Select the type of ring tone (Tone 1 through Tone 5, or Silent). 6 Press Done to save the change. 7 Select Tone Set. 8 Select the country for which you want to apply the tone set. D ra f 1 Valid values are Australia, Europe, France, Germany, Italy, Mexico, UK, and US. Default is US. 9 5-120 Press Done to save the change. The ring tone and tone set you select is immediately applied to the IP phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences. For global configuration: ra f t1 1 In the "Ring Tones" section, select a country from the "Tone Set" field. Valid values are Australia, Europe, France, Germany, Italy, Mexico, UK, and US. Default is US. 3 Select a value from the "Global Ring Tone" field. D 2 Note: See the “Ring Tone Settings Table” on page 5-117 for valid values. For per-line configuration: 4 In the "Ring Tone" section, select a line for which you want to set ring tone. 5 Select a value from the "LineN" field. Note: See the “Ring Tone Settings Table” on page 5-117 for valid values. 6 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-121 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Priority Alerting Priority alerting on the IP phones is a feature that allows incoming calls to trigger pre-defined ringing or call waiting alert tones. You can enable or disable priority alerting on the IP phone for the Asterisk, Broadworks, and Sylantro servers using the configuration files and the Aastra Web UI. Configuration of priority alerting is on a global-basis only. How Priority Alerting Works When the IP phone detects an incoming call, the phone firmware inspects the INVITE request in the IP packet for an "Alert-Info" header. t1 If it contains an "Alert-Info" header, the firmware strips out the URL and keyword parameter and maps it to the appropriate Bellcore tone. ra f If there is no keyword parameter in the "Alert-Info" header, or the INVITE message contains no "Alert-Info" header, then the IP phone firmware uses the Bellcore standard ring tone. Asterisk/Broadworks Servers D The ring tone keywords that can display in the "Alert-Info" header for an Asterisk and Broadworks server are: Asterisk/Broadworks Server Ring Tone Keywords Bellcore-dr2 Bellcore-dr3 Bellcore-dr4 Bellcore-dr5 When the ring tone keywords appear in an "Alert-Info" header from an Asterisk or Broadworks server, the IP phone maps the keywords to the default ring tone patterns. 5-122 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Sylantro Servers The ring tone keywords that can display in the "Alert-Info" header for a Sylantro server are: Sylantro Server Ring Tone Keywords t1 alert-acd (auto call distribution) alert-community-1 alert-community-2 alert-community-3 alert-community-4 alert-emergency alert-external alert-group alert-internal alert-priority When the ring tone keywords appear in an "Alert-Info" header from a Sylantro server, the keyword is mapped to the ring tone pattern based on the configuration you set in the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. ra f Ring Tone Patterns D In IP Telephony, different ringing patterns have different frequencies and cadences. Ring cadence is the ringing pattern heard by the called party, before they pick up the call. On the IP phones, if you enable priority alerting when using an Asterisk or Broadworks server, the IP phone uses the following Bellcore-specified tones by default: Ring Tone Pattern (Asterisk/Broadworks Servers) Call Criteria Bellcore Tones internal calls Bellcore-dr2 external calls Bellcore-dr3 calls with contact list Bellcore-dr4 calls with specific time frames Bellcore-dr5 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-123 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features If you enable priority alerting when using a Sylantro server, you can specify the Bellcore tone to be used for the following configurable criteria: Ring Tone Pattern (Sylantro Servers) Call criteria Bellcore tones for each call criteria Normal ringing (default) Bellcore-dr2 Bellcore-dr3 Bellcore-dr4 Bellcore-dr5 Silent t1 alert-acd (auto call distribution) alert-community-1 alert-community-2 alert-community-3 alert-community-4 alert-emergency alert-external alert-group alert-internal alert-priority A System Administrator can configure the ring tone cadences if required, using the configuration files. The following table identifies the different Bellcore ring tone patterns and cadences. Maximum Duration (ms) 2s On 4s Off 1800 3600 2000 4000 2200 4400 Ringing Silent Long 630 315 800 400 1025 525 Ringing Silent Long Long 630 3475 800 4000 1025 4400 Ringing Silent Short 315 145 400 200 525 525 Ringing Silent Short 315 145 400 200 525 525 Ringing Silent Long 630 2975 800 4000 1025 4400 Ringing Silent Short 200 145 300 200 525 525 Ringing Silent Long 800 145 1000 200 1100 525 Ringing Silent Short 200 2975 300 4000 525 4400 450 500 550 Pattern 1 Ringing Silent 2 D Bellcore-dr2 Cadence Nominal Duration (ms) ra f Bellcore Tone (Standard) Minimum Duration (ms) Pattern ID Bellcore-dr3 Bellcore-dr4 Bellcore-dr5 5-124 3 4 5 Ringing 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features D ra f t1 Note: If the "Do Not Disturb" (DND) or the "Call Forward" (CFWD) feature is enabled on the server-side, and the user is still waiting for a call, the "Bellcore-dr5" is a ring splash tone that reminds the user that these are enabled. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-125 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Priority Alerting and Ring Tone Cadences using the Configuration Files Use the following procedures to configure priority alerting and ring tone cadences on the IP phones. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections, • “Priority Alert Settings” on page A-155. • “Bellcore Cadence Settings” on page A-160. D ra f t1 Note: You can configure Bellcore cadences using the configuration files only. 5-126 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Priority Alerting using the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedure to configure Priority Alerting using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences. 2 In the "Priority Alerting Settings" section, enable the "Enable Priority Alerting" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). D ra f t1 1 For Sylantro Servers: 3 Select a ring tone pattern for each of the following fields: • • • • • • • • • • 4 Group Internal External Emergency Priority auto call distribution community-1 community-2 community-3 community-4 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-127 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Call Waiting Tones Call Waiting is a feature that tells you if a new caller is trying to contact you when you are already on the phone. A discreet tone alerts you to the new caller, so you can answer your second incoming call by putting your first caller on hold. The IP phones use the following Bellcore-specified call waiting tones. Bellcore Call-Waiting Tone Pattern ID Pattern Minimum Duration (ms) Nominal Duration (ms) Maximum Duration (ms) 1 Tone On 270 300 330 Bellcore-dr2 CallWaitingTone2 2 Tone On Tone Off 90 90 100 100 110 110 Bellcore-dr3 CallWaitingTone3 3 Tone On Tone Off 90 90 100 100 110 110 Tone On Tone Off Tone On Tone Off 90 90 90 90 100 100 100 100 110 110 110 110 Tone On Tone Off 270 90 300 100 330 110 4 ra f Bellcore-dr4 CallWaitingTone4 t1 CallWaitingTone 1 D For Asterisk and Broadworks servers, call waiting tones are specified by the default Bellcore tones indicated in the table Ring Tone Pattern (Asterisk/ Broadworks Servers) on page -123. For Sylantro servers, call waiting tones are specified by the Bellcore tones you configure in the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. See the table Ring Tone Pattern (Sylantro Servers) on page -124. Reference For more information about enable/disabling call waiting on the IP Phone, see the section, “Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-67. 5-128 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Directed call pickup is a feature on the phones that allows a user to intercept a call on a ringing phone which is part of the same interception group. You can use the Directed call pickup feature on the phone in two ways: With the existing BLF feature on Asterisk, a user can dial “*76” followed by the extension to pick up a ringing call on another phone. (For more information about BLF, see “Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on page -169 • Using XML, a user can intercept a call by selecting an extension from a list and then pressing a “Pickup” softkey/programmable key. To use the Directed call pickup feature from an XML application, you must list all ringing extensions using the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu XML object in an XML script. This allows the user to select the ringing extension from a text menu without having to dial. The following illustration shows an example of how this feature displays to the LCD from an XML application.: t1 • D ra f Ringing Extensions 201 212 225 234 Pickup Done (For more information about using the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object, see Appendix F, the section, “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” on page F-6. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-129 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features BLF and XML softkeys/programmable keys monitor the states of an extension. The extension states can be one of three states: "busy", "ringing" and "idle". If the monitored extension is in the "ringing" state with an incoming call, and "Directed call pickup" is enabled, pressing the BLF or XML key can pick up the incoming call on the monitored extension. Note: The Asterisk and Epygi Quadro 4x/16x IP PBX servers support this feature. For details about Asterisk support, contact Aastra Technical Support. Directed Call Pickup Prefix (optional) ra f t1 The optional “directed call pickup prefix” allows you to enter a specific prefix string (depending on what is available on your server), that the phone automatically dials when dialing the Directed Call Pickup number. For example, for Broadsoft servers, you can enter a value of *98 for the “directed call pickup prefix”. When the phone performs the Directed Call Pickup after pressing a BLF or BLF/List softkey, the phone prepends the *98 value to the designated extension of the BLF or BLF/List softkey when dialing out. How this feature works when Directed Call Pickup is enabled with BLF or BLF/List Phone A monitors Phone B via BLF/List. 2. Phone C calls Phone B; Phone B rings. 3. 4. D 1. If you press the BLF/List softkey on Phone A, it picks up the ringing line on Phone B. Phone C connects to Phone A. How this feature works when Directed Call Pickup is disabled with BLF or BLF/List 5-130 1. Phone A monitors Phone B via BLF/List. 2. Phone C calls Phone B; Phone B rings. 3. If you press the BLF/List softkey on Phone A, it performs a speeddial to Phone B. 4. Phone C and Phone A are ringing Phone B on separate lines (if available). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Notes: 1. The default method for the phone to use is Directed Call Pickup over BLF if the server provides applicable information. If the Directed Call Pickup over BLF information is missing in the messages to the server, the Directed Call Pickup by Prefix method is used if a value for the prefix code exists in the configuration. 2. You can define only one prefix at a time for the entire BLF/List. 3. The phone that picks up displays the prefix code + the extension number (for example, *981234 where prefix key = *98, extension = 1234). t1 You can enable/disable “Directed Call Pickup” using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. D ra f Note: The “Directed Call Pickup” feature is disabled by default. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-131 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup Use the following procedure to enable or disable the Directed Call Pickup feature on the IP phone. Configuration Files To enable/disable Directed Call Pickup on the IP phone using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings” on page A-184. t1 Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings. 2 Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.) 3 (optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98. This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the BLF or BLF/List softkey. D ra f 1 5-132 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.) The IP phone plays a short "ring splash" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays a "ring splash". 5 Click to save your changes. Configuring BLF/BLF List for Directed Call Pickup t1 Use the following procedure to configure BLF/BLF List for Directed Call Pickup in the configuration files. ra f Note: You must enable Directed Call Pickup before performing these procedures. See “Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup” on page 5-132. D Configuration Files To set BLF or BLF\List in the configuration files for Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix A, the sections: • “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. • “BLF List URI Settings” on page A-230. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-133 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Use the following procedure to configure BLF or BLF/List for Directed Call Pickup in the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings. 2 Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box. 3 (optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98. This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the BLF or BLF/List softkey. 4 Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box. D ra f t1 1 The IP phone plays a short "ring splash" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays a "ring splash". 5-134 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>. D ra f t1 Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is shown as an example. 6 Select a softkey or programmable key to configure. 7 In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-135 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 8 For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT softkeys: In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is BLF). Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead. 9 In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key. For example, for BLF, the value is the extension you want to monitor. For BLF\List, the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring. 10 Click 11 In the "Line" field, select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are using. 12 In the "BLF List URI" field, enter the name of the BLF list defined on the BroadSoft BroadWorks Busy Lamp field page for your particular user. For example, [email protected]. ra f t1 to save your changes. Note: The value of the BLF\List URI parameter must match the list name configured. Otherwise, no values display on the 6757i screen and the feature is disabled. 13 Select the line state (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) that you want to apply to the BLF softkey or programmable key. 14 Click 5-136 D to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring XML for Directed Call Pickup Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the configuration files. Notes: 1. Before implementing this procedure, you must create an XML application that the phone uses when the XML softkey or programmable key is pressed. This XML application must be entered as a URI in the “Value” field of the XML key. For information about creating an XML script, see Appendix F, the section, “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” on page F-6. ra f t1 2. You must enable Directed Call Pickup before performing these procedures. See “Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup” on page 5-132. Configuration Files D To set XML in the configuration files for Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/ Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-137 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings. 2 Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box. 3 (optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98. This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the BLF or BLF/List softkey. 4 Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box. D ra f t1 1 The IP phone plays a short "call waiting tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays a "ring splash". 5-138 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>. D ra f t1 Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is shown as an example. 6 Select a softkey or programmable key to configure. 7 In the "Type" field, select "XML”. 8 For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT softkeys: In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-139 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 9 In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone uses to display the XML application to the LCD. For example, http://65.205.71.13/xml/startup/key.php?user=$$SIPREMOTENUMBER$$. Note: For more information about creating an XML script to use with Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix F, the section, “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” on page F-6. 10 Select the line state (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) that you want to apply to the XML softkey or programmable key. 11 Click D ra f t1 to save your changes. 5-140 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys You can configure the softkeys, programmable keys (9143i and 6753i have programmable keys only), feature keys, and expansion module keys to perform specific functions on the IP phones. Note: When entering definitions for softkeys in the configuration files, the “#” sign must be enclosed in quotes. Softkeys (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) Softkeys 6 6 6755i 6 Programmable Keys Lines Available Handset Keys Available Not Applicable - 9 - Not Applicable - 9 15 36 to 108* (Model M670i) 6 9 - - 9 - - 9 15 D 9480i 9480i CT Expansion Module Keys ra f IP Phone Model t1 The 9480i, 9480i CT, and 6755i IP phone have 6 softkeys you can configure to perform specific functions, The 6757i and 6757i CT IP phones have 12 softkeys you can configure. With up to 3 expansion modules attached to a 67xi model phone, you can get an additional 108 softkeys (M670i) or an additional 180 softkeys (M675i) to configure. The following table provides the number of softkeys you can configure, and the number of lines available for each type of phone. 60 to 180** (Model M675i) 6757i 12 36 to 108* (Model M670i) 60 to 180** (Model M675i) 6757i CT 12 36 to 108* on Base Station (Model M670i) 60 to 180** on Base Station (Model M675i) *The M670i expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for all 67xi model phones EXCEPT the 6751i. **The M675i expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-141 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features State-Based Softkeys (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT only) Users and administrators can configure a specific state to display when a softkey is being used. Available states you can configure for each softkey include: • idle - The phone is not being used. • connected - The current line is in an active call (or the call is on hold) • incoming - The phone is ringing. • outgoing - The user is dialing a number, or the far-end is ringing. • busy - The current line is busy because the line is in use or the line is set as “Do Not Disturb”. t1 The following table identifies the applicable default states for each type of softkey you can configure on the IP phone. Default States None All states disabled. Line idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Speeddial DND BLF idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy D BLF List ra f Softkey Type Auto Call Distribution (ACD) idle Directed Call Pickup (DCP) idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Group Call Pickup (GCP) 5-142 XML idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy WebApps idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Flash All states disabled. Sprecode connected Park connected Pickup idle, outgoing 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Default States Last Call Return idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Call Forward idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy BLF/Xfer idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Speeddial/Xfer idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Directory idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Callers List idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Intercom idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Services idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Phone Lock All states disabled. Paging All states disabled. Empty idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy t1 Softkey Type ra f You can enable or disable the softkey states using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. In the Aastra Web UI, you disable a state by unchecking the box for that operational state. In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to enable and disable operational states: softkeyN states D • You can enter multiple values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for the "softkeyN state" parameter. For example: softkeyN states: idle connected You must associate the softkeyN state parameter with a specific softkey. In the following example, the softkeyN states parameter is associated with softkey 12: 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-143 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features softkey12 softkey12 softkey12 softkey12 type: speeddial label: voicemail value *89 states: outgoing D ra f t1 Note: The IP phone idle screen condenses the softkeys. So in the previous example, softkey 12 will appear in position 1 if no other softkeys are set. A softkey type of "empty" does not display on the idle screen at all. For more information about the softkey type of "empty" see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT” on page A-193. 5-144 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuration Example The following example illustrates the use of the "softkeyN states" parameter, and the "softkeyN type" parameter with a value of empty. For clarity purposes, only the "softkeyN type" and "softkeyNstates" parameters are shown. softkey1 softkey1 softkey3 softkey3 softkey4 softkey5 softkey5 softkey6 softkey6 type: line states: idle connected type: dnd states: idle type: line type: empty states: connected type: speeddial states: connected t1 The following table shows how the keys in the example above would display on the IP Phone UI. softkey1 softkey2 Idle Key 1 Connected Key 2 D Softkey ra f Note: The "empty" key type allows a softkey to be removed quickly by deleting the softkey information from the configuration file. Notes Line displays for softkey1. Key 1 in connected state is the Drop key. Idle and connected display as applicable. (not used) (not used) Softkey2 is not displayed. softkey3 Key 2 (not used) DND displays for softkey3. Idle displays as applicable. softkey4 Key 3 Key 3 Line displays for softkey4. Default state values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing) display as applicable. softkey5 (not used) Key 4 (blank) A blank displays for softkey5. Connected displays as applicable. softkey6 (not used) Key 5 Speeddial displays for softkey6. Connected displays as applicable. Softkeys and programmable keys are configurable using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-145 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Programmable Keys (9143i, 6753i, 6755i) The following table provides the number of softkeys and programmable keys you can configure, and the number of lines available for each type of phone. Softkeys Expansion Module Keys Programmable Keys Lines Available Handset Keys Available 9143i - Not Applicable 7 9 - 6753i - 36 to 108* (Model M670i) 6** 9 - 6755i 6 36 to 108* (Model M670i) 6 9 - IP Phone Model 60 to 180** (Model M675i) t1 *The M670i expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totaling 108 softkeys. **On the 6753i, two of the 6 programmable keys are the DELETE and SAVE keys and can be programmed only if Administrator allows. ra f Softkey/Programmable Key/Expansion Module Key Functions D You can configure the softkeys and programmable keys on the phones, and any attached expansion module keys on the 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT to perform specific functions using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. The following table identifies the available functions of the softkeys, programmable keys, and expansion module keys on the IP phones. Available functions may vary on each model phone. The following Key Functions Table lists the available functions for the keys on the IP Phones and Expansion Modules. Note: These functions apply to the 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT and Expansion Modules unless specifically stated otherwise. The 6751i IP Phone does not have programmable keys or softkeys. 5-146 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Key Functions Table Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Configuration File Parameter Aastra Web UI Parameter Description None none None Indicates not setting for the key. Line line Line Indicates the key is configured for line use. Speeddial speeddial Speeddial Indicates the key is configured for speeddial use. t1 You can configure a softkey to speeddial a specific number. Optionally, you can also configure a speeddial key to dial prefix numbers. With this option, the prefix numbers automatically dial when you press the softkey, and the phone waits for you to enter the remaining numbers to dial out. Busy Lamp Field (BLF) D ra f For more information about speeddial prefixes, see “Speeddial Prefixes” on page 5-167. blf BLF You can also create speeddial keys and edit the keys using the IP Phone keypad. For more information about speeddial keys and editing speeddial keys, see your Model-specific User Guide for more information. Indicates the key is configured for Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use. A user can dial out on a BLF configured key. You can also set a BLF subscription period. For more information about BLF, see the section “Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on page 5-169. For more information about BLF Subscription Period, see “BLF Subscription Period” on page 5-176. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-147 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Busy Lamp Field List Configuration File Parameter list Aastra Web UI Parameter BLF/List Description Indicates the key is configured for BLF list use. A user can dial out on a BLF\List configured key. For more information on BLF, see the section “Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on page 5-169. Auto Call Distribution (For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is configured for automatic call distribution (ACD). ACD allows the Sylantro Server to distribute calls from a queue to registered IP Phones (agents). You can also set an ACD subscription period. t1 Auto Call acd Distribution (ACD) For more information about ACD, see the section “Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-188. Directed Call Pickup D dcp Directed Call Pickup (DCP)/ Group Call Pickup (GCP) ra f For more information about ACD subscription period, see “ACD Subscription Period” on page 5-198. Do Not Disturb (DND) dnd Do Not Disturb (For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is configured for either Directed Call Pickup or Group Call Pickup. The DCP/GCP feature allows you to intercept - or pickup - a call on a monitored extension(s). For more information about DCP/GCP, see the section “Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-202. Indicates key is configured for "do not disturb" use. For more information on DND, see the section “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211. 5-148 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Configuration File Parameter Extensible Markup xml Language) (XML) Aastra Web UI Parameter XML Description Indicates the key is configured to accept an XML application for accessing customized XML services. You can also specify a URL for an XML key. For more information on XML, see the section “XML Customized Services” on page 5-311. WebApps webapps WebApps (Not applicable to the CT handsets) Indicates the key is pre-programmed to access an Aastra XML-based application called, “xml.myaastra.com“. t1 On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones, the WebApps softkey displays on softkey 1 on the idle screen by default. You can also access Web Apps from the Services menu on these phones. D ra f On the 9143i and 6753i, you can access WebApps from the Services menu, or from a configured programmable key. By default, WebApps displays in the Services menu. Flash flash Flash On the 6751i phone, you can access WebApps from the Services menu only. For more information on the WebApps key, see the section “Web Applications Keys” on page 5-351. Indicates the key is set to generate a flash event when it is pressed, or when a feature key is pressed on the 6757i CT handset. The IP phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there is an active RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold). For more information about the Flash key, see your Model-specific User Guide. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-149 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Sprecode Configuration File Parameter sprecode Aastra Web UI Parameter Sprecode Description Indicates the key is set to automatically activate specific services offered by the server. For example, if the sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by pressing the key, *82 automatically activates a service provided by the server. The value you enter for this field is dependent on the services provided by the server. For more information about the Flash key, see your Model-specific User Guide. park Park Indicates the key is set to be used as a park key to park an incoming call. t1 Park For more information on park, see the section “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234. pickup Pickup Indicates the key is set to be used as a pickup key to pick up a parked call. ra f Pickup For more information on pickup, see the section “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234. Call Forward lcr Last Call Return D Last Call Return (LCR) call forward Call Forward (For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is set to be used to dial the last call that came in on that line. For more information on lcr, see the section “Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-245. Indicates the key is set to be used to access the Call Forward menus on the phone. For more information about call forwarding, see the section “Call Forwarding” on page 5-249. BLF/Xfer blf/xfer Call Forward Indicates the key is set to be used as a BLF key AND as a Transfer key. For more information about the BLF/Xfer feature, see the section “BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys” on page 5-178. 5-150 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Speeddial/Xfer Configuration File Parameter speeddial/xfer Aastra Web UI Parameter Speeddial/Xfer Description Indicates the key is set to be used as a speeddial key AND as a Transfer key. For more information about the Speeddial/Xfer feature, see the section “BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys” on page 5-178. Speeddial/Conf speeddial/conf Speeddial/Conf Indicates the key is set to be used as a speeddial key AND as a conference key. Callers List t1 For more information about the Speeddial/ Conf feature, see the section “Speeddial/ Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i)” on page 5-184. callers Callers List Indicates the key is set for accessing the Callers List. Icom directory Directory D Directory ra f For more information on the Callers List, see the section “Callers List” on page 5-288. icom Intercom Indicates the key is set for accessing the Directory List. For more information about the Directory List, see the section “Directory List” on page 5-297. Indicates the key is set to be used as the Intercom key. For more information about using the Intercom key, see your model-specific Aastra IP Phone User’s Guide. For information about other Intercom features, see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-102. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-151 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Conference Configuration File Parameter conf Aastra Web UI Parameter Conference (Applicable to the 6753i only) Description Indicates the key is configured as a conference key (for local conferencing). (For Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) An Administrator can also enable centralized conferencing on the IP Phones. For more information about using the Conference key, see your Model-specific User’s Guide. (Applicable to the 6753i only) Transfer Phone Lock (Not applicable to the cordless handsets on CT models) 5-152 Indicates the key is configured as a transfer key for transferring calls. For more information about using the Xfer key, see your Model-specific User’s Guide. services Services D Services xfer ra f Transfer t1 For information about enabling centralizing conferencing, see “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-359. phone lock Phone Lock Indicates the key is set to access Services, such as, Directory List, Callers List, Voicemail, and any other XML applications configured on the phone. For more information about using the Services key, see your Model-specific User’s Guide. Indicates the key is configured as a phone lock key, allowing you to press this key to lock/ unlock the phone. For more information about the lock/unlock key, see “Locking IP Phone Keys” on page 5-49. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Paging Configuration File Parameter paging Aastra Web UI Parameter Paging Description Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone. Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP) stream to pre-configured multicast address(es) without involving SIP signaling. For more information about the Paging key, see “Group Paging RTP Settings” on page 5-107. empty Empty (Not applicable to programmable keys or expansion module keys) Indicates the key is configured to force a blank entry on the IP phone display for a specific key. If a particular key is not defined, it is ignored. t1 Empty For more information about empty keys, see your Model-specific User’s Guide. ra f Reference D For more information about key functions for your model phone, see your Model-specific User’s Guide. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-153 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Softkeys and Programmable Keys Use the following procedures to configure the softkeys and programmable keys on the IP phone. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 5-154 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>. D ra f t1 Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is shown as an example. 2 Select a key to configure. For Softkeys and Expansion Module Keys: 3 In the "Type" field, select the type of softkey you want to configure. Reference: For available type values on each IP phone model, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 4 If applicable, enter a label in the “Label” field. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-155 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 If applicable, in the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey. For example, for a speeddial value, you can enter a number you want to use for the speeddial key, or 12345+ as a speeddial prefix. 6 If applicable, in the "Line" field, select the line for which you want to associate the softkey. 7 Some softkey types allow you to configure specific operational states. Operational states display to the IP phone when a softkey is used. To enable/disable an operational state, click the "Idle", "Connected", "Incoming", or "Outgoing" fields to check or uncheck the box. Note: Operational states are not applicable to expansion modules. 8 Click to save your changes. 9 t1 For programmable keys: In the “Hard Key” field, select the programmable key type you want to configure. Reference: For available type values on each IP phone model, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the programmable key. For example, for a speeddial value, you can enter a number you want to use for the speeddial key, or 12345+ as a speeddial prefix. 11 In the "Line" field, select the line for which you want to associate the programmable key. 12 Click 5-156 ra f 10 D to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features 6757i Cordless (CT) Feature Keys In addition to the softkeys on the 6757i CT, this phone also has handset keys you can configure with specific features. You can use the Aastra Web UI to configure the handset keys. Note: You configure the handset keys using the Aastra Web UI (Operation->Handset Keys) or by pressing the "F" button on the handset. You can program up to 15 feature keys on the 6757i CT handset with specific functions using the Aastra Web UI. The following table identifies the functions available for all 15 handset keys and the default functions for each key. t1 Description Line 1 key - Selects line one Line 2 key - Selects line two Line 3 key - Selects line three Line 4 key - Selects line four Icom key – Enter handset list to select handset to call Directory key – Activate directory feature Callers key – Activate callers feature Transfer key - Activate transfer feature Conference key - Activate conference feature Public key – Toggle between public & private call mode No function selected. Line 5 key (if available) - Selects line five. No function selected. Line 6 key (if available) - Selects line six. No function selected. Line 7 key (if available) - Selects line seven. No function selected. Line 8 key (if available) - Selects line eight. No function selected. Line 9 key (if available) - Selects line nine. ra f Key Function Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Icom Dir Callers Xfer Conf Public None D Handset Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 None 13 None 14 None 15 None 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-157 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Feature Key Programming Guidelines The following are guidelines to use when programming the feature keys on the handset: All handsets paired with the same Base Station have the same programmed functions since the web interface applies the functions to all the handsets paired with that base. • A newly registered handset or handset that was out-of-range during the programming needs to perform an "off-hook and on-hook" sequence in order for the newly programmed function to be broadcasted to the affected handsets. Simply press the v key from the idle state to go off-hook. Then, press the y key to go back on-hook. • Duplicate functions can exist in the feature key as there is no filtering or duplicate checking done on the handset or the base. • If no line keys are programmed for the feature key, the handset is restricted to intercom calls only. • If all 12 programmable functions have been programmed to "None", the user is presented with a List empty message when the feature key is pressed. ra f t1 • List empty D Use web page to configure 5-158 • For security reasons, the user has 180 seconds (3 minutes) to complete the programming. Otherwise, the phone displays the following error: ** Error **: Session expired, Please reload page. • For security reasons, the user must submit the page from the same browser that was used to load the page. If the user tries to submit the page from any other IP address, the following error displays: ** Error ** Session invalid. Different Client IP Addresses. — Please reload page 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Handset Feature Key Functions You can configure the features keys on the 6757i CT handset to perform specific functions using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.The following table identifies the available functions for the feature keys on the 6757i CT handset. The following Handset Key Functions Table lists the available functions for the keys on the 6757i CT IP Phone. Handset Key Functions Table None Configuration File Parameter none Aastra Web UI Parameter None Description Indicates the key is disabled. t1 Feature Key Function This option is available from Web UI only. line (Lines 1 through 9 are available for selection) icom Icom D Icom Line Directory Indicates the key is configured for line use. ra f Line dir Dir Indicates the key is set to be used as the Intercom key. For more information about the Icom key, see your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide. For information about other Intercom features, see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-102. Indicates the key is set for accessing the Directory List. For more information about the Directory List, see the section “Directory List” on page -297. Callers callers Callers Indicates the key is set for accessing the Callers List. For more information on the Callers List, see the section “Callers List” on page -288. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-159 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Feature Key Function Transfer Configuration File Parameter xfer Aastra Web UI Parameter Xfer Description Indicates the key is configured as a transfer key for transferring calls. For more information about the Xfer key, see your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide. Park park Park Indicates the key is set to be used as a park key to park an incoming call. For more information on park, see the section “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234. Pickup pickup PickUp Indicates the key is set to be used as a pickup key to pick up a parked call. Conference conf t1 For more information on pickup, see the section “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234. Conf Indicates the key is configured as a conference key (for local conferencing). D ra f (For Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) An Administrator can also enable centralized conferencing on the IP Phones. 5-160 For more information about using the Conference key, see your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide. For information about enabling centralizing conferencing, see “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-359. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Feature Key Function Public Configuration File Parameter public Aastra Web UI Parameter Public Description Indicates the key is configured to toggle from public to private mode. A public and private key can be used when at a line item in the Directory List. The Private key toggles a number in the Directory List to private. The Public key allows a number in the Directory List to be sent to the handsets. A 6757i CT accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute. For more information about the public/private keys, see your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide. flash Flash Indicates the key is set to generate a flash event when it is pressed, or when a feature key is pressed on the 6757i CT cordless handset. The IP phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there is an active RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold). ra f t1 Flash D For more information about the Flash key, see your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide. Reference For more information about features key functions for your 6757i CT, see your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-161 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Handset Feature Keys You can program up to 15 feature keys on the 6757i CT IP phone using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedure to program the feature keys on your 6757i CT Base Station and all paired handsets. Use the following procedures to configure the IP phone handset feature keys. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Handset Feature Key Settings for the 9480i CT and 6757i CT” on page A-214. 5-162 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Handset Keys. 2 Select the handset key you want to program. 3 Select the function for that handset key from the "Key Function" field. 4 Click D ra f t1 1 to save the function you selected to the handset key. The key programming information is sent to the 6757i Base Station and to all the cordless handsets associated with that Base Station. Any key programmed to "None" does not appear in the handset’s list. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-163 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI An Administrator can configure which key types display in the Aastra Web UI list for a Softkey, Programmable Key, Expansion Module Key, and/or Feature Key (CT Models). Currently, in the Aastra Web UI for a phone, you can select a type of key from a list of approximately 26 key types to assign to a softkey, programmable key, expansion module key, and/or feature key. Using the configuration files, you can specify key types to display in the key type list that apply to a User’s environment. D ra f t1 List of Available Keys Types 5-164 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features t1 Example of a List of Configured Keys Types (None, Line, XML, Empty) In addition to being able to specify which key types display in the list, the Administrator can also determine in which order the key types display. ra f You can use the following configuration file parameters to control which key types to display and specify in which order to display them in: • softkey selection list • feature key selection list D If no value is specified for the “softkey selection list” and/or “feature key selection list” parameters, the key “Type” list displays all of the key types by default. If an Administrator configures specific key types for a phone in the configuration file, and the phone for which he downloads the configuration to already has key types configured on it, those key types display in the key list for those keys, in addition to the key types specified by the Administrator. For example, a phone has a Park key and a Pickup key already configured on the phone, and the Administrator downloads a configuration file to the phone that has specific key types of None, Line, Speeddial, and XML. After the configuration file is downloaded, the Park key list will show None, Line, Speeddial, XML, and Park; the Pickup key list will show None, Line, Speeddial, XML, and Pickup; all other keys that were configured as None before the download will show only None, Line, Speeddial, and XML. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-165 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Notes: 1. Any key types configured that do not apply to the phone are ignored. 2. The SAVE and DELETE keys appear by default as Keys 1 and 2 on the 6753i and 9143i, unless specifically allowed by the Administrator to be configurable. 3. An Administrator must use the English value when configuring the key types in the configuration files. 5. After configuring specific key types for a phone, the key types in the Aastra Web UI display the same for both the User and Administrator Web interfaces for that phone. t1 Customizing the Key Type List Using the Configuration Files ra f Use the following procedure to configure the Key Type List that displays in the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Customizing the Key Type List” on page A-223. 5-166 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Speeddial Prefixes The normal function of the speeddial option allows you to configure a specific key on the phone to dial a number quickly by pressing the configured key. For example, if you had the following speeddial configuration in the configuration files: softkey1 softkey1 softkey1 softkey1 type: speeddial label: Office value: 5552345 line: 1 after you press softkey1 on the phone, it dials the Office number at 555-2345 on line 1. type: speeddial label: Europe Office value: 1234567+ line: 2 ra f softkey2 softkey2 softkey2 softkey2 t1 A new feature for the speeddial option allows you to configure a preset string of numbers followed by a “+”. This feature allows the phone to speeddial a prefix number and then pause to let you enter the remaining phone number. You can use this feature for numbers that contain long prefixes. For example, if you had the following speeddial configuration in the configuration files: D after you press softkey2 on the phone, it dials the prefix number automatically and pauses for you to enter the remaining number using the keypad on the phone. You can configure the speeddial prefix using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-167 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key The IP Phones allow you to set a parameter, “speeddial edit” using the configuration files that allows you to enable or disable the ability to add a speeddial key or edit a speeddial key from the IP Phone UI. Disabling this parameter prevents a user from adding or editing a speeddial key. The default for this parameter is enabled, allowing you to create and edit speeddial keys on the phone using the Press-and-hold feature, softkeys, programmable keys, expansion module keys and key pad, speeddial menu in the IP Phone UI, and the SAVE TO key. If this parameter is set to disabled, it blocks the user from using any of the features on the phone to create or edit a speeddial key. t1 Enabling/Disabling the Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key Using the Configuration Files ra f Use the following procedure to enable/disable the ability to add and edit a speeddial key. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys” on page A-230. 5-168 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Busy Lamp Field (BLF) The BLF feature on the IP phones allows a specific extension to be monitored for state changes. BLF monitors the status (busy or idle) of extensions on the IP phone. Note: The BLF setting is applicable to the Asterisk server only. Example t1 A Supervisor configures BLFs on his phone for monitoring the status of a worker’s phone use (busy or idle). When the worker picks up his phone to make a call, a busy indicator on the Supervisor’s phone shows that the worker’s phone is in use and busy. BLF Setting (For use with Asterisk) D ra f On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, the busy and idle indicators show on the IP phone screen display next to the softkey or programmable key configured for BLF functionality. When the monitored user is idle, an icon with the handset on-hook shows next to the BLF softkey or programmable key. When the monitored user is on an active call, a small telephone icon is shown with the handset off-hook. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, the LED lights next to each BLF programmable key illuminate steady to indicate the monitored line is off-hook or unregistered. The LED goes off when the line is idle. Note: You can configure a maximum of 50 BLFs on the M670i and M675i Expansion Modules. You can configure a BLF key on the IP Phones using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-169 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features BLF\List Setting (For use with the BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 or higher platform only) The BLF\List feature on the IP phones is specifically designed to support the BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 Busy Lamp Field feature. This feature allows the IP phone to subscribe to a list of monitored users defined through the BroadWorks web portal. In addition to monitoring the idle and busy state, the BLF\List feature also supports the ringing state. When the monitored user is idle, there is a small telephone icon shown with the handset on-hook. When the monitored user is in ringing state, there is a small bell icon shown. When the monitored user is on an active call then a small telephone icon is shown with the handset off-hook. t1 On the 9143i and 6753i phone, the LED lights next to each BLF programmable key illuminate steady to indicate the monitored line is off-hook or unregistered. The LED goes off when the is idle. When the monitored extension is ringing, the LED flashes. ra f Note: The Broadworks BLF feature is not the same as the Broadworks Shared Call Appearance (SCA) feature and does not permit call control over the monitored extension. D You can configure a BLF/List key on the IP Phones using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. You can also specify a BLF list URI that the phone uses to access the required BLF list. You can specify a BLF List URI using the “list uri” parameter in the configuration files or the BLF List URI field in the Aastra Web UI at the path Operation->Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Expansion Module Keys->Services->BLF List URI. For more information about the “list uri” parameter, see Appendix A, the section, “BLF List URI Settings” on page A-230. Example A receptionist has a 6757i running Broadsoft firmware that subscribes to a list of extensions from the BroadWorks Application Server. Each monitored extension in the list shows up individually on the 6757i screen next to a softkey button. The softkey icons on the screen change depending on the state of the extensions. 5-170 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features D ra f t1 On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i running Broadsoft firmware, the programmable key LEDs illuminate either flashing, solid, or turn off depending on the state of those extensions. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-171 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Asterisk BLF Configuration You can enable the BLF feature on Asterisk to enable monitoring for specific extensions. BLF on Asterisk is possible through the “hint” extension parameter. Add the following in the Asterisk extensions.conf file for each target extension being monitored. For example: exten -> 9995551212,hint,SIP/9995551212 Add the following in the Asterisk sip.conf file for each subscriber if it is not defined already. [9995551212] Subscribecontext=sip t1 For example: ra f BroadSoft BLF Configuration D You can enable the BLF feature on BroadSoft BroadWorks Rel 13 or higher through the BroadWorks Web Portal. Each user must have the Busy Lamp Field service enabled for their user. The user must add each desired extension to the “Monitored Users List” on the Busy Lamp Field service page and also enter in a list name for the monitored users BLF list on the same page. Changes to the “Monitored Users List” are dynamic and the Aastra IP phones are automatically updated without requiring a restart. Reference For sample BLF configurations, see Appendix D, “Sample BLF Softkey Settings.” 5-172 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring BLFs Use the following procedures to configure BLF and BLF\List on the IP phone. Configuration Files To set BLF or BLF\List in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. “BLF List URI Settings” on page A-230. D ra f t1 • • 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-173 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>. D ra f t1 Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is shown as an example. 2 Select a softkey, programmable, or expansion module key to configure. 3 In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks). 5-174 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT softkeys: In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is BLF). Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead. 5 In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key. For example, for BLF, the value is the extension you want to monitor. For BLF\List, the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring. 6 Click 7 In the "Line" field, select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are using. 8 In the "BLF List URI" field, enter the name of the BLF list defined on the BroadSoft BroadWorks Busy Lamp field page for your particular user. For example, [email protected]. ra f t1 to save your changes. Note: The value of the BLF\List URI parameter must match the list name configured. Otherwise, no values display on the 6757i screen and the feature is disabled. Click to save your changes. D 9 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-175 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features BLF Subscription Period On the IP phones, you can set the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. In the configuration files, you enter the following parameter with a valid value to set the BLF subscription period: sip blf subscription period: <value in seconds> The minimum value for this 120 seconds (2 minutes). The default is 3600 (1 hour). t1 Setting this parameter to a value lower than 3600 allows the configured BLF feature to become active more quickly after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. If you enter a value lower than 120 for this parameter, the default value (3600) will be used by the IP phone. ra f You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring BLF Subscription Period D Use the following procedures to configure the BLF subscription period on the IP phone. Configuration Files To configure the BLF subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-92. 5-176 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. 2 Enter a value, in seconds, from 120 (2 min) to 3600 (1 hour) in the "BLF Subscription Period" field. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-177 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys The IP Phones have a transfer (Xfer) enhancement feature you can use with the BLF and Speeddial keys - BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer. The BLF key allows one or more extensions to be monitored, and once there is any state change with those extensions, the key shows the status of the monitored lines. The Xfer key allows a call to be transferred to other recipients blindly or consultatively. The Speeddial key allows a number to be dialed quickly by pressing one key configured for speeddialing. After answering a call, the recipient can transfer the call to an extension by: Pressing Xfer key 2. Entering the number of the extension or pressing speeddial or BLF key. 3. Pressing Xfer key again t1 1. D ra f The BLF and Speeddial transfer enhancement feature provides a simpler way of transferring calls using the keys called BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer. The BLF/ Xfer key combines the BLF and Xfer key's functionality together allowing the user to transfer calls or use BLF with one key. Similarly, the Speeddial/Xfer key combines the Speeddial key and Xfer key's functionality together allowing the user to press one key to speeddial and transfer calls. Note: It is recommended that you enable the “switch focus to ringing” parameter when using the BLF and Speeddial transfer key feature. For more information about this parameter, see “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” on page 5-79. 5-178 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features BLF/Xfer Key Requirements and Functionality • BLF/Xfer and BLF A BLF/Xfer key can be configured for subscribing to an extension and monitor the status of the extension, similar to the BLF key functionality. Changes of the state of the monitored extension are indicated by a LED / Icon. • BLF/Xfer and Blind Transfer Calls When the focused line is in the “Connected” state, pressing the BLF/Xfer key transfers the call to the extension unconditionally, disregarding the status of the monitored extension. • t1 If transferring a call to an extension fails, a message “Transfer Failed” displays on the phone, and you can reconnect the call (get the call back) by pressing the line key again. BLF/Xfer and Call forward BLF/Xfer and Speeddial D • ra f When the focused line is in the “Ringing” state, pressing the BLF/Xfer key forwards the call to the extension unconditionally, disregarding the status of the monitored extension. When the focused line and the monitored extension are idle, pressing the BLF/Xfer key causes the phone to go offhook and dial the number of the extension. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-179 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Speeddial/Xfer Key Requirements and Functionality The Speeddial/Xfer key has the following capabilities: • Speeddial/Xfer and Speeddial When the phone is in the “Idle” state, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key causes the phone to go offhook and dial the predefined extension. • Speeddial/Xfer and Blind Transfer When the phone is connected to a call, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key blind transfers the call to the predefined target. • t1 If transferring a call fails, a message “Transfer Failed” displays, and you can reconnect the call (get the call back) by pressing the line key again. Speeddial/Xfer and Call Forward D ra f When the phone is in the “Ringing” state, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key forwards the call to the predefined extension. 5-180 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring the BLF/Xfer Key and the Speeddial/Xfer Key Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters in the configuration files to configure the BLF/Xfer key and/or Speeddial/Xfer key on the IP Phone. Softkey Parameters Programmable Key Parameters Expansion Module Parameters softkeyN type softkeyN label softkeyN value softkeyN line softkeyN states prgkeyN type prgkeyN value prgkeyN line expmodN keyN type expmodN keyN label expmodN keyN value expmodN keyN line topsoftkeyN type topsoftkeyN label topsoftkeyN value topsoftkeyN line type: speeddialxfer label: BX7801 value: 7801 line: 1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy D softkey1 softkey1 softkey1 softkey1 softkey1 ra f Examples: t1 Top Softkey Parameters prgkey1 type: blfxfer prgkey1 value: 35 prgkey1 line: 1 Refer to the following in Appendix A to configure a BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer key on the IP phone using the configuration files. Configuration Files To set a BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, “Softkey/ Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-181 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring the BLF/Xfer Key and the Speeddial/Xfer Key Using the Aastra Web UI You configure the BLF/Xfer key and/or the Speeddial/Xfer Key on the IP phone similar to configuring a BLF key or speeddial key using the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedure to configure BLF/Xfer and/or Speeddial/Xfer. Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML. or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. or Click on Operation->Expansion Keys. D ra f Bottom Keys Tab (6757i example). t1 1 5-182 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI ra f t1 Top Keys Tab (6757i example) Choose a key that you want to assign the BLF/Xfer key or a Speeddial/Xfer key to, and select BLF/ Xfer or Speeddial/Xfer from the “Type” field. 3 In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the BLF/Xfer key (for example, “BX35”). 4 In the “Value” field, enter the monitored extension (for example, “35”). 5 In the “Line” field, select the line for which you want to use the key functionality. 6 On the Bottom Key tab, in the States field, select the state(s) (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for which you want to use on the key. D 2 Note: States are not applicable to programmable keys. 7 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-183 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i) The IP Phones allow you to configure a softkey/programmable key/expansion module key to be used as a speeddial conference key (Speeddial/Conf key) while remaining in the current call. This key allows a user on a call, to conference another party at a pre-defined number while remaining in the conference. For example, while on an active call, a user can use the Speeddial/Conf key to dial a recording service and have the resulting conference recorded. Note: If not currently in a conference, the Speeddial/Conf key is disabled on the active call. t1 How it Works D ra f If you configure a softkey/programmable key/expansion module as a Speeddial/ Conf key, and you press this key while on an active call, the focused line changes to the dialing line. A Cancel softkey displays on the phone (only those phones that have LCDs larger then 3 lines), allowing you to abort the conference speeddial if required. The message "Ringing..." displays below the number when the far end is ringing. The message "Conf. Unavailable" briefly displays when a conference is already in progress or when the CT handset is in use. The active call is not put on hold when the speeddial number is dialed. Limitations for Speeddial/Conference Key The following are limitations for the Speeddial/Conference key: • The CT handsets are not supported. • The feature is not compatible with centralized conferencing. The softkey/programmable key is called "Speeddial/Conf" in the Web UI drop down list. In the configuration file, use "speeddialconf" as the softkey type. 5-184 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring the Speeddial/Conf Key Using the Configuration Files To configure the Speeddial/Conf key using the configuration files, you enter “speeddialconf” for the key type. The following parameters are examples you can use to configure the Speeddial/Conf key: softkey1 type: speeddialconf softkey1 label: Sales softkey1 value: 5645 softkey1 line: 3 t1 topsoftkey1 type: speeddialconf topsoftkey1 label: Sales topsoftkey1 value: 5645 topsoftkey1 line: 3 prgkey1 type: speeddialconf prgkey1 value: 5645 prgkey1 line: 1 D ra f expmod1 key1 type: speeddialconf expmod1 key1 label: Sales expmod1 key1 value: 5645 expmod1 key1 line: 3 Refer to the following in Appendix A to configure a Speeddial/Conf key on the IP phone using the configuration files. Configuration Files To set a Speeddial/Conf key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, “Softkey/Programmable Key/ Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-185 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring the Speeddial/Conf Key Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure the Speeddial/Conf Key using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Sottkeys and XML. or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. or Click on Operation->Expansion Module Keys. D ra f Speeddial/Conf Option t1 1 2 In the “Type” field, select Speeddial/Conf from the list of options. 3 In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the Speeddial/Conf key (for example, “Sales”). 4 In the “Value” field, enter the number that the phone dials when the Speeddial/Conf key is pressed (for example, “4556”). 5 In the “Line” field, select the line for which you want to use the key functionality. 5-186 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 6 For phones with softkeys: In the States field, select the state(s) (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for which you want to use on the key. Note: States are not applicable to programmable keys (6753i, 9143i). Click to save your changes. D ra f t1 7 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-187 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers) The IP phones support an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature for Sylantro servers. The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server to distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users (agents). To use the ACD feature on an IP phone, the administrator must first configure an an ACD softkey or programmable key. When an IP phone user wants to subscribe to a queue (in order to receive incoming calls), the user presses the ACD key. The IP phone UI prompts the user to specify the following information: User ID: the phone number(s) used to login into the queue. • Password: the password used to login to the queue. • Available/unavailable: Shows the current status of the IP phone. Specifies if the IP phone user is available/unavailable to receive a call from the queue. This parameter is set to “unavailable” by default. t1 • ra f When the IP phone user is ready to receive calls from the server, the user logs into a queue. Depending on the server configuration, the IP phone is either in an “unavailable” or “available” state. If the phone is set to “available” then the server begins to distribute calls to this phone immediately. If the phone is set to unavailable, then server waits until the IP phone user manually changes the phone status to “available” (using the IP phone UI) before distributing calls. D Whenever the IP phone user answers a call, or misses a call, the server automatically changes the phone’s status to unavailable. The server updates it database with this new information and no longer distributes calls to this phone. The IP phone will remain in this state until: — the IP phone user makes himself “available” again. — the ACD auto-availability timer expires. This occurs only if the administrator has configured an ACD auto-availability timer as described in “ACD Auto-Available Timer” on page 5-189. The IP phone user can also choose to manually change the phone status to unavailable, using the IP Phone UI. Note: It is recommended you configure no more than a single ACD softkey or programmable key per IP phone. 5-188 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features ACD Auto-Available Timer Whenever the IP phone user answers a call, or misses a call, the server automatically changes the phone’s status to unavailable. The administrator can control how long the IP phone remains in the unavailable state by configuring an auto-available timer. When the timer expires, the IP phone status is automatically changed to available. The default setting for the timer is 60 seconds. You use the following parameters to configure an ACD Auto-Available Timer in the configuration files: • acd auto available • acd auto available timer Configuring an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Key Softkey Examples Top Softkey Examples Programmable Key Examples prgkey1 type: acd topsoftkey1 type: acd topsoftkey1 label: sales prgkey1 line: 1: topsoftkey1 line: 1 topsoftkey1 states: idle D softkey1 type: acd softkey1 label: sales softkey1 line: 1 softkey1 states: idle ra f t1 You can configure an ACD key on softkeys, programmable keys, and extension module keys. The following table illustrates examples of configuring an ACD key on the phone. Extension Module Examples expmod1 key1 type: acd expmod1 key1 label: sales expmod1 key 1 line: 1 Use the following procedures to configure an ACD key n the IP phone. Configuration Files To configure an ACD key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-189 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring the ACD Auto-Available Timer. Configuration Files D ra f t1 To configure the ACD Auto-Available Timer using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings” on page A-186. 5-190 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring an ACD Key Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure an ACD softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key using the Aastra Web UI. This procedure uses the 6755i IP phone as an example. Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>. D ra f t1 Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is shown as an example. 2 In the “Type” field, select Auto Call Distribution. 3 In the “Label” field, specify a name for this ACD softkey. The Label helps identify which queue you are subscribing to when you login. (This field does not apply to the 6753i and the 9143i.) For example: Sales 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-191 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 In the “Line” field, select the line which the IP phone uses to subscribe to the queue. For example: Line 1 5 Click to save your changes. Configuring the ACD Auto-Available Timer Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure an ACD auto-available timer using the Aastra Web UI. t1 Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Auto Call Distribution Settings. 2 In the “Auto Available” check-box, click Enabled. 3 In the “Auto Available Timer” field, specify the length of time (in seconds) before the IP phone state is automatically reset to “available.” Valid values are 0 to 120 seconds. Default is 60. D ra f 1 For example: 60 4 5-192 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using the ACD Feature on your IP Phone The ACD feature allows you to login to a phone queue in order to receive distributed calls on your IP phone. To login to a phone queue, your system administrator must preconfigure an ACD softkey or programmable key on your Aastra IP phone. For models 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT, the ACD softkey is labeled according to your network requirements. Check with your administrator to verify the label assigned to the ACD softkey on your IP phone. The label usually describes which phone queue you are accessing when you press the ACD softkey. t1 For example, suppose the administrator wants to configure an ACD softkey to allow an IP phone user to log into the Customer Support phone queue. The administrator assigns the label “Support” to the softkey, so it is easily recognizable to the IP phone user. When the IP phone user wants to subscribe to the Customer Support queue, the user presses the Support key and can log in. ra f Once logged in to the queue, you can make himself “available” or “unavailable” to take calls by pressing the Available/Unavailable key on the phone UI. The server monitors your IP phone status. When you set the IP phone to “available,” the server begins distributing calls to your phone. When you set the IP phone to “unavailable,” the server temporarily stops distributing calls to your phone. D The icon that appears next to the ACD softkey or programmable key on the IP Phone UI reflects your current status. In the example shown below, the icon shows the current status of this IP phone user as “logged off.” Services Dir Callers Icom L1 Mon Jan 2 10:37am ACD softkey for this example 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 o Support 5-193 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features This icon changes when you log on to the phone queue and are available to take calls. The icon changes again when you are busy with an active call. The table below describes the meaning of the LED, and each icon, as they may appear on your IP phone: Phone Model Status: Logged In and Available Status: Unavailable Logged Out 9143i Solid Red LED Blinking red LED No LED 9480i, 9480i CT Solid Red LED icon Blinking Red LED Blinking icon No LED icon 6753i Solid Red LED Blinking red LED No LED Blinking Red LED Blinking icon No LED icon D ra f t1 6755i, 6757i, 6757i Solid Red LED CT icon 5-194 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Logging In to a Phone Queue (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) Use the following procedure to log into a phone queue from your Aastra IP phone. Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press the ACD softkey on your IP phone. Note: Check with your administrator to verify the label assigned to the ACD softkey on your IP phone. t1 The login screen (see below) appears. In this example, the ACD softkey accesses the Customer Support phone queue and is labelled “Support.” Icom ra f Services Dir Callers ACD: Support User ID: Password: D Backspace 2 Log In Cancel To log into the phone queue, use your IP phone keypad to enter the following information: User ID: The phone number you use to access the queue. Password: The password you use to access this queue. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-195 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Press the Log In softkey. You are logged into the phone queue. Once you log in, examine the IP Phone UI, and note the following information: If your IP phone status is set to “available” then the server will begin to distribute phone calls from this queue to your IP phone. • If your IP phone status remains “unavailable” after you log in, then you must manually change the state to “available” in order to start receiving calls. • To temporarily stop receiving calls, you can switch the IP phone status to “unavailable.” t1 • 5-196 • You use the IP Phone UI to manually switch the IP phone state back to available, or • The availability “timer” for your IP phone expires. This only occurs if your administrator has configured an auto-availability timer on your IP phone. To Log out of the queue, press the Log Out softkey. The server no longer distributes phone calls to your IP phone. D 4 ra f While you are on a call (or miss a call that has been distributed to your IP phone), your IP phone status automatically switches to “unavailable.” Your IP phone remains in the unavailable state until one of the following things occur: 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Logging In To a Phone Queue (6753i and 9143i) Use the following procedure to log into a phone queue from your Aastra IP phone. Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press the ACD programmable key on your IP phone. 2 To login to the phone queue, use your IP phone keypad to enter the following information: User ID: The phone number you use to access the queue. Password: The password you use to access this queue. Select Login. t1 3 You are logged into the phone queue. Once you log in, examine the IP Phone UI, and note the following information: If your IP phone status is set to “available” then the server will begin to distribute phone calls from this queue to your IP phone. • If your IP phone status remains “unavailable” after you log in, then you must manually change the state to “available” in order to start receiving calls. • To temporarily stop receiving calls, you can switch the IP phone status to “unavailable.” D ra f • While you are on a call (or miss a call that has been distributed to your IP phone), your IP phone status automatically switches to “unavailable.” Your IP phone remains in the unavailable state until one of the following things occur: 4 • You use the IP Phone UI to manually switch the IP phone state back to available, or • The availability “timer” for your IP phone expires. This only occurs if your administrator has configured an auto-availability timer on your IP phone. To Log out of the queue, select Logout. The server no longer distributes phone calls to your IP phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-197 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features ACD Subscription Period On the IP phones, you can set the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the ACD subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. In the configuration files, you enter the following parameter with a valid value to set the ACD subscription period: sip acd subscription period: <value in seconds> The minimum value for this 120 seconds (2 minutes). The default is 3600 (1 hour). t1 Setting this parameter to a value lower than 3600 allows the configured ACD feature to become active more quickly after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. If you enter a value lower than 120 for this parameter, the default value (3600) will be used by the IP phone. ra f You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring ACD Subscription Period D Use the following procedures to configure the ACD subscription period on the IP phone. Configuration Files To configure the ACD subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-92. 5-198 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. 2 Enter a value, in seconds, from 120 (2 min) to 3600 (1 hour) in the "ACD Subscription Period" field. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-199 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features BLA Subscription Period The IP Phones include a SIP BLA subscription period parameter that allows an Administrator to set the amount of time, in seconds, of the BLA subscription period. If this parameter is set to zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is specified in the Subscribe message received from the server, the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds. You can configure this parameter using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. t1 Configuring the BLA Subscription Period Use the following procedures to configure the BLA Subscription Period. ra f Configuration Files D To configure the BLA subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-92. 5-200 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. 2 In the “BLA Subscription Period” field, enter a value, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is specified, the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds. Valid values are 0 to 3700. Default is 300 seconds. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 to save your changes. 5-201 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers) Aastra IP phones and any attached Expansion Modules support the Directed Call Pickup (DCP) and Group Call Pickup (GCP) features. The Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept - or pickup - a call on a monitored extension. An Administrator or User can configure this feature using the Aastra Web UI to create a DCP or GCP softkey on the IP phone. When you configure a DCP softkey, you specify the extension that you want to monitor. Then, when the monitored extension receives a call, you press the DCP softkey to “pickup” (intercept) it. If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the IP Phone UI displays a list of incoming calls. You select a call from this list, and are connected to the call. ra f t1 When you configure a GCP softkey, you specify the ring group that you want to monitor for incoming calls. For example, suppose an Operator configures a GCP softkey to monitor incoming calls for a specific ring group (extensions 2200-2210). When an incoming call is received on any of these extensions, the Operator presses the GCP softkey and is connected to the call. If multiple incoming calls are received simultaneously, the Operator does the following actions: Presses the GCP softkey. The Operator Phone UI displays the current list of incoming calls (see below). • Selects an extension to “pickup” first. • D • Presses the Pickup softkey. The Operator is connected to the incoming call. Select an extension Press the Pickup softkey to intercept the call 5-202 DCP on line: 1. 2201 = Pickup = Cancel 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring DCP/GCP Using the Configuration Files (for Sylantro Servers) Use the following procedures to configure DCP/GCP using the configuration files. Configuration Files D ra f t1 To set DCP/GCP in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/ Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-203 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Directed Call Pickup (DCP) Using the Aastra Web UI (for Sylantro Servers) D ra f t1 Use the following procedure to configure Directed Call Pickup using the Aastra 5-204 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Web UI. This procedure uses the 6757i IP Phone as an example. Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>. D ra f t1 Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6755i Key Screen is shown as an example. 2 Select a key for which to configure Directed Call Pickup. 3 In the “Type” field, select Directed Call Pickup. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-205 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 In the “Label” field, specify a name for this Directed Call Pickup softkey. For example: DCP2200 5 In the “Value” field, specify the extension you want to intercept when you press this softkey. For example: 2200 Click to save your changes. D ra f t1 6 5-206 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Group Call Pickup (GCP) Using the Aastra Web UI (for Sylantro Servers) Use the following procedure to configure Group Call Pickup using the Aastra Web UI. D ra f t1 Note: A ring group must be configured on the Sylantro Server in order for a GCP softkey to function. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-207 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>. D ra f t1 Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6755i Key Screen is shown as an example. 2 Select a key for which to configure Group Call Pickup. 3 In the “Type” field, select Directed Call Pickup. 4 In the “Label” field, specify a name for this Directed Call Pickup softkey. For example: GCP_A 5-208 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 In the “Value” field, enter groupcallpickup. 6 Click to save your changes. Using Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup Use the following procedure for the DCP/GCP on your phone. t1 Note: Before using the DCP/GCP feature on your phone, you must first configure the DCP or GCP key. You must identify the extension(s) or phone number(s) you want to monitor when configuring the key. Step Action ra f IP Phone UI Using Directed Call Pickup (DCP) When the monitored extension receives a call, press the DCP softkey to pick up the call. 2 If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the phone displays a list of incoming calls. 3 Select a call from this list using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The call is answered. D 1 Using Group Call Pickup (GCP) 1 When any of the monitored group of extensions receives a call, press the GCP softkey to pick up the call. The call is answered. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-209 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 2 If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the phone displays a list of incoming calls. 3 Select a call from this list using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. Press the "Pickup" softkey to answer the call you selected. = Cancel D ra f Press the Pickup key to answer the call DCP on line: 1. 2201 = Pickup t1 Select an extension 5-210 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Do Not Disturb (DND) The IP phones have a feature you can enable called "Do not Disturb (DND). An Administrator or User can set “do not disturb” based on the accounts on the phone (all accounts or a specific account). You can set specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND. The three modes you can set on the phone for DND are: • Account • Phone • Custom DND Account-Based Configuration t1 An Administrator or User can configure DND on the phone-side by setting a mode for the phone to use (account, phone, or custom). Once the mode is set, you can use the IP Phone UI to use the DND feature. ra f Notes: 1. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”. D 2. You must configure a DND key on the phone to be able to use this feature via the phone’s keypad. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-211 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features The following describes the DND key behavior for each DND mode. • Account - DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF if DND enabled for that account. • Phone - DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF. • Custom - DND key displays custom screens on the IP Phone UI. User can select whether to enable/disable DND per account, enable DND on all accounts, or disable DND on all accounts. The following table describes the DND key and Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) LEDs when you enable DND on the IP Phone. MWI LED Behavior for All Modes t1 Softkey LED Behavior for All Modes MWI LED ON if current account in focus has DND ON. MWI LED OFF if current account in focus has DND OFF. ra f DND key LED RED if current account in focus has DND ON. DND key LED OFF when current account in focus has DND disabled. You can configure the DND softkey and the DND mode (Account, Phone, Custom) using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Once you configure DND, you can access the DND screen on the IP Phone UI. • 5-212 D Important Notes In the Aastra Web UI, the “Account Configuration” page replaces the previous “Call Forward Settings” page. • In the IP Phone UI, the new DND key feature now has new menu screens. • If you make changes to the configuration for DND via the IP Phone UI, you must refresh the Aastra Web UI screen to see the changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring DND Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters to configure DND on the IP Phone: • dnd key mode • softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type • softkeyN states (optional) Note: If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is disabled on the IP Phone. Example t1 The following is an example of configuring the mode for DND in the configuration files: ra f dnd key mode: 2 softkey1 type: dnd softkey1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy D In the above example, softkey 1 is configured for DND for line 1 only, with a “custom” configuration. Pressing softkey 1 displays DND screens for which you can customize on the phone. For specific screens that display in the IP Phone UI, see the section, “Using DND Modes via the IP Phone UI” on page 5-217. Configuration Files To set DND in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections: • • “DND Key Mode Settings” on page A-154. “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-213 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring DND Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure DND mode using the Aastra Web UI: Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 DND Key Mode Parameter D ra f t1 1 In the “DND Key Mode” field, select a “do not disturb” (DND) mode to use on the phone. Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Phone. • account • phone • custom Sets DND for a specific account. DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF. Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF. Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key, that list the account(s) on the phone. The user can select a specific account for DND, turn DND ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all accounts. Notes: 1. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”. 2. Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND Key Mode to “phone”, all accounts synchronize to the current setting of Account 1. 5-214 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 3 Click to save your changes. The change takes effect immediately without a reboot. Click on Basic Settings->Account Configuration. 5 For each account, enable DND by placing a check mark in the box. Disable DND by unchecking the box. D ra f t1 4 Notes: 1. If you selected “Account” or “Custom” mode in step 2, you can enable/disable each account or all accounts as applicable. If you selected “Phone” mode, the first account allows you to change the DND status for all accounts. 2. Number and name of accounts that display to this screen are dependant on the number and name of accounts configured on the phone. In the screen in step 4, Screenname1 is configured on Line 1, Screenname2 is configured on Line 2, and Screenname3 is configured on Line 3. The name for the account is dependant on the name specified for the “Screen Name” parameter at the path Advanced Settings->LineN. If you do not specify a value for the “Screen Name” parameter, the account name is based on the “Phone Number” parameter at the path Advanced Settings->LineN. If neither the “Screen Name” nor the “Phone Number” parameters are specified, the account name shows “1”, “2”, “3”, etc. only. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-215 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 6 Click to save your changes. The change takes effect immediately without a reboot. Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML; or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys; or Click on Operation->Expansion Module. D ra f t1 7 Softkeys 1 and 2 configured for DND Note: If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is disabled on the IP Phone. 8 5-216 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using DND Modes via the IP Phone UI If you add a DND key using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can toggle the DND state using the IP Phone UI. Use the following procedure to enable/disable DND on the IP Phone. The following procedure assumes you have already configured a DND key AND assumes there are three accounts configured on the phone. Notes: 1. If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is disabled on the IP Phone. t1 2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”. D ra f 3. Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND key mode to “phone”, all accounts synchronize to the current setting of Account 1. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-217 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features . Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action DND in Account Mode On the 9143i, 6751i and 6753i: With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for the account. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. 2 Screenname1 DND On Jan 1 12:96 3 Screenname2 Jan 1 12:96 t1 1 Screenname3 DND On Jan 1 12:96 ra f In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts configured on the phone. Only Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON. Screenname 2 has DND OFF. D On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT: With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for the account. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. Services Dir Callers L1 Screenname1 Services Dir Callers L2 Screenname2 Services Dir Callers L3 Screenname3 DND On Tues Jan1 10:00am Tues Jan1 10:00am DND On Tues Jan1 10:00am - DND - DND - DND In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts configured on the phone. Only Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON. Screenname 2 has DND OFF. 5-218 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action DND in Phone Mode On the 9143i, 6751i and 6753i: Press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for all accounts on the phone. Toggling to ON enables DND on all accounts on the phone. Toggling to OFF disables DND on all accounts on the phone. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. 2 Screenname1 DND On Jan 1 12:96 3 Screenname2 DND On Jan 1 12:96 t1 1 Screenname3 DND On Jan 1 12:96 ra f In the above example, toggling Screenname1 to DND ON, enabled DND for Screenname2 and 3 also. D On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT: Press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for all accounts on the phone. Toggling to ON enables DND on all accounts on the phone. Toggling to OFF disables DND on all accounts on the phone. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. Services Dir Callers L1 Screenname1 Services Dir Callers L2 Screenname2 Services Dir Callers L3 Screenname3 DND On Tues Jan1 10:00am DND On Tues Jan1 10:00am DND On Tues Jan1 10:00am - DND - DND - DND In the above example, toggling Screenname1 to DND ON, enabled DND for Screenname2 and 3 also. Note: Enabling DND in “Phone” mode toggles all accounts on the phone to DND ON. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-219 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action DND in Custom Mode On the 9143i, 6751i and 6753i: Press the DND key on the phone. The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows you to enable/disable a specific account or all accounts. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the accounts. Indicates DND Off DND X 2. Screenname2 Change Done ra f Indicates DND On DND 4. All Off Done Set DND 5. All On Done Set t1 DND 1. Screenname1 Change Done DND 3. Screenname3 Change Done D In the above example, Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON as indicated by a checkmark ( 3). Screenname2 has DND off as indicated by an X. Items 4 and 5 allow you to disable or enable DND on all accounts, respectively. You use the CHANGE key to enable or disable DND for a specific account. You use the SET key to enable/disable DND for all accounts. After making the change, you must press DONE and then Confirm (#) to save the change. Pressing Cancel (0) cancels the attempted change. The following screen displays after pressing a DONE key: Apply Changes? 0 Cancel # Confirm 5-220 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action DND in Custom Mode (continued) On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT: Press the DND key on the phone. The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows you to enable/disable a specific account or all accounts. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the accounts. Services Dir Callers t1 DND 1. Screenname1 2. Screenname2 3. Screenname3 Cancel - Indicates DND On Indicates DND Off Done - ra f - Change - All On - All Off X D In the above example, Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON as indicated by a checkmark ( 3). Screenname2 has DND off as indicated by an X. The ALL ON and ALL OFF softkeys allow you to enable or disable DND on all accounts, respectively. You use the CHANGE key to enable or disable DND for a specific account selected. After making the change, you must press DONE to save the change. If DND is configured on the phone, the softkey or programmable key switches DND ON and OFF. If the phone shares a line with other phones, only the phone that has DND configured is affected. The second line on the screen of the IP phone shows when DND is configured. When a call comes in on the line, the caller hears a busy signal or recorded message, depending on the server configuration. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-221 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) A SIP bridge line appearance (BLA) on the IP phones allows multiple devices to share a single directory address (DA). For example, people working at a technical support department could be located in different places. If their desktop phones are configured for BLA DA, when customer calls come in, all the phones with the BLA DA would ring but the call can only be answered by one of them. Once the call is answered, the rest of the phones reflect the status of the call. If the call was put on "hold" by the original recipient, any one from the group can pick up the call. t1 Note: This feature is dependent on the IP telephony system to which the IP phone is registered and according to draft-anil-sipping-bla-02.txt. You can apply BLA on the IP phones as follows: As a single BLA group - One BLA DA is shared among multiple phones. Only one phone at a time can pick up an incoming call or initiate an outgoing call on the BLA DA. All phones reflect the usage of the BLA DA. If the call is put on "hold", any one from the group can pick up the "held" call. • As a multiple BLA group - On one single phone, multiple BLA DA can be associated with different line appearances. Every BLA DA is independent from each other and follows the same rules as "a single BLA group". D • ra f • As multiple instances of a BLA DA - A "x-line-id" parameter was defined in draft-anil-sipping-bla-02.txt to present the incoming call to or place an outgoing call on the specified line appearance instance. The parameter is carried in "Alert-Info" header field over the request-URI (INVITE e.g.) or in the NOTIFY messages to report the status of a dialog. BLA DA can be configured on a global basis or on a per-line basis on the IP phones using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. 5-222 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features The following table shows the number of lines that can be set to BLA for each model phone. IP Phone Model Possible # of BLA Lines 9143i 9 9480i 9 9480i CT 9 6751i N/A 6753i 9 6755i 9 9 9 Configuring BLA t1 6757i 6757i CT ra f You can configure BLA on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Global BLA You configure BLA on a global basis in the configuration files using the following parameters: D sip mode sip user name sip bla number You configure BLA on a global basis in the Aastra Web UI using the following fields at Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Settings: • Line Mode • Phone Number • BLA Number 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-223 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Per-Line BLA You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the configuration files using the following parameters: sip lineN mode sip lineN username sip lineN bla number You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the Aastra Web UI using the following fields at Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru Line 9: • Line Mode • Phone Number • BLA Number ra f For Sylantro Server t1 Sylantro servers and ININ servers require specific configuration methods for per-line configurations. D When configuring the BLA feature on a per-line basis for a Sylantro server, the value set for the "sip lineN bla number" parameter shall be the same value set for the "sip lineN user name" parameter for all the phones in the group. For example, if sip lineN user name is 1010, you would configure BLA on a per-line basis for the Sylantro server as follows: sip line 1 mode: 3 sip line1 user name: 1010 (# for all the phones) sip line1 bla number: 1010 5-224 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features For ININ Server When configuring the BLA feature on an ININ server, the value set for the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user name parameter without the incremented digit added to the phone #. For example, if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is 10101, and the sip lineN user name for the second phone is 10102, etc., you would configure BLA on a per-line basis for the ININ server as follows: (# for phone 1 with appearance of phone 3) ra f t1 sip line1 mode: 3 sip line1 user name: 10101 sip line1 bla number: 1010 (# for phone 2 with appearance of phone 3) sip line1 mode: 3 sip line1 user name: 10102 sip line1 bla number: 1010 (# for phone 3) sip line1 mode: 3 sip line1 user name: 1010 sip line1 bla number: 1010 Note: The original phone number which has the bridged line appearance on other phones, will have the "sip lineN user name" parameter the same as the "sip lineN bla number" (1010 in the above example on Phone 3). D Use the following procedures to configure BLA on the IP phone. Configuring Global BLA Configuration Files For specific global parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Basic, Global Settings” on page A-67. Configuring Per-Line BLA Configuration Files For specific per-line parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings” on page A-76. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-225 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 1 For global configuration of BLA: D ra f t1 Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Authentication Settings. 5-226 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For per-line configuration of BLA: D ra f t1 Click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9). In the "Line Mode" field, select the BLA option. 2 In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone. 3 For global configuration of BLA: In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all IP phones. For per-line configuration of BLA: In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared on a specific line. 4 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-227 BLA Subscription Period The phones include a SIP BLA subscription period parameter that allows an Administrator to set the amount of time, in seconds, of the BLA subscription period. Reference For more information about setting the BLA Subscription Period, see the section, “BLA Subscription Period” on page 5-200. Using a BLA Line on the IP Phone t1 If you have either a global or per-line BLA configuration, and you want to share a call on the line with a BLA group, you need to press the Hold button before sharing the call with the group. For example, if line 1 is configured for BLA, and you pick up a call on line 1, you must press the Hold button to share the call with the BLA group. D ra f If you pick up a call on line 1 configured for BLA, and another call comes in on line 2, you can pick up line 2 without putting line 1 on hold. The line 1 call will be on hold automatically; however it is on hold locally only. The line 1 call cannot be shared with the BLA group. Note: The Hold button must be pressed for a call on a BLA line to be shared with the BLA group. Configuring Operational Features Operational Features BLA Support for Third Party Registration BLA allows an Address Of Record (AOR) to be assigned onto different line appearances for a group of SIP user agents (IP phones). When a call is made to this BLA number, the call is offered to all user agents that have mapping to this BLA. To support this, the IP phones need to support third party registration for the BLA along with the registration for its own primary appearance number. If the IP phone has the primary appearance as a BLA, then there is no need for third party registration. When configuring the BLA feature on a per-line basis for third party registration and subscription, the third party name must be configured using the “sip lineN bla number” parameter. For third party registration to work effectively, one of the lines should register as generic with its own username. #line 1 Bob auth name:4082272203 password: mode: 0 user name:4082272203 display name:Bob screen name:Bob ra f line1 line1 line1 line1 line1 line1 D sip sip sip sip sip sip t1 For example, Bob has Alice’s appearance on his phone. Bob’s configuration is as follows: #line 2 Alice sip line2 auth name:4082272203 sip line2 password: #BLA mode 3 sip line2 mode: 3 sip line2 user name:4082272203 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-229 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features #Alice phone number sip line2 bla number:4085582868 sip line2 display name:Alice sip line2 screen name:Alice Alice’s configuration is as follows: #line 1 sip sip sip sip sip sip line1 line1 line1 line1 line1 line1 auth name:4085582868 password: mode: 3 user name:4085582868 display name: Alice screen name: Alice t1 P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts ra f The IP Phones support the BLA specification, draft-anil-sipping-bla-02, which states that the P-Preferrred-Identity header (RFC3325) gets added to the INVITE message to indicate the Caller-ID that is used for the call. D Note: The P-Preferred-Identity for BLA accounts is also sent for hold/ unhold messages. 5-230 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) The IP Phones have an option for a Busy Line Appearance (BLA) configured line to send a SUBSCRIBE SIP message for a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI). t1 Notes: 1. If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the phone for it to take affect. 2. Both the “sip explicit mwi subscription” and “sip mwi for bla account” parameters must be enabled in order for the MWI subscription for BLA to occur. 3. The MWI re-subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for the "sip explicit mwi subscription period" parameter to re-subscribe. 4. Whether or not the "sip mwi for bla account" parameter is enabled, the priority for displaying MWI does not change. You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. ra f Limitations The following are limitations of the BLA Support for MWI feature: The phone shows MWI for the first matching identity if more than one line with different user names has the same BLA account. • If a normal line has the same user name as the BLA user of another line, the phone shows MWI only for the normal line. D • Use the following procedure to configure BLA support for MWI. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-231 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring BLA Support for MWI Using the Configuration Files Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “BLA Support for MWI” on page A-87. Configuring BLA Support for MWI using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure BLA support for MWI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. D ra f MWI for BLA Account Parameter t1 1 5-232 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 The “MWI for BLA Account” field is disabled by default. To enable this feature, place a checkmark in the “Enabled” box. Notes: 1. If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the phone for it to take affect. 2. Both the “sip explicit mwi subscription” and “sip mwi for bla account” parameters must be enabled in order for the MWI subscription for BLA to occur. 3. The MWI re-subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for the "sip explicit mwi subscription period" parameter to re-subscribe. 4. Whether or not the "sip mwi for bla account" parameter is enabled, the priority for displaying MWI does not change. Click affect. to save your changes and reboot the phone for the change to take D ra f t1 3 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-233 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Park/Pick Up Key The IP phones (including the 6757i CT and 9480i CT handsets) have a park and pickup call feature that allows you to park a call and pickup a call when required. There are two ways a user or administrator can configure this feature: • Using a static configuration (globally configures park and pickup) • Using a programmable configuration (using a key) Note: The IP phones accept both methods of configuration. However, to avoid redundancy, Aastra Telecom recommends you configure either a static configuration or a programmable configuration. t1 The IP phones support the Park/Pickup feature on the Asterisk, BroadWorks, Sylantro, and ININ PBX servers. ra f The following paragraph describes the configuration of a park and pickup key on the IP phone. For information about configuring the park and pickup static configuration method see “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls” on page 5-59. Park/Pickup Programmable Configuration (using a key) D The programmable method of configuration creates park and pickup keys (softkeys, programmable keys, expansion module keys) that you can configure on the IP phones. For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT you can set a key as "Park" or "Pickup" and then: • specify a customized label to display on the Phone UI • specify a value • specify which line to use • specify the state of the park and/or pickup keys For the 9143i and 6753i, you can set a programmable key as "Park" or "Pickup" and then: 5-234 • specify a value • specify a line to use 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features On 9480i/9480i CT and 6757i/6757i CT On the IP phone UI, the Park/Pickup feature displays the following: When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the custom label that you configured for the Park softkey displays on the Phone UI. • After the call is parked, the label that you configured for the Pickup softkey displays on other phones in the network. You can then press the "Pickup" softkey, followed by the applicable value to pickup the call on another phone in your network. • On the Model CTs, the customized labels apply to the base unit only. On the Model CT handsets, pressing Ï displays the default labels of "Park" and "Pickup". t1 • ra f Note: On the 9480i/9480i CT and 6757i/6757i CT, the old softkey labeled "Pickup" has been renamed to "Answer". This softkey uses the old functionality - when you pickup the handset, you see a softkey labeled "Answer". You can then press this key to pick up an incoming call. Do no confuse this feature with the new Park/Pickup configuration feature. On 9143i and 6753i • When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, you can press the applicable "Park" programmable key to park the call. D • After the call is parked, you can press the "Pickup" programmable key, followed by the applicable value to pickup the call. You can configure a Park and Pickup key configuration using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-235 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Park/Pickup Key Using Configuration Files In the configuration files, you configure Park/Pickup using the key parameters. You must specify the "softkeyN value", "prgkeyN value", “topsoftkeyN value“, or “expmodX keyN value”. The following examples show Park/Pickup configurations using specific servers. Model 6757i/6757i CT and 9480i/9480i CT Examples Server Park Configuration Pickup Configuration softkeyN type: park softkeyN label: parkCall softkeyN value: asterisk;70 softkeyN line: 1 softkeyN states: connected* softkeyN type: pickup softkeyN label: pickupCall softkeyN value: asterisk;70 softkeyN line: 1 softkeyN states: idle, outgoing** Sylantro softkeyN type: park softkeyN label: parkCall softkeyN value: sylantro;*98 softkeyN line: 1 softkeyN states: connected* softkeyN type: pickup softkeyN label: pickupCall softkeyN value: sylantro;*99 softkeyN line: 1 softkeyN states: idle, outgoing** BroadWorks softkeyN type: park softkeyN label: parkCall softkeyN value: broadworks;*68 softkeyN line: 1 softkeyN states: connected* softkeyN type: pickup softkeyN label: pickupCall softkeyN value: broadworks;*88 softkeyN line: 1 softkeyN states: idle, outgoing** softkeyN type: park softkeyN label: parkCall softkeyN value: inin;callpark softkeyN line: 1 softkeyN states: connected* softkeyN type: pickup softkeyN label: pickupCall softkeyN value: inin;pickup softkeyN line: 1 softkeyN states: idle, outgoing** ra f D ININ PBX t1 Asterisk *When you configure a softkey as "Park", you must configure the state of the softkey as "connected". **When you configure a softkey as "Pickup", you can configure the state of the softkey as "idle, outgoing", or just "idle", or just "outgoing". 5-236 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Model 6753i and 9143i Examples Server Park Configuration Pickup Configuration prgkeyN type: park prgkeyN value: asterisk;70 prgkeyN line: 1 prgkeyN type: pickup prgkeyN value: asterisk;70 prgkeyN line: 1 Sylantro prgkeyN type: park prgkeyN value: sylantro;*98 prgkeyN line: 1 prgkeyN type: pickup prgkeyN value: sylantro;*99 prgkeyN line: 1 BroadWorks prgkeyN type: park prgkeyN value: broadworks;*68 prgkeyN line: 1 prgkeyN type: pickup prgkeyN value: broadworks;*88 prgkeyN line: 1 ININ PBX prgkeyN type: park prgkeyN value: inin;callpark prgkeyN line: 1 prgkeyN type: pickup prgkeyN value: inin;pickup prgkeyN line: 1 t1 Asterisk ra f Note: The 6753i and 9143i do not allow for the configuration of labels and states. D Use the following procedure to configure a Park/Pickup key using the configuration files. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT” on page A-193 and “Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 6753i, and 6755i” on page A-202. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-237 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring a Park/Pickup Key Using Aastra Web UI On the 6757i/6757i CT and 9480i/9480i CT, you configure a Park and/or Pickup key at Operation->Softkeys and XML. You enter a key label, and value for a specific line on the phone. The default state of the Park configuration is "connected". The default state of the Pickup configuration is "idle, outgoing". The 6757i CT and 9480i CT handsets use the park/pickup configuration enabled at Operation->Handset Keys in the Aastra Web UI. If Park or Pickup are enabled on more than one line on the base unit, the 6757i CT and 9480i CT handset uses the first programmable configuration. For example, if line 1 and line 6 are configured for park, the 6757i CT and 9480i CT handset uses the configuration set for line 1 to park a call. t1 On the 6753i and 9143i, you configure a Park and/or Pickup key at Operation->Programmable Keys, and then enter the appropriate value and line. ra f Note: Applicable values depend on the server in your network (Asterisk, BroadWorks, Sylantro, ININ PBX. See the table below for applicable values. Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values Park Values* D Server Pickup Values* Aasterisk 70 70 Sylantro *98 *99 BroadWorks *68 *88 callpark pickup ININ PBX *Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature. Use the following procedure to configure the Park/Pickup call feature using the programmable configuration method and the Aastra Web UI. 5-238 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 6757i/6757i CT and 9480i/9480i CT: Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML. 2 Pick a softkey to configure for Parking a call. 3 In the "Type" field, select Park. 4 In the "Label" field, enter a label for the Park softkey. 5 In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network. D ra f t1 1 Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-238. 6 In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Park configuration. 7 The park softkey has a default state of “Connected”. Leave this state enabled or to disable, uncheck the check box. 8 Pick a softkey to configure for Picking up a call. 9 In the "Type" field, select Pickup. 10 In the "Label" field, enter a label for the Pickup softkey. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-239 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 11 In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network. Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-238. 12 In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Pickup configuration. 13 The pickup softkey has a default state of “Idle” and “Outgoing”. Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes. 14 Click to save your changes. For the 6757i CT and 9480i CT Handset: Click on Operation->Handset Keys. 2 Pick a handset key to configure for parking a call. 3 In the "Key Function" field, select Park. 4 Pick another handset key to configure for picking up a call. 5 In the "Key Function" field, select Pickup. 6 Click D ra f t1 1 5-240 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 6753i and 9143i: 1 Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. ra f t1 6753i and 9143i Screen 2 Pick a hard key (from keys 3 through 6) to configure for Parking a call. 3 In the "Hard Key" field, select Park. 4 In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network. 5 D Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-238. For the 6753i and 9143i: In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Park configuration. 6 Pick a hard key to configure for Picking up a call. 7 In the "Hard Key" field, select Pickup. 8 In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network. Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-238. 9 For the 6753i and 9143i: In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Pickup configuration. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-241 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 10 Click to save your changes. You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect. Click on Operation->Reset. 12 In the "Restart Phone" field click to restart the IP phone and apply the changes. D ra f t1 11 5-242 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using the Park Call/Pickup Parked Call Feature Use the following procedures on the IP phones to park a call and pick up a parked call. IP Phone UI Step Action Parking a Call 1 While on a live call, press the "Park" softkey. 2 Perform the following for your specific server: For Asterisk Server: t1 - Server announces the extension number where the call has been parked. Once the call is parked, press the y key to complete parking. ra f For BroadWorks Server: - After you hear the greeting from the CallPark server, enter the extension where you want to park the call. D For Sylantro Server: - Enter the extension number where you want to park the call, followed by "#" key. For ININ Server: - Enter the extension number where you want to park the call, followed by "#" key. If the call is parked successfully, the response is either a greeting voice confirming that the call was parked, or a hang up occurs. The parked call party will get music on hold. 3 If the call fails, you can pick up the call (using the next procedure) and press the "Park" softkey again to retry step 2. Picking up a Parked Call 4 Pick up the handset on the phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-243 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 5 Enter the extension number where the call was parked. 6 Press the "Pickup" softkey. D ra f t1 If the call pick up is successful, you are connected with the parked call. 5-244 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers) Last call return (lcr) allows an administrator or user to configure a "last call return" function on a softkey or programmable key. This feature is for Sylantro servers only. You can configure the “lcr” softkey feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. How it works If you configure "lcr" on a softkey or programmable key, and a call comes into your phone, after you are finished with the call and hangup, you can press the key configured for “lcr” and the phone dials the last call you received. t1 When you configure an “lcr” softkey, the label “LCR” displays next to that softkey on the IP phone. When the Sylantro server detects an “lcr” request, it translates this request and routes the call to the last caller. ra f Configuring Last Call Return Use the following procedures to configure LCR on the IP phones. D Configuration Files For specific last call return (lcr) parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-245 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 6757i/6757i CT: Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML. 2 Pick a softkey to configure for Last Call Return. 3 In the "Type" field, select lcr. 4 In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the last call return configuration. 5 The lcr softkey has a default state of “Idle”, “Connected”, “Incoming”, “Outgoing”. Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes as required. 6 Click 5-246 D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 6757i CT Handset: Click on Operation->Handset Keys. 2 Pick a handset key to configure for Last Call Return. 3 In the "Key Function" field, select lcr. 4 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-247 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 6753i and 9143i 1 Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. ra f t1 6753i and 9143i Screen Pick a hard key (from keys 3 through 6) to configure for Last Call Return. 3 In the "Type" field, select lcr. 4 For the 6753i and 9143i: D 2 In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the lcr configuration. 5 5-248 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Call Forwarding Call Forward (CFWD) on the IP phone allows incoming calls to be forwarded to another destination. The phone sends the SIP message to the SIP proxy, which then forwards the call to the assigned destination. An Administrator or User can configure CFWD on the phone-side by setting a mode for the phone to use (Account, Phone, or Custom). Once the mode is set, you can use the IP Phone UI to use the CFWD feature at Options->Call Forward or by pressing a configured Call Forward softkey/programmable key/extension module key. The following describes the behavior for each CFWD mode. Account mode - The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in focus. • Phone mode - The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone. • D ra f t1 • Custom mode - The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On the 9143i, 6751i and 6753i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey. Note: If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”. You can enable different call forwarding rules/modes independently (for example, you can set different phone numbers for Busy, All, and NoAns modes and then turn them on/off individually). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-249 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features The following table describes the key and Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) LEDs when you enable CFWD on the IP Phone. Key LED Behavior for All Modes MWI LED Behavior for All Modes CFWD key LED RED if CFWD All, CFWD MWI LED ON if current account in focus has Busy, or CFWD No Answer is enabled for CFWD ALL enabled. the account in focus. MWI LED OFF if CFWD All is disabled. CFWD key LED OFF if any CFWD mode is disabled. Important Notes In the configuration files, the “call forward key mode” parameter in the section, “Configuring Call Forwarding” on page 5-251 is in addition to the previous call forward parameter (call forward disabled). You can still use the previous call forwarding parameter if desired in the configuration files. • In the IP Phone UI, you can access the Call Forwarding features at the path Options->Call Forward or by pressing a configured CFWD key. D ra f • • 5-250 t1 You can enable/disable CFWD and set a CFWD key using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. You can set CFWD mode (Account, Phone, Custom) using the configuration files, Aastra Web UI or IP Phone UI. If you make changes to the configuration for CFWD via the IP Phone UI, you must refresh the Aastra Web UI screen to see the changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Call Forwarding You use the following parameters to set CFWD on the IP Phone using the configuration files: • • • call forward key mode softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type softkeyN states (optional) Notes: 1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward. t1 2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”. ra f 3. When configuring a CFWD mode (All, Busy, No Answer) for an account, you must configure a CFWD number for that mode in order for the mode to be enabled. D Use the following procedures to configure Call Forwarding on the IP phones. Configuration Files For specific last call forwarding parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections, • “Priority Alert Settings” on page A-155. • “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-251 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features : Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML; or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys; or Click on Operation->Expansion Module. D ra f t1 1 Softkey 2 configured for CFWD 2 5-252 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. Call Forward Key Mode Parameter ra f t1 3 D Note: If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-253 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 In the “Call Forward Key Mode” field, select a call forward mode to use on the phone. Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Account. • • ra f t1 • account The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in focus. phone The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone. custom The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific state (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey. 5 Click D Notes: 1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward. 2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”. 3. When configuring a CFWD state (All, Busy, No Answer) for an account, you must configure a CFWD number for that state in order for the state to be enabled. to save your changes. The change takes effect immediately without a reboot. 5-254 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Account Configuration. 7 For each account, enable CFWD state by placing a check mark in one or more of the following “State” fields: • • • D ra f t1 6 All Busy No Answer The “All” option forwards all incoming calls for this account to the specified phone number regardless of the state of the phone. The phone can be in the Busy or No Answer states, or can be in the idle state. The phone still forwards all calls to the specified number. The “Busy” option call forwards incoming calls only if the account is in the busy state. The calls are forwarded to the specified phone number. The “No Answer” option call forwards incoming calls only if the account rings but is not answered in the defined number of rings. The call gets forwarded to the specified number. Note: You can use the “Busy” and “No Answer” states together using different forwarding phone numbers. If these states are enabled for an account (the “All” state is disabled), and the phone is in the busy state when a call comes in, the phone can forward the call to the specified phone number (for example, voicemail). If there is no answer on the phone after the specified number of rings, the phone can forward the call to a different specified number, such as a cell phone number. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-255 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 8 For each account, in the “Number” field, enter the phone number for which you want the incoming calls to forward to if the phone is in the specified state. If using the “Account” mode or “Custom” mode, you can enter different phone numbers for each account. Notes: 1. If you selected “Account” mode in step 4, you can enable/disable each account or all accounts as applicable. You can enter different phone number for each enabled state. If you selected “Custom” mode, you can enable/disable each account or all accounts as applicable. You can enter different phone numbers for each enabled state. If you selected “Phone” mode, all accounts are set to the same CFWD configuration (All, Busy, and/ or No Answer) as Account 1 on the phone. (In the Aastra Web UI, only Account 1 is enabled. All other accounts are grayed out but use the same configuration as Account 1.) ra f t1 Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to Account 1, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone. Using the IP Phone UI, if you make changes to any other account other then Account 1, the changes also apply to all accounts on the phone. When enabling a CFWD state, you must specify a phone number for the phone to CFWD to. The number you specify applies to all accounts of the same mode. D 2. Number and name of accounts that display to this screen are dependant on the number and name of accounts configured on the phone. In the screen in step 6, Screenname1 is configured on Line 1, Screenname2 is configured on Line 2, and Screenname3 is configured on Line 3. The name for the account is dependant on the name specified for the “Screen Name” parameter at the path Advanced Settings->LineN. If you do not specify a value for the “Screen Name” parameter, the account name is based on the “Phone Number” parameter at the path Advanced Settings->LineN. If neither the “Screen Name” nor the “Phone Number” parameters are specified, the account name shows “1”, “2”, “3”, etc. only. 9 For the No Answer state, in the “No. Rings” field, enter the number of times that the account rings before forwarding the call to the specified number. Valid values are 1 through 20. Default is 1. Note: When using the “Account” mode or “Custom” mode, you can enter a different number of rings for each account. If you use the Aastra Web UI to change the Call Forward Key Mode to “Phone”, all accounts synchronize to Account 1. 10 Click to save your changes. The change takes effect immediately without a reboot. 5-256 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using CFWD Modes via the IP Phone UI If you enable/disable CFWD using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can use the CFWD screens that display to the IP Phone UI. You can access the CFWD parameters by pressing a configured CFWD key (if previously configured) OR by pressing Options->Call Forward on the phone’s front panel. The following procedure assumes you have already configured a CFWD key AND assumes there are three accounts configured on the phone. Notes: 1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still enable CFWD via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward. t1 2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”. D ra f 3. Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the CFWD key mode to “Phone”, all accounts synchronize to the current setting of Account 1. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-257 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features . Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Account Mode (9143i, 6751i, and 6753i) 1 Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. 1 2 Screenname1 CFWD All Jan 1 12:96 3 Screenname2 Jan 1 12:96 Screenname3 CFWD Busy Jan 1 12:96 Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state type. Cfwd Mode 1. All Done D Indicates CFWD Enabled ra f 2 t1 In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname 2 has CFWD disabled as indicated by no message displayed, and Screenname3 has “CFWD Busy” enabled. Indicates no CFWD phone number configured Indicates CFWD Disabled Change Cfwd Mode 2. Busy Done Change Cfwd Mode 3. NoAns Done X Change Cfwd Mode 4. All Off Done Set Cfwd Mode 5. All On Done Set ! In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is enabled but no call forward phone number configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD NoAns is disabled, as indicated by an X. 5-258 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for an account: All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the specified number. • Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call. • No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings. t1 • ra f Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns. You can also use the following keys if required: All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus. 4 D All On - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus. Press the CHANGE key for the state you selected in step 3. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON. Use CFWD State Screen to view 1. Cfwd State On Done Change Change 1. Cfwd All Cfwd State On Next Cfwd State Off Next Set Set 5 Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD mode ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF. 6 Press the SET key to save the change. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-259 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 7 In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd All Use to view Change t1 1. Cfwd State On Done CFWD Number Screen 2. Cfwd Number Done Change Change Cfwd Number __ Cancel Set Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify. 9 Press SET to save the change. D ra f 8 5-260 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 10 For the CFWD No Answer state, In the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd NoAns Use to view Change t1 1. Cfwd State On Done CFWD No. Rings Screen 2. Cfwd Number Change ra f Done 3. No. Rings Done No. Rings 1 Next Set Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1. D 11 Change Change When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call if there is no answer. 12 Press SET to save the change. 13 Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State, CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings. Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays. Apply Changes? 0 Cancel # Confirm 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-261 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 14 Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays. D ra f t1 All changes are saved to the phone. 5-262 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Phone Mode (9143i, 6751i, and 6753i) 1 Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. 1 Screenname1 CFWD All Jan 1 12:96 2 Screenname2 CFWD All Jan 1 12:96 3 Screenname3 CFWD All Jan 1 12:96 t1 In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts configured on the phone. All three accounts have CFWD enabled as indicated by the “CFWD All” message. D ra f Note: In ”Phone” mode, when you change the call forward configuration for an account, the change applies to all accounts. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-263 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 2 Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state type. Change ! Cfwd Mode 3. NoAns Done Change Cfwd Mode 4. All Off Done Set Cfwd Mode 5. All On Done Set D Indicates CFWD NoAns enabled Cfwd Mode 2. Busy Done t1 Indicates no CFWD phone number configured for Busy Change ra f Indicates CFWD ALL enabled Cfwd Mode 1. All Done In the above example, the account has CFWD All and CFWD NoAns enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3). The CFWD Busy setting is enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a ! 5-264 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select a state using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states. However, the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone. All - Enables CFWD All on the phone and forwards all incoming calls to the specified number. • Busy - Enables CFWD Busy on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled OR if the phone is currently engaged in another call. • No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings. t1 • ra f Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns. You can also use the following keys if required: All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the phone. D All On - Enables all CFWD states for the phone. Note: In “Phone” mode, the initial configuration you set for an account applies to all the accounts on the phone. 4 Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON. Use CFWD State Screen 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 to view 1. Cfwd State On Done Change Change 1. Cfwd All Cfwd State On Next Cfwd State Off Next Set Set 5-265 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 5 Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD state ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF. 6 Press the SET key to save the change. 7 In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd All to view t1 Use CFWD Number Screen Change ra f 1. Cfwd State On Done 2. Cfwd Number Done Change Change Cfwd Number __ Cancel Set Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify. 9 Press SET to save the change. 5-266 D 8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 10 For the CFWD No Answer state, in the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd NoAns Use to view Change t1 1. Cfwd State On Done CFWD No. Rings Screen 2. Cfwd Number Change ra f Done 3. No. Rings Done No. Rings 1 Next Set Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1. D 11 Change Change When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call. 12 Press SET to save the change. 13 Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State, CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings. Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays. Apply Changes? 0 Cancel # Confirm 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-267 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 14 Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays. D ra f t1 All the same changes are saved to all accounts on the phone. 5-268 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Custom Mode (9143i, 6751i, and 6753i) 1 Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. 1 Screenname1 CFWD All Jan 1 12:96 2 3 Screenname2 CFWD Busy Jan 1 12:96 Screenname3 CFWD NoAns Jan 1 12:96 t1 In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts configured on the phone. All three accounts have CFWD enabled as indicated by the “CFWD All”, “CFWD Busy”, and “CFWD NoAns” messages. Press the Call Forward key. The CFWD Account screens display. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each account. ra f Call Forward 1. Screenname1 Change Done Indicates CFWD Enabled D Indicates CFWD Disabled Indicates no CFWD phone number configured Call Forward X 2. Screenname2 Change Done Call Forward ! 3. Screenname3 Change Done Call Forward 4. All Off Done Set Call Forward 5. All On Done Set In the above example, Screenname1 has one or more CFWD states enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3). Screenname2 has one or more CFWD states disabled as indicated by an X. Screenname3 has one or more CFWD states configured but a specific state has no call forward phone number configured as indicated by a !. Items 4 and 5 allow you to disable or enable CFWD on all accounts, respectively. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-269 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 2 Select an account to configure. Press the CHANGE key. The CFWD Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state screen. Change Cfwd Mode 3. NoAns Done ! Change Cfwd Mode 4. All Off Done Set Cfwd Mode 5. All On Done Set D Indicates CFWD NoAns enabled Cfwd Mode 2. Busy Done t1 Indicates no CFWD phone number configured for Busy Change ra f Indicates CFWD All enabled Cfwd Mode 1. All Done In the above example, the account has CFWD All and CFWD NoAns enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3). The CFWD Busy setting is enabled for the account but has no call forward phone number configured as indicated by a !. 5-270 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for a specific account or for all accounts (with individual configurations): All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the specified number. The phone number can be different between accounts. • Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if that account is currently engaged in another call. The phone number can be different between accounts. • No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if the call has not been answered for a specified number of rings. The phone number can be different between accounts. t1 • ra f Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns. You can also use the following keys if required: D All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus or all accounts. All On - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus or all accounts. 4 Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON. Use CFWD State Screen 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 to view 1. Cfwd State On Done Change Change 1. Cfwd All Cfwd State On Next Cfwd State Off Next Set Set 5-271 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 5 Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD state ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF. 6 Press the SET key to save the change. 7 In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd All to view t1 Use CFWD Number Screen Change ra f 1. Cfwd State On Done 2. Cfwd Number Done Change Change Cfwd Number __ Cancel Set Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify. 9 Press SET to save the change. 5-272 D 8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 10 For the CFWD No Answer state, in the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd NoAns Use to view Change t1 1. Cfwd State On Done CFWD No. Rings Screen 2. Cfwd Number Change ra f Done 3. No. Rings Done No. Rings 1 Next Set Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1. D 11 Change Change When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call. 12 Press SET to save the change. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-273 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 13 Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State, CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings. Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays. Apply Changes? 0 Cancel # Confirm Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays. t1 14 D ra f All changes are saved to the phone for all accounts. 5-274 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features . Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Account Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT) Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. Services Dir Callers L1 Screenname1 Services Dir Callers L2 Screenname2 Services Dir Callers L3 Screenname3 CFWD All Tues Jan1 10:00am CFWD Busy Tues Jan1 10:00am Tues Jan1 10:00am t1 1 - Call Fwd - Call Fwd - Call Fwd Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays for the account you selected. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state type. D 2 ra f In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname2 has “CFWD Busy” enabled, and Screenname3 has CFWD disabled as indicated by no message displayed. Call Forward Mode Screen Services Dir Callers Indicates CFWD Enabled Call Forward Mode 1. All 2. Busy 3. No Answer - Change - All Off - All On ! X CopytoAll Cancel Done - Indicates no CFWD phone number configured Indicates CFWD Disabled In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD NoAns is disabled as indicated by an X. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-275 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for an account: All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the specified number. • Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call. • No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings. t1 • ra f Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns. You can also use the following keys if required: All Off Key- Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus. D All On Key - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus. CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the Call Forward mode (All, Busy, No Answer) in focus to every Call Forward mode of that account. For example, if you have the cursor pointing at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured, pressing the CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same phone number to both states. Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key. 5-276 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 4 For the CFWD No Answer state, press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. This displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON. Services Dir Callers Change D Change the State Services Dir Callers ra f Call Forward State Screen Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212 No. Rings: 1 - Change Cancel - AllAccts Done - t1 Services Dir Callers Call Forward Mode NoAns State: On Number: 5551212 No. Rings: 1 - Change Cancel - AllAccts Done - Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212__ No. Rings: 1 - Backspace Cancel - AllAccts Done - Services Dir Callers Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212 No. Rings: 3 - Change Cancel - AllAccts Done - Change the Number Change the No. Rings Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the same settings for that call forward mode. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-277 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 5 Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key. Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the same settings for that call forward mode. 6 Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify. t1 Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters. Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the same settings for that call forward mode. Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1. ra f 7 D When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call. Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the same settings for that call forward mode. 8 5-278 Press DONE in the CFWD State Screen to save all changes. Press DONE in the CFWD Mode Screen to save all changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Phone Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT) 1 Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. Services Dir Callers L1 Screenname1 Services Dir Callers L2 Screenname2 Services Dir Callers L3 Screenname3 CFWD All Tues Jan1 10:00am CFWD All Tues Jan1 10:00am CFWD All Tues Jan1 10:00am - Call Fwd - Call Fwd t1 - Call Fwd ra f In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts configured on the phone. Screenname1, 2 and 3 have “CFWD All” enabled. Note: In “Phone” mode, the initial configuration you set for an account applies to all the accounts on the phone. Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state type. D 2 Call Forward Mode Screen Services Dir Callers Indicates CFWD Enabled Call Forward Mode 1. All 2. Busy 3. No Answer - Change - All Off - All On ! X CopytoAll Cancel Done - Indicates no CFWD phone number configured Indicates CFWD Disabled In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD No Answer is disabled, as indicated by an X. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-279 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select a state for the phone using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states. However, the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone. All - Enables CFWD All on the phone and forwards all incoming calls to the specified number. • Busy - Enables CFWD Busy on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled OR if the phone is currently engaged in another call. • No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings. t1 • ra f Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns. You can also use the following keys if required: All Off Key- Disables all CFWD modes. D All On Key - Disables all CFWD modes. CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the Call Forward mode (All, Busy, No Answer) in focus to every Call Forward mode. For example, if you have the cursor pointing at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured, pressing the CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same phone number to both states. Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key. 5-280 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 4 In the CFWD No Answer state, press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. This displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON. Change Services Dir Callers Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212__ No. Rings: 1 - Backspace Cancel Done - D ra f Call Forward State Screen Services Dir Callers Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212 No. Rings: 1 - Change Cancel Done - Services Dir Callers Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212 No. Rings: 3 - Change Cancel Done - 5 Change the State t1 Services Dir Callers Call Forward Mode NoAns State: On Number: 5551212 No. Rings: 1 - Change Cancel Done - Change the Number Change the No. Rings Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-281 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 6 Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify. Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters. 7 Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1. 8 t1 When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call. Press DONE in the CFWD State Screen to save all changes. Press DONE in the CFWD Mode Screen to save all changes. D ra f Note: In “Phone” mode, the configuration applies to all the accounts on the phone. 5-282 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Custom Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT) 1 Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. Services Dir Callers L1 Screenname1 Services Dir Callers L2 Screenname2 Services Dir Callers L3 Screenname3 CFWD All Tues Jan1 10:00am CFWD Busy Tues Jan1 10:00am Tues Jan1 10:00am - Call Fwd t1 - Call Fwd - Call Fwd With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Account screen displays which lists all the accounts on the phone. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each account. D 2 ra f In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname2 has “CFWD Busy” enabled, and Screenname3 has CFWD disabled as indicated by no message displayed. Call Forward Account Screen Services Dir Callers Call Forward 1. Screenname1 2. Screenname2 3. Screenname3 - Change - All Off - All On Indicates CFWD Enabled ! X CopytoAll Cancel Done - Indicates no CFWD phone number configured Indicates CFWD Disabled In the above example, Screenname1 has one or more CFWD states enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), Screenname 2 has one or more CFWD states enabled but a specific state has no call forward phone number configured as indicated by a !, and Screenname3 has one or more CFWD states disabled as indicated by an X. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-283 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select an account using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can also use the following keys if required: All Off Key- Disables CFWD for all accounts on the phone. All On Key - Enables CFWD for all accounts on the phone. t1 CopytoAll Key - Copies all settings for the account you select, to all other accounts on the Call Forward Account screen. For example, if you have the cursor pointing at Screenname1, and you press the CopytoAll key, all of the CFWD settings for Screenname1 are copied to Screenname2 and Screenname3. Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key. After selecting an account, press CHANGE. ra f 4 D The Call Forward Mode screen displays for the account you selected. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state type. Call Forward Mode Screen Services Dir Callers Call Forward Mode 1. All 2. Busy 3. No Answer - Change - All Off - All On ! X CopytoAll Cancel Done - Indicates CFWD Enabled Indicates no CFWD phone number configured Indicates CFWD Disabled In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD No Answer is disabled, as indicated by an X. 5-284 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 5 Select a state for the selected account(s) using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for a specific account or for all accounts (with individual configurations): All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the specified number. The phone number can be different between accounts. • Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if that account is currently engaged in another call. The phone number can be different between accounts. • No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if the call has not been answered for a specified number of rings. The phone number can be different between accounts. t1 • ra f Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns. You can also use the following keys if required: D All Off Key- Disables all CFWD states for the selected account. All On Key - Enables all CFWD states for the selected account. CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the selected Call Forward mode (All, Busy, No Answer) to every Call Forward mode of that account. For example, if you have the cursor pointing at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured, pressing the CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same phone number to both states. Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-285 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 6 Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 4. This displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON. Services Dir Callers Change D Change the State Services Dir Callers ra f Call Forward State Screen Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212 No. Rings: 1 - Change Cancel - AllAccts Done - t1 Services Dir Callers Call Forward Mode NoAns State: On Number: 5551212 No. Rings: 1 - Change Cancel - AllAccts Done - Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212__ No. Rings: 1 - Backspace Cancel - AllAccts Done - Services Dir Callers Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212 No. Rings: 3 - Change Cancel - AllAccts Done - Change the Number Change the No. Rings Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the same settings for that call forward mode. 5-286 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 7 Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key. Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the same settings for that call forward mode. 8 Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify. t1 Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters. Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the same settings for that call forward mode. Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1. ra f 9 D When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call. Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the same settings for that call forward mode. 10 Press DONE in the CFWD State screen to save all changes. Press DONE in the CFWD Mode screen to save all changes. Press DONE in the CFWD Account screen to save all changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-287 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Callers List The IP phones have a "Callers List" feature that store the name, phone number, and incremental calls, for each call received by the phone. The following illustrations show the default location of the Callers List Key on each type of phone model. Callers List Key under Services Menu Callers List Key Options Directory 9480i Hold Redial Delete Conf Options 1 Xfer 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV * 0 9 WXYZ # L3 L1 D 5-288 3 DEF 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ GHI L2 Mute 9143i 2 ABC 4 ra f 1 Goodbye t1 Save * 0 # Xfer Icom Conf L1 Services L2 L3 L4 9480i/9480i CT 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Callers List Key 6753i ra f t1 6755i D 6757i/6757i CT You can enable and disable the Callers List feature using the configuration files. When disabled, the Callers List does not display on the IP phone UI and the Caller List key is ignored when pressed. When enabled, you can view, scroll, and delete line items in the Callers List from the IP phone UI. You can also directly dial from a displayed line item in the Callers List. You can download the Callers List to your PC for viewing using the Aastra Web UI. When you download the Callers List, the phone stores the callerlist.csv file to your computer in comma-separated value (CSV) format. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-289 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The following is an example of a Callers List in a spreadsheet application. D ra f t1 The file displays the name, phone number, and the line that the call came in on. 5-290 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Enabling/Disabling Callers List You can enable and disable user access to the Callers List on the IP phones using the following parameter in the configuration files: • callers list disabled Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter is set to 0, the Callers List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is set to 1, the IP phone does not save any caller information to the Caller List. For 6757i and 6757i CT phones, the "Caller List" option on the IP phone is removed from the Services menu, and the Caller List key is ignored if pressed by the user. Configuration Files t1 Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Callers List on the IP phones. ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Callers List, see Appendix A, the section, “Callers List Settings” on page A-124. Using the Callers List D Use the following procedure to access and use the Callers List. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 On 9143i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT: Press the “Callers List” key on the phone to enter the Callers List. On the 9480i, 9480i CT: Press the “Services” key on the phone, and then select “Callers List” from the list of options. 2 Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List. To the left of a line item, a b icon displays with the handset ON or OFF the receiver. The ON receiver indicates the call came in as a missed call. The OFF receiver indicates the call came in and was answered. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-291 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 3 To delete all entries in the Callers list, press the 3 Delete key at the "Callers List" header. To delete a line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to delete and press the 3 Delete key. 4 To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys. To save a line item to a programmable key for speeddialing, press the 3 Save key and enter the line number at the "Save to?" prompt that is already configured for speeddialing at a programmable key. 6 To dial a displayed entry from the Callers List, pick up the handset, press the d/f handsfree key, or press a line key. 7 To exit the Callers List, press the “Callers List” key again or the “Goodbye” key. D ra f t1 5 5-292 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Downloading the Callers List Use the following procedure to download the Callers List using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Directory. 2 In the Callers List field, click on ra f t1 1 . A “File Download” message displays. Click . 4 Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Callers List and click . D 3 The callerslist.csv file downloads to your computer. 5 Use a spreadsheet application to open and view the Callers List. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-293 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Customizable Callers List and Services Keys The IP phones currently have a Callers List key (all 5i Series phones) and a Services key (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT). An Administrator can specify URI overrides for these keys using the following parameters in the configuration files: • services script • callers list script Specifying URIs for these parameters cause the creation of an XML custom application instead of the standard function of the Callers List and Services keys. An Administrator can configure these parameters using the configuration files only. t1 Creating Customizable Callers List and Services Keys ra f Use the following procedure to create customized Callers List and Services keys on the IP Phone using the configuration files. Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Customize Callers List and Services Key” on page A-125. 5-294 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Missed Calls Indicator The IP phone has a "missed calls" indicator that increments the number of missed calls to the phone. This feature is accessible from the IP phone UI only. You can enable and disable the Missed Calls Indicator feature using the configuration files. When disabled, the Missed Calls Indicator does not increment as calls come into the IP phone. t1 When enabled, the number of calls that have not been answered increment on the phone’s idle screen as "<number> New Calls". As the number of unanswered calls increment, the phone numbers associated with the calls are stored in the Callers List. The user can access the Callers List and clear the call from the list. Once the user accesses the Callers List, the "<number> New Calls" on the idle screen is cleared. ra f Note: The phones also include a “Missed-Calls-Message” field in a “message summary” event of a SIP NOTIFY message. Enabling/Disabling Missed Calls Indicator You can enable (turn on) and disable (turn off) the Missed Calls Indicator on the IP phones using the following parameter in the configuration files: missed calls indicator disabled D • Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter is set to 0, the indicator increments as unanswered calls come into the IP phone. If set to 1, the indicator does not increment the unanswered calls. Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Missed Calls Indicator on the IP phones. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Missed Calls Indicator, see Appendix A, the section, “Missed Calls Indicator Settings” on page A-131. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-295 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Accessing and Clearing Missed Calls Use the following procedure to access and clear missed calls from the Callers List. Once you display the Callers List, the "<number> New Calls" indicator clears. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press the “Callers List” key on the phone to enter the Callers List. 2 3 Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List to find the line items that have the b icon with the receiver ON. These are the missed calls to the phone. To clear the line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to clear and press the 3, Clear, or Delete key (depending on your phone model). t1 Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys. D ra f The line item deletes from the Callers List. 5-296 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Directory List The IP phones have a "Directory List" feature that allows you to store frequently used names and numbers on the phone. You can also dial directly from the directory entry. The following illustrations show the default location of the Directory Key on each type of phone model. Directory Key under Services Menu Directory Key t1 Options Directory Save Hold Redial Delete Conf Options 1 Xfer 2 ABC 4 GHI 5 JKL 7 PQRS 8 TUV * 0 3 DEF ra f 1 6 MNO 9 WXYZ # L3 D Mute 9143i 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 8 9 WXYZ PQRS L2 L1 9480i Goodbye * 0 TUV # Xfer Icom Conf L1 Services L2 L3 L4 9480i/9480i CT 5-297 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Directory Key Options Key (Directory is an option under Services Menu) 6753i t1 6751i D ra f Directory Key 5-298 6755i 6757i/6757i CT 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Directory List Capabilities In the Directory List a user or administrator can store a maximum of 7 numbers associated with a unique name. You can apply pre-defined labels to the entry which include, Office, Home, Cell, and Pager, or create your own labels. Labels can be up to 14 characters in length. You can also sort multiple numbers according to preference and perform a quick-search feature that allows you to enter the first letter that corresponds to a name in the Directory to find specific line items. The phone displays the first name with this letter.The quick-search feature in the Directory List works only when the Directory is first accessed. Reference t1 For more detailed information about the Directory Key on your IP phone, and the Directory List, see your model-specific User Guide. ra f Administrator/User Functions for Directory List You can perform the following pertaining to the Directory List: • You can enable and disable access to the Directory List using the configuration files. When disabled, the Directory List does not display on the IP phone UI and the Directory List softkey is ignored when pressed. This is an administrator function only. D • If the Directory List is enabled, you can view, add, change, and delete entries to/from the Directory List using the IP phone UI. You can also directly dial a number from the Directory List. This is an administrator and user function. • A public and private softkey can be used when at a line item in the Directory List. The Private key toggles a number in the Directory List to private. The Public key allows a number in the Directory List to be sent to the handsets. A 6757i CT accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute. This is an administrator and user function. • You can download the Directory List to your PC via the Aastra Web UI. The phone stores the directorylist.csv file to your PC in comma-separated value (CSV) format. This is an administrator and user function. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-299 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features • You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The following is an example of a Directory List in a spreadsheet application. This is an administrator and user function. t1 The file displays the name, phone number(s), and line number(s) for each Directory entry. ra f Enabling/Disabling Directory List You can enable and disable user access to the Directory List on the IP phones using the following parameter in the configuration files: directory disabled D • Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter is set to 0, the Directory List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is set to 1, the Directory List does not display on the IP phone and the Directory key is disabled. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, the "Directory" option is also removed from the "Services" menu. Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Directory List on the IP phones. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Directory List, see Appendix A, the section, “Directory Settings” on page A-123. 5-300 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Server to IP Phone Download You can populate your IP phone Directory List with server directory files. To activate this feature, you need to add the following parameters to the configuration files: • directory 1: company_directory • directory 2: my_personal_directory’ The IP phone recognizes the following characters in a Directory List: Character Description Pound character; any characters appearing after the # on a line are treated as a comment ’,’ Comma character; used to separate the name, URI number, line, and mode fields within each directory entry. ’"’ Quotation mark; when pound and comma characters are found between quotes in a name field or URI number field, they are treated as regular characters. ra f t1 ’#’ D A valid directory entry has a name, a URI number, and optional line number, and an optional mode attribute, all separated by commas. If a line number is not present, the entry is assigned to line 1. If a mode attribute (public or private) is not present, the entry is assigned to "Private". The following directory entries are considered valid: # our company's directory # updated 1 jan 2012 # mode = private, by default # joe foo bar, 123456789, 6 # line = 1, by default # mode = private, by default # snidley whiplash, 000111222 # the parser ignores the COMMA # in the name # mode = private, by default # "manny, jr", 093666888, 9 # the parser ignores the POUND # chars in the URI number # mode = private, by default # hello dolly, "12#34#7", 2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-301 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Server to IP Phone Download Behavior The software that reads directory files from the server, loads the file’s contents into the phone's NVRAM when the phone is booting. Directory entries in the NVRAM that originate from a server directory file are 'owned' by the server. During the boot process both directory files are read, combined into a single list, and any duplicate entries are deleted from the list. Any entries in this list that are not already in the phone's NVRAM are added to the NVRAM and flagged as being owned by the server. Likewise, any entries in the NVRAM that are owned by the server, but are no longer in one of the server's directory files, are removed from the NVRAM. Entries made from the IP phone UI are never touched. t1 Directory List Limitations The following table indicates the maximum characters for each line and field in the Directory List. ra f Directory List Limitations 255 characters Maximum length of a name 15 characters Maximum length of a URI 45 characters Maximum number directory entries in the NVRAM 200 entries Maximum number directory entries in the NVRAM with the "public" attribute (6757i CT only) 50 entries D Maximum length of a line 5-302 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using the Directory List Use the following procedures to access and use the Directory List. Note: In the following procedure, the location of keys (hard keys, softkeys, and programmable keys) on the phone are dependant on your specific phone model. See Chapter 1, Overview, for the keys that are specific to your phone model. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 On the 9143i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: On the 9480i, 9480i CT: t1 Press the DIRECTORY key to enter the Directory List. ra f Press the Services key, and then select “Directory” from the list of options. Note: After entering the Directory List, if no key is pressed within 3 seconds, the phone prompts you to press the first letter in the name of the required directory entry. The phone finds and displays the first name with this letter. Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Directory List. D 2 To dial from an entry in the Directory List: 3 At a line item in the Directory List, pick up the handset, press the d/f key, or press a line key. The phone automatically dials the Directory List number for you. To add a new entry to the Directory List: 4 a Press the SAVE key or ADD NEW softkey (depending on your model phone) at the Directory List header screen and perform step 4. or Press the SAVE key or ADD NEW softkey at a line item and press the DIRECTORY key again. b Enter a phone number, name, and line number and press the SAVE key after each field entry. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-303 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action To edit an entry in the Directory List: 5 a At a line item in the Directory List, press the 3 key. Note: Use the SAVE key to scroll between the number, name and line entries. Edit the phone number if required and press SAVE. c Edit the name if required and press SAVE. d Edit the line if required and press SAVE. e Press SAVE to save the changes and exit the editing function. t1 b To delete an entry from the Directory List: a At a line item in the Directory List, press DELETE. The following prompt displays: ra f 6 “DELETE again to erase this item”. b Press DELETE again to delete the entry from the Directory List. D Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s scroll keys. To delete all entries from the Directory List: 7 a At the Directory List header, press DELETE or DELETE LIST (depending on your phone model). The following prompt displays: “DELETE again to erase all items”. b Press DELETE again to delete all entries from the Directory List. Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s scroll keys. To copy an entry from the Directory List to a speeddial key (for 9143i, and 6753i only): 8 At a line item in the Directory List, press the SAVE key. The "Save to?" prompt displays. Enter a number from 1 to 9 (associated with the keypad) where you want to save the item as a speeddial. Note: You must have a speeddial key previously configured on your phone to use this feature. To configure a speeddial key, see your Model-specific User’s Guide. 5-304 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 9 To exit the Directory List, press the DIRECTORY key again, the GOODBYE key, or the QUIT key (depending on your specific phone model). From the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handset: 10 a Press the Public/Private softkeys to toggle between making the new entry public or private. Note: The entry is set to Private by default. If the entry is made Public, the entry is sent to the handsets. A 6757i CT accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute. b D ra f t1 c To edit an entry, use the Change softkey. A screen displays allowing you to edit the name, phone number, and line number, as well as the public/private setting. To dial a displayed entry from the Directory List, pick up the handset, press the d/f handsfree key, or press the Dial softkey. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-305 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Downloading from the Server to the IP Phone You can use the configuration files to download the Directory List from the configuration server to the IP phone.. Note: You must use TFTP to download the Directory List. Use the following procedure to configure the download. Configuration Files t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for downloading the Directory List, see Appendix A, the section, “Directory Settings” on page A-123. Downloading from the IP Phone to the Server ra f You can use the Aastra Web UI to download the Directory List from the IP phone to the configuration server. D Note: You must use TFTP to download the Directory List. 5-306 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Use the following procedure to configure the download. Click on Operation->Directory. 2 In the Directory List field, click on . ra f 1 t1 Aastra Web UI A “File Download” message displays. Click . 4 Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Directory List and click . D 3 The directorylist.csv file downloads to your computer. 5 Use a spreadsheet application to open and view the Directory List. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-307 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) The Voicemail feature on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i and 6757i CT IP phones allow you to configure lines with phone numbers so the phone can dial out to connect to a voicemail server. You associate the Voicemail numbers with the phone numbers configured on each line (1 - 9 lines). For each assigned Voicemail number, there can be a minimum of 0 or a maximum of 1 Voicemail access phone number. The Voicemail list displays a list of phone numbers assigned to the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT that have registered voicemail accounts associated with them. t1 Note: The Voicemail list does not display the voicemail access number. ra f The phone displays up to 99 voicemails for an account even if the number of voicemails exceeds the limit. Registered account numbers/URIs that exceed the length of the screen, either with or without the voicemail icon and the message count, are truncated with an ellipse character at the end of the number/URI string. D The end of the Voicemail list displays the number of new voicemail messages (if any exist). Configuring Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) You configure Voicemail in the configuration files to dial a specific number to access an existing voicemail account. The user then follows the voicemail instructions for listening to voicemails. Note: The phone must have a registered voicemail account from a server for this feature to be enabled. When no registered voicemail accounts are registered to the phone, the display shows "List Empty". 5-308 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features To configure the Voicemail feature on the 9480i/9480i CT and 6757i/6757i CT, you must enter the following parameter in the configuration files: • sip lineN vmail: You can enter up to 9 Voicemail numbers associated with each of the 9 lines on the phone. For example: sip line1 vmail: *97 sip line2 vmail: *95 t1 Note: In the above example, the user would dial *97 to access the voicemail account for line 1, and *95 to access the voicemail account for line 2. Use the following procedure to configure voicemail using the configuration files. ra f Configuration Files D For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Voicemail Settings” on page A-122. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-309 Using Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i6757i CT only) Use the following procedure to access and use voicemail. IP Phone UI Step Action For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i/6757i CT: 1 Press Services on the phone to display the Services menu. 2 From the Services menu, select "Voicemail". 3 Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Voicemail List. t1 When you have selected a line item, press the d/f handsfree key, 4 Scroll Right key, or press a line softkey to make an outgoing call using the voicemail access phone number associated with the line for which the voicemail account is registered. ra f From a selected item in the Voicemail list, you can also lift the handset (go offhook) to make an outgoing call using the voicemail access phone number. D 4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features XML Customized Services Extensible Markup Language (XML) is a markup language much like HTML. HTML was designed to display data and to focus on how data looks. XML was designed to describe data and to focus on what data is. The following are characteristics of XML: • XML tags are not predefined. You must define your own tags. • XML uses a Document Type Definition (DTD) or an XML Schema to describe the data. • XML with a DTD or XML Schema is designed to be self-descriptive • XML is a W3C Standard Recommendation t1 Creating Customized XML Services on the IP Phones ra f The XML application for the IP phones allows users to create custom services they can use via the phone’s keyboard and display. These services include things like weather and traffic reports, contact information, company info, stock quotes, or custom call scripts. D The IP phone XML application supports the following proprietary objects that allow for the customization of the IP phone’s display. XML Object Description AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (for Menu screens) Creates a numerical list of menu items on the IP phones. AastraIPPhoneTextScreen (for Text screens) Creates a screen of text that wraps appropriately. AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen Creates a formatted screen of text (for Text screens) (specifies text alignment, text size, text static or scrolling) AastraIPPhoneInputScreen (for User Input screens) Creates screens for which the user can input text where applicable. AastraIPPhoneInputScreen Time and Date Attributes (for User Input screens) Allows you to specify US (HH:MM:SS am/ pm and MM/DD/YYYY) or International (HH:MM:SS and DD/MM/YYYY) time/date formats for an XML user input screen. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-311 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Description AastraIPPhoneDirectory (for Directory List screen) Creates an online Directory List that a user can browse in real-time. AastraIPPhoneStatus (for Idle screen) Creates a screen that displays status messages when applicable. AastraIPPhoneExecute (for executing XML commands) Allows the phone to execute commands (i.e., “reset”, “NoOp”, etc.) using XML. AastraIPPhoneConfiguration (for pushing a configuration to the phone) Allows the server to push a configuration to the phone.(See page 5-316 for more information). AastraIPPhoneImageScreen (Standard Bitmap Image) Creates a display with a single bitmap image according to alignment, height, and width specifications. AastraIPPhoneImageMenu (Menu Image) Creates a display with a bitmap image as a menu. Menu selections are linked to keypad keys (0-9, *, #). AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu) (Icon Menu Image) Creates a display that has a small icon before each item in the menu. ra f t1 XML Object D For more information about creating customized XML applications, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications.” 5-312 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features You can also use the following attributes/options with the XML objects to further customize your XML applications: Attribute/Option Description/Usage Valid Values Beep Enables or disables a BEEP option to indicate a status on the phone. yes | no Default = no Use with: XML object (See Appendix F) Configuration files (See page 5-315) Aastra Web UI (See page 5-315) Note: This value is case sensitive. xml status scroll delay (config files) Status Scroll Delay (seconds) (Web UI) 1 to 25 Allows you to set the time delay, in seconds, between the scrolling of each Default = 5 status message on the phone. t1 Use with: Configuration files (See page 5-316) Aastra Web UI (See page 5-316) Specifies a timeout value for the LCD screen display. ra f Timeout 0, 30, 45, 60 Default =45 Use with: XML object (See Appendix F) Specifies a timeout value, in seconds, that the phone waits for the far side to return a response after accepting the HTTP GET connection. D XML Get Timeout 0 to 214748364 seconds Default =0 (never timeout) Use with: Configuration Files (See page 5-317) 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-313 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Attribute/Option Description/Usage Valid Values LockIn Specifies whether or not the information on the LCD screen stays displayed when other events occur (such as pressing buttons on the keypad). yes | no Default = no Use with: XML object (See Appendix F) CancelAction Specifies a URI that the phone executes a GET on when the user presses the default CANCEL key. For example: cancelAction= http:// 10.50.10.117/ ft.xml D ra f t1 Use with: XML object (See Appendix F) Fully qualified URI 5-314 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Enabling/Disabling a Beep for Status Message Displays You can enable or disable a BEEP option using the Status Message object (AastraIPPhoneStatus), the configuration files, or the Aastra Web UI. Note: For enabling/disabling a status message beep using the Status Message object, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications.” When the phone receives a status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the message is displaying. You can use the following to enable/disable a status message beep: AastraIPPhoneStatus object (via XML object; see Appendix F) • xml beep notification (via configuration files) • XML Beep Support (via the Aastra Web UI) t1 • ra f Enabling the beep is an indication to the phone to sound a beep when it receives an AastraIPPhoneStatus object. If you disable the beep, or no AastraIPPhoneStatus object appears in the status message, then the default behavior is no beep is heard when the object arrives to the phone. D The value set in the configuration files and Aastra Web UI override the attribute you specify for the AastraIPPhoneStatus object. For example, if the AastraIPPhoneStatus object has the attribute of Beep=”yes”, and you uncheck (disable) the “XML Beep Support” in the Aastra Web UI, the phone does not beep when it receives an AastraIPPhoneStatus object. Setting the BEEP option in the configuration files and the Aastra Web UI applies to the phone immediately. Reference For information about enabling/disabling the XML beep in the Aastra Web UI, see “XML Beep Support” on page 5-72. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-315 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Scroll Delay Option for Status Messages The IP phones support a scroll delay option that allows you to set the time delay, in seconds, between the scrolling of each status message on the phone. The default time is 5 seconds for each message to display before scrolling to the next message. You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. You can use the following to set the scroll delay for status messages: • xml status scroll delay (via the configuration files) • Status Scroll Delay (seconds) (via the Aastra Web UI) Changes apply to the phone immediately. t1 Reference For more information about configuring status scroll delay, see “Status Scroll Delay” on page 5-74. ra f XML Configuration Push from the Server D The IP phones provide an XML feature that allows you to make configuration changes to the phone that take affect immediately, without having to reboot the phone. This feature involves creating XML scripts that push the changed configuration parameter(s) from the server to the IP phones. You can use the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object in the XML scripts to change configuration parameters or configure new parameters. However, since the IP phone does not save new parameters created in XML scripts to the local.cfg file, when the phone reboots, it does not save the new parameters on the phone. In order for the phone to apply new configuration parameters, you have to enter the parameters via the user interfaces (Telephone User Interface, Web User Interface, or configuration files), or reapply the new parameters using the XML scripts after every boot. Specific configuration parameters are dynamic on the phone when pushed from XML scripts on the server. See Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications” for more information about XML configuration scripts and dynamic configuration parameters. 5-316 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features For more information about creating XML configuration scripts and for XML script examples, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications”. Configuring the Phone to use XML You can configure the phone to request the XML objects you create by configuring specific parameters via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Users can access XML applications via softkeys configured on the IP phones. The phone performs an HTTP GET on the URI configured in the Aastra Web UI or configuration files. You configure the following parameters for object requests: xml application URI • xml application title t1 • The xml application URI is the application you are loading into the IP phone. ra f The xml application title is the name of the XML application that displays on the Services menu in the IP Phone UI (as option #4). XML Get Timeout D The IP phone has a parameter called, “xml get timeout” that allows you to specify a timeout value, in seconds, that the phone waits for the far side to return a response after accepting the HTTP GET connection. If the far side accepts the GET connection but never returns a response, it blocks the phone until it is rebooted. If you enter a value greater than 0 for this parameter, the phone times out and will not be blocked. For more information about configuring this parameter, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings” on page A-132. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-317 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features XML Push Requests In addition to initiating a request to an XML application from a softkey, an HTTP server can push an XML object to the phone via HTTP Post. When the phone sees a PUSH request containing an XML object, it tries to authenticate the request. It does so by checking the IP address or host name of the requesting host against a list of trusted hosts (or domain names) configured via the Aastra Web UI (parameter called XML Push Server List) or the configuration files (parameter called xml application post list). If the request is authenticated, the XML object is handled by the IP phone accordingly, and displays the information to the screen. t1 Note: The HTTP Post must contain HTTP packets that have an "xml" line in the message body. For more information about adding "xml" lines in HTTP packets, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications”. Example Configuration of XML Application ra f The following example shows the parameters you enter in the configuration files to configure an XML application: xml application URI: http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php xml application title: Aastra Telecom D xml application post list: 10.50.10.53, dhcp10-53.ana.aastra.com Configuring for XML on the IP Phone After creating an XML application, an administrator can configure the IP phone to use the application using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings” on page A-132. 5-318 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML. 2 Select a key from keys 1 through 20. 3 In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box. 4 In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey. For example, "XML". 5 In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application. 6 In the "XML Application URI" field, enter the HTTP server path or qualified domain name of the XML application you want to load to the IP phone. For example, you could enter an XML application called "http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php" in the applicable field. D ra f t1 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-319 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 7 In the "XML Application Title" field, enter the name of the XML application that you want to display on the IP phone Services Menu. In the illustration above, the XML Application Title is "Aastra Telecom". 8 Click to save your changes. The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately. When the XML application is pushed to the phone via an HTTP POST, a host IP address or domain name server is required. Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server. 10 In the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field, enter the host IP address and/or domain name server. You can enter multiple IP address and/or domain name servers (separated by commas). In the example in Step 8, the illustration shows a host IP address of "10.50.10.53, 10.50.10.54" in the applicable field. 11 Click D ra f t1 9 to save your changes. Note: No posting is performed if a session times out. 5-320 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 9143i, 6753i 1 Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. ra f t1 6753i and 9143i Screen For the 6753i and 9143i, select a key from keys 3 through 6. 3 In the "Hard Key" field, select XML from the list box. 4 In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application. 5 Click D 2 to save your changes. The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately. When the XML application is pushed to the phone via an HTTP POST, a host IP address or domain name server is required. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-321 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server. 7 In the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field, enter the host IP address and/or domain name server. You can enter multiple IP address and/or domain name servers (separated by commas). In the example in Step 6, the illustration shows a host IP address of "10.50.10.53, 10.50.10.54" in the applicable field. 8 Click D ra f t1 6 to save your changes. Note: No posting is performed if a session times out. 5-322 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using the XML Customized Service After you create, save, and configure the IP phone with an XML application, the customized service is ready for you to use. Use the following procedure to use the XML feature on the IP phone. IP Phone UI Step Action For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Press the Services key on the phone to display the Services menu. 2 Select "Custom Features". 3 Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in a menu-driven and directory "Custom Features" screen. t1 1 Message services display to the screen after selecting the "Custom Features" option. For user input services, follow the prompts as appropriate. ra f To exit from the "Custom Features" screen, press Exit. D 4 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-323 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action For the 9143i, 6753i: 1 Press the programmable key configured on the phone for XML services. A "Custom Features" screen displays. 2 Use the r and s to scroll through the customized features. 3 Select a service to display the information for that customized service. To exit from the "Custom Features" screen, press the XML programmable key again. D ra f 4 t1 Message services display to the screen after pressing the programmable key. For user input services, follow the prompts as appropriate. 5-324 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features XML Action URIs The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events occur. The IP phone events that support this feature are: The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain XML events occur. The Action URI feature prevents the phones from hanging if the Action URIs should fail. The phones also support transparent, non-blocking, XML post execute item URIs. Action URI Description Startup t1 The IP phone XML events that support this feature are defined in the following table. Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event occurs. Successful Registration Incoming Call ra f Specifies the URI for when registration events occur or when there are registration state changes. D Registration Event Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful registration event occurs. Note: This action URI is not called when the same event is repeated (for example, a timeout occurs again when registration is already in a timeout state.) Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call event occurs. Outgoing Call Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call event occurs. Offhook Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an offhook event occurs. Onhook Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an onhook event occurs. Disconnected Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when it transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state. For more information, see “Action URI Disconnected” on page 5-336. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-325 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Action URI Description XML SIP Notify Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone. For more information, see “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-339. Poll Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri poll interval" seconds. For more information, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-334. Poll Interval Specifies the interval, in seconds, between calls from the phone to the "action uri poll". For more information, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-334. t1 Note: For more information about the XML execute items, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications”. ra f The following table identifies the configurable action URI parameters in the configuration files and the Aastra Web UI. This table also identifies the variables that apply to specific parameters. Action URIs and Associated Variables action uri startup action uri registered 5-326 Aastra Web UI Parameters at Advanced Settings->Action URI D Configuration File Parameters Applicable Variables Startup $$REMOTENUMBER$$ $$DISPLAYNAME$$ $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$SIPAUTHNAME$$ $$INCOMINGNAME$ $$PROXYURL$$ $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ $$DISPLAYNAME$$ $$CALLDURATION$$ $$CALLDIRECTION$$ Successful Registration $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$SIPAUTHNAME$$ $$PROXYURL$$ $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuration File Parameters Aastra Web UI Parameters at Advanced Settings->Action URI Applicable Variables Registration Event $$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$ $$REGISTRATIONCODE$$ action uri incoming Incoming Call $$REMOTENUMBER$$ $$DISPLAYNAME$$ $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$INCOMINGNAME$ $$LINESTATE$$ $$CALLDURATION$$ $$CALLDIRECTION$$ $$LOCALIP$$ action uri outgoing Outgoing Call $$REMOTENUMBER$$ $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ action uri offhook Offhook action uri onhook Onhook action uri disconnected Disconnected t1 action uri registration event $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ D ra f $$LOCALIP$$ $$CALLDURATION$$ $$CALLDIRECTION$$ $$LINESTATE$$ action uri xml sip notify XML SIP Notify $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ For more information, see “Action URI Disconnected” on page -336. $$LOCALIP$$ For more information, see “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-339. action uri poll Poll For more information, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-334. action uri poll interval Interval For more information, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-334. Variable Descriptions 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-327 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features The following table provides a description of each variable. Description $$SIPUSERNAME$$ Username associated with: • registered phone • incoming caller • outgoing caller $$SIPAUTHNAME$$ Authentication name associated with: • registered phone $$PROXYURL$$ Proxy URL associated with: • registered phone $$LINESTATE$$ Current line state associated with: • registered phone • incoming caller • outgoing caller • offhook • onhook • disconnected $$LOCALIP$$ IP Address associated with: • registered phone • onhook ra f t1 Variable Note: This variable allows for enhanced information in call records and billing applications. Remote number associated with: • incoming caller • outgoing caller D $$REMOTENUMBER$$ $$DISPLAYNAME$$ Display name associated with: • incoming caller $$SIPUSERNAME$$ Username associated with: • registered phone • incoming caller • outgoing caller $$INCOMINGNAME$$ Name associated with: • incoming caller $$CALLDURATION$$ Duration of last call. This variable is associated with: • onhook Note: This variable allows for enhanced information in call records and billing applications. 5-328 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Variable Description $$CALLDIRECTION$$ Specifies whether the current/last call was incoming or outgoing. This variable is associated with: • onhook Note: This variable allows for enhanced information in call records and billing applications. Specifies the state of the phone’s registration. Registration states can be: • registered • unregistered • expired • refused • timeout $$REGISTRATIONCODE$$ Specifies the code generated during the registration process. Registration code can be: "xxx" where xxx is the 3 digit code; for example, "403". Possible codes are: 001 (registration successful) 403 (registration failed) ra f • • t1 $$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$ How it works D When a startup, successful registration, incoming call, outgoing call, offhook, or onhook call event occurs on the phone, the phone checks to see if the event has an action URI configured. If the phones finds a URI configured, any variables configured (in the form $$VARIABLENAME$$) are replaced with the value of the appropriate variable. After all of the variables are bound, the phone executes a GET on the URI. The Action URI binds all variables and is not dependant on the state of the phone. For example, if you enter the following string for the action uri outgoing parameter: action uri outgoing: http://10.50.10.140/ outgoing.pl?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$ and you dial out the number 5551212, the phone executes a GET on: http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.pl?number=5551212 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-329 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Note: If the phone can’t find the Action URI you specify, it returns a “NULL” response. For example, http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.pl?number= You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring XML Action URIs Use the following procedures to configure XML Action URIs using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Action URI Settings” on page A-135. 5-330 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI. 2 Enter an XML URI for a startup event in the “Startup” field. For example: ra f t1 1 D http://10.50.10.140/startup This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event occurs. 3 Enter an XML URI for a successful registration in the “Successful Registration” field. For example: http://10.50.10.14/registered.php?auth name=$$SIPAUTHNAME$$ This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful registration event occurs. Note: For a successful registration event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and Associated Variables” on page 5-326. The “Successful Registration” parameter executes on the first successful registration of each unique line configured on the phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-331 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 Enter an XML URI in the “Registration Event” field, for when the phone performs registration. For example: http://10.30.100.39/PHPtests/ actionuri.php?action=RegEvt®state=$$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$®code=$$REGI STRATIONCODE$$ This parameter specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when a registration event change occurs. Note: For a registration event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and Associated Variables” on page 5-326. 5 Enter an XML URI for an incoming call event in the “Incoming Call” field. For example: t1 http://10.50.10.140/incoming.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$ This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call event occurs. 6 ra f Note: For an incoming call event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and Associated Variables” on page 5-326. Enter an XML URI for an outgoing call event in the “Outgoing Call” field. For example: D http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$ This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call event occurs. Note: For an outgoing call event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and Associated Variables” on page 5-326. 7 Enter an XML URI for an offhook event in the “Offhook” field. For example: http://10.50.10.140/offhook.php?state=$$LINESTATE$$ This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an offhook event occurs. Note: For an offhook event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and Associated Variables” on page 5-326. 5-332 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 8 Enter an XML URI for an onhook event in the “Onhook” field. For example: http://10.50.10.140/onhook.php?state=$$LINESTATE$$ This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an onhook event occurs. Note: For an onhook event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and Associated Variables” on page 5-326. To configure a Disconnected event, see the section, “Action URI Disconnected” on page 5-336. 10 To configure an XML SIP Notify event, see the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-339. 11 (Optional) You can poll a URI at specific intervals on the phones. For more information about polling Action URIs, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-334. 12 Click t1 9 D ra f to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-333 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Polling Action URIs Another way to reach a phone behind a NAT/firewall is to have the phone make an XML call at periodic intervals. An Administrator can use the action uri poll parameter that commands the phone to perform an XML call at configurable intervals. An Administrator can specify the URI to be called and specify the interval between polls using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration of this feature is dynamic (no reboot required). Configuring Polling Action URI via the Configuration Files Use the following parameters to configure the polling Action URI on the IP Phones. action uri poll • action uri poll interval ra f t1 • Configuration Files D For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Polling Action URI Settings” on page A-142. 5-334 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Polling Action URI via the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure polling Action URI using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI. 2 In the “Poll” field, enter a URI to be called every "action uri pool interval" seconds. Enter the value in a URI format. For example, http://myserver.com/myappli.xml. 3 In the “Interval” field, enter the interval, in seconds, between calls from the phone to the "action uri poll". The value of “0” is disabled. 4 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-335 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Action URI Disconnected The phones have a parameter, “action uri disconnected” that allow a disconnect event to occur when the phone transitions from any active state (outgoing, incoming, connected, or calling) to an idle state. This parameter can use the variable “$$LINESTATE$$”. Note: The $$LINESTATE$$ variable is optional and not required when enabling the “action uri disconnected” parameter. If the Administrator enables this feature (by specifying a disconnect URI), when a call is disconnected, the phone checks to see if the event has a ra f t1 Disconnect URI configured. If the phones finds a configured URI with a $$LINESTATE$$ variable, it replaces the $$LINESTATE$$ variable with the appropriate line state of the current active line. After all of the variables are bound, the phone executes a GET on the URI. The following table lists the applicable values for the $$LINESTATE$$ variable. $$LINESTATE$$ Value Description Meaning in a Disconnected URI Phone is idle. N/A DIALING Phone is offhook and ready to dial. N/A CALLING A SIP INVITE was sent but no response was received. Error occurred during the call. Remote party is ringing. Call was cancelled. Local phone is ringing. Call was missed or cancelled. CONNECTED Parties are talking. Call was successful. CLEARING Call was released but not acknowledged. OUTGOING INCOMING D IDLE N/A The Action URI Disconnect feature allows an Administrator to determine the reason for the disconnect if required. Note: If you enable the Action URI Disconnect feature by specifying a URI, the URI is called when any disconnect event occurs including an intercom call or a conference setup. 5-336 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Example If you enter the following string on Phone A for the “action uri disconnected” parameter: action uri disconnected: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/ disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$ and then Phone A calls Phone B, Phone B answers and then hangs up, Phone A executes a GET on: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=CONNECTED which is what the remote server receives. t1 Note: If the phone can’t find the Action URI you specify, it returns a “NULL” response. For example, http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state= ra f An Administrator can enable the disconnect feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring the Action URI Disconnected Feature D Use the following procedure to configure the Action URI Disconnected feature on the phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Action URI Settings” on page A-135. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-337 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI->Event. 2 In the “Disconnected” field, enter a valid URI for which the phone executes a GET on, when it transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state. Leaving this field empty disables the Action URI Disconnected feature. For example, ra f t1 1 http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$ D The following table lists the applicable values and descriptions for the $$LINESTATE$$. $$LINESTATE$$ Value IDLE 3 5-338 Meaning in a Disconnected URI Description Phone is idle. N/A DIALING Phone is offhook and ready to dial. N/A CALLING A SIP INVITE was sent but no response was received. Error occurred during the call. OUTGOING Remote party is ringing. Call was cancelled. INCOMING Local phone is ringing. Call was missed or cancelled. CONNECTED Parties are talking. Call was successful. CLEARING Call was released but not acknowledged. N/A Click to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features XML SIP Notify Events In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with or without XML content. An Administrator can enable/disable the SIP NOTIFY event using a specific parameter in the configuration files (sip xml notify event) or the Aastra Web UI (XML SIP Notify). If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY, it is processed directly by the phone as it is done for an XML PUSH. If the content is empty in the SIP NOTIFY, the phone automatically triggers a new pre-configured action uri (action uri xml sip notify). t1 Example of a SIP NOTIFY with XML Content D ra f NOTIFY sip:[email protected]:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.30.100.103:5060;branch=z9hG4bK7bbc1fac;rport From: <sip:[email protected]:5060>;tag=81be2861f3 To: Jacky200 <sip:[email protected]:5060> Contact: <sip:[email protected]> Call-ID: 59638f5d95c9d301 CSeq: 4 NOTIFY Max-Forwards: 70 Event: aastra-xml Content-Type: application/xml Content-Length: 115 <AastraIPPhoneExecute><ExecuteItem URI="http://10.30.100.39/XMLtests/ SampleTextScreen.xml"/></AastraIPPhoneExecute> When the phone receives the SIP NOTIFY, the XML content is processed as any XML object. In the above example, the phone calls http://10.30.100.39/XMLtests/ SampleTextScreen.xml after reception of the SIP NOTIFY. Note: The phone supports all the current XML objects with all the existing limitations. For example if an AastraIPPhoneExecute is used, the embedded URI(s) can not be HTTPS based. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-339 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Example of a SIP NOTIFY without XML Content t1 NOTIFY sip:[email protected]:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.30.100.103:5060;branch=z9hG4bK7bbc1fac;rport From: <sip:[email protected]:5060>;tag=81be2861f3 To: Jacky200 <sip:[email protected]:5060> Contact: <sip:[email protected]> Call-ID: 59638f5d95c9d301 CSeq: 4 NOTIFY Max-Forwards: 70 Event: aastra-xml Content-Type: application/xml Content-Length: 0 ra f When the phone receives the SIP NOTIFY, it will trigger the action uri xml sip notify parameter, if it has been previously configured using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. If the action uri xml sip notify parameter is not configured, the phone does not do anything. D On the phone side, a System Administrator can enable or disable this SIP NOTIFY feature using the configuration files or the phone Web UI. Also to ensure that the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist, the phone rejects the message. 5-340 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Enabling/Disabling XML SIP NOTIFY using the Configuration Files To enable/disable the SIP NOTIFY event, you can set the following parameter in the configuration files: • sip xml notify event If the content is missing in the SIP NOTIFY message received by the phone, the phone automatically uses the value you specify for the following parameter: • action uri xml sip notify Configuration Files D ra f t1 For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Polling Action URI Settings” on page A-142. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-341 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Enabling/Disabling XML SIP NOTIFY Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to enable/disable the XML SIP NOTIFY feature in the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Enabling/Disabling the XML SIP NOTIFY Feature Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. D ra f t1 1 XML SIP Notify Parameter 5-342 Enabling Whitelist Proxy is recommended 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 The “XML SIP Notify" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box. This field enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message. Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the phone rejects the message. Click to save your changes. D ra f t1 3 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-343 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring XML SIP NOTIFY using the Aastra Web UI if an Empty SIP NOTIFY Message Received by the Phone Use the following procedure in the Aastra Web UI to configure the XML SIP NOTIFY parameter when the phone receives an empty SIP NOTIFY message. Aastra Web UI 1 If the content is missing in the SIP NOTIFY message received by the phone, the phone automatically uses the value you specify for the Action URI XML SIP Notify parameter at the path Advanced Settings->Action URI. D ra f t1 Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI. XML SIP Notify Parameter 2 Specify a URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone. For example: http://myserver.com/myappli.xml Note: The sip xml notify event parameter at the path Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings must be enabled. 3 5-344 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features XML Softkey URI In addition to specifying variables for the Action URIs, you can also specify variables in the XML softkey URIs that are bound when the key is pressed. These variables are the same as those used in the Action URIs. When an administrator enters an XML softkey URI either via the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files, they can specify the following variables: t1 $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$SIPAUTHNAME$$ $$PROXYURL$$ $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ $$REMOTENUMBER$$ $$DISPLAYNAME$$ $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$INCOMINGNAME$$ $$CALLDURATION$$ $$CALLDIRECTION$$ ra f • • • • • • • • • • • Note: For a description of each variable in the above list, see D “Variable Descriptions” on page 5-327. When the softkey is pressed, if the phone finds a URI configured with variables (in the form $$VARIABLENAME$$), they are replaced with the value of the appropriate variable. After all of the variables are bound, the softkey executes a GET on the URI. Example For example, if the administrator specifies an XML softkey with the value: http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$ This softkey executes a GET on: http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=42512 assuming that the sip username of the specific line is 42512. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-345 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features You can configure the XML softkey URI variables via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring XML Softkey URIs Use the following procedures to configure XML Softkey URIs using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 5-346 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML. 2 Select a key from keys 1 through 20. 3 In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box. 4 In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the XML softkey. For example, "aastra". D ra f t1 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-347 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For example: http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$ Click to save your changes. D ra f 6 t1 Note: You can use the following variables in the URI: • $$SIPUSERNAME$$ • $$SIPAUTHNAME$$ • $$PROXYURL$$ • $$LINESTATE$$ • $$LOCALIP$$ • $$REMOTENUMBER$$ • $$DISPLAYNAME$$ • $$SIPUSERNAME$$ • $$INCOMINGNAME$$ • $$CALLDURATION$$ • $$CALLDIRECTION$$ 5-348 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 9143i, 6753i: 1 Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. ra f t1 6753i and 9143i Screen On the 9143i and 6753i, select a key from keys 1 through 6. 3 In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box. 4 On the 9143i and 6753i, in the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the XML softkey. For example, "aastra". D 2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-349 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For example: http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$ Click to save your changes. D ra f 6 t1 Note: You can use the following variables in the URI: • $$SIPUSERNAME$$ • $$SIPAUTHNAME$$ • $$PROXYURL$$ • $$LINESTATE$$ • $$LOCALIP$$ • $$REMOTENUMBER$$ • $$DISPLAYNAME$$ • $$SIPUSERNAME$$ • $$INCOMINGNAME$$ • $$CALLDURATION$$ • $$CALLDIRECTION$$ 5-350 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Web Applications Keys The IP Phones have a feature that allow a User or Administrator to assign a pre-programmed XML-based application to a softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key. This pre-programmed key is called, "WebApps", and is hardcoded on the phone. Pressing this key launches an XML-based application called, “xml.myaastra.com”. You can assign the WebApps key to any softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key on the phone. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones, the WebApps softkey displays on softkey 1 on the idle screen by default. You can also access Web Apps from the Services menu on these phones. t1 On the 9143i and 6753i, you can access WebApps from the Services menu, or from a configured programmable key. By default, WebApps displays in the Services menu. On the 6751i phone, you can access WebApps from the Services menu only. ra f Note: The WebApps key is not applicable to the CT handsets. Reference D For information on configuring a WebApps softkey or programmable key, see Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys on page 5-141. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-351 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features XML Key Redirection The IP phones allow the redirecting of phone-based hard keys to XML scripts. This allows the server to provide the phone with Redial, Transfer (Xfer), Conference (Conf), and Intercom (Icom) key features, and the Voicemail option feature, rather then accessing them from the phone-side. This feature allows you to access the redirected keys and voicemail option from the server using the IP Phone’s Services Menu. By default, the server-side keys function the same as the phone-side key features. The following table identifies the phone states that apply to each key redirection. Redirects in Conference (Conf) the connected state Transfer (Xfer) Redial t1 Hard Keys/Options the connected and dialing states all states Voicemail all states all states ra f Intercom (Icom) D Notes: 1. If XML key redirection is enabled on the 6751i., the Xfer and Conf menu items perform redirection. 2. Key remapping takes precedence over redirecting. 3. Disabling the redial, conference, or transfer features on the phone also disables the redirection of these keys. The following URI configuration parameters control the redirection of the keys and the voicemail option: • • • • • redial script xfer script conf script icom script voicemail script An Administrator can configure the XML key, redirection URI parameters using the configuration files only. 5-352 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring XML Redirection of the Redial, Xfer, Conf, and Icom Keys, and the Voicemail Option Use the following procedure to configure XML redirection of the Redial, Xfer, Conf, and Icom keys, and the Voicemail option. Configuration Files For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail)” on page A-237. Options Key Redirection (for Options Menu on all phones and Services Menu on 6751i) ra f t1 The IP phones allow the redirecting of the Options Key (Options Menu on all phones and Services Menu on the 6751i) to an XML script. This allows the server to provide the phone with available options, rather then accessing them from the phone-side. You access the Options Key XML script by pressing the Options Key. You can still access the Options Menu from the phone-side by pressing and holding the Options key to display the phone-side Options Menu. The following URI configuration parameter controls the redirection of the Options Key: options script D • IMPORTANT NOTES • If no Options URI script is configured, the local Options Menu on the phone displays as normal. • If you configure password access to the Options Menu, this password is required when accessing the local Option Menu, but is not required for the Options Key redirection feature. • Pressing the Options Menu for redirection from the server does not interfere with normal operations of the phone (for example, pressing the options menu when on a call does not affect the call). • If the phone is locked, you must unlock the phone before accessing the Options Menu redirect feature. After pressing the Options Key, the phone displays a screen that allows you to unlock the phone before continuing. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-353 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features • On the 6751i, the redirection feature works after selecting “Options” from the Services Menu. To display the original Options Menu, press and hold the Services key. An Administrator can configure the XML Options Key (or Services Key on the 6751i), redirection URI parameter using the configuration files only. Configuring XML Redirection of the Options Key (Services Key on the 6751i) Use the following procedure to configure XML redirection of the Options key (Services key on 6751i). Configuration Files D ra f t1 For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 6751i)” on page A-239. 5-354 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features XML Applications and Off-Hook Interaction A feature on the IP phone allows you to specify whether the phone is prevented from going into the off-hook/dialing state when the handset is off-hook and the call ends. By default, the phone behaves as follows: You are in a call using the handset and the phone displays an XML application. The far-end terminates the call, and a new XML application gets pushed/pulled onto the display. Since the handset is off-hook and in idle mode, the "offhook idle timer" starts. When this timer expires, the phone applies dial tone and moves to the off-hook/dialing state, which then destroys the XML application that was being displayed. t1 With the “off-hook interaction” feature you can set an “auto offhook” parameter that determines whether or not the phone is prevented from entering the off-hook/ dialing state, if the handset is off-hook and the call ends. ra f An Administrator can enable (allow phone to enter the off-hook dialing state) or disable (prevent the phone from entering the off-hook dialing state) using the “auto offhook” parameter in the configuration files only. Configuring the Off-Hook Interaction Feature D Use the following procedure to configure the XML application and off-hook interaction feature. Configuration Files For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting” on page A-239. XML URI for Key Press Simulation The Phones provide a feature that allow an XML Developer or Administrator to define XML Key URIs that can send key press events to the phone, just as if the physical hard key, softkey, or programmable key were pressed on the phone. For more information about this feature, see Appendix F, the section, “XML URI for Key Press Simulation” on page F-60. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-355 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features XML Override for a Locked Phone The IP phones have a feature that allows a locked phone to be overridden when an XML application is sent to the phone. This feature also allows you to still use any softkeys/programmable key/Extension Module Keys applicable to the XML application even though the phone is locked. However, any keys NOT associated with the XML application cannot be used when the phone is locked. Also, XML Get Requests override the locked feature on the phone so that any softkey pressed by the user that initiates a Get Request continues to get sent. To allow the overriding of the locked phone for XML applications, the System Administrator must enter the following parameter in the configuration files: xml lock override t1 • Configuring XML Override for a Locked Phone using the Configuration Files ra f Configuration Files D For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting” on page A-240. Note: A System Administrator can also lock and unlock a remote phone using the “lock” and “unlock” commands with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object in an XML application. For more information about this feature, see Appendix F, the section, “Using the Lock and Unlock Commands” on page F-46. 5-356 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments The audio gain properties for the IP phone handset, headset, and speakerphone is adjusted to reduce side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. You can adjust these settings from -10 db to +10 db to best suit your comfort level and deployment environment by using the following parameters in the configuration files: headset tx gain • headset sidetone gain • handset tx gain • handset sidetone gain • handsfree tx gain • audio mode t1 • The default setting for these parameters is 0 (zero). ra f Note: Aastra Telecom recommends you leave the default of 0 (zero) as the settings for these parameters. Parameter Headset tx gain D The following table describes each parameter. Description The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from the headset microphone to t he far-end party. Headset sidetone gain The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal from the headset microphone to the headset speaker. Handset tx gain The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from the handset microphone to the far-end party. Handset sidetone gain The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal from the handset microphone to the handset speaker. (continued) 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-357 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Parameter Description Handsfree tx gain The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from the base microphone to the far-end party. Audio mode Allows you to configure how the d/f key (handsfree key) works. Audio mode has 4 options: 0 (Speaker) - Calls can be made or received using the handset or handsfree speakerphone and can be switched between the two modes by pressing the d /fkey. When on speaker, you can return to using the handset by placing the handset on the cradle and picking it up again. 1 (Headset) - Calls can be made or received using the headset. Calls can be switched between the headset and handset by pressing the d /fkey. t1 2 (Speaker/Headset) - Incoming calls are sent to the speakerphone. By pressing the d /fkey, you can switch between the handsfree speakerphone, the headset, and the handset. ra f 3 (Headset/Speaker) - Incoming calls are sent to the headset. By pressing the d /fkey, you can switch between the headset, the handsfree speakerphone, and the handset. D Configuring Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments You can configure the audio transmit and gain adjustments using the configuration files only. Use the following procedure to configure this feature. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings” on page A-180. 5-358 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) The IP phones include support for centralized conferencing (Ad-Hoc conferencing) for Sylantro and Broadsoft servers. This feature provides centralized conferencing on the SIP server (versus localized, on the phone) and allows IP phone users to do these tasks: • Conference two active calls together into a conference call. • When on an active conference call, invite another party into the call. • Create simultaneous conference calls on the same IP phone (Sylantro servers only). For example, the IP phone user at extension 2005 could create these two conferences, and put one conference on hold while conversing with the other party: t1 — Line 1: conference together extensions 2005, 2010, and 2020. — Line 2: conference together extensions 2005, 2011 and 2021. ra f When an IP phone user is connected to multiple conference calls, some outbound proxies have maximum call “hold” time set from 30-90 seconds. After this time, the call that is on hold is disconnected. Disconnect from an active conference call while allowing the other callers to remain connected. • Ability to create N-way conference. • • D • Join two active calls together into a conference call. Incoming or outgoing active call can join any of the existing conferences. If the administrator does not configure centralized conferencing, then the IP phone uses localized conferencing by default. Note: When you configure centralized conferencing globally for an IP Phone, the global settings apply to all lines. Although, for the global setting to work on soft lines, the user must configure the lines with the applicable phone number. An Administrator can configure centralized conferencing on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-359 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features To use the centralized conferencing after it is enabled, see your Model-specific IP Phone User Guide. Configuring Centralized Conferencing Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters to configure centralized conferencing in the configuration files: Global Parameter • sip centralized conf Per-Line Parameter Configuration Files t1 sip lineN centralized conf D ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Centralized Conferencing Settings” on page A-88. 5-360 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Centralized Conferencing Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure centralized conferencing using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Global Configuration Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP Settings->Basic SIP Network Settings. 2 In the “Conference Server URI” field, do one of the following actions: D ra f t1 1 • To disable centralized conferencing on the IP phone, leave this field empty (blank). • To enable SIP centralized conferencing on the IP phone, do one of the following actions: — If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to reach the media server via the proxy server, set this field to one of the following: conf (Sylantro server), or Conference (Broadsoft server) By setting this field to conf or Conference, you specify conf@<proxy_server _address>: <proxy_port>. For example, if the proxy server address is 206.229.26.60 and the port used is 10060, then by setting this parameter to conf, you are specifying the following: [email protected]:10060. — To reach the media server using a different address/port than that specified by the proxy, set this field to the following: conf@<media_server _address>: <media_port> 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-361 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 3 Click to save your changes. Per-Line Configuration Click on Advanced Settings->Line <#>->Basic SIP Network Settings 2 In the “Conference Server URI” field, do one of the following actions: ra f t1 1 To disable centralized conferencing on this line, leave this field empty (blank). • To enable SIP centralized conferencing on this line, do one of the following actions: — D • If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to reach the media server via the proxy server, set this field to one of the following: conf (Sylantro server), or Conference (Broadsoft server) By setting this field to conf or Conference, you specify conf@<proxy_server _address>: <proxy_port>. — To reach the media server using a different address/port than that specified by the proxy, set this field to the following: conf@<media_server _address>: <media_port> 3 5-362 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features “SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference (not applicable to the 6751i) The IP Phones support RFC 3911 which allows an additional caller to join an active call between two parties if the caller knows the dialog information. This feature begins a conference using a join header as described in RFC 3911. The “SIP Join“ feature provides the following: • Security via the whitelist (which is a feature that already exists on the phone). • Initiates an offhook action uri when it is answered. • Initiates an onhook action uri at call termination. • Creates a caller list entry. t1 This feature is disabled by default. You can enable the “SIP Join” feature by setting the “sip join support” parameter in the configuration files. Limitations of the “SIP Join” Feature ra f The following are limitations of the “SIP Join” feature: Not applicable to a conference call already in progress. • Not applicable to a CT handset that has two active calls. • Not applicable to a phone mixing RTP. • • D • Allows secondary parties to join calls if they can determine the dialog parameters. In order to provide security, it is recommended that the Administrator configure the SIP whitelist. Not applicable while the active call between two parties is in the early dialog state. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-363 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring the “SIP Join” Feature Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters to configure the “SIP Join feature in the configuration files: sip join support Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference” on page A-90. 5-364 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS) The IP phones support HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication as defined in RFC 2617. (The HTTP client supports digest authentication; the HTTP server does not; the HTTP server supports basic authentication). This feature allows the phones to interoperate with Broadsoft’s CMS phone configuration tool. Using the configuration files, you can enable/disable the following parameter to display a LOG IN softkey which allows the HTTP/HTTPS server to perform digest authentication: http digest force login - specifies whether or not to display the LOG IN softkey on the IP Phone UI screen. Valid values are 0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled). Default is 0 (disabled). t1 • Using the configuration files, you can change the default values for the following parameters: D • ra f If the “http digest force login” parameter is set to 1 (enabled), after the phone boots, the LOG IN softkey displays on the phone’s LCD. If the user presses this softkey, a username/password screen displays, allowing the user to enter the configured username and password that is sent to the HTTP/HTTPS server for digest authentication by the server. By default, username is “aastra” and password is “aastra”. You can enter the username and password in two ways: — http digest username - specifies the username to use for HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication. — http digest password - specifies the password to use for HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication. • By enabling the “http digest force login” parameter (setting to 1) - the phone displays the LOG IN key so the user can enter the default username/password via the IP Phone UI. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-365 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Broadsoft CMS Support via the Configuration Files Configure Broadsoft CMS support on the IP Phone using the following parameters in the configuration files: • http digest force login • http digest username • http digest password Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS” on page A-91. t1 Using the IP Phone when Broadsoft CMS is Enabled If you enable the HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication feature, the phone behaves as follows with the BroadSoft CMS tool: Factory default the phone. 2. Configure the HTTP or HTTPS server (specify the HTTP or HTTPS server, path, and port). 3. Restart the phone. D ra f 1. The first time the phone reboots, the phone is challenged by the server. The phone sends the default username of “aastra” and the default password of “aastra” to the server. The server sends the default profile to the phone. This profile includes the information “http digest force login: 1”.When the phone receives the profile, it displays the “Log In” key on the IP Phone UI’s idle screen. 5-366 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features 4. Press the “Log In" key to displays the username/password screen. Note: On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you use the Log In softkey to log in. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, you press the right arrow key to log in. 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i Login Screens Please Enter: Username: Next Submit t1 471348471 Tues Jan1 10:00am Log In ra f 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT Login Screens L1 471348471 D Tues Jan1 10:00am Log In - 5. Please Enter: Username: Password: - Backspace Cancel - - abc... Submit - Enter a username in the “Username” field (up to 40 characters) and a password in the “Password” field (up to 20 characters). Note: The “Username” and “Password” fields accept special characters, such as, @, #, %, =, _, etc. You can also specify domain names in the Username field (i.e., user@domain). 6. After entering the username and password, press Submit. The phone attempts to authenticate with the server. If successful, the phone reboots and loads the user configuration. If unsuccessful, the phone displays “Authentication Failed”. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-367 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module The M675i Expansion Module screen displays softkeys in column format. The function keys on the bottom left of the Module allow you to display 3 full screens of softkeys. Each screen consists of 2 columns with the following default headings on each page: Page 1 "List 1" and "List 2" Page 2 "List 3" and "List 4" Page 3 "List 5" and "List 6" Softkeys List 2 t1 List 1 Lock/Unlock BLF 200 D ra f Home (speeddial) Function Keys (Press for page 1) (Press for page 2) (Press for page 3) Page 1 Screen 5-368 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features List 3 List 5 List 4 Page 2 Screen List 6 Page 3 Screen t1 To use the M675i, press the function key for the page you want to display to the LCD (page 1, page2, or page 3), and press the applicable softkey. ra f You can customize the headings on each M675i Expansion Module screen using the configuration files. You use the following parameters to customize the column headings: • expmod1page1left • expmod1page1right • D Expansion Module 1 (3 pages) • • • expmod1page2left expmod1page2right expmod1page3left expmod1page3right Expansion Module 2 (3 pages) • expmod2page1left • expmod2page1right • expmod2page2left • expmod2page2right • expmod2page3left • expmod2page3right 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-369 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Expansion Module 3 (3 pages) • expmod3page1left • expmod3page1right • expmod3page2left • expmod3page2right • expmod3page3left • expmod3page3right Example The following is an example of configuring Expansion Module 1 column headings. D ra f t1 expmod1page1left: Personnel Ext expmod1page1right: Operations Ext expmod1page2left: Marketing Ext expmod1page2right: Logistics Ext expmod1page3left: Engineering Ext expmod1page3right: Shipping Ext 5-370 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Operational Features Operational Features These settings display to the Expansion Module as shown in the following illustrations. Personnel Ext Marketing Ext Operations Ext Page 1 Screen Logistics Ext t1 Page 2 Screen D ra f Engineering Ext Shipping Ext Page 3 Screen Customizing the M675i Expansion Module Column Display. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display” on page A-231. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 5-371 D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features 5-372 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Chapter 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features About this chapter t1 Introduction ra f The IP phones have advanced operational features you can configure using the configuration files and/or the Aastra Web UI. This chapter describes each of these features and provides procedures for configuring each feature. D Topics This chapter covers the following topics: Topic Page Advanced Operational Features page 6-3 MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages page 6-5 SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer page 6-7 Update Caller ID During a Call page 6-8 Boot Sequence Recovery Mode page 6-9 Auto-discovery Using mDNS page 6-10 Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only) page 6-11 Missed Call Summary Subscription page 6-13 As-Feature-Event Subscription page 6-17 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-1 IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page page 6-22 Whitelist Proxy page 6-24 Transport Layer Security (TLS) page 6-26 802.1x Support page 6-31 Symmetric UDP Signaling page 6-43 Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers page 6-44 GRUU and sip.instance Support page 6-45 Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro Servers) page 6-46 Configurable DNS Queries page 6-49 Ignore Out of Sequence Errors page 6-51 t1 Blacklist Duration page 6-52 Reason Header Field in SIP Message page 6-52 D ra f “Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891 6-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Description This section provides the following information about advanced features of the IP phones: Description MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages Allows you to enable or disable the sending of the MAC address and line number from the IP phone to the call server, in a REGISTER message. SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use the Blind Transfer method available in software prior to release 1.4. Update Caller ID During a Call D Auto-discovery Using mDNS Allows you to enable or disable the updating of the Caller ID information during a call. Allows you to enable or disable Web recovery mode and set the maximum boot count on the IP phone. ra f Boot Sequence Recovery Mode t1 Feature The IP phones automatically perform an auto-discovery of all servers on a network using mDNS. When the IP phone discovers a TFTP server, it is automatically configured by that TFTP server. Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only) Allows you to enable or disable a single call restriction between the 6757i CT base unit and a call server. Missed Call Summary Subscription Allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. As-Feature-Event Subscription Allows you to enable or disable a specific line on the phone with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD features. Blacklist Duration Allows you to specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains on the server blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server (if another server is available) for this amount of time. Whitelist Proxy Allows you to configure the phone to either accept or reject call requests from a trusted proxy server. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-3 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Feature Description Transport Layer Security (TLS) Allows you to enable or disable the use of Persistent Transport Layer Security (TLS). Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once and re-uses that connection for all calls from the phone. The setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone. If the phones are set to use Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone, this call and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated connection. This significantly reduces the delay time when placing a call. Allows you to enable or disable the 802.1x Protocol support on the IP Phones. Symmetric UDP Signaling Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use port 5060 to send SIP UDP messages. Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers D Configurable DNS Queries Ignore Out of Sequence Errors 6-4 Allows you to enable or disable the addition of the User-Agent and Server SIP headers in the SIP stack. IP Phones support Sylantro Server features, like mandatory and optional billing codes that require the application server to notify the phone to collect more digits before completing the call. The IP phone is able to collect digits in two stages to support the billing code feature. ra f Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro Servers) t1 802.1x Support Allows you to specify the Domain Name Service (DNS) query method to use when the phone performs a DNS lookup. Allows you to configure the phone to ignore CSeq number errors on all SIP dialogs on the phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages The IP phones can send the MAC address and line number in the REGISTER packets making it easier for the call server when a user configures the phones via the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. The following two configurable headers send this information to the call server: Aastra-Mac: <mac address> Aastra-Line: <line number> The MAC address is sent in uppercase hex numbers, for example, 00085D03C792. The line number is a number between 1 and 9. • sip send mac • sip send line t1 The following parameters allow you to enable/disable the sending of MAC address and line number to the call server: ra f These parameters are disabled by default. The parameters are configurable via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring the MAC address/Line Number in REGISTER Message D Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling MAC address and line number, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced Operational Parameters” on page A-233. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-5 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Setting. 2 Enable the "Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). 3 Enable the "Send Line Number in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). 4 Click D ra f t1 Step to save your settings. Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings. 5 6-6 Select Operation->Reset and click . 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer The SIP message sequence for Blind Transfer avoids the transfer target having two simultaneous calls. Prior to release 1.4, a CANCEL message was sent to the transfer target (if it was in a ringing state) after sending a REFER to the transferee to complete the transfer. In the 1.4 and later releases, the CANCEL is now sent before the REFER message. The following parameter allows the system administrator to force the phone to use the Blind Transfer method available in software versions prior to 1.4: sip cancel after blind transfer This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only. Configuration Files t1 Configuring SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer D ra f For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the blind transfer method, see Appendix A, the section, “Blind Transfer Setting” on page A-233. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-7 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Update Caller ID During a Call It is possible for a proxy or call server to update the Caller ID information that displays on the phone during a call, by modifying the SIP Contact header in the re-INVITE message. The phone displays the updated name and number information contained within the Contact header. The following parameter allows the system administrator to enable or disable this feature: sip update callerid: This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only. Configuration Files t1 Configuring Update Caller ID During a Call D ra f For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the update of caller ID during a call, see Appendix A, the section, “Update Caller ID Setting.” on page A-233. 6-8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Boot Sequence Recovery Mode You can force the IP phone into recovery mode by pressing the 1 and # keys during boot up when the logo displays. This feature is enabled by default on the IP phone. You can disable this feature using the following parameter in the configuration files: • force web recovery mode disabled Valid values for this parameter are 0 (false) and 1 (true). Default is 0 (false). t1 A boot counter increments after each faulty boot. When the counter reaches a predetermined value, it forces Web recovery mode. The counter is reset to zero upon a successful boot. The predetermined value is set using the following parameter in the configuration files: max boot count ra f • A zero (0) value disables this feature. The default value is 10. D You can configure the boot sequence recovery mode parameters using the configuration files only. Configuring Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Configuration Files For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for boot sequence recovery mode, see Appendix A, the section, “Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings.” on page A-234. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-9 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Auto-discovery Using mDNS The IP phones can perform an auto-discovery of all servers on a network using mDNS. When the IP phone discovers a TFTP server, it is automatically configured by that TFTP server. An unconfigured phone (phone right out of the box) added to a network, attempts to auto-discover a configuration server on the network without any end-user intervention. When it receives DHCP option 66 (TFTP server), it automatically gets configured by the TFTP server. An already configured phone (either previously configured by auto-discovery or manually configured) added to a network, uses its predefined configuration to boot up. ra f t1 Notes: 1. Configuration parameters received via DHCP do not constitute configuration information, with the exception of a TFTP server. Therefore, you can plug a phone into a DHCP environment, still use the auto-discovery process, and still allow the use of the TFTP server parameter to set the configuration server. D 2. DHCP option 66 (TFTP server details) overrides the mDNS phase of the auto-discovery. Therefore, the DHCP option takes priority and the remaining process of auto-discovery continues. 3. As the phone performs auto-discovery, all servers in the network (including the TFTP server), display in the phone window. However, only the server configured for TFTP automatically configures the phone. 6-10 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only) On the 6757i CT and 9480i CT, an administrator can enable or disable a single call restriction between the 6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and a call server. When this feature is enabled (set to 1), you can make separate active calls from the 6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and from the cordless handset. If this feature is disabled (set to 0), only one call can be active at a time either from the base unit or from the handset. When this feature is disabled, and you make an active call on either the base unit or the handset, any other attempt to make an active call is put on hold. Also, when this feature is disabled, more than one call can negotiate complex audio codecs since only a single call is decoding audio at a time. You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files t1 Configuring Single Call Restriction. D ra f For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for single call restriction on the 6757i CT and 9480i CT, see Appendix A, the section, “Single Call Restriction Setting” on page A-235. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-11 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings. 2 Enable the "Two Call Support" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). 3 Click D ra f t1 Step to save your settings. Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings. 4 6-12 Select Operation->Reset and click . 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Missed Call Summary Subscription The “Missed Call Summary Subscription” feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. This feature is called the Missed Call Summary Subscription and can be set with a timer that allows the phone to use the feature for a period of time before the timer expires. For this feature to work, you must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to. 3KRQH& ra f 3KRQH$ t1 For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server. You configure the server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has voicemail configured) to be forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls phone B, the server forwards the call to phone C. With this feature, phone B receives notification from the server that the call was forwarded and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B. 3KRQH% %IRZDUGVFDOOWR& D $FDOOV% 0LVVHGFDOOVLQGLFDWRULQFUHPHQWVRQSKRQH% 9RLFHPDLOPXVWEHFRQILJXUHGRQSKRQH% 1RWH An Administrator can configure this feature on a global or per-line basis, using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-13 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Configuring Missed Call Summary Subscription using the Configuration Files In addition to enabling/disabling the Misses Call Summary Subscription, You can also configure the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses this feature. The timer is configurable on a global basis only. You use the following parameters to configure Missed Call Summary Subscription feature on a global basis: Global Parameters • sip missed call summary subscription • sip missed call summary subscription period Per-Line Parameter sip lineN missed call summary subscription ra f • t1 Use the following parameters to configure Missed Call Summary Subscription feature on a per-line basis: Configuration Files D For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for Missed Call Summary Subscription, see Appendix A, the section, “Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings” on page A-101. 6-14 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configuring Missed Call Summary Subscription using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Global Configuration Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. D ra f t1 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-15 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 The "Missed Call Summary Subscription" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box. This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server. You configure the server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has voicemail configured) to be forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls sip missed call summary subscription parameter, phone B receives notification from the server that the call was forwarded and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B. Note: You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to (phone B in the above example). 3 The "Missed Call Summary Subscription Period" field is enabled with a default value of 86400. To disable this field, enter zero (0), or leave the field blank. 4 Click t1 to save your changes. Per-Line Configuration Click on Advanced Settings->Line <N>->Advanced SIP Settings. 2 Click D ra f 1 6-16 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features As-Feature-Event Subscription The IP phones support server-side Do Not Disturb (DND), Call Forward (CFWD), and Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature events.This feature is called “as-feature-event” and works with the DND, CFWD, and ACD keys. Notes: 1. The 6751i supports server-side DND and CFWD only. 2. The DND, CFWD, and ACD server-side feature is not applicable to the CT handset. This feature is configurable using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. How it Works on the Phone UI t1 When you enable the “as-feature-event” on the phone, AND you activate a DND, CFWD, and/or ACD key, pressing the key performs as follows: If the key is configured for an account on the phone, the server applies DND, CFWD or ACD to that account. (For information about CFWD and DND account configuration, see Chapter 3, the section, “Account Configuration” on page 3-35). • If the key is “custom” configured, a screen displays on the phone allowing the user to choose the account to apply DND or CFWD. (For information about CFWD and DND custom configuration, see Chapter 3, the section, “Account Configuration” on page 3-35). D • ra f • A solid “Message Waiting Indicator” (MWI) indicates if one line/account has DND or CFWD enabled, and the LED next to the DND/CFWD key is ON. A status displays on the LCD that indicates the status of the line in focus (for example, the status of CFWD could be “Call Forward Busy” (CFWDB) or “Call Forward No Answer” (CFWDNA). Note: If the ACD key is configured on the phone, and the “as-feature-event” is not enabled, the phones uses the ACD icons and LED behavior from a Sylantro server instead. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-17 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features When you press the DND, CFWD, or ACD key, only one attempt is made to enable/disable the “as-feature-event” feature on the server. The message “Trying” displays on the phone’s LCD after pressing the key. If the attempt is successful, the idle screen displays. If the attempt is unsuccessful, the message “Failed” displays. The user can press the softkey again to re-attempt the feature if required. The following screen displays on the IP Phone UI for server-side call forwarding: Call Forward Mode: CFA Next Done For server-side ACD, when you press the ACD softkey, the screen that displays is dependant on the state of the ACD subscription. Possible state for ACD are:: Logged Out - User has the option of logging in. • Logged In - User has the option of logging out or making the phone unavailable. • Unavailable - User has the option of logging out or making the phone available. ra f t1 • ACD Screen for 9143i, 6751i, 6753i ACD Logged In Unavail Log Out Logged Out Log In D ACD ACD Avail Unavailable Log Out ACD Screen for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT ACD ACD Logged Out Logged In - Log Out - Log In Cancel - 6-18 ACD - Unavailable Unavailable - Log Out Cancel - - Available Cancel - 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Note: IMPORTANT! If DND and CFWD are configured to use “Account” mode on the IP Phone, pressing the DND and CFWD keys apply to the account in focus as described in Chapter 3, the section, “Account Configuration” on page 3-35. If ACD is configured on the phone, the ACD softkey applies to the line for which the key is configured. The ACD softkey must be configured for the first line of an account. For example, if account 2 has line 3 and line 4 you must configure the ACD softkey for line 3. t1 Configuring As-Feature-Event Subscription Using the Configuration Files ra f If the phone-side features of the DND, CFWD, and ACD keys are enabled, the phone uses the existing parameter values for these keys. If the server-side features are enabled, the phone saves the state of the features from the server on the phone. Use the following parameters to enable/disable the server-side “as-feature-event” on the IP Phone: • sip lineN as-feature-event subscription D • sip as-feature-event subscription period Configuration Files For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings” on page A-104. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-19 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Configuring As-Feature-Event Subscription Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to enable/disable the server-side “as-feature-event” on the IP Phone using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->LineN->Advanced SIP Settings. 2 In the “Advanced SIP Settings” section, enable the "As--Feature-Event Subscription" field, by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). 3 Click D ra f t1 1 6-20 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. D ra f t1 As-Feature-Event Subscription Period 5 In the “Advanced SIP Settings” section, in the “As-Feature-Event Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits after sending a SUBSCRIBE, to receive a NOTIFY response from the server side. Default is 3600. Valid values are 6 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-21 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Blacklist Duration The Blacklist Duration feature helps to reduce unnecessary delays during proxy/ registrar server failures, caused by the IP phone repeatedly sending SIP messages to a failed server. If you enable this feature, then whenever the IP phone sends a SIP message to a server, and does not get a response, the phone automatically adds the server to the blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending messages to any servers on the blacklist. If all servers are on the blacklist, then the IP phone attempts to send the message to the first server on the list. You can specify how long failed servers remain on the blacklist in the IP phone’s configuration file or in the Aastra Web UI. The default setting is 300 seconds. If you set the duration to 0 seconds, then you disable the blacklist feature. t1 Configuring Blacklist Duration Using the Configuration Files Use the following parameter to configure the Blacklist Duration in the configuration files: sip blacklist duration ra f • Configuration Files D For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting Blacklist Duration, see Appendix A, the section, “Blacklist Duration Setting” on page A-236. 6-22 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configuring a Server Blacklist Using the Aastra Web UI You use the following procedure to configure Blacklist Duration using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings 2 In the “Blacklist Duration” field, specify the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains on the server blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server (if another server is available) for this amount of time. Valid values are 0 to 9999999. Default is 300 seconds (5 minutes). D ra f t1 1 For example: 600 Note: The value of “0” disables the blacklist feature. 3 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-23 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Whitelist Proxy To protect your IP phone network, you can configure a “Whitelist Proxy” feature that screens incoming call requests received by the IP phones. When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server Configuring Whitelist Proxy Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameter to configure the whitelist proxy feature using the configuration files: sip whitelist Configuration Files t1 • D ra f For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting Whitelist Proxy, see Appendix A, the section, “Whitelist Proxy Setting” on page A-236. 6-24 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configuring Whitelist Proxy Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure the Whitelist Proxy feature using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings 2 The "Whitelist Proxy" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box. D ra f t1 1 When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server. 3 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-25 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Transport Layer Security (TLS) The IP Phones support a transport protocol called Transport Layer Security (TLS) and Persistent TLS. TLS is a protocol that ensures communication privacy between the SIP phones and the Internet. TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or tamper with any message. TLS is composed of two layers: the TLS Record Protocol and the TLS handshake protocol. The TLS Record Protocol provides connection security with some encryption method such as the Data Encryption Standard (DES). The TLS Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to authenticate each other and to negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is exchanged. TLS requires the use of the following security certificate files to perform TLS handshake: Root and Intermediate Certificates • Local Certificate • Private Key • Trusted Certificate ra f t1 • D When the phones use TLS to authenticate with the server, each individual call must setup a new TLS connection. This can take more time when placing each call. Thus, the IP phones also have a feature that allows you to setup the connection to the server once and re-use that one connection for all calls from the phone. It is called Persistent TLS. The setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone. If the phones are set to use Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone, this call and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated connection. This significantly reduces the delay time when placing a call. 6-26 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Notes: 1. Persistent TLS requires the outbound proxy server and outbound proxy port parameters be configured in either the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI (Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Network Settings). There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per phone. The phone establishes the TLS connection to the configured outbound proxy. 2. If you configure the phone to use Persistent TLS, you must also specify the Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and Intermediate Certificates, Local Certificate, and Private Key files are optional. t1 On the IP phones, an Administrator can configure TLS and Persistent TLS on a global-basis only, using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. SIP Asserted Identity (for Sylantro Servers) ra f The IP Phones support a private extension to the SIP, Asserted Identity (SAI) within Trusted Networks (as defined in RFC 3325), inside the User Agent Server (UA) in the Aastra IP phones. D Note: The phones support PAI header in the UPDATE message, according to draft-ietf-sipping-update-pai-00. This feature is always enabled. If an UPDATE is received with a PAI header from a trusted source, the phone updates the display with this information. The phone ignores any PAI received from untrusted entities This feature allows a network of trusted SIP servers to assert the identity of authenticated users, and verify that phone messages originate from a Trusted Identity. Upon receiving a message from a caller in the Trust Network, the IP phone reads the contents of the P-Asserted-Identity (PAI) header field and displays it on the phone UI. This field contains a more accurate description of the caller identity (extension/phone number) than is contained in the SIP message. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-27 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features When an IP phone receives an incoming call, the IP phone does the following actions: • Checks to see if the incoming call is from a registered proxy server. • If the call is forwarded via a registered proxy server, then the message has already been verified and authenticated by the server. The caller is part of the Trust Network. The IP phone UI displays the caller information contained in the PAI header. • If the call is not forwarded via a registered proxy server - and therefore is not a “Trusted Entity” - the IP phone UI does not display any trust information contained in the PAI header. Configuring TLS Using the Configuration Files t1 You use the following parameters to configure TLS in the configuration files: sip transport protocol • sips persistent tls • sips root and intermediate certificates • sips local certificate • sips private key • sips trusted certificates D ra f • Configuration Files For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting TLS, see Appendix A, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings” on page A-105. 6-28 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configuring TLS Using the Aastra Web UI To configure TLS using the Aastra Web UI, you must enable TLS or Persistent TLS first. Then you must define the TLS certificate file names that you want the phone to use. Use the following procedure to configure TLS using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. 2 In the "Transport Protocol" field, select TLS or Persistent TLS. D ra f t1 1 Note: If configuring Persistent TLS, you must go to Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic Network Settings and configure the “Outbound Proxy Server” and “Outbound Proxy Port” parameters. 3 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-29 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->TLS Support. 5 Enter the certificate file names and the private key file name in the appropriate fields. ra f t1 4 The Root and Intermediate Certificate files contain one root certificate and zero or more intermediate certificates which must be placed in order of certificate signing with root certificate being the first in the file. If the local certificate is signed by some well known certificate authority, then that authority provides the user with the Root and Intermediate Certificate files (most likely just CA root certificate). D The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates. The phone’s trusted list must contain the CA root certificates for all the servers it is connecting to. For example, if the phone is connecting to server A which has a certificate signed by CA1, and server B which has a certificate signed by CA2, the phone must have CA1 root certificate and CS2 root certificate in its Trusted Certificate file. Notes: 1. If configuring TLS, you must specify the files for Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate, the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates in order for the phone to receive calls. 2. If configuring Persistent TLS, you must specify the Trusted Certificates (which contains the trusted certificate list). All other certificates and the Private Key are optional. 3. The certificate files and Private Key file names must use the format “.pem”. 4. To create custom certificate files and private key files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support. 6 6-30 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features 802.1x Support The IP phones support the IEEE 802.1x protocol. The 802.1x protocol is a standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over a wired or wireless Local Area Network (LAN). The 802.1x protocol on the IP phone facilitates media-level access control, and offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity, control LAN access, and apply traffic policy, based on user or endpoint identity. This feature supports both the EAP-MD5 and EAP-TLS protocols. t1 If 802.1x on the phone is enabled, the following screen displays during startup of the phone. D ra f >> 10% 802.1x Authenticating.... If the 802.1x failed to authenticate with the server, the phone continues it's normal startup process using DHCP. However, the network port on the phone may or may not be disabled, depending on the switch configuration. Certificates and Private Key Information • If the certificates and private key are NOT stored in the phone: — the phone connects to an open unauthenticated VLAN and the certificates are downloaded. or — the phone connects using EAP-MD5 to a restricted VLAN and the certificates are downloaded. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-31 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features • If the certificates and private key ARE stored in the phone, the phone uses them during the authentication process. • If the phone uses EAP-TLS for successful authentication, after the phone reboots, it downloads the latest certificates and private key files to the phone. • The private key uses AES-128 to encrypt the private key file. • Switch Supplicant Mode - The switch supports the following 2 modes: — Single supplicant - This mode enables the port once any machine connected to this port is authenticated. For security reasons, the IP phone has the option to disable the pass-through port. — Multiple supplicants - Using this mode, the switch can support multiple clients connected to same port. The switch distinguishes between the clients based on their MAC address. Factory default and recovery mode deletes all certificates and private keys, and sets the EAP type to disabled. t1 • ra f You can configure the 802.1x feature on the IP phone using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. D Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the certificates and private keys must already be configured and stored on the phone. Use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to load certificates and private keys. 6-32 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone using the configuration files. For EAP-MD5 use: eap type • identity • md5 password • pc port passthrough enabled For EAP-TLS use: t1 • eap type • identity • 802.1x root and intermediate certificates (use 1 root and 0 or 1 intermediate certificates) • 802.1x local certificate (use 1 local certificate) D • ra f • 802.1x private key (1 private key that corresponds to local certificate) • 802.1x trusted certificates (0 or more trusted certificates (a maximum of 2)) • pc port passthrough enabled Configuration Files For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting 802.1x support, see Appendix A, the section, “802.1x Support Settings” on page A-109. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-33 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone using the IP Phone UI. Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the certificates and private keys must already be configured and stored on the phone. Use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to load certificates and private keys. t1 Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator password. D ra f to enter the Options List. 6-34 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 On 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT: Select Network Settings->Ethernet->Enable PassThru Port. On the 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Select Network Settings->Ethernet->PC Port Enabled. 1. LAN Port Link 10. Ethernet Ethernet Link 9143i, 6751i, 6753i ra f - Select Enter t1 Next 1. LAN Port Link 2. PC Port Link 3. Enable PassThru Port 4. 802.1x Settings Done - D 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT Next 2. PC Port Link Next Enter 3. PC Port Enabled Yes Change Next 4. 802.1x Settings Next 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Enter Enter 6-35 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 4 The PC PassThru Port is enabled by default. Enable PassThru Port Enable PassThru Port Yes - Change t1 Cancel Done - ra f Note: The PC PassThru Port must be enabled to use the 802.1x Protocol. Press Done (on 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT). or Press Next (on 9143i, 6751i, 6753i). 6 Select 802.1x Settings. 7 Select 802.1x Mode. D 5 802.1x Settings 1. 802.1x Mode 1. 802.1x Mode 2. EAP-MD5 Settings Next Enter 2. EAP-MD5 Settings Yes Enter Next - Select Done - 6-36 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 8 Select EAP-MD5 to configure the phone to use MD5 authentication; or Select EAP-TLS to configure the phone to use TLS authentication. 4. 802.1x Settings 802.1x Mode Next 1. 802.1x Mode Enter Next Enter Disabled EAP-MD5 802.1x Mode Disabled Next Set 802.1x Mode EAP-MD5 Next Set 802.1x Mode EAP-TLS Next Set t1 EAP-TLS ra f Cancel Done - Note: The 802.1x Protocol is disabled by default. If you select EAP-TLS authentication, you must use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to configure the certificates and private key for the phone. Press Done (on 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) or Press Set (on 9143i, 6751i, 6753i). 10 To configure MD5, select EAP-MD5 Settings. 11 Select Identity. D 9 1. EAP-MD5 Settings EAP-MD5 Setting 1. Identity 2. MD5 Password Next Enter 1. Identity Next Enter User Name | Cancel Set Enter Password | Cancel Set 2. MD5 Password Next - Select Done - 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-37 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 12 Enter the identity or username used for authenticating the phone. 1. EAP-MD5 Settings Next Username Enter Username: | 1. Identity Next Enter User Name | Cancel Set Enter Password | Cancel Set 2. MD5 Password Next t1 - Backspace Nextspace Cancel - ABC Done - Use the keys as applicable while entering the username; then press Done (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT). or Press Set (9143i, 6751i, 6753i). 14 Enter the password used for authenticating the phone. D ra f 13 1. EAP-MD5 Settings Password Password: | Next Enter 1. Identity Next Enter User Name | Cancel Set Enter Password | Cancel Set 2. MD5 Password Next - Backspace Nextspace Cancel - ABC Done - 6-38 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 15 Use the keys as applicable while entering the password; then press Done (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT). or Press Set (9143i, 6751i, 6753i). 16 Press the key to save your settings and exit from the IP Phone UI. Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the Aastra Web UI t1 Use the following procedure to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI ra f Click on Advanced Settings->802.1x Support. D 1 To configure EAP-MD5: 2 In the “EAP Type” field, select EAP-MD5. Valid values are: Disabled (Default), EAP-MD5, and EAP-TLS. 3 In the “Identify” field, enter an Identity for the IP phone for which you are configuring 802.1x. For example, phone1. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-39 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 In the “MD5 Password” field, enter a password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone. For example, password1. 5 Click 6 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable D ra f t1 to save your changes. 7 The “PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. Note: The PC Port PassThru Enable Disable field must be enabled to use the 802.1x Protocol. 8 6-40 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI To configure EAP-TLS: Click on Advanced Settings->802.1x Support. 1 In the “EAP Type” field, select EAP-TLS. Valid values are: Disabled (Default), EAP-MD5, and EAP-TLS. 2 In the “Identity” field, enter an Identity for the IP phone for which you are configuring 802.1x. For example, phone1. 3 In the “Root and Intermediate Certificates Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the root and intermediate certificates related to the local certificate. For example: root_Intermed_certifi.pem. 4 In the “Local Certificate Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the local certificate. For example: localcertificate.pem. 5 In the “Private Key Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the private key. For example: privatekey.pem. D ra f t1 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-41 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI 6 In the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the trusted certificates. For example: trusted_certificates.pem. 7 Click 8 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable D ra f t1 to save your changes. 9 The “PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. Note: The PC Port PassThru Enable Disable field must be enabled to use the 802.1x Protocol. 10 6-42 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Symmetric UDP Signaling By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060. You can manually disable symmetric UDP signaling using the IP phone’s configuration file. When you disable symmetric UDP signaling, then the IP phone chooses a random source port for UDP messages. The IP phone also chooses a random source port for UDP messages if you configure a backup proxy server, registrar server, or outbound proxy server. t1 An Administrator can configure symmetric UDP signaling using the configuration files only. Configuring Symmetric UDP Signaling Using the Configuration Files • ra f You use the following parameter to enable or disable Symmetric UDP Signaling in the configuration files: sip symmetric udp signaling D Configuration Files For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings” on page A-114. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-43 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers Currently, the phone always configures the SIP UserAgent/Server headers to contain: Aastra <PhoneModel>/<FirmwareVersion> You can suppress the addition of these headers by using the following parameter in the configuration files: • sip user-agent Setting this parameter allows you to enable or disable the addition of the User-Agent and Server SIP headers from the SIP stack. t1 You can configure this feature using the configuration files only. Configuring UserAgent/Server SIP Headers • ra f You use the following parameter to specify whether the UserAgent and Server SIP header is added to the SIP stack. sip user-agent D Configuration Files For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “User-Agent Setting” on page A-241. 6-44 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features GRUU and sip.instance Support Globally Routable User-Agent URIs (GRUUs) provide a way for anyone on the Internet to route a call to a specific instance of a User-Agent. The IP phones provide GRUU support using draft-ietf-sip-gruu-15. A sip.instance is added to all non-GRUU contacts. By default, this feature is enabled. You can enable or disable this support using the configuration files. Limitations of the GRUU Feature The following are limitations of the GRUU feature on the phones: GRUU-Draft-15 is not compatible with versions prior to GRUU-Draft-10. • Phones do not support temporary or phone-created GRUUs. t1 • Enabling/Disabling GRUU and sip.instance Support ra f Use the following procedure to enable/disable GRUU and sip.instance support. Configuration Files D For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “GRUU and sip.instance Support” on page A-241. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-45 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro Servers) The IP Phones support Multi-Stage Digit Collection (billing codes) for Sylantro Servers. Sylantro Server features, like mandatory and optional billing codes, requires that the application server notify the phone to collect more digits before completing the call. The IP phone is able to collect digits in two stages to support the billing code feature. Aastra IP Phone users are prompted to enter the correct billing code when they dial these numbers: External numbers. • Eternal numbers dialed using a Speeddial key. t1 • Billing Codes Implementation Notes Note the following implementation information: IP phone users may enter a 2-9 digit billing code. Billing codes may not start with either 0 (Operator) or 9 (external calls). • When using Sylantro Click-to-Call, IP phone users select a billing code from a pull-down menu. • When placing a call, a secondary dial tone alerts IP phone users to enter the billing code. The IP phone UI also displays a “Enter Billing Code” message. • D • ra f • If an IP phone user redials a number, they do not have to re-enter the billing code. The billing code information is maintained and processed accordingly. If an IP phone user enters an invalid billing code, the call fails. Mandatory versus Optional Billing Codes This release of the Aastra IP phones supports two types of billing codes: Mandatory and Optional. The Sylantro server configuration determines which type of billing code is used on the IP phones. • 6-46 Mandatory billing codes: Calls are not connected until the user enters a valid billing code. The user dials the phone number. When prompted for billing codes, user dials the billing code. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features For example, suppose the IP phone user is using billing code 300, and dialing the external number 617-238-5500. The IP user then enters the number using the following format: 6172385000#300 Using mandatory billing codes, if the user is configuring a Speeddial number, then they enter the number using the following format: <phonenumber>%23<billingcode> t1 To use this format with the default dial plan terminator (#), the # sign required by Sylantro as a delimiter should be represented as an escaped character by using the sequence %23. The speed dial format for an external number that includes a mandatory billing code becomes: <phonenumber>%23<billing code> Optional billing codes: The user dials an optional billing code by dialing *50, followed by the billing code digits. When prompted for additional digits, user enters the phone number. ra f • D For example, suppose the IP phone user is using billing code 500, and dialing the external number 617-238-5000. The IP user then enters the number using the following format: *50500#6172385000 If the user is dialing configuring a Speeddial number, then they enter the number using the following format: *50<billingcode>#<phonenumber> To use this format with the default dial plan terminator (#), the # sign required by Sylantro as a delimiter should be represented as an escaped character by using the sequence %23. The speed dial format for an external number that includes an optional billing code becomes: *50<billing code>%23<phone number> 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-47 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Numbers Not Requiring Billing Codes Billing codes are not required for the following two types of calls: Emergency calls (E911) • Calls between extensions D ra f t1 • 6-48 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configurable DNS Queries The domain name system (DNS) is the way that Internet domain names are located and translated into Internet Protocol addresses. A domain name is a meaningful and easy-to-remember identifier for an Internet address. The lists of domain names and IP addresses are distributed throughout the Internet in a hierarchy of authority within a database of records. There is usually a DNS server within close proximity to your geographic location that maps the domain names in your Internet requests or forwards them to other servers in the Internet. t1 The IP Phones support three methods of DNS lookups allowing it to adapt to various deployment environments: eNone, eSRV, and eNAPTR&SRV. (See the following table for a description of each method). When the IP Phone accesses the Internet, it sends out a DNS query to the proxy to lookup the IP address and the port, and then waits for a response from the proxy. ra f You can configure the phone to use any one of these methods by entering the applicable value in the configuration files:. Configuration File Value DNS Server Method Used 0 A only 1 SRV & A 2 NAPTR & SRV & A First, the phone sends "NAPTR" (Naming Authority Pointer) lookup to get the “SRV” pointer and service type (such as "aastra.com SIP+2DT .... _sip.tcp.aastra.net", which means the service prefers to use TCP and "_sip.tcp.aastra.net" for the SRV query instead of the default "_sip._tcp.aastra.com"). If the NAPTR record is returned empty then the default value is used, so in the same case, the phone will use "_sip._udp.aastra.com" for the next step lookup. Description D The phone sends “A” (Host IP Address) lookup for the IP address and uses the default port number of 5060. The phone sends “SRV” (Service Location Record) lookup to get the port number. Most often, the IP address is included in the response from the DNS server to avoid extra queries. If there is no IP address returned in the response, the phone sends out the “A” DNS lookup to find the IP address. Next, the phone does SRV lookup to get the IP address and port number. If there is no IP address in the SRV response then it sends out and “A” lookup to get it. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-49 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Note: On the phone side, if you configure the phone with a FullyQualified Domain Name (FQDN) proxy and specified port, the phone always sends “A only” lookups to find the Host IP Address of the proxy. Configuring the DNS Query Method You can configure the DNS query method for the phone to use for performing DNS lookups using the following parameter in the configuration files: • sip dns query type Configuration Files D ra f t1 For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DNS Query Setting” on page A-242. 6-50 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Ignore Out of Sequence Errors An Administrator can configure the phone via the “sip accept out of order requests” parameter to ignore CSeq number errors on all SIP dialogs on the phone. When this parameter is enabled, the phone no longer verifies that the sequence numbers increase for each message within a dialog, and does not report a "CSeq Out of Order" error if they do not increase. t1 Note: As the default Asterisk configuration does not fully track dialogs through a reboot, it is recommended that this parameter be enabled when using the BLF feature with an Asterisk server. If you do not enable this feature, then rebooting the Asterisk server may cause BLF to stop working. With this parameter enabled, the BLF key starts working again when the phone re-subscribes, which by default, are one hour apart. An Administrator can enable/disable this feature using the configuration files only. ra f Enabling/Disabling “Out of Order SIP Requests” Use the following procedure to enable/disable “out of order SIP requests”. D Configuration Files For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests” on page A-243. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 6-51 IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features “Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891 The phones support the “early-only” parameter in the “Replaces” header according to RFC3891. When the phone receives a Replaces header with the early-only parameter, it replaces the existing dialog if the call is still in the early state. If the call has been answered, then the Replaces request is rejected. Note: This feature is not supported in outgoing requests. Reason Header Field in SIP Message ra f Limitation t1 The IP Phones support the receiving of the Reason Header Field in a SIP CANCEL message, as described in RFC3326. This allows a call that is answered from somewhere else to still display in the Callers List. Also, the missed calls indicator and counter do not change. D If the call is answered somewhere else, the duration of the call does not display in the Callers List. 6-52 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Chapter 7 Encrypted Files on the IP Phone About this chapter Introduction t1 This chapter provides information about encryption on the IP phones and provides methods an administrator can use to store encrypted files to a server. ra f Topics This chapter covers the following topics: D Topic Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Page page 7-2 Configuration File Encryption Method page 7-2 Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files page 7-4 Vendor Configuration File Encryption page 7-6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 7-1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Encrypted Files on the IP Phone An encryption feature for the IP phone allows Service Providers the capability of storing encrypted files on their server to protect against unauthorized access and tampering of sensitive information (i.e., user accounts, login passwords, registration information). Service Providers also have the capability of locking a phone to use a specific server-provided configuration only. Configuration File Encryption Method t1 Only a System Administrator can encrypt the configurations files for an IP Phone. System Administrators use a password distribution scheme to manually pre-configure or automatically configure the phones to use the encrypted configuration with a unique key. ra f From a Microsoft Windows command line, the System Administrator uses an Aastra-supplied encryption tool called "anacrypt.exe" to encrypt the <MAC>.tuz file. D Note: Aastra also supplies encryption tools to support Linux platforms (anacrypt.linux) and Solaris platforms (anacrypt.sunos) if required. This tool processes the plain text <mac>.cfg and aastra.cfg files and creates triple-DES encrypted versions called <mac>.tuz and aastra.tuz. Encryption is performed using a secret password that is chosen by the administrator. The encryption tool is also used to create an additional encrypted tag file called security.tuz, which controls the decryption process on the IP phones. If security.tuz is present on the TFTP/FTP/HTTP server, the IP phones download it and use it locally to decrypt the configuration information from the aastra.tuz and <mac>.tuz files. Because only the encrypted versions of the configuration files need to be stored on the server, no plain-text configuration or passwords are sent across the network, thereby ensuring security of the configuration data. 7-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Encrypted Files on the IP Phone To make changes to the configuration files, the System Administrator must save the original files. Note: If the use of encrypted configuration files is enabled (via security.tuz or pre-provisioned on the IP phone) the aastra.cfg and <mac>.cfg files are ignored, and only the encrypted equivalent files aastra.tuz and <mac>.tuz are read. The security feature described above prevents unauthorized parties from reading or writing the contents of the <MAC>.tuz file. It also provides the following: Prevents users from using the <MAC>.tuz file that does not match the user’s phone MAC address. • Renders the <MAC>.tuz file invalid if the user renames the file. • Works with IP phone releases prior to Release 2.2. • Provides compatibility between the previous encryption routine and the new decryption routine. D ra f t1 • 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 7-3 IP Phone Administrator Guide Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files To encrypt the IP phone configuration files: 1. Open a command line window application (i.e., DOS window). 2. At the prompt, enter anacrypt.exe and press <Return>. C:\> anacrypt.exe -h Provides encryption of the configuration files used for the family of Aastra IP phones, using 56bit triple-DES and site-specific keys. Copyright (c) 2008, Aastra Technologies, Ltd. t1 Copyright (c) 1999, Philip J. Erdelsky Usage: anacrypt {infile.cfg|-d <dir>} [-p password] [-m] [-i] [-v] [-h] Description {infile.cfg | -d <dir>} Specifies that all .cfg files in <dir> should be encrypted [-p password] Specifies password used to generate keys -m Generate MAC.tuz files that are phone specific. This switch generates files that are only usable for phones with firmware version 2.2.0 and above. -v D -i ra f Anacrypt Switch Generate security.tuz file Specifies the version of encryption that the anacrypt tool uses. Use version 1 encryption (i.e., -v1) to generate firmware that is readable by all model phones. Without the -v1 switch, the anacrypt tool generates files that are only readable by phones with firmware 2.2.0 and above. -h Display program help text Note: Incorrect password produces garbage. For site-specific keyfile security.cfg the plaintext must match password. 7-4 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Examples The following examples illustrate the use of the anacrypt.exe file. Example 1 Generating a security.tuz file with password 1234abcd For firmware version 2.2.0 and up: C:\>anacrypt -i -p 1234abcd For any firmware version: Example 2 t1 C:\>anacrypt -i -p 1234abcd -v1 ra f Encrypting a single aastra.cfg file with password 1234abcd C:\>anacrypt aastra.cfg -p 1234abcd D Example 3 Encrypting a <mac>.cfg file with password 1234abcd C:\>anacrypt 00085d000000.cfg -p 1234abcd Example 4 Encrypting a <mac>.cfg file with password 1234abcd using the new MAC encryption (-m is only supported for firmware version 2.2.0 and up) C:\>anacrypt 00085d000000.cfg -m -p 1234abcd 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 7-5 IP Phone Administrator Guide Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Example 5 Encrypting all cfg files in C:\data with password 1234abcd using the new MAC encryption and generating a security.tuz file at the same time.(2.2.0 and up) C:\>anacrypt -d C:\data -p 1234abcd -m -i Example 6 Encrypting all cfg files in C:\data with password 1234abcd using the and generating a security.tuz file at the same time for all firmware versions.(any version) t1 C:\>anacrypt -d C:\data -p 1234abcd -i -v1 Vendor Configuration File Encryption ra f Some vendors can have specific methods to encrypt files on their configuration servers. For each phone, the configuration server can generate a random hex string (encryption key) that is used to encrypt the phone’s MAC-specific configuration file. D The encryption key is placed in a plain text MAC-specific configuration file that the server downloads to the phone. After the phone receives the file, it updates the encryption key. This method of encryption does not affect the implementation of the Aastra method of file encryption. Note: The aastra.cfg file is not encrypted with this feature. You can set the phone-specific encryption key using the configuration files only. For more information about configuration file encryption, contact Aastra Technical Support. 7-6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Configuring Vendor Configuration File Encryption Use the following procedure to configure vendor configuration file encryption on the IP Phones. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for automatic update, see Appendix A, the section, “Configuration Encryption Setting” on page A-243. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 7-7 D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Encrypted Files on the IP Phone 7-8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Upgrading the Firmware About this chapter Chapter 8 Upgrading the Firmware About this chapter t1 Introduction This chapter provides information about upgrading the IP phone firmware. ra f Topics This chapter covers the following topics: D Topic Upgrading the Firmware Page page 8-2 Using the “Firmware Update” Page in the Aastra Web UI page 8-2 Using the Restart Feature page 8-5 Using the Auto-Resync Feature page 8-7 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 8-1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware The IP phones support the protocols, TFTP, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS to download configuration files and upgrade firmware to the phones from a configuration server. The configuration server should be ready and able to accept connections. For information on configuration server requirements, see Chapter 1, the section, “Configuration Server Requirement” on page 1-35. You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three ways: Using the “Firmware Update” page in the Aastra Web UI at the location Advanced Settings->Firmware Update. • Using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone. The phone automatically looks for firmware updates and configuration files during the boot process. • Setting an Auto-Resync feature to automatically update the firmware, configuration files, or both at a specific time in a 24-hour period). (Feature can be enabled using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI). D ra f t1 • Using the “Firmware Update” Page in the Aastra Web UI You can use the Aastra Web UI to manually force a firmware update from the configuration server to a phone in your network by selecting Advanced Settings->Firmware Update. You can configure the phone to perform the update using any of the protocols that the phone supports: TFTP, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS. Warning: Do not reset or turn off the phone until the download is complete. Note: This procedure downloads an updated <phone model.st> file as well as any other firmware files that were updated, to your phone. 8-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware Use the following procedure to manually update the firmware on your phone from the specified configuration server. Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Firmware Update. D ra f t1 Step 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 8-3 IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 In the “File Name” field, enter the firmware file name (<phone model>.st) that you want to download to your IP phone. For example, 53i.st (for a 6753i phone). Note: This file name must match the actual name of the firmware file residing on your configuration server. IMPORTANT: The renamed 675xi phones still use the old naming convention for the .st files. See the following table. Associated Firmware 9143i 9143i.st 9480i 9480i.st 9480i CT 9480iCT.st 6751i 51i.st 6753i 53i.st 6755i 55i.st 6757i CT ra f 6757i t1 IP Phone Model 57i.st 57iCT.st In the “Download Protocol” field, select the protocol from the list to use for downloading the new firmware. Valid values are: • TFTP • FTP • HTTP • HTTPS 4 In the “Server” field, enter the IP address in dotted decimal format, of the TFTP configuration server, or the domain name of the FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS configuration servers (dependant on the protocol you selected in step 3.) For example: 432.221.45.6. 5 In the “Path” field, enter the path location on the protocol server for where the new firmware resides. For example, C:\aastra\configserver\firmwareupgrade. 6 In the “Port” field, enter the port number of the protocol server. For example, 80 (for HTTP) or 443 (for HTTPS). D 3 Note: This field is not applicable to the TFTP and FTP protocols. 7 8-4 (FTP only) In the “Username ” field, enter the username that is used for authentication when the FTP server is accessed. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware Aastra Web UI Step Action 8 (FTP only) In the “Password ” field, enter the password that is used for authentication when the FTP server is accessed. 9 Click . This starts the upgrade process. If the upgrade is successful the following message displays on the screen: "Firmware Upgrade Successful". Using the Restart Feature t1 Restarting the phone forces the phone to check for both firmware and configuration files stored on the configuration server. ra f Warning: Do not reset or turn off the phone until the download is complete. Restarting the Phone Using the IP Phone UI D IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Restart Phone. 3 For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Press # to confirm. on the phone to enter the Options List. Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key. For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Press Restart. Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 8-5 IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware Restarting the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Reset->Phone. 2 Click ra f t1 1 D to restart the phone. 8-6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware Using the Auto-Resync Feature The auto-resync feature on the IP phones allows an administrator to enable the phone to be updated automatically once a day at a specific time in a 24-hour period if the files on the server have changed. This feature works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS servers. An administrator can enable this feature using the Aastra Web UI or using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and <mac>.cfg). Note: The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain text configuration files. An Administrator can enable Auto-Resync using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. In the configuration files you set the following parameters: auto resync mode - Determines whether the configuration server automatically updates the phone’s configuration files only, the firmware only, both the firmware and configuration files, or disables automatic updates. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS servers. • auto resync time - Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to be automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP and HTTPS servers. • auto resync max delay - Specifies the maximum time, in minutes, the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a checksync. ra f D • t1 • auto resync days - Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between checksync operations. In the Aastra Web UI, you can set the following parameters at the path Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->Auto-Resync: • Mode • Time (24 hours) • Maximum Delay • Days Setting the “auto resync max delay” (Maximum Delay) and “auto resync days” (Days) parameters can greatly reduce the load placed on the configuration server when downloading configurations. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 8-7 IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware Enabling Auto-Resync Using the Configuration Files Use the following procedure to configure automatic updates of the IP phone firmware, configuration files, or both. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for automatic update, see Appendix A, the section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-18. . t1 Notes: 1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an auto-reboot. ra f 2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are not overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files. D 3. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle. 4. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone. 5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00, the event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15. This prevents several phones from accessing the server at the exact same time. 6. The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain text configuration files. 8-8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware Enabling Auto-Resync Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to enable auto-resync for the phones in your network. Aastra Web UI Step Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->Auto-Resync. D ra f t1 Auto-Sync Parameters 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 8-9 IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 In the “Mode” field, select the auto-resync mode you want to use to automatically update the phone. Valid values are: In the “Time (24-hour)” field, select the time that you want the update to take place. Valid values are 00:00 to 23:30 (in 30 minute increments). ra f 3 t1 None Disable auto-resync Configuration Files Updates the configuration files on the IP phone automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed. Firmware Updates the firmware on the IP phone automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed. Both Updates the configuration files and firmware automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed. Notes: 1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an auto-reboot. 2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are not overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files. 3. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone. 4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle. D Notes: 1. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone. 2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M. 3. When selecting a value for this parameter in the Aastra Web UI, the values are in 30-minute increments only. 4. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00, the event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15. 4 In the “Maximum Delay” field, specify the maximum time, in minutes, the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a checksync. The range is 0 to 1439. Default is 15. 5 In the “Days” field, specify the amount of days that the phone waits between checksync operations. The range is 0 to 364. Default is 0. Note: A value of 0 causes the phone to checksync every time the clock reads the proper time. A value of 1 forces the phone to wait 24 hours prior to doing the first checksync. 6 Click to save your settings. These changes are not dynamic. You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect. 8-10 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware Aastra Web UI Step Action 7 Click on Operation->Reset. 8 In the "Restart Phone" field click to restart the IP phone and apply the update. D ra f t1 The update performs automatically at the time you designated. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 8-11 D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware 8-12 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Upgrading the Firmware D ra f t1 Upgrading the Firmware 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 8-13 D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware 8-14 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 t1 ra f D D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware 8-16 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting About this chapter Chapter 9 Troubleshooting About this chapter t1 Introduction Topics ra f This chapter describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP phones for troubleshooting purposes. It also includes answers to questions you may have while using the IP phones. This chapter covers the following topics: D Topic Troubleshooting Page page 9-3 Log Settings page 9-3 Module/Debug Level Settings page 9-4 Support Information page 9-7 WatchDog Task Feature page 9-12 Error Messages Display page 9-15 Troubleshooting Solutions page 9-19 Why does my phone display “Application missing”? page 9-19 Why does my phone display the “No Service” message? page 9-20 Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"? page 9-20 Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP Server? 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 page 9-21 9-1 IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page page 9-22 How do I set the IP phone to factory default? page 9-23 How do I erase the phone’s local configuration? page 9-24 How to reset a user’s password? page 9-25 How do I lock and unlock the phone? page 9-27 D ra f t1 How do I restart the IP phone? 9-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This section describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP phones for troubleshooting purposes. Using the Aastra Web UI, a system administrator can: Assign an IP address and IP port in which to save log files • Filter the logs according to severity that get reported to log files • Save the current local configuration file to a specified location • Save the current server configuration file to a specified location • Show task and stack status (including “Free Memory”and “Maximum Memory Block Size”) t1 • Log Settings ra f Aastra Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform troubleshooting tasks. D Using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can specify the location for which to save files for troubleshooting purposes. In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to configure log settings: • log server ip - The IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting purposes. • log server port - The IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting purposes. • log level - The severity level of the logs to be reported to a log file. Log Level default is Error (3). (Changes to this parameter via the Aastra Web UI require a reboot). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 9-3 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting In the Aastra Web UI, you use the following parameters to configure log settings: • Log IP - The IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting purposes. • Log Port - The IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting purposes. Reference For more information about the log setting configuration parameters, see Appendix A, the section, “Troubleshooting Parameters” on page A-244. For information about configuring the log settings using the Aastra Web UI, see “Performing Troubleshooting Tasks” on page 9-8. t1 Module/Debug Level Settings ra f The Aastra IP phones provide blog module support that allows enhanced severity filtering of log calls sent as blog output. D The blog, as used on the IP phones, is a an online debugging tool that can be frequently updated and intended for technical support analyzation. Blogs are defined by their format: a series of entries posted to a single page in reverse-chronological order. The IP Phone blogs are separated into modules which allow you to log specific information for analyzing. The following table identifies the blog modules you can set. 9-4 Aastra Web UI Parameters Configuration File Parameters LINMGR (Line Manager information) log module linemgr UI (User Interface (UI) related) log module user interface MISC (Miscellaneous) log module misc SIP (Call control SIP stack) log module sip DIS (Display drivers) log module dis DSTORE (Delayed storage) log module dstore EPT (Endpoint module) log module ept IND (Indicator module) log module ind 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Aastra Web UI Parameters Configuration File Parameters KBD (Keyboard module) log module kbd NET (Network module) log module net PROVIS (Provisioning module) log module provis RTPT (Realtime Transport module) log module rtpt SND (Sound module) log module snd PROF (Profiler module) log module prof XML (Extension Markup Lanaguage) log module xml STUN (Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) through Network Address Translation (NAT) log module stun t1 Setting Values for the Module/Debug Levels ra f There are 6 debug levels for the modules. Each debug level has a value you can use to turn individual levels ON and OFF. The following table identifies these debug levels and their values. The value of “1” (fatal errors) is the default setting for all modules. Value Fatal Errors 1 (default) Errors 2 Warnings 4 Init 8 Functions 16 Info 32 All debug levels OFF 0 All Debug Levels ON 65535 D Debug Level 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 9-5 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Example 1 To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value associated with each level. For example, Fatal Errors + Errors + Warnings = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 log module linemgr: 7 log module user interface: 7 log module sip: 7 In the above example, fatal errors, general errors, and warnings are logged for the line manager, user interface, and SIP call control modules. Example 2 ra f log module dis: 48 log module net: 48 log module snd: 48 t1 Functions and Info = 16 + 32 = 48 In the above example, functions and general information are logged for the display drivers, network, and sound modules. D Example 3 log module rtpt: 0 log module ind: 65535 In the above example, all debug levels are OFF for the Real Time Transport module. All debug levels are ON for the indicator module. You can set the Module/Debug Levels using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Reference For more information about the debug level configuration parameters, see Appendix A, the section, “Troubleshooting Parameters” on page A-244. For information about configuring the log settings using the Aastra Web UI, see “Performing Troubleshooting Tasks” on page 9-8. 9-6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Support Information You can save the local and/or server configuration files of the IP phone to the location specified in the "Log Settings" section. Performing this task allows Aastra Technical Support to view the current configuration of the IP phone and troubleshoot as necessary. In the “Support Information” section, you can: • Get local.cfg • Get server.cfg • Show Task and Stack Status t1 Aastra Technical Support uses this support information for troubleshooting the IP phone when required. ra f Using the Aastra Web UI and selecting “Show Task and Stack Status” displays the tasks and stack status on the IP phone. This screen also displays the Free Memory and the Max Block Free Memory currently on the phone as shown in the following illustration. This information is for troubleshooting purposes only. D . Free Memory 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Max Memory Block Size 9-7 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Performing Troubleshooting Tasks Use the following procedures to perform troubleshooting on the IP phone via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Log Settings” on page A-244. 9-8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting. D ra f t1 Step To set log settings: 2 In the "Log IP" field, enter the IP address of where you want log files to be stored. 3 In the "Log Port" field, enter the port number associated with the IP address specified in the "Log IP" field. This port passes the information from the IP phone to the IP address location. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 9-9 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Aastra Web UI Step Action 4 Click 5 Click on Operation->Reset. 6 In the "Restart Phone" field click to save your settings. to restart the IP phone. To set blog modules: 7 Select a module for which you want to have log files created, and sent to a blog. 8 Enter a debug level value in the “Debug Level” field for a module. Valid values are: Value t1 Debug Level 1 (default) Errors 2 Warnings 4 Init 8 ra f Fatal Errors 16 Info 32 All debug levels OFF 0 All Debug Levels ON 65535 D Functions The value of “0” turns all debug levels OFF for a module. The value of “65535” turns all debug levels ON for a module. To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value associated with each level. For example, Fatal Errors + Errors + Warnings = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 log module linemgr: 7 log module user interface: 7 log module sip: 7 In the above example, fatal errors, general errors, and warnings are logged for the line manager, user interface, and SIP call control modules. 9 9-10 Click to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Aastra Web UI Step Action 10 Click on Operation->Reset. 11 In the "Restart Phone" field click to restart the IP phone. To perform support tasks: 12 To store the local configuration file to the specified location, click on local.cfg" field. in the "Get 13 To store the server configuration file to the specified location, click on "Get server.cfg" field. 14 To display task and stack status information, as well as Free Memory and Maximum Block Free Memory on the phone, click on in the "Show Task and Stack Status" field. t1 in the Note: The local and server configuration file information and the task and stack status information is for use by Aastra Technical Support for troubleshooting purposes. ra f Reference D For information that describes solutions to most common problems using the IP phones, see the next section, “Troubleshooting Solutions” on page 9-19. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 9-11 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting WatchDog Task Feature The IP Phones include a troubleshooting feature called the “WatchDog” task that monitors the status of the phones and provides the ability to get stack traces from the last time the phone failed. When the phone detects a failure (i.e., a crash), it automatically reboots. You can view a WatchDog crash file using the Aastra Web UI at the path, Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting. You can enable/disable the WatchDog task using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Enabling/Disabling WatchDog Use the following procedure to enable/disable the WatchDog. t1 Configuration Files D ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “WatchDog Settings” on page A-247. 9-12 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Use the following procedure to enable/disable the WatchDog task for the IP Phones using the Aastra Web UI. You can also view the “Crash Log” generated by the WatchDog task using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting. D ra f t1 1 Enable/Disable WatchDog View Crash Log Enable/Disable WatchDog Task 2 The “WatchDog” field is enabled by default. To disable the WatchDog task, click in the “Enabled” box to clear the check mark. 3 Click 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 to save your changes. 9-13 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Aastra Web UI View the Crash Log To view a crash log, in the “Get a Crash Log” field, click the SAVE AS button. You can open the file immediately, or you can save the Crash Log to your PC. D ra f t1 4 9-14 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Error Messages Display An Administrator can view generated error messages that may have occurred during startup or reboot of the IP Phones. The IP Phone UI has a selection on the Phone Status page called, “Error Messages” at the location, Options->Phone Status->Error Messages. The Aastra Web UI also allows you to view these error messages at the location Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->Error Messages. These options allow you to view error messages generated by modules during startup only (not after registration has completed). You can use this information for troubleshooting purposes or for reporting the errors to the Administrator. t1 The IP Phone stores and displays up to 10 error messages (any extra error messages beyond 10 are discarded). The time and date of each error message also displays. After a reboot, the previous error messages are discarded and, if applicable, new error messages display. If there are no error messages during startup or after a reboot, the message, “No Error Messages” displays on the screen. Error messages display in the language currently set on the phone. ra f The following table identifies the possible error messages that may display. Description Bad Certificate A Transport Layer Security (TLS) certificate is not valid. The invalid certificate can be any of the following: • root and intermediate certificate • local certificate • private key filename • trusted certificate D Possible Error Message 802.1x Startup Failed The Extensible Authentication Protocol TLS (EAP-TLS) certificates and/or the EAP-MD5 information has failed on the phone. LLDP Startup Failed Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) failed during startup of the phone. HTTP Connection Manager Init Failed The Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) connection manager initialization failed while updating the configuration on the phone. Failed to config Line Manager The configuration of the Line Manager module on the phone has failed. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 9-15 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Viewing the Error Messages Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to view the error messages, if any, that generated during startup. IP Phone UI 1 Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select Phone Status. 3 Select Error Messages. Phone Status IP&MAC Addresses LAN Port PC Port Firmware Info Error Messages t1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT 9480i, 9480i CT - Select ra f Done - D 6751i, 6753i, 9143i 9-16 5. Error Messages Enter 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting IP Phone UI 4 If error messages display, use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to view the messages. If no error message exist, the message, “No Error Messages” displays on the screen. 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT 9480i, 9480i CT Error Messages <error message 1> Fri Aug 4 1:55 pm <error message 2> Fri Aug 4 1:57 pm <error message 3> Fri Aug 4 2:00 pm Error Messages No Error Messages Done - Done - No Error Messages ra f t1 Error Messages 6751i, 6753i, 9143i <error message 1> Fri Aug 4 2:00 pm Exit 5 Exit No Error Messages D Error Messages No Error Messages When done viewing, press Done or Exit to exit the Error Messages screen. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 9-17 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Viewing the Error Messages Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to view the error messages, if any, that generated during startup. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->Error Messages. D ra f t1 1 Error Messages 2 9-18 Scroll down to the “Error Messages” section to view the error messages that may have generated during startup or reboot of the IP Phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Solutions Troubleshooting Solutions Description This section describes solutions to some most common problems that can occur while using the IP phones. Why does my phone display “Application missing”? t1 If you have experienced networking issues while the phone was downloading the application from the TFTP server, it is possible that the phone can no longer retrieve the required firmware file. In the event that the phone is no longer able to communicate with the TFTP server in its attempt to re-download the firmware and the phone cannot locate the application locally, the message "Application missing" displays. ra f The phone also displays the following: “Recovery web-client at: <IP Address>”. The IP Address displayed is the IP address of the phone. If the phone is unable to receive an IP from the DHCP server or has lost its record of its static IP, the phone auto-assigns itself the default IP 192.168.0.50. 1. D To recover the firmware for your phone in this circumstance, please perform the following: Launch your web browser on your computer. Note: Your computer needs to be on the same network as your IP Phone. 2. In the URL, type: “http://<IP Address>” (where IP Address is the IP Address displayed on the phone). Your browser launches the Aastra IP Phone Firmware Recovery page. 3. Call Customer Support and request a <phone model>.st file. 4. Copy the file to your TFTP server. 5. Enter the <phone model>.st file that is ready for download. 6. Enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the TFTP server. 7. Press the Download Firmware button. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 9-19 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Solutions Please ensure that the TFTP server is running and accessible on the network. If the firmware file is correctly located on the running TFTP server, the phone will locate the file and reload the application onto the phone. Why does my phone display the “No Service” message? The phone displays the “No Service” message if the SIP settings have not been set up correctly. The Registrar server could be set to 0.0.0.0. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone. The phone displays "No Service". t1 If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on. ra f Check that the "Registrar Server" IP address in the Aastra Web UI at Advanced Settings->Global SIP is correct. Check the "sip registrar ip" parameter in the configuration files is correct. Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"? D The IP phone displays "Bad Encrypted Config" because encrypted configuration files are enabled but the decryption process has failed. Specific cases where decryption fails are: Reason: The site-specific password in security.tuz does not match the password used to encrypt the <mac>.tuz or aastra.tuz files. Fix: Encrypt the .cfg files to .tuz using the correct password, or replace the security.tuz with the correct encrypted file. 9-20 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Solutions Reason: Neither of the <mac>.tuz and aastra.tuz files are present on the configuration server (TFTP/FTP/HTTP). Fix: Create the encrypted files using anacrypt.exe and copy them to the configuration server. Reason: The encrypted <mac>.tuz or aastra.tuz file is encrypted using a different version of anacrypt.exe than the phone firmware. t1 Fix: Run "anacrypt.exe -v" and confirm that the correct version is reported, compared to the phone firmware version. ra f Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP Server? D For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Option 66 is responsible for forwarding the TFTP server IP address or domain name to the phone automatically. If your DHCP server does not support Option 66, you must manually enter the IP address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server into your IP phone configuration. For procedures on configuring the TFTP server using the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web UI, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108. For specific protocol parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-18. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 9-21 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Solutions How do I restart the IP phone? IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Restart Phone. 3 For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Press # to confirm. on the phone to enter the Options List. Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key. t1 For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Press Restart. Aastra Web UI ra f Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel. Click on Operation->Reset->Phone. 2 Click D 1 9-22 to restart the phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Solutions How do I set the IP phone to factory default? IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222). 3 Select Factory Default. 4 For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: The “Restore Defaults?” prompt displays. Press # to confirm. on the phone to enter the Options List. ra f Aastra Web UI t1 For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i/6757i/6757i CT: The “Reset phone to factory defaults?” prompt displays. Press Default to confirm. Action 1 Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings. 2 In the "Restore to Factory Defaults" field, click D Step . This restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 9-23 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Solutions How do I erase the phone’s local configuration? IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222). 3 Select Erase Local Config. 4 For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: The “Erase local config?” prompt displays. Press # to confirm. on the phone to enter the Options List. ra f Aastra Web UI t1 For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: The “Erase local config?” prompt displays. Press Erase to confirm. Action 1 Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings. 2 In the "Remove Local Configuration Settings" field, click D Step . This removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone. 9-24 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Solutions How to reset a user’s password? IP Phone UI 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select User Password. 3 Enter the current user password. 4 Press Enter. 5 Enter the new user password. Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead. Press Enter. 7 Re-enter the new user password. 8 Press Enter. A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen. ra f Aastra Web UI t1 6 Action 1 Click on Operation->User Password. 2 In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password. 3 In the "New Password" field, enter the new user password. D Step 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 9-25 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Solutions Aastra Web UI Step Action 4 In the "Confirm Password" field, enter the new user password again. 5 Click D ra f t1 to save your changes. 9-26 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Solutions How do I lock and unlock the phone? IP Phone UI Step Action Lock the phone: 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select Phone Lock. The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays. 3 Press Lock to lock the phone. Unlock the phone: Press on the phone to enter the Options List. t1 1 The prompt, “To unlock the phone...Password:” Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter. D The phone unlocks. ra f 2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 9-27 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Solutions Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Phone Lock. Lock the phone: 2 ra f t1 1 In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click . Unlock the phone: D The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message: “Phone is locked”. 3 Click on Operation->Phone Lock. 4 In the “Unlock the Phone?” field, click . The phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message: “Phone is unlocked”. 9-28 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 About this appendix Appendix A Configuration Parameters t1 About this appendix Introduction ra f This appendix describes the parameters you can set in the configuration files for the IP phones. The configuration files include <mac.cfg> and config.cfg. Topics Topic D This appendix covers the following topics: Page Setting Parameters in Configuration Files page A-6 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters page A-7 Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu page A-7 Network Settings page A-8 DHCP Option Settings page A-13 Password Settings page A-15 Emergency Dial Plan Settings page A-16 Aastra Web UI Settings page A-17 Configuration Server Settings page A-18 Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings page A-29 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-1 IP Phone Administrator Guide About this appendix Topic Page page A-31 Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting page A-32 Local SIP TLS Port page A-32 HTTPS Client and Server Settings page A-33 HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings page A-35 UPnP Settings page A-37 Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings page A-38 Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings page A-44 Time and Date Settings page A-45 Time Server Settings page A-52 Custom Time Zone and DST Settings page A-54 t1 Rport Setting Backlight Mode Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) page A-63 Live Dialpad Settings page A-64 SIP Local Dial Plan Settings ra f SIP Basic, Global Settings page A-67 SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings page A-76 BLA Support for MWI page A-87 D Centralized Conferencing Settings A-2 page A-65 page A-88 SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference page A-90 HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS page A-91 Advanced SIP Settings page A-92 Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings page A-101 As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings page A-104 Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings page A-105 802.1x Support Settings page A-109 RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings page A-114 Autodial Settings page A-119 Voicemail Settings page A-122 Directory Settings page A-123 Callers List Settings page A-124 Customize Callers List and Services Key page A-125 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 About this appendix Topic Page page A-126 Call Forward Key Mode Settings page A-127 LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings page A-129 Missed Calls Indicator Settings page A-131 XML Settings page A-132 Action URI Settings page A-135 XML SIP Notify Settings page A-141 Polling Action URI Settings page A-142 Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings page A-143 Ring Tone Per-Line Settings page A-145 Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting page A-146 Switch Focus to Ringing Line t1 Call Forward Settings page A-148 Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout page A-149 Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call page A-150 Call Waiting Settings ra f Stuttered Dial Tone Setting page A-151 page A-152 page A-153 DND Key Mode Settings page A-154 D Message Waiting Indicator Settings Priority Alert Settings page A-155 Bellcore Cadence Settings page A-160 Language Settings page A-162 Language Pack Settings page A-164 Suppress DTMF Playback Setting page A-173 Display DTMF Digits Setting page A-174 Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings page A-175 Group Paging RTP Settings page A-179 Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings page A-180 Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings page A-184 ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings page A-186 Park and Pickup Global Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i/6757i CT only) page A-187 Mapping Key Settings page A-189 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-3 IP Phone Administrator Guide About this appendix Topic Page Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters page A-192 Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT page A-193 Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 6753i, and 6755i page A-202 Top Softkey Settings for 6757i and 6757i CT page A-207 Handset Feature Key Settings for the 9480i CT and 6757i CT page A-214 Expansion Module Key Settings for M670i (6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) and M675i page A-216 (for 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) page A-223 Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys page A-226 Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i) page A-229 Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys page A-230 BLF List URI Settings t1 Customizing the Key Type List Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display Expansion Module 1 through 3 Blind Transfer Setting Update Caller ID Setting. ra f Advanced Operational Parameters page A-231 page A-231 page A-233 page A-233 page A-233 Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings. page A-234 Single Call Restriction Setting page A-235 Blacklist Duration Setting page A-236 Whitelist Proxy Setting page A-236 XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail) page A-237 Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 6751i) page A-239 Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting page A-239 XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting page A-240 Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting page A-240 User-Agent Setting page A-241 GRUU and sip.instance Support page A-241 DNS Query Setting page A-242 Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests page A-243 Configuration Encryption Setting page A-243 D A-4 page A-230 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 About this appendix Topic Page Troubleshooting Parameters page A-244 page A-244 WatchDog Settings page A-247 D ra f t1 Log Settings 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-5 IP Phone Administrator Guide Setting Parameters in Configuration Files Setting Parameters in Configuration Files You can set specific configuration parameters in the configuration files for configuring you IP phone. The aastra.cfg and <mac>.cfg files are stored on the server. The aastra.cfg file stores global IP phone configuration settings. The <mac>.cfg file stores configuration settings specific to the IP phone with that MAC address. When you restart the IP phone, these files are downloaded to the phone. If you make changes to the phone configuration, the changes are stored in a local configuration on the phone (not on the server). t1 Configuration changes made to the <mac>.cfg file override the configuration settings in the aastra.cfg file. ra f Note: Configuration parameters that you enter in the configuration files are NOT case sensitive. Reference D For information about configuration file precedence, see Chapter 1, the section, “Configuration File Precedence” on page -38. This section includes the following types of configurable parameters: A-6 • Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters on page A-7 • Mapping Key Settings on page A-189 • Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters on page A-192 • Advanced Operational Parameters on page A-233 • Troubleshooting Parameters on page A-244 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters The following sections provide the configuration parameters you can configure on the IP phone. Each parameter table includes the name of the parameter, a description, the format, default value, range, and example. The table also provides the method for which the parameters can be configured (IP phone UI, Aastra Web UI, or configuration files). Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu Parameter – options simple menu Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Allows you to enable a simplified options menu or enable the full menu on the IP Phone UI. Simplified Options Menu Call Forward Call Forward Preferences Preferences Only the following display: Services (9143i, 6751i, and 6753i) Tones Contrast Level Live Dialpad Set Audio (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT only) Handset Pairing (9480i CT and 6757i CT) ra f t1 Full Options Menu Phone Status User Password Removed Administrator Menu Removed D Phone Status Restart Phone Removed Phone Lock Phone Lock Warning: When using the simplified menu, you cannot change the Network settings from the IP Phone UI. If the network settings become misconfigured, you must “factory default” the phone and use the full menu to recover the network settings from the Phone UI OR use the Aastra Web UI to configure the network settings. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (full options menu) Range 0 (full options menu) 1 (simplified options menu) Example options simple menu: 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-7 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Network Settings Parameter – dhcp IP phone UI Aastra Web UI DHCP (in Web UI) Description Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Enables or disables DHCP. Enabling DHCP populates the required network information. The DHCP server serves the network information that the IP phone requires. If the IP phone is unable to get any required information, then you must enter it manually. DHCP populates the following network information: IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway,, Domain Name Servers (DNS), TFTP, HTTP, HTTP Port, HTTPS, HTTPS Port, and FTP servers, and Timer Servers. t1 Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Integer Default Value 1 (enabled) Example Parameter – ip 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) dhcp: 1 D Range ra f Format IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Ip Address (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description This parameter assigns a static IP address to the IP phone device. Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Format IP address Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example ip: 192.168.0.25 A-8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – subnet mask IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Subnet Mask (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description Subnet mask defines the IP address range local to the IP phone. Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. IP address Default Value 255.255.255.0 Range Not Applicable Example subnet mask: 255.255.255.224 Parameter – default gateway IP phone UI t1 Format Description ra f Aastra Web UI Gateway (in Web UI) Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Configuration Files The IP address of the network’s gateway or default router IP address. Format D Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. IP address Default Value 1.0.0.1 Range Not Applicable Example default gateway: 192.168.0.1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-9 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dns1 IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Primary DNS (in Web UI) Description Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Primary domain name server IP address. For any of the IP address settings on the IP phone a domain name value can be entered instead of an IP address. With the help of the domain name servers the domain names for such parameters can then be resolved to their corresponding IP addresses. Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. IP address Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example dns1: 192.168.0.5 ra f Parameter – dns2 t1 Format IP phone UI Description D Aastra Web UI Secondary DNS (in Web UI) Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg A service that translates domain names into IP addresses. To assign static DNS addresses, disable DHCP. Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Format IP address Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example dns2: 192.168.0.6 A-10 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – ethernet port 0 IP phone UI Aastra Web UI LAN Port (in Web UI) Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The send (TX) and receive (RX) method to use on Ethernet port 0 to transmit and receive data over the LAN. Format Integer Default Value 0 Range 0 - auto-negotiate 1 - full-duplex, 10Mbps 2 - full-duplex, 100Mbps 3 - half-duplex, 10Mbps 4 - half-duplex, 100Mbps Example lan port: 1 Parameter – ethernet port 1 IP phone UI t1 Description ra f Aastra Web UI Description Format Configuration Files The send (TX) and receive (RX) method to use on Ethernet port 1 to transmit and receive data over the LAN. D PC Port (in Web UI) Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Integer Default Value 0 Range 0 - auto-negotiate 1 - full-duplex, 10Mbps 2 - full-duplex, 100Mbps 3 - half-duplex, 10Mbps 4 - half-duplex, 100Mbps Example ethernet port 1: 2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-11 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – pc port passthru enabled IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Description Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Ethernet Link Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Enables or disables the PC port on the phone to be used for 802.1x authentication support. Note: For more information about configuring 802.1x support on the IP phones, see “802.1x Support Settings” on page A-109. Integer Default Value 1 (enable) Range 0 (disable) 1 (enable) Example pc port passthru enabled: 1 D ra f t1 Format A-12 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters DHCP Option Settings Option 12 Parameter– hostname Configuration Files IP Phone UI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Hostname Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings Hostname (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Description Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends with the DHCP Request packet. Note: If you change this parameter, you must restart your phone for the change to take affect. String Default Value [<model><MAC IP Address>] Range Up to 64 alpha-numeric characters t1 Format Example ra f Note: The value for this parameter can also be a fully qualified domain name. hostname: aastra4 Option 77 DHCP User Class (in Web UI) Description Configuration Files IP Phone UI D Parameter– dhcp userclass Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->DHCP Settings-> DHCP User Class Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings Specifies the User Class DHCP Option 77 that the phone sends to the configuration server with the DHCP Request packet. Note: If you specify a value for this parameter, you must restart your phone for the change to take affect. Any change in its value during start-up results in an automatic reboot. Format String Default Value ““ Range Up to 64 alpha-numeric characters Example dhcp userclass: admin 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-13 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Options 159 and 160 - DHCP Option Override Parameter– dhcp config option override Configuration Files IP Phone UI DHCP Download Options (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Description The value specified for this parameter overrides the precedence order for determining a configuration server. aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->DHCP Settings-> Download Options Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings Note: You must restart the IP Phone for this parameter to take affect. Format Integer Default Value 0 (Any - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, Range -1 (Disabled - ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160) 0 (Any) 43 66 159 160 Example dhcp config option override: 66 D ra f t1 160, 159, 66) A-14 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Password Settings Parameter – admin password Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Allows you to set a new administrator password for the IP phone. Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead. Integer Default Value 22222 Range 0 to 4294967295 Example admin password: 1234567890 Parameter – user password IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Description Options->User Password Operation->User Password aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f Current Password (in Web UI) t1 Format Allows you to set a new user password for the IP phone. Format D Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead. Integer Default Value Default value is an empty string ““ (left blank) Range 0 to 4294967295 Example user password: 123 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-15 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Emergency Dial Plan Settings Parameter – emergency dial plan Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Operation->Phone Lock Description Allows you to specify an emergency number to use on your IP phone so a caller can contact emergency services in the local area when required. t1 The default emergency numbers on the IP phones is 911, 999, 112, and 110. 911 - A United States emergency number. 999 - A United Kingdom emergency number. 112 - An international emergency telephone number for GSM mobile phone networks. In all European Union countries it is also the emergency telephone number for both mobile and fixed-line telephones. 110 - A police and/or fire emergency number in Asia, Europe, Middle East, and South America. Length (bytes) 14 18 35 54 325 D ra f Dial plan(characters) 911 4xx x+#|xx+* 911|999|112|110|450 911|112|011XX+#|101XX+#|1[2-3]XXXXXXXXX| [4-5]XXXXXXXXX|[6-7]XXXXXXXXXX,3| [8-9]XXXXXXXXXXX,2|XX+*|XX+#| *XXX+#|#XX+#|4xx,2 Note: Contact your local phone service provider for available emergency numbers in your area. Format Integer Default Value x+#|xx+* Range Up to 512 characters Example emergency dial plan: 911|999 A-16 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – options password enabled Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Enables or disables password protection of the Options key on the IP phone. If enabled, upon pressing the Options key, a user has to enter a password at the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user is allowed to gain access to the Options Menu and no more password prompts display for other password protected screens. If the user fails to enter the correct password in three attempts, access to the Options Menu is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle screen. Note: The password to enter is the administrator password configured for that phone. Boolean Default Value 0 Range 0 (false; not password protected) 1 (true; password protected) Example options password enabled: 1 ra f t1 Format Aastra Web UI Settings Description Configuration Files D Parameter – web interface enabled aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Enables or disables the Aastra Web UI for a single IP phone when this parameter is entered in the <mac>.cfg file. Enables or disables the Aastra Web UI for all phones when this parameter is placed in the aastra.cfg file. Format Boolean Default Value Not Applicable Range 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Example web interface enabled: 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-17 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Server Settings Parameter – download protocol Download Protocol (in Web UI) IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Protocol to use for downloading new versions of software to the IP phone. Format Text Default Value TFTP Range TFTP FTP HTTP HTTPS Example download protocol: HTTPS Parameter – tftp server IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files The TFTP server’s IP address. If DHCP is enabled and the DHCP server provides the information, this field is automatically populated. Use this parameter to change the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. D Description Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->TFTP Server->Primary TFTP Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f TFTP Server (in Web UI) t1 Description Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Format IP address or qualified domain name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example tftp server: 192.168.0.130 A-18 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – tftp path Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings-> Configuration Server->Settings IP Phone UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->TFTP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. String Default Value N/A Range Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Example tftp path: configs\tftp Description ra f Alternate TFTP (in Web UI) IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->TFTP Server-> Alternate TFTP Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Parameter – alternate tftp server t1 Format The alternate TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain name. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Format IP address or qualified domain name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example alternate tftp server: 192.168.0.132 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-19 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – alternate tftp path Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings-> Configuration Server->Settings IP Phone UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->TFTP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. String Default Value N/A Range Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Example alternate tftp path: configs\alternate Parameter – use alternate tftp IP phone UI Format Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Enables or disables the alternate TFTP server. Valid values are "0" disabled and "1" enabled. Not Applicable Default Value 0 Range 0 or 1 Example use alternate tftp: 1 A-20 Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->TFTP Server->Select TFTP Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Use Alternate TFTP (in Web UI) Description ra f t1 Format 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – ftp server FTP Server (in Web UI) Description IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->FTP Server Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The FTP server’s IP address or network host name. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Optional: You can also assign a username and password for access to the FTP server. See the following parameters for setting username and password. Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example ftp server: 192.168.0.131 Description ra f Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings-> Configuration Server->Settings IP Phone UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->FTP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Parameter – ftp path t1 Format Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles. Format String Default Value N/A Range Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Example ftp path: configs\ftp 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-21 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – ftp username FTP User Name (in Web UI) Description IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->FTP Server Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The username to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Note: The IP Phones support usernames containing dots (“.”). Text Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 63 alphanumeric characters Example ftp username: 6757iaastra Parameter – ftp password IP phone UI Format Default Value Range Example A-22 ra f Description Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->FTP Server Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The password to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Text D FTP Password (in Web UI) t1 Format Not Applicable Up to 63 alphanumeric characters ftp password: 1234 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – http server HTTP Server (in Web UI) Description IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->HTTP Server Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The HTTP server’s IP address. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Optional: You can also assign an HTTP relative path to the HTTP server. See the next parameter (http path). Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example http server: 192.168.0.132 Parameter – http path IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files The HTTP path name to enter. D Description Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->HTTP Server Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f HTTP Path (in Web UI) t1 Format If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s HTTP root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Format dir/dir/dir Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 63 alphanumeric characters Example http path: ipphones/6757i 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-23 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – http port HTTP Port (in Web UI) Description IP Phone UI: Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->HTTP Settings Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->Configuration Server-> Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP. Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Integer Default Value 80 Range 1 through 65535 Example http port: 1025 HTTPS Server (in Web UI) Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->HTTPS-> HTTPS Client->Download Server Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Aastra Web UI Configuration Files The HTTPS server’s IP address. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Optional: You can also assign an HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS server. See the next parameter (https path). D Description IP phone UI ra f Parameter – https server t1 Format Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example https server: 192.168.0.143 A-24 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – https path IP phone UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->HTTPS-> HTTPS Client->Download Path Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg HTTPS Path (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Description The HTTPS path name to enter. If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s HTTPS root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. dir/dir/dir Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 63 alphanumeric characters Example https path: ipphones/6755i HTTPS Port (in Web UI) Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->Configuration Server-> Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Specifies the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTPS. D Description IP Phone UI: ra f Parameter – https port t1 Format Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Format Integer Default Value 443 Range 1 through 65535 Example https port: 1025 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-25 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – auto resync mode Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Configuration Server-> Auto-Resync aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Mode (in Web UI) Determines whether the configuration server automatically updates the configuration files only, the firmware only, both the firmware and configuration files, or disables automatic updates. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP and HTTPS servers. Valid values are: None (0) - Disable auto-resync Configuration Files (1) - Updates the configuration files on the IP phone automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed. Firmware (2) - Updates the firmware on the IP phone automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed. Both (3) - Updates the configuration files and firmware automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed. Notes: 1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an auto-reboot. 2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are not overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files. 3. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone. 4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle. 5. The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain text configuration files. Format Default Value D ra f t1 Description Integer Aastra Web UI None Configuration Files 0 Range Aastra Web UI None Configuration Files Firmware Both Configuration Files 0 (none) 1 (configuration files only) 2 (firmware only) 3 (configuration files and firmware) Example A-26 auto resync mode: 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – auto resync time Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Configuration Server-> Auto-Resync aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Time (24-hour) (in Web UI) Description Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to be automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP and HTTPS servers. Default Value hh:mm 00h00 (for French and Spanish configuration files) Aastra Web UI 00:00 D Format ra f t1 Notes: 1. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone. 2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M. 3. When selecting a value for this parameter in the Aastra Web UI, the values are in 30-minute increments only. 4. When entering a value for this parameter using the configuration files, the value can be entered using minute values from 00 to 59 (for example, the auto resync time can be entered as 02:56). 5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00, the event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15. 6. When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish, you must enter the time in the format "00h00" (configuration files only). Configuration Files 00:00 Range Aastra Web UI 00:00 to 23:30 (in 30 minute increments) Configuration Files hh = 00 to 23 mm = 00 to 59 Example auto resync time: 03:24 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-27 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter– auto resync max delay Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Advanced Settings->Configuration Server-> Auto-Resync Maximum Delay (in Web UI) Description Specifies the maximum time, in minutes, the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a checksync. Format Integer Default Value 15 Range 0 to 1439 Example auto resync max delay: 20 Parameter– auto resync days Configuration Files Aastra Web UI t1 ra f Days (in Web UI) Description aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Advanced Settings->Configuration Server-> Auto-Resync Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between checksync operations. Format Default Value D Note: A value of 0 causes the phone to checksync every time the clock reads the proper time. A value of 1 forces the phone to wait 24 hours prior to doing the first checksync. Integer 0 Range 0 to 364 Example auto resync days: 1 A-28 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings Parameter – sip nat ip IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Network aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg NAT IP (in Web UI) IP address of the network device that enforces NAT. Format IP Address Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example sip nat ip: 192.245.2.1 Parameter – sip nat port IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Format Default Value Range Example ra f Description Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Network aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Port number of the network device that enforces NAT. Integer 0 D NAT SIP Port (in Web UI) t1 Description Not Applicable sip nat port: 51620 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-29 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip nat rtp port IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI NAT RTP Port (in Phone UI and Web UI) Description Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> SIP Settings->RTP Port Base Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or router. The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port. Integer Default Value 51720 ra f Format t1 Note: The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The following DTMF tones are supported: • Support signals 0-9, #, * • Support durations up to 5 seconds Range Not Applicable sip nat rtp port: 51730 D Example Parameter – sip nortel nat support IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Network aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Nortel NAT Traversal Enabled (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables the phone to operate while connected to a network device that enforces NAT. Format Integer Default Value 0 (disabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example sip nortel nat support: 1 A-30 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip nortel nat timer Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Network aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Nortel NAT Timer (in Web UI) Description The interval, in seconds, that the phone sends SIP ping requests to the Nortel proxy. Format Integer Default Value 30 Range 0 to 2147483647 Example sip nortel nat timer: 60 Description Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f Parameter – sip rport t1 Rport Setting Allows you to enable (1) or disable (0) the use of Rport on the IP phone. Format Default Value D “Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the port from which the request came. Boolean 0 Range 0 (disable) 1 (enable) Example sip rport: 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-31 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting Parameter – sip local port Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Specifies the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the phone sends SIP messages. Format Numeric Default Value 5060 Range Greater than 1024 and less than 65535 t1 Notes: 1. It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport. 2. By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060.If symmetric UDP signaling is disabled, the phone sends from random ports but it listens on the configured SIP local port. sip local port: 5060 Parameter – sip local tls port Description Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Local SIP TLS Port ra f Example Specifies the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone sends SIP messages. Format Numeric Default Value 5061 Range Greater than 1024 and less than 65535 Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports being used. For example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS on 443/tcp. Example A-32 sip local tls port: 5061 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters HTTPS Client and Server Settings Parameter – https client method IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI HTTPS Client Method (in Web UI) Description Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->HTTPS->HTTPS Client Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Defines the security method that the client advertises to the server during the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) handshake. Available options are: TLS 1.0 - Transport Layer Security version 1 (TLS 1.0) is a protocol that ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. TLS is the successor to SSL. SSL 3.0 - Secure Socket Layer version 3 (SSL 3.0) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet. Alphanumeric characters Default Value SSL 3.0 Range TLS 1.0 SSL 3.0 (default) ra f Example t1 Format https client method: TLS 1.0 IP Phone UI D Parameter – https redirect http get Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->HTTPS-> HTTPS Server->Redirect Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg HTTPS Server - Redirect HTTP to HTTPS (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Description Allows or disallows redirection from the HTTP server to the HTTPS server. Format Boolean Default Value 1 (enables redirection) Range 0 (disables redirection) 1 (enables redirection) Example https redirect http get: 0 Configuration Files 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-33 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – https block http post xml IP Phone UI HTTPS Server - Block XML HTTP POSTs (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Description Enables or disables the blocking of XML scripts from HTTP POSTs. Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->HTTPS-> HTTPS Server->XML Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg t1 Some client applications use HTTP POSTs to transfer XML scripts. The phones’s HTTP server accepts these POSTs even if server redirection is enabled, effectively bypassing the secure connection. When this parameter is enabled (blocking is enabled), receipt of an HTTP POST containing an XML parameter header results in the following response: “403 Forbidden”. This forces the client to direct the POSTs to the HTTPS server through use of the “https://” URL. Boolean Default Value 0 (disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs) Range 0 (disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs) 1 (enables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs) https block http post xml: 1 D Example ra f Format A-34 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings Parameter– https validate certificates Configuration Files IP Phone UI Validate Certificates (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Description aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings-> Cert Validation Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of certificates on the phone. When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client performs validation on SSL certificates before accepting them. Note: If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you must set this parameter to “0” (disabled) before upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones. Boolean Default Value 1 (enabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example https validate certificates: 0 Parameter– https validate expires Configuration Files IP Phone UI Check Certificate Expiration (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI ra f D Description t1 Format aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings-> Cert Validation->Check Expires Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of the expiration of the certificates. When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a certificate has expired prior to accepting the certificate. Note: If the “https validate expires” parameter is set to enable, the clock on the phone must be set for the phone to accept the certificates. Format Boolean Default Value 1 (enabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example https validate expires: 0 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-35 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files IP Phone UI Check Certificate Hostnames (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Description Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of hostnames on the phone. Format Boolean Default Value 1 (enabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example https validate hostnames: 0 Parameter– https user certificates Configuration Files Aastra Web UI ra f Description aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings Specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This file contains the User-provided certificates in PEM format. These certificates are used to validate peer certificates. D Trusted Certificates Filename (in Web UI) aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings-> Cert Validation->Check Hostnames Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings t1 Parameter– https validate hostnames Note: You must disable the “https validate certificates” parameter in order for the phone to accept the User-provided certificates. Format Alphanumeric string in the format <filename.pem> Default Value Not applicable Range Not applicable Example https user certificates: trustedCerts.pem A-36 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters UPnP Settings Parameter – upnp manager IP phone UI Aastra Web UI UPnP (in Web UI) Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->UPnP Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Enables or disables Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on the IP phone. If you set this parameter to “0”, you can manually configure NAT on the IP phone and the UPnP manager will not start. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (false) Range 0 (false) 1 (true) Example upnp manager: 1 Parameter – upnp gateway Configuration Files Format Default Value ra f aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg IP address or fully qualified Domain Name of the Internet gateway or router. This parameter stores the IP address of the gateway or router in the event that only non-default UPnP gateways get discovered on the network. The UPnP port mappings are saved to this IP address so even if the phone reboots, it will still have the correct port mappings. D Description t1 Description IP address or fully qualified Domain Name 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example upnp gateway: 120.400.003.2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-37 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – upnp mapping lines Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg UPnP Mapping Lines (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables the use of Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on a specific line on the IP phone. Note: For this feature to work, UPnP must be enabled on the phone (upnp manager and upnp gateway must be set). Integer Default Value 0 (UPnP is not mapped to a specific line) Range 0 to 10 Example upnp mapping lines: 5 t1 Format ra f This example indicates that line 5 allows UPnP mapping. Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings Parameter – tagging enabled VLAN Enable (in Web UI) D Global Parameters IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN->VLAN Enable Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Global aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones. This is a global setting. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (false) Range 0 (false) 1 (true) Example tagging enabled: 1 A-38 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – priority non-ip IP phone UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->Priority ->Other Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Global aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Priority, Non-IP Packet (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Description Specifies the priority value for non-IP packets. This is a global setting. Format Integer Default Value 5 Range 0 to 7 Example priority non-ip: 7 Description Format Default Value Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->VLAN ID Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 0 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f VLAN ID (for LAN Port in Web UI) IP phone UI VLAN is a feature on the IP phone that allows for multiple logical Ethernet interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single physical Ethernet as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure a VLAN ID that associates with the physical Ethernet Port 0. D Parameter – vlan id t1 LAN Port (Ethernet Port 0) Parameters Integer 1 Range 1 to 4094 Example VLAN id: 300 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-39 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – tos priority map IP phone UI SIP Priority RTP Priority RTCP Priority Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN->Phone-> Priority->RTP (for LAN Port in Web UI) Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN->Phone-> Priority->RTCP Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 0 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg This parameter is based on the Type of Service (ToS), Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) setting for SIP (tos sip parameter), RTP (tos rtp parameter) and RTCP (tos rtcp parameter). It is the mapping between the DSCP value and the VLAN priority value for SIP, RTP, and RTCP packets. You enter the tos priority map value as follows: (DSCP_1,Priority_1)(DSCP_2,Priority_2).....(DSCP_64,Priority_64) t1 Description Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN->Phone-> Priority->SIP Default Value Range Example A-40 Integer 3 (based on the default ToS DSCP SIP setting of 26) 5 (based on the default ToS DSCP RTP setting of 46) 5 (based on the default ToS DSCP RTCP setting of 46) D Format ra f where the DSCP value range is 0-63 and the priority range is 0-7. Mappings not enclosed in parentheses and separated with a comma, or with values outside the ranges, are ignored. 0 to 63 (for DSCP) 0 to 7 (for SIP, RTP, and RTCP priorities) tos priority map: (26,7) 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters The following table identifies the default DSCP-to-priority mapping structure. DSCP Priority 0-7 0 8-15 1 16-23 2 24-31 3 32-39 4 40-47 5 48-55 6 56-63 7 D ra f t1 DSCP Range 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-41 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters PC Port (Ethernet Port 1) Parameters Parameter – vlan id port 1 IP phone UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN-> Passthrough->VLAN ID Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg VLAN ID (for PC Port in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Description Specifies the VLAN ID used to pass packets through to a PC via Port 1. Note: If you set the VLAN id port 1 (passthrough port) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this port. The following is an example of configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent to the passthrough port. t1 Example You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the passthrough port (VLAN id port 1) to 4095. The following example sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the passthrough port is configured as untagged. Default Value Range Example A-42 Integer 1 D Format ra f tagging enabled: 1 VLAN id: 3 VLAN id port 1: 4095 1 to 4095 VLAN id port 1: 3 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – QoS eth port 1 priority IP phone UI Priority (for PC Port in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Description Specifies the priority value used for passing VLAN packets through to a PC via Port 1. Format Integer Default Value 0 Range 0 to 7 Example QoS eth port 1 priority: 3 D ra f t1 Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN->Passthrough ->Priority Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-43 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings Parameter – tos sip IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Type of Service->SIP Advanced Settings->Network-> Type of Service,DSCP aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Configuration Files Description The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for SIP packets. Format Integer Default Value 26 Range 0 to 63 Example tos sip: 3 Parameter – tos rtp IP phone UI t1 SIP (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Format Default Value Range Example Parameter – tos rtcp ra f Description Configuration Files The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTP packets. Integer 46 0 to 63 D RTP (in Web UI) Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Type of Service->RTP Advanced Settings->Network-> Type of Service,DSCP aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg tos rtp: 2 IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Type of Service->RTCP Advanced Settings->Network-> Type of Service,DSCP aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg RTCP (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTCP packets. Format Integer Default Value 46 Range 0 to 63 Example tos rtcp: 3 A-44 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time and Date Settings Parameter – time format IP phone UI Configuration Files Options->Time and Date->Time Format aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Time Format (in Phone UI) This parameter changes the time to 12 hour or 24 hour format. Use “0” for the 12 hour format and “1” for the 24 hour format. Format Integer Default Value 0 Range 0 (12 hr format)) 1 (24 hr format) Example time format: 0 Parameter – date format IP phone UI Configuration Files Format Default Value Range Example ra f Description Options->Time and Date->Date Format aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg This parameter allows the user to change the date to various formats. Integer D Date Format (in Phone UI) t1 Description 0 0 (WWW MMM DD) (default) 1 (DD-MMM-YY) 2 (YYYY-MM-DD) 3 (DD/MM/YYYY) 4 (DD/MM/YY) 5 (DD-MM-YY) 6 (MM/DD/YY) 7 (MMM DD) date format: 7 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-45 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dst config IP phone UI Configuration Files Options->Time and Date->Daylight Savings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Daylight Savings (in Phone UI) Enables/disables the use of daylight savings time. Format Integer Default Value 3 Range 0 - OFF 1 - 30 min summertime 2 - 1 hr summertime 3 - automatic Example dst config: 0 Parameter – time zone name IP phone UI Configuration Files Format Default Value Range Example A-46 ra f Description Options->Time and Date->Time Zone aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Assigns a time zone name to the time server. Text D Time Zone (in Phone UI) t1 Description US-Eastern See “Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” below. time zone name: US-Central 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table Time Zone Code AD-Andorra AE - United Arab Emirates (Dubai) AG-Antigua AI-Anguilla AL-Tirane AN-Curacao AR-Buenos Aires AS-Pago Pago AT-Vienna AU-Lord Howe AU-Tasmania AU-Melbourne AU-Sydney AU-Broken Hill AU-Brisbane AU-Lindeman AU-Adelaide AU-Darwin AU-Perth AW-Aruba AZ - Azerbaijan (Baku) CET GST AST AST CET AST ART BST CET LHS EST EST EST CST EST EST CST CST WST AST AZT BA-Sarajevo BB-Barbados BE-Brussels BG-Sofia BM-Bermuda BO-La Paz BR-Noronha BR-Belem BR-Fortaleza BR-Recife BR-Araguaina BR-Maceio BR-Sao Paulo BR-Cuiaba BR-Porto Velho BR-Boa Vista BR-Manaus BR-Eirunepe BR-Rio Branco BS-Nassau BY-Minsk BZ-Belize EET AST CET EET AST BOT FNT BRT BRT BRT BRS BRT BRS AMS AMT AMT AMT ACT ACT EST EET CST D ra f t1 Time Zone Name 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-47 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Zone Code CA-Newfoundland CA-Atlantic CA-Eastern CA-Saskatchewan CA-Central CA-Mountain CA-Pacific CA-Yukon CH-Zurich CK-Rarotonga CL-Santiago CL-Easter CN-China CO-Bogota CR-Costa Rica CU-Havana CY-Nicosia CZ-Prague NST AST EST EST CST MST PST PST CET CKS CLS EAS CST COS CST CST EES CET EE-Tallinn ES-Madrid ES-Canary D FI-Helsinki FJ-Fiji FK-Stanley FO-Faeroe FR-Paris GB-London GB-Belfast GD-Grenada GE - Georgia (Tbilisi) GF-Cayenne GI-Gibraltar GP-Guadeloupe GR-Athens GS-South Georgia GT-Guatemala GU-Guam GY-Guyana A-48 CET CET AST AST ra f DE-Berlin DK-Copenhagen DM-Dominica DO-Santo Domingo t1 Time Zone Name EET CET WET EET NZT FKS WET CET GMT GMT AST GET GFT CET AST EET GST CST CST GYT 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Zone Code HK-Hong Kong HN-Tegucigalpa HR-Zagreb HT-Port-au-Prince HU-Budapest HKS CST CET EST CET IE-Dublin IS-Reykjavik IT-Rome GMT GMT CET JM-Jamaica JP-Tokyo EST JST KY-Cayman EST LC-St Lucia LI-Vaduz LT-Vilnius LU-Luxembourg LV-Riga AST CET EET CET EET CET EET CET AST AST CET MUT CST CST CST CST MST MST MST PST D ra f MC-Monaco MD-Chisinau MK-Skopje MQ-Martinique MS-Montserrat MT-Malta MU - Mauritius MX-Mexico City MX-Cancun MX-Merida MX-Monterrey MX-Mazatlan MX-Chihuahua MX-Hermosillo MX-Tijuana t1 Time Zone Name NI-Managua NL-Amsterdam NO-Oslo NR-Nauru NU-Niue NZ-Auckland NZ-Chatham CST CET CET NRT NUT NZS CHA OM - Oman (Muscat) GST 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-49 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Zone Code PA-Panama PE-Lima PL-Warsaw PR-Puerto Rico PT-Lisbon PT-Madeira PT-Azores PY-Asuncion EST PES CET AST WET WET AZO PYS RO-Bucharest RU-Kaliningrad RU-Moscow RU-Samara RU-Yekaterinburg RU-Omsk RU-Novosibirsk RU-Krasnoyarsk RU-Irkutsk RU-Yakutsk RU-Vladivostok RU-Sakhalin RU-Magadan RU-Kamchatka RU-Anadyr EET EET MSK SAM YEK OMS NOV KRA IRK YAK VLA SAK MAG PET ANA ra f t1 Time Zone Name CET SGT CET CET CET SRT CST TR-Istanbul TT-Port of Spain TW-Taipei EET AST CST UA-Kiev US-Eastern US-Central US-Mountain US-Pacific US-Alaska US-Aleutian US-Hawaii UY-Montevideo EET EST CST MST PST AKS HAS HST UYS D SE-Stockholm SG-Singapore SI-Ljubljana SK-Bratislava SM-San Marino SR-Paramaribo SV-El Salvador A-50 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Zone Code VA-Vatican CET YU-Belgrade CET D ra f t1 Time Zone Name 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-51 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Server Settings Parameter – time server disabled Aastra Web UI IP Phone UI‘ NTP Time Servers (in Web UI) Description Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Time and Date Settings Options->Preferences-> Time and Date->Time Servers aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Enables or disables the time server. This parameter affects the time server1, time server2, and time server3 parameters. Setting this parameter to 0 allows the use of the configured Time Server(s). Setting this parameter to 1 prevents the use of the configured Time Server(s). Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Integer Default Value 0 (disabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example time server disabled: 0 ra f Parameter – time server1 t1 Format Aastra Web UI Description D IP Phone UI‘ Time Server 1 (in Web UI) Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Time and Date Settings Options->Preferences-> Time and Date->Time Servers aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The primary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the time server is enabled, the value for time server1 will be used to request the time from. Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Format IP address or qualified domain name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example time server1: 192.168.0.5 A-52 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – time server2 Aastra Web UI IP Phone UI‘ Time Server 2 (in Web UI) Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Time and Date Settings Options->Preferences-> Time and Date->Time Servers aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The secondary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the time server is enabled, and the primary time server is not configured or cannot be accessed the value for time server2 will be used to request the time from. Format IP address or qualified domain name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example time server2: 192.168.0.5 Parameter – time server3 Aastra Web UI t1 Description Format Configuration Files The tertiary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the time server is enabled, and the primary and secondary time servers are not configured or cannot be accessed the value for time server3 will be used to request the time from. D Description ra f IP Phone UI‘ Time Server 3 (in Web UI) Basic Settings->Preferences-> Time and Date Settings Options->Preferences-> Time and Date->Time Servers aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg IP address or qualified domain name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example time server3: 192.168.0.5 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-53 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Custom Time Zone and DST Settings Configuration Files Description The number of minutes the timezone is offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). This can be positive (West of the Prime Meridian) or negative (East of the Prim Meridian). Eastern Standard Time (EST) has a value of 300. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range Any positive or negative Integer Example time zone minutes: 300 Parameter – dst minutes Configuration Files Description The number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. Valid values are a positive integer between 0 to 60. Range Example A-54 ra f Default Value aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Integer N/A 0 to 60 D Format aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg t1 Parameter – time zone minutes dst minutes: 60 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dst [start|end] relative date Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Specifies how to interpret the start and end day, month, and week parameters - absolute (0) or relative (1). Format Boolean Default Value N/A Range 0 (absolute) 1 (relative) Example dst [start|end] relative date: 1 t1 Absolute Time Configuration Files Description The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to December). Format Default Value Integer N/A 1 (January) 2 (February) 3 (March) 4 (April) 5 (May) 6 (June) 7 (July) 8 (August) 9 (September) 10 (October) 11 (November) 12 (December) D Range aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f Parameter – dst start month Example dst start month: 7 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-55 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to December). Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 (January) 2 (February) 3 (March) 4 (April) 5 (May) 6 (June) 7 (July) 8 (August) 9 (September) 10 (October) 11 (November) 12 (December) dst end month: 6 D Example ra f t1 Parameter – dst end month A-56 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dst start day Configuration Files Description The day of the month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 31. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 to 31 Example dst start day: 1 Parameter – dst end day Configuration Files Description The day of the month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 31. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 to 31 Description t1 ra f Parameter – dst start hour aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg dst end day: 31 Configuration Files D Example aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 0 (midnight) to 23 Example dst start hour: 0 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-57 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dst end hour Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 0 (midnight) to 23 Example dst end hour: 23 Relative Time Configuration Files Description The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to December). Format Integer N/A 1 (January) 2 (February) 3 (March) 4 (April) 5 (May) 6 (June) 7 (July) 8 (August) 9 (September) 10 (October) 11 (November) 12 (December) D Range ra f Default Value aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg t1 Parameter – dst start month Example A-58 dst start month: 6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to December). Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 (January) 2 (February) 3 (March) 4 (April) 5 (May) 6 (June) 7 (July) 8 (August) 9 (September) 10 (October) 11 (November) 12 (December) dst end month: 12 D Example ra f t1 Parameter – dst end month 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-59 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files Description The week in the specified month in which DST starts. Valid value is a positive or negative integer from 1 to 5. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 = first full week of month -1 = last full week of month 2 = second full week of month -2 = last full week of month 3 = third full week of month -3 = last full week of month 4 = fourth full week of month -4 = last full week of month 5 = fifth full week of month -5 = last full week of month Example dst start week: 1 Format ra f Description Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The week in the specified month in which DST ends. Valid value is a positive or negative integer from 1 to 5. D Parameter – dst end week aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg t1 Parameter – dst start week Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 = first full week of month -1 = last full week of month 2 = second full week of month -2 = last full week of month 3 = third full week of month -3 = last full week of month 4 = fourth full week of month -4 = last full week of month 5 = fifth full week of month -5 = last full week of month Example dst end week: 5 A-60 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files Description The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST starts on. Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 (Sunday) 2 (Monday) 3 (Tuesday) 4 (Wednesday) 5 (Thursday) 6 (Friday) 7 (Saturday) Example dst start day: 1 Parameter – dst end day Configuration Files Default Value Range Example ra f Format aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST ends on. Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7. Integer D Description aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg t1 Parameter – dst start day N/A 1 (Sunday) 2 (Monday) 3 (Tuesday) 4 (Wednesday) 5 (Thursday) 6 (Friday) 7 (Saturday) dst end day: 7 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-61 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dst start hour Configuration Files Description The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 0 (midnight) to 23 Example dst start hour: 0 Parameter – dst end hour Configuration Files Description The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23. Format Integer Default Value N/A t1 0 (midnight) to 23 dst end hour: 23 D Example aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f Range aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg A-62 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Backlight Mode Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) Parameter – backlight mode IP phone UI Configuration Files Options->Preferences->Display->Backlight aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Backlight (in Phone UI) Description Allows you to turn the backlight on the LCD, On, Off, or Auto. “The Auto” setting sets the phone to turn off the backlighting after a period of inactivity. Format Integer Default Value 1 (Auto) Range 0 1 Example backlight mode: 0 Parameter – bl on time IP phone UI Configuration Files Format t1 ra f Description Options->Preferences->Display->Backlight aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Allows you to set the amount of time, in seconds, that the backlight stays ON before turning OFF because of inactivity. This settings is applicable to the “Auto” mode only. D Backllight On Time (in Phone UI) (Off - Turns the backlight off constant) (Auto - Turns the backlight off after a period of inactivity.) Integer Default Value 10 Range 1 to 120 minutes (2 hours) Example bl on timer: 15 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-63 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Live Dialpad Settings Parameter – live dialpad IP phone UI Configuration Files Options->Preferences->Live Dialpad aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Live Dialpad (in Phone UI) Description Turns the “Live Dialpad” feature ON or OFF. With live dial pad ON, the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed. With live dial pad OFF, if you dial a number while the phone is on-hook, lifting the receiver or pressing the initiates a call to that number. Boolean Default Value 0 (Off) Range 0 (Off) 1 (On) Example live dialpad: 1 D ra f t1 Format A-64 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Local Dial Plan Settings Parameter – sip dial plan Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Local Dial Plan (in Web UI) A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to reach a particular telephone number. The SIP local dial plan is as follows: Symbol Description 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Digit symbol X Match any digit symbol (wildcard) *, #, . Other keypad symbol; # can terminate a dial string | Expression inclusive OR + 0 or more of the preceding digit symbol or [] expression [] Symbol inclusive OR Used only with [], represent a range of acceptable symbols; For example, [2-8] “,” (open/close quotes) In the configuration files, enter the sip dial plan value using quotes. .;. Used when a secondary dial tone is required on the phone. (For example, “9;xxxxxx”, when a user has to dial “9” to get and outside line and needs a secondary dial tone presented. ra f t1 Description D Note: You can configure prefix dialing by adding a prepend digit to the dial string. For example, if you add a prepend map of “[2-9]XXXXXXXXX,91”, the IP phone adds the digits “91” to any 10-digit number beginning with any digit from 2 to 9 that is dialed out. Other examples of prepend mappings are: • • • 1X+#,9 (Prepends 9 to any digit string beginning with “1” and terminating with “#”.) 6XXX,579 (Prepends “579” to any 4-digit string starting with “6”.) [4-6]XXXXXX,78 (Prepends “78” to any 7-digit string starting with “4”, “5”, or “6”. Format Alphanumeric characters Default Value X+#|XX+* Range Up to 512 alphanumeric characters. Note: If a User enters a dial plan longer than 512 characters, or a parsing error occurs, the phone uses the default dial plan of “x+#|xx+*”. If this is the case, the Administrator cannot change the dial plan from the configuration files. The dial plan must be changed from the Aastra Web UI. Example sip dial plan: "X+#|XXX+*" 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-65 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip dial plan terminator Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Send Dial Plan Terminator (in Web UI) Allows you to enable or disable a dial plan terminator. If you enable the use of this parameter, when you configure the IP phone’s dial plan with a dial plan terminator or timeout (such as the pound symbol (#)), the phone waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up the handset or after to finish dialing the number on the keypad before making the call. Format Boolean Default Value 0 Range 0 (Disable) 1 (Enable) Example sip dial plan terminator: 1 Description ra f Digit Timeout (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Represents the time, in seconds, between consecutive key presses on the IP phone. The default for this parameter is 4 seconds. If you press a key on the phone and wait 4 seconds before pressing the next key, the key times out and cancels the digit selection. You must press consecutive keys before the timeout occurs. Format Integer Default Value 4 Range Not Applicable Example sip digit timeout: 6 A-66 Basic Settings->Preferences aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Parameter – sip digit timeout t1 Description 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Basic, Global Settings SIP Global Authentication Settings IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Screen Name (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description Used to display text on the screen of the phone. You may want to set this parameter to display the user’s name of the phone. Format Text Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters Example sip screen name: Joe Smith Parameter – sip screen name 2 IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI ra f Description Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Configuration Files Used to display text on a second line on the screen of the phone. D Screen Name 2 (in Web UI) Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg t1 Parameter – sip screen name Notes: 1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network Disconnected”, the Screen Name 2 value does not display. 2. Symbol characters are allowed (such as “#”). 3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates the text to fit the display. Format Alphanumeric characters. Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Example sip screen name 2: Lab Phone 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-67 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip user name IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Phone Number (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description Used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering the IP phone at the registrar. Note: The IP Phones support Usernames containing dots (“.”). Text Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters Example sip user name: 1010 Parameter – sip display name IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Format Default Value ra f Description Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Configuration Files Used in the display name field of the From SIP header field. Some IP PBX systems use this as the caller’s ID and some may overwrite this with the string that is set at the PBX system. D Caller ID (in Web UI) t1 Format Text Not Applicable Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters Example sip display name: Joe Smith A-68 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Authentication Name (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request. Format Text Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters Example sip auth name: 5553456 Parameter – sip password IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Password (in Web UI) Configuration Files Default Value Range Example ra f Format Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The password that will be used to register at the registrar. Text Not Applicable Up to 20 alphanumeric characters D Description Options->Administrator Menu->>SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg t1 Parameter – sip auth name sip password: 12345 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-69 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip bla number Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg BLA Number (in Web UI) Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared across all IP phones. Format Integer Default Value Not Applicable Range Not Applicable Example sip bla number: 1010 Parameter – sip mode Aastra Web UI t1 Description Allows you to configure the mode of the line. Applicable values are: • Generic - Normal line • BroadSoft SCA - Shared Call/Line Appearances (SCA) line for BroadWorks network (call activity can go to more than one phone) • Nortel - Conference line for Nortel Networks (private - all call activity goes to one phone) • BLA - Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) line. D Description ra f Configuration Files Line mode (in Web UI) Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Format Integer Default Value 0 Range Valid values are: 0 - Generic 1 - BroadSoft SCA 2 - Nortel 3 - BLA Example sip mode: 2 A-70 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Global Network Settings. IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Proxy Server (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to send all SIP requests. A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by the IP phone to the targeted user. Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not applicable Example sip proxy ip: 192.168.0.101 Parameter – sip proxy port IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Format Default Value Range Example ra f Description Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Configuration Files The proxy server's port number. Integer D Proxy Port (in Web UI) Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg t1 Parameter – sip proxy ip 0 Not Applicable sip proxy port: 5060 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-71 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip backup proxy ip Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Backup Proxy Server (in Web UI) Description The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable. Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example sip backup proxy ip: 192.168.0.102 Parameter – sip backup proxy port Aastra Web UI t1 Configuration Files Backup Proxy Port (in Web UI) The backup proxy’s port number. ra f Description Format Integer Default Value 0 Not Applicable D Range Example Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Parameter – sip outbound proxy sip backup proxy port: 5060 Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg outbound proxy server (in Web UI) Description This is the address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you have a Session Border Controller in your network, then you would normally set its address here. Format IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example sip outbound proxy: 10.42.23.13 A-72 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip outbound proxy port Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg outbound proxy port (in Web UI) The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP messages. Format Integer Default Value 0 Range Not Applicable Example sip outbound proxy port: 5060 Parameter – sip registrar ip IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Registrar Server (in Web UI) Configuration Files ra f Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The address of the registrar for which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests. A SIP registrar is a server that maintains the location information of the IP phone. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone. If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on. D Description t1 Description Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example sip registrar ip: 192.168.0.101 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-73 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip registrar port IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Registrar Port (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description The registrar's port number. Format Integer Default Value 0 Range Not Applicable Example sip registrar port: 5060 Parameter – sip backup registrar ip Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg t1 Configuration Files ra f Backup Registrar Server (in Web UI) The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary registrar is unavailable. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables backup registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone. If the backup registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the backup register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on. D Description Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example sip backup registrar ip: 192.168.0.102 A-74 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip backup registrar port Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Backup Registrar Port (in Web UI) Description The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number. Format Integer Default Value 0 Range Not Applicable Example sip backup registrar port: 5060 Parameter – sip registration period Aastra Web UI t1 Configuration Files Default Value Range Example The requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar. Integer 0 0 to 2147483647 D Format ra f Registration Period (in Web UI) Description Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg sip registration period: 3600 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-75 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings The following parameters are SIP per-line settings. The value of "N" is 1 - 9 for 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT. SIP Per-Line Authentication Settings Parameter – sip lineN screen name Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Screen Name (in Web UI) Used to display text on the screen of the phone. You may want to set this parameter to display the phone user's name. Format Text Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters Example sip line1 screen name: Joe Smith Screen Name 2 (in Web UI) Description Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Parameter – sip lineN screen name 2 ra f t1 Description Used to display text on a second line on the screen of the phone. Notes: 1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network Disconnected”, the Screen Name 2 value does not display. 2. Characters are allowed (such as “#”). 3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates the text to fit the display. Format Alphanumeric characters Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters Example sip line1 screen name 2: Lab Phone A-76 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN user name Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Phone Number (in Web UI) Description Used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering the IP phone at the registrar. When configuring per-line BLA on an ININ server, the username must be incremented as shown in the example for the "sip lineN bla number" parameter on page A-79. Note: The IP Phones support Usernames containing dots (“.”). Text Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters Example sip line1 user name: 1010 Caller ID (in Web UI) Description Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Parameter – sip lineN display name ra f t1 Format Used in the display name field of the From SIP header field. Some IP PBX systems use this as the caller’s ID and some may overwrite this with the string that is set at the PBX system. Format Text Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters Example sip line1 display name: Joe Smith 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-77 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN auth name Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Authentication Name (in Web UI) Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request. Format Text Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters Example sip line1 auth name: 5553456 Parameter – sip lineN password t1 Description Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Format Default Value Range Example A-78 The password that will be used to register at the registrar. Text Not Applicable Up to 20 alphanumeric characters D Description ra f Password (in Web UI) Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg sip line1 password: 12345 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN bla number Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg BLA Number (in Web UI) Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared on specific lines on the IP phone. For Sylantro Server: When configuring the BLA feature on a Sylantro server, the value set for the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user name parameter for all the phones in the group. For example, if sip lineN user name is 1010, you would configure BLA on a per-line basis for the Sylantro server as follows: sip line1 user name: 1010(# for all the phones) sip line1 bla number: 1010 For ININ Server: When configuring the BLA feature on an ININ server, the value set for the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user name parameter without the incremented digit added to the phone #. For example, if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is 10101, and the sip lineN user name for the second phone is 10102, etc. you would configure BLA on a per-line basis for the ININ server as follows: sip line1 user name: 10101(# for phone 1 with) sip line1 bla number: 1010appearance of phone 3) ra f t1 Description sip line1 user name: 10102(# for phone 2 with) sip line1 bla number: 1010appearance of phone 3) D sip line1 user name: 1010(# for phone 3) sip line1 bla number: 1010 Note: The original phone number which has the bridged line appearance on other phones, will have the "sip lineN user name" parameter the same as the "sip lineN bla number" (1010 in the above example on Phone 3). Format Integer Default Value Not Applicable Range Not Applicable Example Sylantro Server: sip line1 bla number: 1010 ININ Server: sip line 1 bla number: 1010 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-79 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN mode Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Line Mode (in Web UI) Allows you to configure the mode of the line. Applicable values are: • Generic - Normal line • BroadSoft SCA - Shared Call/Line Appearances (SCA) line for BroadWorks network (call activity can go to more than one phone) • Nortel - Conference line for Nortel Networks (private - all call activity goes to one phone) • BLA - Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) line. • If the softkeys on the 6757i/6757i CT or the programmable keys on the 6753i are set as line keys, and you configure that line key for BLA, the key is configured to use BLA. Format Integer Default Value 0 Range Valid values are: 0 - Generic 1 - BroadSoft SCA 2 - Nortel 3 - BLA ra f sip line1 mode: 2 D Example t1 Description A-80 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Per-Line Network Settings. Parameter – sip lineN proxy ip Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Proxy Server (in Web UI) The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to send all SIP requests. A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by the IP phone to the targeted user. Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not applicable Example sip line1 proxy ip: 192.168.0.101 Parameter – sip lineN proxy port Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Format Default Value Range Example ra f Description Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The proxy server's port number Integer D Proxy Port (in Web UI) t1 Description 0 Not Applicable sip line1 proxy port: 5060 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-81 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip linex backup proxy ip Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Backup Proxy Server (in Web UI) The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable. Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example sip line1 backup proxy ip: 192.168.0.102 Parameter – sip linex backup proxy port Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Format Default Value Range Example A-82 ra f Description Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The backup proxy’s port number. Integer 0 D Backup Proxy Port (in Web UI) t1 Description Not Applicable sip line1 backup proxy port: 5060 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN outbound proxy Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Outbound Proxy Server (in Web UI) This is the address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you have a Session Border Controller in your network, then you would normally set its address here. Format IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example sip outbound proxy: 10.42.23.13 Parameter – sip lineN outbound proxy port Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Format Default Value Range Example The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP messages. Integer D Description Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f Outbound Proxy Port (in Web UI) t1 Description 0 Not Applicable sip outbound proxy port: 5060 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-83 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN registrar ip Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Registrar Server (in Web UI) The address of the registrar for which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests. A SIP registrar is a server that maintains the location information of the IP phone. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone. If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on. Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example sip line1 registrar ip: 192.168.0.101 D ra f t1 Description A-84 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN registrar port Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Registrar Port (in Web UI) The registrar's port number Format Integer Default Value 0 Range Not Applicable Example sip line1 registrar port: 5060 Parameter – sip linex backup registrar ip Aastra Web UI t1 Description Configuration Files The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary registrar is unavailable. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables backup registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone. If the backup registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the backup register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on. D Description ra f Backup Registrar Server (in Web UI) Advanced Settings->LineN-> Basic SIP Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example sip line1 backup registrar ip: 192.168.0.102 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-85 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip linex backup registrar port Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->LineN-> Basic SIP Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Backup Registrar Port (in Web UI) Description The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number. Format Integer Default Value 0 Range Not Applicable Example sip line1 backup registrar port: 5060 Parameter – sip lineN registration period Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Default Value Range Example A-86 t1 The requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar. Integer 0 0 to 2147483647 D Format ra f Registration Period (in Web UI) Description Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg sip line1 registration period: 3600 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters BLA Support for MWI Parameter – sip mwi for bla account Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings MWI for BLA Account (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables a BLA configured line to send an MWI SUBSCRIBE message for the BLA account. Default Value Range 0 (disabled) 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) sip mwi for bla account: 1 D Example Boolean ra f Format t1 Notes: 1. If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the phone for it to take affect. 2. Both the “sip explicit mwi subscription” and “sip mwi for bla account” parameters must be enabled in order for the MWI subscription for BLA to occur. 3. The MWI re-subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for the "sip explicit mwi subscription period" parameter to re-subscribe. 4. Whether or not the "sip mwi for bla account" parameter is enabled, the priority for displaying MWI does not change. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-87 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Centralized Conferencing Settings Global Settings Parameter – sip centralized conf Aastra Web UI Advanced->Global SIP Settings-> Basic SIP Network Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Conference Server URI (in Web UI) Description Globally enables or disables SIP centralized conferencing for an IP phone as follows: • To disable centralized conferencing, leave this field empty (blank). • To enable SIP centralized conferencing, then do one of the following actions: — If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to t1 reach the media server via the proxy server, set this field to one of the following: conf (Sylantro server), or ra f Conference (Broadsoft server) D By setting this field to conf, you specify conf@<proxy_server _address>: <proxy_port>. For example, if the proxy server address is 206.229.26.60 and the proxy port used is 10060, then by setting this parameter to conf, you are specifying the following: [email protected]:10060 — To reach the media server using a different address/port than that specified by the proxy, set this field to the following: conf@<media_server _address>: <media_port> Format String Default Value Blank Example sip centralized conf: conf A-88 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Per-Line Settings Parameter – sip lineN centralized conf Aastra Web UI Advanced->Line <1 thru 9>-> Basic SIP Network Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Conference Server URI (in Web UI) Description Enable or disable per-line SIP centralized conferencing for an IP phone as follows: • To disable centralized conferencing, leave this field empty (blank). • To enable SIP centralized conferencing on a specific line, do one of the following actions: If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to reach the media server via the proxy server, set this field to one of the following: t1 — conf (Sylantro server), or Conference (Broadsoft server) D ra f By setting this field to conf, you specify conf@<proxy_server _address>: <proxy_port>. For example, if the proxy server address is 206.229.26.60 and the proxy port used is 10060, then by setting this parameter to conf, you are specifying the following: [email protected]:10060. — To reach the media server using a different address/port than that specified by the proxy, set this field to the following: conf@<media_server _address>: <media_port> Format String Default Value Blank Examples sip line3 centralized conf: conf 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-89 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Enables or disables the phone to allow a conference to be set up with a join header as described in RFC 3911. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (disabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example sip join support: 1 D ra f t1 Parameter – sip join support A-90 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS Parameter – http digest username Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Specifies the username to use for HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication. The server uses this username for authentication purposes when loading configuration to the phone over HTTP/HTTPS. This parameter initiates a “Username/Password” screen after pressing the Log In softkey. Notes: 1. The Username field accepts special characters, such as, @, #, %, =, _, etc. You can also specify domain names (i.e., user@domain). 2. You must reboot the phone after setting the HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication parameters. String Default Value N/A Range Up to 40 alphanumeric characters Example http digest username: mysuername Parameter – http digest password Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Specifies the password to use for HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication. The server uses this password for authentication purposes when loading configuration to the phone over HTTP/HTTPS. This parameter initiates a “Username/Password” screen after pressing the Log In softkey. D Description ra f t1 Format Notes: 1. The Password field accepts special characters, such as, @, #, %, =, _, etc. 2. You must reboot the phone after setting the HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication parameters. Format String Default Value N/A Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters Example http digest password: mypassword 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-91 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – http digest force login Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Enables and disables the display of a LOGIN key on the phone’s idle screen. Note: After the server has authenticated the phone, this parameter must be set to “0” in order for the server to send the default profile to the phone. Boolean Default Value 0 (disable) Range 0 (disable) 1 (enable) Example http digest force login: 1 t1 Format Advanced SIP Settings Explicit MWI Subscription (in Web UI) Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider, a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells the user there is a message on the IP Phone. You can enable and disable MWI by setting this parameter to the following: "0" to disable "1" to enable D Description Aastra Web UI ra f Parameter – sip explicit mwi subscription Format Boolean Default Value 0 Range 0 (disable) 1 (enable) Example sip explicit mwi subscription: 1 A-92 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – Aastra Web UI sip explicit mwi subscription period Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Explicit MWI Timeout (in Web UI) The requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times out. The phone re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends. Format Integer Default Value 86400 Range 30 - 214748364 Example sip explicit mwi subscription period: 30 t1 Description . Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Description Format Adds an "Aastra-Mac:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the phone to the call server, where the value is the MAC address of the phone. D Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message (in Web UI) Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f Parameter – sip send mac Boolean Default Value 0 (disabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example sip send mac: 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-93 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip send line Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Send Line Number in REGISTER Message (in Web UI) Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the phone to the call server, where the value is the MAC address of the phone. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (disabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example sip send line: 1 Description Format Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f Session Timer (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI The time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic re-INVITE requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE requests to maintain the status' of the connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details. D Parameter – sip session timer t1 Description Integer Default Value 0 Range Not Applicable Example sip session timer: 30 A-94 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip T1 timer Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg T1 Timer (in Web UI) This timer is a SIP transaction layer timer defined in RFC 3261. Timer 1 is an estimate, in milliseconds, of the round-trip time (RTT). Format Integer Default Value 500 Range Not Applicable Example sip T1 timer: 600 Parameter – sip T2 timer Aastra Web UI Format Default Value Range Example ra f Description Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg This timer is a SIP transaction layer timer defined in RFC 3261. Timer 2 represents the amount of time, in milliseconds, a non-INVITE server transaction takes to respond to a request. Integer D T2 Timer (in Web UI) t1 Description 0 Not Applicable sip T2 timer: 8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-95 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip transaction timer Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Transaction Timer (in Web UI) The amount of time, in milliseconds that the phone allows the callserver (registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends. If the phone does not receive a response in the amount of time designated for this parameter, the phone assumes the message has timed out. Format Integer Default Value 4000 Range 4000 to 64000 Example sip transaction timer: 6000 D ra f t1 Description A-96 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip transport protocol Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Transport Protocol (in Web UI) Description The protocol that the Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) port on the IP phone uses to send out SIP signaling packets. t1 Notes: 1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4 (TLS), the phone checks to see if the “sips persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection. If “sips persistent tls” is disabled, then the phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is used, you must specify the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate, the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates. 2. If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you MUST specify the Trusted Certificates; the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate, and the Private Key are optional. Format Default Value Integer 1 - UDP Valid values are: 0 - User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) 1 - UDP 2 - TCP 4 - Transport Layer Security (TLS) D Range ra f For more information about Persistent TLS, see “Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings” on page A-105. Example sip transport protocol: 4 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-97 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip registration retry timer Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Registration Failed Retry Timer (in Web UI) Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits between registration attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar. Format Integer Default Value 1800 (30 minutes) Range 30 to 1800 Example sip registration retry timer: 30 Parameter – sip registration timeout retry timer Aastra Web UI ra f Description Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the phone waits until it re-attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out. D Registration Timeout Retry Timer (in Web UI) t1 Description If this parameter is set lower than 30 seconds, the phone uses a minimum timer of 30 seconds. Format Integer Default Value 120 Range 30 to 214748364 Example sip registration timeout retry timer: 150 A-98 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip registration renewal timer Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Registration Renewal Timer (in Web UI) Description The length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration, that the phone renews registrations. For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20 seconds before the registration is due to expire, a new REGISTER message is sent to the registrar to renew the registration. Integer Default Value 15 Range 0 to 214748364 t1 Format The value set for this parameter should be between 0 and the value set for the registration period. sip registration renewal timer: 10 Parameter – sip blf subscription period ra f Example Aastra Web UI D Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP ->Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg BLF Subscription Period (in Web UI) Description Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. Format Integer Default Value 3600 Range 120 (2 minutes is the minimum value) Example sip blf subscription period: 2000 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-99 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip acd subscription period Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP ->Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ACD Subscription Period (in Web UI) Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) subscription service after a software/ firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. Format Integer Default Value 3600 Range 120 (2 minutes is the minimum value) Example sip acd subscription period: 2000 t1 Description Configuration Files Aastra Web UI Description Format Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is specified, the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds. D BLA Subscription Period (in Web UI) aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings ra f Parameter– sip bla subscription period Integer Default Value 300 Range 0 to 3700 Note: When set to zero (0), the phone uses BLA expiry value specified in subscribe message. Example A-100 sip bla subscription period: 0 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings Global Parameters Parameter – sip missed call summary subscription Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Missed Call Summary Subscription (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature. This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. ra f t1 For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server. You configure the server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has voicemail configured) to be forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls sip missed call summary subscription parameter, phone B receives notification from the server that the call was forwarded and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B. Note: You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to (phone B in the above example). Default Value Range Example Boolean 0 (disabled) D Format 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) sip missed call summary subscription: 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-101 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip missed call summary subscription period Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Missed Call Summary Subscription Period (in Web UI) Description Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses the Missed Calls Summary Subscription feature. This parameter is always enabled with a default value of 86400 seconds. When the phone reaches the limit set for this parameter, it sends the subscription again. To disable this parameter, leave the field blank or set the field to zero (0). Integer Default Value 86400 Range 0 to 99999999 Example sip missed call summary subscription period: 70000 D ra f t1 Format A-102 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Per-Line Parameter Parameter – sip lineN missed call summary subscription Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Missed Call Summary Subscription (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature. This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. t1 For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server. You configure the server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has voicemail configured) to be forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls phone B, the server forwards the call to phone C. If you enable the sip missed call summary subscription parameter, phone B receives notification from the server that the call was forwarded and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B. Default Value Range Example Boolean 0 (disabled) 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) D Format ra f Note: You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to (phone B in the above example). sip line1 missed call summary subscription: 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-103 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings Aastra Web UI: Description Enables or disables the specified line with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD features. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (disable) Range 0 (disable) 1 (enable) Example sip line1 as-feature-event subscription: 1 Parameter – sip as-feature-event subscription period Aastra Web UI: Description Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, between resubscribing. If the phone does not resubscribe in the time specified for this parameter, it loses subscription. Range Example A-104 ra f Default Value Basic Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Integer 3600 D Format Advanced Settings->LineN-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg t1 Parameter – sip lineN as-feature-event subscription 5 to 2147483648 sip as-feature-event subscription period: 600 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings To configure TLS, you must enter the “sip transport protocol” parameter with a value of “4” (TLS). See the “sip transport protocol” description on page A-97. Also enter the following parameters in the configuration files to configure TLS: Parameter – sips persistent tls Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Enables or disables the use of Persistent Transport Layer Security (TLS). t1 Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once and re-uses that connection for all calls from the phone. The setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone. If the phones are set to use Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone, this call and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated connection. This significantly reduces the delay time when placing a call. Format D ra f Notes: 1. Persistent TLS requires the outbound proxy server and outbound proxy port parameters be configured in either the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI (Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Network Settings). There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per phone. The phone establishes the TLS connection to the configured outbound proxy. 2. If you configure the phone to use Persistent TLS, you must also specify the Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and Intermediate Certificates, Local Certificate, and Private Key files are optional. Boolean Default Value 0 (disabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example sips persistent tls: 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-105 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sips root and intermediate certificates Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->TLS Support aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Root and Intermediate Certificates Filename (in Web UI) Description Allows you to specify the SIP Root and Intermediate Certificate files to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. t1 The Root and Intermediate Certificate files contain one root certificate and zero or more intermediate certificates which must be placed in order of certificate signing with root certificate being the first in the file. If the local certificate is signed by some well known certificate authority, then that authority provides the user with the Root and Intermediate Certificate files (most likely just CA root certificate). This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.) Default Value Range Example A-106 <file name>.pem N/A D Format ra f Note: The certificate files must use the format “.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support. N/A sips root and intermediate certificates: cacert_openser.pem 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sips local certificate Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->TLS Support aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Local Certificate Filename (in Web UI) Description Allows you to specify the Local Certificate file to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.) Note: The certificate file must use the format “.pem”. To create specific certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support. <file name>.pem Default Value N/A Range N/A Example sips local certificate: phonesLocalCert.pem ra f Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Parameter – sips private key Advanced Settings->TLS Support aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Private Key Filename (in Web UI) Description t1 Format Allows you to specify a Private Key file to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.) Note: The key file must use the format “.pem”. To create specific private key files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support. Format <file name>.pem Default Value N/A Range N/A Example sips private key: phone-privkey.pem 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-107 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sips trusted certificates Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->TLS Support aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Trusted Certificates Filename (in Web UI) Description Allows you to specify the Trusted Certificate files to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. t1 The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates. The phone’s trusted list must contain the CA root certificates for all the servers it is connecting to. For example, if the phone is connecting to server A which has a certificate signed by CA1, and server B which has a certificate signed by CA2, the phone must have CA1 root certificate and CA2 root certificate in its Trusted Certificate file. This parameter is required when configuring TLS or Persistent TLS. Default Value Range Example A-108 <file name>.pem N/A N/A sips trusted certificates: trustedCert.pem D Format ra f Note: The certificate files must use the format “.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters 802.1x Support Settings Use the following parameters to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone using the configuration files. For EAP-MD5 use: eap type • identity • md5 password • pc port passthrough enabled For EAP-TLS use: t1 • eap type • identity • 802.1x root and intermediate certificates (use 1 root and 0 or 1 intermediate certificates) • 802.1x local certificate (use 1 local certificate) D • ra f • 802.1x private key (1 private key that corresponds to local certificate) • 802.1x trusted certificates (0 or more trusted certificates (a maximum of 2)) • pc port passthrough enabled 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-109 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – pc port passthru enabled IP phone UI Aastra Web UI PC Port PassThru Enable/ Disable (in Web UI) Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Ethernet Link Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Enables or disables the PC port on the phone to be used for 802.1x authentication support. Format Integer Default Value 1 (enable) Range 0 (disable) 1 (enable) Example pc port passthru enabled: 1 Parameter – eap type IP Phone UI: Format Default Value Range Example A-110 ra f Description Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Ethernet Link-> 802.1x Settings->802.1x Mode Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->General Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Specifies the type of authentication to use on the IP Phone. Integer D EAP Type (in Web UI) t1 Description 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (MD5) 2 (TLS) eap type: 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – identity IP Phone UI: Identity (in Web UI) Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Ethernet Link-> 802.1x Settings->EAP-MD5 Settings Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->General Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Specifies the identity or username used for authenticating the phone. Note: The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path Advanced Settings-> 802.1x Support->General->Identity. String Default Value N/A Range N/A Example identity: phone1 Parameter – md5 password IP Phone UI: Description ra f Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Ethernet Link-> 802.1x Settings->EAP-MD5 Settings Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->802.1x Support-> EAP-MD5 Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D MD5 Password (in Web UI) t1 Format Specifies the password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone. Note: The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path Advanced Settings-> 802.1x Support->EAP-MD5 Settings->MD5 Password. The password displays as “*******”. Format String Default Value N/A Range N/A Example md5 password: password1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-111 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – 802.1x root and intermediate certificates Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->802.1x Support-> EAP-TLS Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Root and Intermediate Certificates (in Web UI) Specifies the file name that contains the root and intermediate certificates related to the local certificate. Format String Default Value N/A Range N/A Example 802.1x root and intermediate certificates: filename.pem Parameter – 802.1x local certificate Aastra Web UI: Format Default Value Range Example A-112 ra f Description Advanced Settings->802.1x Support-> EAP-TLS Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Specifies the file name that contains the local certificate. String D Local Certificate (in Web UI) t1 Description N/A N/A 802.1x local certificate: filename.pem 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – 802.1x private key Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->802.1x Support-> EAP-TLS Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Private Key (in Web UI) Specifies the file name that contains the private key. Format String Default Value ANDN/A Range N/A Example 802.1x private key: filename.pem Parameter – 802.1x trusted certificates Aastra Web UI: Format Default Value Range Example ra f Description Advanced Settings->802.1x Support-> EAP-TLS Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Specifies the file name that contains the trusted certificates. String N/A D Trusted Certificates (in Web UI) t1 Description N/A 802.1x trusted certificates: filename.pem 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-113 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings Global Settings Parameter – sip rtp port RTP Port Base (in IP Phone UI) IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> SIP Settings->RTP Port Base Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg RTP Port (in Web UI) Description Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or router. t1 The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port. Default Value Range Example A-114 Integer D Format ra f Note: The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The following DTMF tones are supported: • Support signals 0-9, #, * • Support durations up to 5 seconds 3000 Not Applicable sip rtp port: 3000 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip use basic codecs Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Basic Codecs (in Web UI) Enables or disables basic codecs. Enabling this parameter allows the IP phone to use the basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP packets. Format Boolean Default Value 0 Range 0 - Disable 1 - Enable Example sip use basic codecs: 1 Parameter – sip out-of-band dtmf Aastra Web UI Configuration Files t1 Description Format Default Value Range Example Enables or disables out-of-band DTMF. Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF according to RFC2833. Boolean D Description ra f Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF (in Web UI) Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg 1 0 - Disable 1 - Enable sip out-of-band dtmf: 0 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-115 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip customized codec Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Customized Codec Preference List (in Web UI) Specifies a customized Codec preference list which allows you to use the preferred Codecs for this IP phone. Format Comma-separated list of semicolon-separated values Default Value Not Applicable Range Valid values for the syntax are: payload 0 for G.711 m-Law 8 for G.711 a-Law 18 for G.729a Parameter – sip dtmf method DTMF Method (in Web UI) ptime (in milliseconds) 5, 10, 15, 20........90 silsupp on, off ra f sip customized codec: payload=8;ptime=10;silsupp=on,payload=0;ptime=10; silsupp=off D Example t1 Description Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Sets the Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) method to use on the IP phone. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (RTP) Range 0 (RTP) 1 (SIP INFO) 2 (BOTH) Example sip dtmf method: 1 A-116 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip srtp mode Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> RTP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg RTP Encryption (in Web UI) Description This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this IP phone, as follows: • If set to 0, then disable SRTP. • If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred. • If set to 2, then SRTP calls only are generated/accepted. Integer Default Value 0 (SRTP Disabled) Range 0 (SRTP Disabled) 1 (SRTP Preferred) 2 (SRTP Only) Example sip srtp mode: 1 Parameter – sip silence suppression Description Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Silence Suppression (in Web UI) ra f t1 Format Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones. The phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value. Format Boolean Default Value 1 (enabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example sip silence suppression: 0 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-117 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Per-Line Settings Parameter – sip lineN dtmf method Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg DTMF Method (in Web UI) Sets the Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) method to use on the IP phone for a specific line. Format Integer Default Value 0 (RTP) Range 0 (RTP) 1 (SIP INFO) 2 (BOTH) Example sip line1 dtmf method: 1 Parameter – sip lineN srtp mode Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Line <1-9>->RTP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this line, as follows: • If set to -1, then use the global setting for this line. (This is the default setting.) • If set to 0, then disable SRTP. • If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred. • If set to 2, then SRTP calls only are generated/accepted. D Description t1 Description Format Integer Default Value 0 (disabled) Range -1 0 1 2 Example sip line1 mode: 1 A-118 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Autodial Settings Global Settings Parameter – sip autodial number Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Autodial Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Autodial Number (in Web UI) Globally specifies the SIP phone number that the IP phone autodials when the handset is lifted from the phone cradle. An empty (blank) value disables autodial on the phone. Format Integer Default Value Blank Range Any valid SIP number Examples sip autodial number: 8500 D ra f t1 Description 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-119 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip autodial timeout Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Autodial Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Autodial Timeout (in Web UI) Description Globally specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits to dial a preconfigured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone cradle. If this parameter is set to 0 (hotline), the phone immediately dials a preconfigured number when you lift the handset. If this parameter is set to a value greater than 0, the phone waits the specified number of seconds before dialing the preconfigured number (warmline) when you lift the handset. t1 Default is 0 (hotline). Integer Default Value 0 Range 0 to 120 Examples sip autodial timeout: 30 ra f Format Per-Line Settings Autodial Number (in Web UI) Description Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->LineN->Autodial Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Parameter – sip lineN autodial number On a per-line basis, this parameter specifies the SIP phone number that the IP phone autodials when the handset is lifted from the phone cradle. Valid values can be: -1 Blank Valid SIP Number (Default) The phone uses the global autodial setting for this line. (Empty field) Disables autodial on this line. Dials the SIP number specified for this line. Format Integer Default Value -1 Range Any valid SIP number. Examples sip line1 autodial number: 8500 A-120 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN autodial timeout Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->LineN->Autodial Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg AutoDial Timeout (in Web UI) Description On a per-line basis, this parameter specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits to dial a preconfigured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone cradle. If this parameter is set to 0 (hotline), the phone immediately dials a preconfigured number when you lift the handset. If this parameter is set to a value greater than 0, the phone waits the specified number of seconds before dialing the preconfigured number (warmline) when you lift the handset. Integer Default Value 0 Range 0 to 120 sip line1 autodial timeout: 30 D Examples ra f Format t1 Default is 0 (hotline). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-121 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Voicemail Settings Parameter – sip lineN vmail Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Note: The value of "N" is 1 - 9 for 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT. Use this parameter in the <mac>.cfg file to configure the phone to dial a specific number to access an existing voicemail account on a Service Provider’s server. The user then follows the voicemail instructions for listening to voicemails. Note: The phone must have a registered voicemail account from a server for this feature to be enabled. When no registered voicemail accounts are registered to the phone, the display shows "List Empty". The phone displays up to 99 voicemails for an account even if the number of voicemails exceeds the limit. Registered account numbers/URIs that exceed the length of the screen, either with or without the voicemail icon and the message count, are truncated with an ellipse character at the end of the number/URI string. Format Integer Range Not Applicable 0 to 99 sip line1 vmail: *97 D Example ra f Default Value t1 Description Note: In the above example, the user would dial *97 to access the voicemail account. A-122 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Directory Settings Parameter – directory 1 Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Directory aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Directory List (in Web UI) The name of a directory list that you can download from the configuration server. Format Alphanumeric characters Default Value Not Applicable Range Not Applicable Example directory 1: companylist.csv Parameter – directory 2 Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Format Default Value Range Example ra f Description Operation->Directory aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg The name of a directory list that you can download from the configuration server. Alphanumeric characters D Directory List (in Web UI) t1 Description Not Applicable Not Applicable directory 2: personallist.csv 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-123 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Enables or disables the Directory on the IP phone. If this parameter is set to 0, users can access the Directory List via the IP phone UI. If this parameter is set to 1, the Directory List does not display on the IP phone and the Directory key is disabled. On the 6757i and 6757i CT the "Directory" option is also removed from the "Services" menu. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (false) Range 0 (false), 1 (true) Example directory disabled: 1 t1 Parameter – directory disabled Callers List Settings Configuration Files Description Enables or disables the Callers List. If this parameter is set to 0, the Callers List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is set to 1, the IP phone does not save any caller information to the Caller List. For 6757i and 6757i CT phones, the "Caller List" option on the IP phone is removed from the Services menu, and the Caller List key is ignored if pressed by the user. Default Value D Format Boolean 0 (false) Range 0 (false), 1 (true) Example callers list disabled: 1 A-124 aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f Parameter – callers list disabled 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Customize Callers List and Services Key Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Allows you to specify a specific URI for accessing services after pressing the Services key. When this parameter is set, it overrides the standard function of the Services key. Format Alphanumeric characters Default Value N/A Range N/A Example services script: http://10.50.100.234/test.xml Parameter – callers list script Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Allows you to specify a specific URI for accessing the Callers List after pressing the Callers List key. When this parameter is set, it overrides the standard function of the Callers List key. Range Example ra f Default Value Alphanumeric characters N/A N/A D Format t1 Parameter – services script callers list script: http://10.50.100.234/test.xml 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-125 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Call Forward Settings IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Call Forward Basic Settings->Account Configuration aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Enables or disables the ability to configure Call Forwarding. If this parameter is set to 0, a user and administrator can configure Call Forwarding via the Aastra Web UI and the IP Phone UI using the "Call Forward" options. If this parameter is set to 1, all "Call Forward" options are removed from the Aastra Web UI and the IP Phone UI, preventing the ability to configure Call Forwarding. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (false) Range 0 (false), 1 (true) Example call forward disabled: 1 D ra f t1 Parameter – call forward disabled A-126 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Call Forward Key Mode Settings Aastra Web UI: Basic Settings->Preferences->General Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Sets the mode for how the phone uses “call forwarding” (CFWD) • account The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in focus. • phone The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone. • custom The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey. ra f t1 Parameter – call forward key mode D Notes: 1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward. 2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”. 3. When configuring a CFWD mode (All, Busy, No Answer) for an account, you must configure a CFWD number for that mode in order for the mode to be enabled. Format Integer Default Value 0 (account) Range 0 (account) 1 (phone) 2 (custom) Example call forward key mode: 2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-127 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Example The following is an example of configuring the CFWD key mode in the configuration files: call forward key mode: 2 softkey1 type: call forward softkey1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy D ra f t1 In the above example, softkey 1 is configured for CFWD on line 1 (account 1) with a “custom” configuration. Pressing softkey 1 displays CFWD screens for which you can customize on the phone. A-128 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings Parameter– lldp Configuration Files IP Phone UI LLDP Support (IP Phone UI) Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Ethernet&VLAN-> LLDP Support Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings LLDP (in Web UI) Enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone. Format Boolean Default Value 1 (enabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example lldp: 0 Parameter– lldp interval Configuration Files Aastra Web UI Description Format ra f aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings D LLDP Packet Interval (in Web UI) t1 Description The amount of time, in seconds, between the transmission of LLDP Data Unit (LLDPDU) packets. The value of zero (0) disables this parameter. Integer Default Value 30 Range 0 to 2147483647 Example lldp interval: 60 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-129 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter– use lldp elin Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Basic Settings->Preferences->General Use LLDP ELIN (in Web UI) Enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers. Format Boolean Default Value 1 (enabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example use lldp elin: 0 D ra f t1 Description A-130 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Missed Calls Indicator Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Enables or disables the Missed Calls Indicator. If the "missed calls indicator disabled" parame.ter is set to 0, the indicator increments as unanswered calls come into the IP phone. If the "missed calls indicator disabled" parameter is set to 1, the indicator is disabled and will NOT increment as unanswered calls come into the IP phone. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (false) Range 0 (false), 1 (true) Example missed calls indicator disabled: 1 D ra f t1 Parameter – missed calls indicator disabled 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-131 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters XML Settings Configuration Files Description Allows you to specify a timeout value, in seconds, that the phone waits for the far side to return a response after accepting the HTTP GET connection. If the far side accepts the GET connection but never returns a response, it blocks the phone until it is rebooted. If you enter a value greater than 0 for this parameter, the phone times out and will not be blocked. Format Integer Default Value 0 (never timeout) Range 0 to 214748364 seconds Example xml get timeout: 20 Parameter – xml application URI Default Value This is the XML application you are loading into the IP phone configuration. D Format Operation->Softkeys and XML->Services aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg ra f Aastra Web UI Configuration Files XML Application URI (in Web UI) Description aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg t1 Parameter – xml get timeout HTTP server path or fully qualified Domain Name Not Applicable Range Not Applicable Example xml application URI: http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php A-132 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – xml application title Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Softkeys and XML->Services aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg XML Application Title (in Web UI) This parameter allows you to rename the XML application in the IP phone UI (Services->4. Custom Feature). By default, when you load an XML application to the IP phone, the XML application title is called "Custom Feature". The "xml application title" parameter allows you to change that title. For example, if you are loading a traffic report XML application, you could change this parameter title to "Traffic Reports", and that title will display in the IP phone UI as Services->4. Traffic Reports. Format Alphanumeric characters Default Value Not Applicable Range Not Applicable Example xml application title: Traffic Reports Parameter – xml application post list Description Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses) (in Web UI) ra f t1 Description The HTTP server that is pushing XML applications to the IP phone. Format IP address in dotted decimal format and/or Domain name address Default Value Not Applicable Range Not Applicable Example xml application post list: 10.50.10.53, dhcp10-53.ana.aastra.com 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-133 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – xml beep notification Aastra Web UI Basic Settings->Preferences Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg XML Beep Support (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables a BEEP notification on the phone when a status message object (AastraIPPhoneStatus) containing a “beep” attribute arrives to the phone. Changes to this parameter are applied immediately. Boolean Default Value 1 (ON) Range 0 (OFF)No beep is audible even if the beep attribute is present in the XML object. t1 Format 1 (ON)The phone beeps when an XML object with the “beep” attribute arrives to the phone. xml beep notification: 0 Aastra Web UI Basic Settings->Preferences Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Parameter – xml status scroll delay ra f Example Status Scroll Delay (seconds) (in Web UI) Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that each XML status message displays on the phone. Note: Changes to this parameter are applied immediately. Format Integer Default Value 5 Range 1 to 25 Example xml status scroll delay: 3 A-134 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Action URI Settings Parameter – action uri startup Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Startup (in Web UI) Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event occurs. This parameter can use any of the following variables: $$REMOTENUMBER$$ $$DISPLAYNAME$$ $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$SIPAUTHNAME$$ $$INCOMINGNAME$ $$PROXYURL$$ $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ $$DISPLAYNAME$$ $$CALLDURATION$$ $$CALLDIRECTION$$ Format Fully qualified URI Range Not Applicable Up to 128 ASCII characters action uri startup: http://10.50.10.140/startup D Example ra f Default Value t1 Description 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-135 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – action uri registered Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Successful Registration (in Web UI) Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful registration event occurs. This parameter can use the following variables: $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$SIPAUTHNAME$$ $$PROXYURL$$ $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ Note: The “action uri registered” parameter executes on the first successful registration of each unique line configured on the phone. Format Fully qualified URI Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 128 ASCII characters ra f action uri registered: http://10.50.10.14/registered.php?auth name=$$SIPAUTHNAME$$ D Example t1 Description A-136 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter– action uri registration event Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Advanced Settings->Action URI Registration Event (in Web UI) Description Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when a registration event change occurs. This parameter uses the following variables to determine the state of the event: $$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$ $$REGISTRATIONCODE$$ t1 Note: This action URI is not called when the same event is repeated (for example, a timeout occurs again when registration is already in a timeout state.) String Default Value Not Applicable Range Any valid URI Example action uri registration event: http://10.30.100.39/PHPtests/ actionuri.php?action=RegEvt®state=$$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$®co de=$$REGISTRATIONCODE$$ D ra f Format 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-137 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – action uri incoming Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Incoming Call (in Web UI) Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call event occurs. This parameter can use the following variables: $$REMOTENUMBER$$ $$DISPLAYNAME$$ $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$INCOMINGNAME$ $$LINESTATE$$ $$CALLDURATION$$ $$CALLDIRECTION$$ $$LOCALIP$$ Format Fully qualified URI Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 128 ASCII characters Parameter – action uri outgoing Outgoing Call (in Web UI) ra f action uri incoming: http://10.50.10.140/ incoming.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$ D Example t1 Description Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call event occurs. This parameter can use the following variables: $$REMOTENUMBER$$ $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ Format Fully qualified URI Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 128 ASCII characters A-138 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Example action uri outgoing: http://10.50.10.140/ outgoing.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$ Parameter – action uri offhook Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Offhook (in Web UI) Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an offhook event occurs. This parameter can use the following variables: $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ Format Fully qualified URI Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 128 ASCII characters Example action uri offhook: http://10.50.10.140/offhook Description ra f Onhook (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg D Parameter – action uri onhook t1 Description Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an onhook event occurs. This parameter can use the following variables: $$LOCALIP$$ $$CALLDURATION$$ $$CALLDIRECTION$$ $$LINESTATE$$ Note: The “LocalIP”, “CallDuration”, and “CallDirection” variables allow for enhanced information in call records and billing applications. Format Fully qualified URI Default Value Not Applicable Range Up to 128 ASCII characters Example action uri onhook: http://10.50.10.140/onhook 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-139 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI->Event aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when it transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state. This parameter uses the following variables to determine the state of the line: $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ Format String Default Value Not Applicable Range Any valid URI Example action uri disconnected: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/ disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$ D ra f t1 Parameter– action uri disconnected A-140 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters XML SIP Notify Settings Parameter – sip xml notify event Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message. Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the phone rejects the message. Boolean Default Value 0 Range 0 - disabled 1 - enabled Example sip xml notify event: 1 Parameter – action uri xml sip notify Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->Action URI Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone. This parameter can use the following variable: $$LOCALIP$$ D Description ra f t1 Format Note: The sip xml notify event parameter must be enabled. Format HTTP(s) server path or Fully Qualified Domain Name Default Value N/A Range N/A Example action uri xml sip notify: http://myserver.com/myappli.xml 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-141 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Polling Action URI Settings Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Action URI Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri poll interval" seconds. Format HTTP(s) server path or Fully Qualified Domain Name Default Value N/A Range N/A Example action uri poll: http://myserver.com/myappli.xml Parameter – action uri poll interval Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Action URI Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between calls from the phone to the "action uri poll". Format Integer Default Value 0 (disabled) N/A action uri poll interval: 60 D Example ra f Range t1 Parameter – action uri poll A-142 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings Parameter – ring tone IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Options->Tones->Set Ring Tone Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Global Ring Tone (in Web UI) Globally sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone. Ring tone can be set to one of six distinct rings. Format Integer Default Value Aastra Web UI: Tone 1 IP Phone UI: Tone 1 Configuration Files: 0 (Tone 1) Range Aastra Web UI & IP Phone UI Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 Tone 4 Tone 5 Silent t1 Description ring tone: 3 D Example ra f Configuration Files 0 (Tone 1) 1 (Tone 2) 2 (Tone 3) 3 (Tone 4) 4 (Tone 5) 5 (Silent) 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-143 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – tone set IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Options->Tones->Tone Set Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Tone Set (in Web UI) Globally sets a tone set for a specific country. Format Text Default Value US Range Australia Europe (generic tones) France Germany Italy Mexico United Kingdom (UK) US (also used in Canada) Example tone set: Germany D ra f t1 Description A-144 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Ring Tone Per-Line Settings Parameter – lineN ring tone Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg N=1 through 9 Line N (in Web UI) Description Sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone on a per-line basis. Ring tone can be set to one of six distinct rings. Note: LineN is applicable to lines 1 through 9. Not applicable to the 6751i. Integer Default Value Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files: Range Aastra Web UI Global Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 Tone 4 Tone 5 Silent Global -1 (Global) D ra f t1 Format Configuration Files -1 (Global) 0 (Tone 1) 1 (Tone 2) 2 (Tone 3) 3 (Tone 4) 4 (Tone 5) 5 (Silent) Example line1 ring tone 3 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-145 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting Parameter – incoming call cancels dialing Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables how the phone handles incoming calls while the phone is dialing out. When you enable this parameter (1 = true), an incoming call interrupts the outgoing call during dialing and allows the phone to ring for the user to answer the incoming call. ra f t1 When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), which is the default, the phone does not interrupt the outgoing call during dialing and the number you were dialling continues to display in the LCD. The phones sends the incoming call to a free line on the phone (or sends busy signal if all remaining lines are busy) and the LED for that line blinks. You have a choice to ignore the incoming call, or answer the incoming call on another line, via the Ignore and Answer softkeys that display. If you choose to answer the incoming call, you can answer the call, finish the call, and then hang up. You can still go back to the original outgoing call and finish dialing out. D Notes: 1. On a 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, you must use the up and down arrow keys to ignore or answer the call. 2. On all phone models, if you disable this parameter (0=disable), and the phone receives an incoming call while you are dialing an outgoing call, you can pick up the call and perform transfer or conference as required. After enabling or disabling this feature, it takes affect on the phone immediately. A-146 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Description (Cont’d) Transfer/Conference Call Behavior If you are dialing the phone to transfer or conference a call, and your phone receives an incoming call, your dialing is never interrupted (regardless of whether the “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” is enabled or disabled). For Transfer and Conference, the incoming calls always go to an available line (other than the one you are using for dialing) and the incoming call’s line LED blinks. The LCD still displays your dialing screen. Default Value Range Example Boolean 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) D Format ra f t1 Intercom Behavior If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (or incoming call cancels dialing in config files) is enabled and you are dialing an outgoing Intercom call, the enabled interrupt setting takes precedence over an enabled “Allow Barge In” setting. The incoming call interrupts your dialing on an outgoing intercom call. On an incoming intercom call, the enabled “Allow Barge In” and “Auto-Answer” occurs while you are dialing to transfer or conference the call. However, the incoming call goes to an available idle line, and the LED blinks while you are dialing the second half of the conference or transfer. If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (or incoming call cancels dialing in config files) is disabled, an incoming intercom goes to an available idle line and the LED blinks for that line. The phone answers the call under all conditions. incoming call cancels dialing: 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-147 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Switch Focus to Ringing Line Aastra Web UI: Basic Settings->Preferences->General Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Description Specifies whether or not the UI focus is switched to a ringing line while the phone is in the connected state. Format Boolean Default Value 1 (enable) Range 0 (disable) 1 (enable) Example switch focus to ringing line: 1 D ra f t1 Parameter – switch focus to ringing line A-148 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout Configuration Files Aastra Web UI Parameter– preferred line aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Basic Settings->Preferences->General Preferred Line (in Web UI) Specifies the preferred line to switch focus to when incoming or outgoing calls end on the phone. Format Integer Default Value 1 Range 0 (none - disables the preferred line focus feature) 1 to 9 Example preferred line: 2 Parameter– preferred line timeout Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Basic Settings->Preferences->General ra f Preferred Line Timeout (seconds) (in Web UI) t1 Description Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone switches back to the preferred line after a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a duration of inactivity on an active line. Format Integer Default Value Range Example D Description 0 (the phone returns the line to the preferred line immediately) 0 to 999 preferred line timeout: 30 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-149 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call Parameter – goodbye cancels incoming call Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call (in Web UI) Description Enable or disables the behavior of the Goodbye Key on the IP phone. When you enable this parameter (1 = enable), the Goodbye key rejects the incoming call. When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), the Goodbye key hangs up the active call. t1 For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT: If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when an active call is already present, the phone displays softkey 1 as “answer” and softkey 2 as “ignore”. You can press the required softkey as applicable. ra f For the 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when an active call is already present, the “ignore” option only displays in the LCD window. The phone ignores the incoming call. If you press the DOWN arrow key, the phone answers the incoming call. Format D Note: After enabling or disabling this feature, it takes affect on the phone immediately. Boolean Default Value 1 (true) Range 0 (false) 1 (true) Example goodbye cancels incoming call: 0 A-150 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Stuttered Dial Tone Setting Parameter – stutter disabled Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Stuttered Dial Tone (in Web UI) Enable or disables the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a message waiting on the IP phone. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (false) Range 0 (false) 1 (true) Example stuttered disabled: 1 D ra f t1 Description 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4 A-151 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Call Waiting Settings Parameter – call waiting Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg Call Waiting (in Web UI) Description Allows you to enable or disable Call Waiting on the IP phone. If you enable call waiting (default), the user has the option of accepting a second call while currently on the first call. If you disable call waiting, and a user is currently on a call, a second incoming call is automatically rejected by the phone with a busy message. ra f t1 If you disable call waiting on the phone, and the user is on a call, any further incoming calls will receive busy unless “Call Forward Busy” or “Call Forward No Answer and Busy” is configured on the phone. It will then forward the call accord
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project